Home

4 - Oracle Documentation

1. Figure 5 28 Display Settings Properties Calendar Manager 259 260 Changing the User Calendar Location You can change user calendar location by specifying a different machine name Just type the machine name The new user calendar location becomes the first name or default in the Browse menu pulldown Any properties applied are added to the new calendar Changing Day Boundaries You can specify the range of hours for your workday using the Day Boundaries sliders shown in Figure 5 28 This determines the hours displayed by Calendar Manager in these places Calendar Manager Day view Week chart in the Calendar Manager Week view e Multiple Calendars display Start and End time menus in the Appointment Editor window The current value of the day boundaries is displayed to the right of each slider To change the setting follow these steps 1 Move the pointer to the slider drag box and press SELECT 2 Drag the pointer to the left or to the right Note that the time changes as you drag the slider 3 When the time you want is displayed release SELECT Alternatively you can move the pointer onto the slider bar to the left or right of the drag box and click SELECT to change the time hour by hour You cannot set a day boundary that ends before it begins When the values overlap the drag boxes are synchronized and move together so that the end time is always at least one hour after the start time 4 Wh
2. Figure 11 14 New Format Window Extensions To create a new format 1 Select the new format s encoding sample rate and number of channels from the lefthand part of the window 2 Type the new format s name in the Name field Solaris User s Guide September 1995 ie i Open 3 Click SELECT on the Add button The new format is added to the bottom of the list To add the new format elsewhere click MENU on Add and choose Before After Top or Bottom The new format will appear in the list of formats Open enables you to open a directory or file Click SELECT on the Open menu item to display the Audio Tool Open window shown in Figure 11 15 This window contains a browser that can be used to locate particular directories within a file system I ko Audio Tool Open Type in the path to the folder and press Return Current Folder d0 audio Getfiles Select a file or folder and click Open t Go up one folder audio test audiotest audio O Testfiles testmail audio voicefile audio Show All Files Audio Files Figure 11 15 Audio Tool Open Window Go To To change directories type the pathname of the new directory in the Go To field then click SELECT on the Go To button or press Return Notice that if you click MENU on the Go To button a directory stack is displayed that includes the recently visited directories as well as the directories s
3. ext Editor printtool amp shelltool amp snapshot amp tapetool amp textedit amp Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll Working with Text The OpenWindows Text Editor is an application for working within documents and composing editing cutting copying and pasting text Text Editor enables you to create and compose a new document or open load an existing document into the application for editing You can also work with text using a command line editor such as vi in a Command Tool or Shell Tool For information on using vi refer to Solaris Advanced User s Guide Figure 1 33 shows the Text Editor application window Text Editor NONE dir hightide egret File v View v Edit v Find v O LLEI Figure 1 33 Text Editor Application Window Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 39 40 Managing Your Files The File Manager application provides a graphical display of the structure of the folders and documents directories and files in your file system Each file appears as an icon as shown in Figure 1 34 r File Manager hightide egret Fish ve hightide egret Fish loll Contains 5 items 877 Mbytes 98 available O cod D salmon O Eel O swordfish B Tuna ILD Updated folder no files added or deleted since last update Figure 1 34 File Manager s Base Window Opening a File in
4. 64 X 64 3 undos 0 redos available Figure 15 7 Text Added to an Icon Once you have added text to the canvas you can edit it as you would any other part of the image Choose Region the rectangle within a rectangle to define a rectangular region on the canvas and move flip or rotate it by clicking SELECT on any of the Move buttons 426 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 ie e Choose Erase to erase any pixels on the canvas by moving the cursor onto the canvas clicking SELECT and dragging the eraser cursor over the areas you want to erase Only the pixel under the front tip of the eraser is actually erased Editing Images At any time you can Undo the last change or addition you made by choosing Edit gt Undo from the control area The remaining editing commands in the Edit menu behave the same as those in a Text Editor window Cutting a Portion of an Image To cut a portion of the drawing create a rectangular outline around the area to be cut To do this 1 Click SELECT on the rectangular icon next to the oval in the control area This enables you to define a region to cut Icon Editor None Edited Choose the Region selection rectangle Sleraarararatc Figure 15 8 Region Selection Rectangle 2 Position the pointer on the canvas window at one corner of the portion to cut press SELECT and drag the pointer diagonally to the opposite corner then release the mouse b
5. wastebasket Artfiles C Seafood ScreenShots Folder filemgr_proto home Figure 2 6 Opening the Folder View The hierarchical Folder View tree structure is another way of showing the UNIX file system The analogy between the parts of a tree and the parts of the file system is often used when describing the UNIX file system The Folder View can show all parts of the file system Alternatively you can use the Folder View to start at any directory or folder in the file system File Manager 65 66 Root is the top directory in the file system Under the root are various branches For example Figure 2 7 shows root and the branches that start with the directories home Along with the tree analogy there is a parent child analogy The root directory is the parent directory A subdirectory is also a parent directory when there are one or more subdirectories below it Each subdirectory is a child of the parent directory that is above it The File menu from the Folder View has the following options Open Opens the children of the selected folder Open Folder Window Brings up the File Manager folder pane Find Information Remote Copy and Custom Commands The View menu from the Folder View has the following options Gq se Show Horizontal Vertical to change the view orientation from horizontal to vertical or visa versa Use Show All Sub Folders to show all folders below the selected fol
6. Figure 1 48 Viewer Icon Double click SELECT on the Viewer icon when you want to open it again Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 55 Exiting the Help Viewer You can exit the Help Viewer from any location by choosing Quit from the Window menu Double clicking SELECT on the Exit icon at the bottom of the page of Introducing Your Desktop handbook displays instructions for quitting the tutorial handbooks Figure 1 49 shows the Exit icon Exit Figure 1 49 The Exit Icon in Introducing Your Desktop On line Documentation AnswerBooks 56 As you use your system and its software you can browse search bookmark and print from manuals right on your screen in your own on line Library Your Library may contain one or more AnswerBooks or collections of documents covering many topics For more information about AnswerBooks see Chapter 19 Using the AnswerBook Software Note To give you access to AnswerBooks your administrator has to install and configure them for your use To open your on line Library choose Workspace gt Programs gt AnswerBook Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lil File Manager File Manager provides a graphical display of the UNIX file system using icons that represent directories folders files documents and applications You can use File Manager to find copy move open close delete undelete create and print files You can start applications
7. Canvas 64 X 64 O undos 0 redos available Figure 15 2 Icon Editor Base Window The Icon Editor controls are described in the following sections Icon Editor Drawing Controls The controls that you use to draw an image in the canvas appear to the left of the preview area and are shown in Figure 15 3 422 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 15 Square Point Line Circle Figure 15 3 Icon Editor Drawing Controls This section describes the Icon Editor drawing control menus and buttons Drawing Mode Choices To draw an icon choose a drawing mode from the choices in Figure 15 4 Ellipse Region Erase Text Figure 15 4 Drawing Mode Choices The Mode choice items function as follows Choose Point to insert one black pixel at a time in the canvas To draw a point move the pointer to the desired position in the canvas and click SELECT You can continuously hold down SELECT and move the pointer to create a freehand drawing When you lift your finger from the mouse button you end one drawing segment When you continue this process you begin a new drawing segment Undo here only removes the last drawing segment You can also point to a black or color pixel and click ADJUST to turn the pixel from black to white Choose Line to draw a line that is 1 pixel wide To draw a line position the pointer at one end of the line press SELECT drag the pointer to the other end of the line
8. Note Small icons do not display custom icon images for files as displayed in the Icon View modes Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll Icon By Name Choose Icon By Name if you want to view your icons as large icons ordered alphabetically Icon By Type Choose Icon By Type if you have several different types of icons in one folder The order of icons listed is folder file or document and application or program List By Name Choosing the List By Name option shows a list of icons and file names as shown in Figure 2 16 You can select and operate on small icons in the same way as for standard sized icons These are listed as one entry per line The default is icon name size and date File Manager 2D Ges hightide egret Fish Seafood IELE Contains 4 items iki Catch_of_the_Day ps Feb 17 14 06 76154 D Fish Feb 17 14 06 5504 C NewFolder Feb 17 14 06 512 O salmon Feb 17 14 06 31 Figure 2 16 Example of a List Display When using the View menu you can choose to display additional information about each file such as the Date Size Owner Group Links and Permissions When displaying any of these file attributes the display changes to show one item per line For complete information on file information or properties refer to File and Folder Information on page 96 You choose the information File Manager 75 lll No List By Size List By Date
9. Abbreviated menu button Menu butto Button menu Window pane Some applications have one window and others have one or more subwindows The primary window that appears when you display an application is called a base window Figure 1 29 shows the visual elements of a simple base window Window m Text Editor NONE edited dir hightide e menu This is a text file created with text editor a Text Pane g Scrollbar view gt Edit a Find a Extras b gt co Figure 1 29 Base Window with Pop Up Menus Opening Saving Including and Attaching Files Once you begin working with the DeskSet applications you will at sometime need to open save or rename include or attach a file or document There is a standard window that looks very similar from application to application for performing these tasks throughout the DeskSet applications Once you learn the basic elements of this window you can easily perform these tasks DeskSet applications that use this type of window include Text Editor Mail Tool Command Tool Shell Tool Audio Tool Image Tool Snapshot and Icon Editor Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 31 aa Allows you to move or go to another location in your file system These buttons change with the task you are performing for example Figure 1 30 shows an example of a standard Open window This window looks very similar from application to application
10. If you give more permissions to the world than you give to an individual that individual will still have the world permissions For example if you give a user named Jim permission to browse your calendar but the world has permission to browse and insert Jim will inherit the world permissions and will be able to insert appointments as well as browse your calendar Solaris User s Guide September 1995 5 To give someone the ability to edit or change appointments you must give them both Insert and Delete permissions That person then has full permissions to insert new appointments and delete or modify existing appointments they own After you have entered the list of users you can sort the list alphabetically using the sort list button Adding Users to the Access List To add a user follow these steps 1 In the User Name text field type the email address of the user you want to add Names in the access list can either be in the form name host or simply name Note that if you just specify the user name you are giving access to any user on your network with that name If you are using the NIS or DNS system which uses the concept of domains make sure names on the access list do not use the format name domain or name host domain Just use name host 2 Select the permissions you want to give the user 3 To add the name enter a name in the User Name text field choose Add Name as shown in Figure 5 30 Q CM Propert
11. Multimedia Mail Tool If the appointment is in a format that Calendar Manager cannot understand a Notice is displayed informing you that the appointment cannot be scheduled Calendar Manager 241 z Multiple Calendars Base Window 242 Calendar Manager allows you to access the calendars of other users if you are included on their Access List This convenient feature allows you and your coworkers to coordinate scheduling of appointments You can use the Show Multiple Calendars menu item to overlay the calendars of many users at one time in order to find the best time to schedule a meeting Once you have found a convenient meeting time you can schedule the meeting in everyone s calendar and or send each user mail about the new appointment You can also see all the public appointments on another user s calendar and insert delete or change existing appointments as long as you have the appropriate access list permissions See Access List and Permissions Properties on page 261 for information about creating the access list for your personal calendar Using Multiple Calendars The Show Multiple Calendars menu item allows you to view many people s calendars overlaid onto the same display at one time It lets you see how many and which users are busy during any particular hour and quickly tells you if there is a time slot in which all the users are free If there is not a time slot when all the users are free you can d
12. Mouse and Pointer on page 7 Mouse and Pointer The easiest way to access the windows in the Workspace is to use your mouse the small electronic device that sits on a pad next to your workstation Notice that when you move the mouse the pointer on the Workspace moves with you to a new location Figure 1 8 shows the pointer moving across the Workspace Figure 1 8 Movement of the Pointer by the Mouse Versions of the Pointer The pointer changes shape to reflect current position and system activity Figure 1 9 shows various pointer types Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 7 _____ _ Basic pointer Appears on Workspace Busy pointer System cannot accept input Duplicate pointer When user copies an item by dragging Move pointer When user moves an item by dragging yer ar Text duplicate or duplicate and move pointer When user duplicates or moves a portion of text by dragging Figure 1 9 Examples of Pointer Types Using the Mouse Buttons The mouse buttons enable you to control the windows icons and menus on the Workspace The terminology of the mouse and pointer is as follows e Mouse buttons are referred to by function From left to right on a three button mouse these are SELECT ADJUST and MENU A two button mouse has only SELECT and MENU ADJUST is peformed by pressing the keyboard Shift key and clicking SELECT Figure 1 10 shows the function of each mouse but
13. Panning an Image To move the image within the View window choose the Pan tool The pointer changes to a hand until you choose another action Figure 13 7 on page 401 shows the pan icon as a hand Selecting An Area to Be Saved To select an area of an image to be saved 1 Choose the Selector tool 2 Outline the new view by pressing SELECT in one corner of the new view and dragging to the opposite corner 3 Release SELECT You can save the selected view as a new image Figure 13 8 shows the selector icon and selection made from the View window For information on saving your file refer to Save As on page 397 Image Tool File Fish Ce SELECT region Figure 13 8 Selector icon and selected item 402 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 is Flipping an Image To display a mirror image use the Flip tools You can flip horizontally and vertically Figure 13 9 shows the Flip icon and the result of flipping the image upside down Image Tool File Fish Figure 13 9 Flip Icon and Flipped Image Image Tool 403 13 Rotating an Image To rotate the image with the Rotate tool first enter the number of degrees to be applied in the text field next to the buttons You can type the value use the abbreviated menu buttons or use the sliders Figure 13 10 on page 404 shows the rotate icon and an image that has been rotated 90 degrees s em Image Tool File Fish N ait 0 180 Figure 13
14. Printer co T Information mimeo N Data transfer in progress 0 Figure 4 11 Printing by Using Drag and Drop 3 Release SELECT to drop the headers Messages are displayed in the footer of the Print Tool window displaying the printing status Multimedia Mail Tool 163 lll HS Composing Messages If a selected mail message has attachments and the message is dropped on the Print Tool the attachments are not printed A message is printed that tells how many attachments are with the message To print an attachment open the attachment and print it using the attachment s application or drag just the attachment to the Print Tool Your email address is typically your login ID and your machine s host name combined like this name host If there is more than one domain on your network you may need to append a domain name to the address as well For instance the name would appear in this format name host domain Check with your system administrator to make certain Others on your network will typically have the same address format When you are certain of your email address try sending a test message to yourself Composing a New Message 164 To compose a new message 1 In the Header window control area click SELECT on Compose The Compose Message window is displayed 2 Click SELECT on the To text field and fill in the message header information e Press Return as you comple
15. The Redo command restores the effects of the Undo command Click MENU on Redo to display the Redo submenu which has the following options Last Undo Restores the previously revised data This is the default action for Redo All Undos Restores all edited changes Making edits to the audio buffer clears any subsequent editing history in the redo list The Cut command removes the current selection from your sound file and places it on the clipboard Click SELECT on Cut to cut the selection The Copy command copies the current selection to the clipboard without modifying the original sound file Click SELECT on Copy to copy the selection The Paste command pastes data currently stored on the clipboard into the current audio file at the location specified by the play position pointer For example after doing a Cut or Copy the next step is often to paste the stored data to some new location Click SELECT on Paste to paste the selection The Delete command removes the current selection from the sound file without modifying the contents of the clipboard Use Delete instead of Cut when something is on the clipboard that should not be overwritten or when you are sure you do not want to use the selection again Solaris User s Guide September 1995 iL Properties Click MENU on Delete to display the Delete submenu with the following options Selection This is the default which deletes the current audio selection
16. The new mail file is created the selected messages are moved to the new file and a message is displayed in the footer of the Header window Creating a New Mail File Using the Mail Files Popup Window Follow these steps to create a new mail file using the Mail Files popup window 1 Choose Mail Files from the File menu to display the Mail Files popup window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll 2 Type the name of the new mail file in the Name text field For example type projectreports to create a project report mail file as shown in Figure 4 29 Mail Tool Mail Files Name projectreports fhightide egret B Go up one folder G rtfiles COFish Folder TestApps filename G mail Groot Figure 4 29 New Mail File Typed in the Mail Files Name Field You can also type the name of a new mail file subdirectory if you d like to create a subdirectory of mail files If you already have a subdirectory where you want to put the new mail file you can type a relative path name in the Name field starting with the subdirectory For example type projects projectreports to create a mail file in the subdirectory called projects Alternatively you can double click SELECT on the projects subdirectory in the scrolling list to display that mail directory and then type the name of the new mail file in the Name field 3 Choose Mail File or Directory from the Create menu to cre
17. Checksum Errors If you receive a checksum error when reading files from a tar tape there may be a mismatch between the block size on the tape and the block size you specify Solaris Troubleshooting 537 To correct the block size choose Block I O from the Tape Tool Properties window In the text field that appears type the correct block size the one from the tape Files Not Written to Specified Directory If you retrieve files from a tape and they are not copied to the destination directory you specify list the contents of the tape to see if the file names are preceded by an absolute path name When you retrieve files that have an absolute path name that path is used as the destination directory Tape Drive Not Recognized Tape device names are not automatically included in your system configuration unless a tape drive is hooked up at the time of installation If you add a tape driver after the inital system installtion but did not reboot your system afterwards you will get this error message To reconfigure your system to include the new tape device name shut down your system and reboot with the following flags sparc At the ok prompt type boot r x86 Atthe boot gt prompt type br PowerPC At the ok prompt type boot E The new tape drive will appear in dev rmt Solaris User s Guide September 1995 A OpenWindows Troubleshooting core Files You may occasionally receive an error message or
18. Compose 7 Mail File 1 thief cici Thu Feb 18 10 42 2 patten newbirth Thu Feb 18 10 49 U 3 bgahl scuba Thu Feb 18 10 50 u 4 ayers outhouse Thu Feb 18 10 51 5 ayers outhouse Thu Feb 18 10 51 7 mariac celtic Thu Feb 18 11 00 8 hamilton artemis Thu Feb 18 11 13 9 abelson sharonolds Thu Feb 18 11 34 N 10 aquablu cowman Thu Feb 18 13 58 18 506 46 1282 32 1110 17 532 17 511 90 2531 22 611 32 1232 21 64 Your Move Project Status Inbox status SunU Training Registratio vi command summary Project Schedule meeting reminder Your position paper Summer Collaboration il Figure 4 30 Dragging a Copy of a Message Header You can schedule appointments in Calendar Manager by using the Appointment Editor Attachment See the Chapter 5 Calendar Manager for more information Multimedia Mail Tool 193 Customizing Mail Tool 194 Dragging Attachments to Other Applications You can drag individual attachments onto the following destinations File Manager e Print Tool See Printing Mail Messages Using Print Tool on page 163 Any application that accepts drag and drop data of the attachment s file type For example you can drag audio attachments onto AudioTool Icon Editor attachments onto Icon Editor ASCII attachments onto Text Editor and so forth A Calendar Manager appointment attachment to Calendar Manager To drag and drop attachments onto other applications follow
19. Customizing the OpenWindows Environment You can modify many aspects of the OpenWindows environment including the fonts used in applications and menus the distance you need to drag the pointer from a menu to open a submenu and the window and menu colors Additionally if you are left handed you may want to remap the keys on the left and right panels of the keyboard for ease of use Chapter 17 Customizing the Solaris Environment provides instructions for customizing the OpenWindows environment including WorkSpace Properties keyboard and mouse customization Hidden Files Hidden files or dot files as they are sometimes called are distinguished in your file system with a dot in front of them These files are normally not visible to you in your home directory and you should not change or delete these files unless you have specific knowledge about the file Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll Getting Help There are two kinds of on line help available Magnify Help for immediate assistance with an item in the OpenWindows environment such as a menu or window element and the help handbooks for quick reference on the elements and applications of the OpenWindows environment Note The OpenWindows more help facility Help Viewer depends on the X11 window server Therefore it will not work with a non OpenWindows server for example the MIT X11 server In particular clicking the More butt
20. Icon Editor Color Chooser Palette You can create a multi color icon if you have a color workstation You can save the color icon as a color X Pixmap file to be used with your own X applications If you are using the Icon Editor to create new icons for File Manager you should create black and white icons You can use the Binder to specify foreground and background colors for your File Manager icons If you want to create a color icon select the Color choice in the Icon Editor drawing controls area as described in the section Icon Editor Color Controls on page 430 When you are creating a color icon the rightmost button in the Icon Editor header is labeled Palette When you are creating a black and white icon this button is replaced with a Black or White choice setting Click SELECT on the Palette button to display the Color Chooser shown in Figure 15 18 which you can use to specify the color to draw with Icon Editor 439 19 KO Color Chooser Choosing Color for Iconedit Figure 15 18 Color Chooser for Icon Editor The current color that the Icon Editor will use for drawing is displayed in the upper left corner of the palette shown in Figure 15 18 To use any of the colors displayed in the Color Chooser palette for the Icon Editor 1 Click SELECT on the desired color in the Color Chooser palette The selected color is highlighted and displayed in the Color Chooser preview area The preview area is the large sq
21. On x86 and PowerPC machines the Help key is the F1 key Navigating through Handbooks When you display a particular handbook you have several choices You can 1 Page through the handbook 2 Double click SELECT on a topic to access that information quickly 3 Return to the table of contents of help handbooks 4 Return to a handbook s table of contents from within that handbook The following sections describe these operations Paging through a Handbook The buttons at the top of the Help Viewer enable you to move backward or forward page by page Clicking SELECT on the Next Page and Previous Page buttons is equivalent to pressing the PgUp and PgDn buttons on your keyboard Figure 1 44 shows the help handbook paging buttons Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 51 52 Help Viewer Figure 1 44 Buttons for Paging Through the Handbooks The Go Back button gives you the option to go back to the last page viewed Click SELECT on the Go Back button to return to wherever you were last If you have viewed pages in various parts of a handbook or in different handbooks you can retrace your steps by choosing Go Back as many times as necessary The paging features are also available from the Viewer menu shown in Figure 1 45 ne Viewer Next Page Previous Page Redisplay Go Back Figure 1 45 The Viewer Menu Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll To use the Viewer menu 1 Position the p
22. Overview of the OpenWindows Environment on page 5 describes the elements of your desktop environment Workspace and how to use them Introduction to the DeskSet Applications on page 36 describes how to choose the right application for the task you need to accomplish The third and forth major sections talk about using on line Help and AnswerBook You can choose the method of learning that is most comfortable for you Those who have had previous experience with OpenWindows may want to skip this introductory chapter and move on to the rest of the book where a chapter is devoted to each of the DeskSet applications and the Workspace Properties lll Logging In and Logging Out Logging In Before you start your system must be ready to use Your system is ready to use when Solaris is fully installed and the login prompt is on the screen If Solaris is not installed refer to the installation manual for your specific platform When you begin working on your system you will need to log in Logging in tells the system who you are and what you have permission to do Likewise when you finish you will log out so that no one else can access your files without permission Since more than one person can have an account on a single system each user must log in using his or her own unique user name and password Logging in indicates who is using the system and what files they can access To log in 1 Type your user name at the l
23. Project Schedufe meeting reminder Your positiov paper Summer Collaboration 11 items 1 new 2 deleted F Subject Number of messages in the queue Figure 4 9 Message Headers in the Mail Tool Window To read a message 1 If Mail Tool is closed double click SELECT on icon The Header window is displayed 2 Double click SELECT on the header of the message you want to read The message is displayed in the View Message window Multimedia Mail Tool 161 4 Printing Messages 162 You can print your mail messages using either Mail Tool or Print Tool Printing Mail Messages Using Mail Tool To print your messages from Mail Tool select the headers for the messages you want to print and choose Print from the File menu Figure 4 10 shows these steps v Mail Tool var mail egret Nail Fle aooo D Load In Box O Wij Thu Feb Print rem birth Thu Feb ba Thu Feb Save Changes OS Broce Thu Feb Done house Thu Feb il Fil eltic Thu Feb Mail Files r Thu Feb i AET SONE Feb 42 49 750 751 18 506 46 1282 32 1110 17 532 17 511 90 2531 22 611 32 1232 Your Move Project Status Inbox status SunU Training Registratio vi command summary Project Schedule meeting reminder Your position paper 10 aquablu cowman Thu Feb 18 13 58 21 64 Summer Collaboration Figure 4 10 Printing Multiple Mail Messages L 11 items 1 new 2 deleted E The messages are printed using the print sc
24. Select and open an AnswerBook Select topics for display in the Viewer Browse through tables of contents Leave bookmarks and comments on pages within a Library To create a bookmark for the current Viewer page To add or remove an AnswerBook to from the Library AnswerBook Navigato Modify Library New Bookmark Location To change to Book marks mode To change to Search mode Library Solaris User s AnswerBook a gt Solaris User s Guide Book Contents of Solaris User s Guide Cover Credits Contents Preface Starting up the Solaris User Environment Introduction Desktop Management Tools Productivity Tools Media Tools Customizing Tools Utilities Figure 19 3 AnswerBook Navigator Functions Solaris User s Guide September 1995 v Look up page info and modify adjust the display Current page in the Viewer Cross reference hypertext link to another section Use the AnswerBook Viewer to read the documents you select in the Navigator and to print them You can read pages sequentially or follow hypertext cross reference links from topic to topic Select printing options Page turning buttons A co In this example the output from the date command is redirected to a new file i called sample file Next the contents of sample file are displayed with the more command With each click mre sample file Mon Feb 3 12 56 26 PST 1993 here y
25. StickyKeys Settings Latching and Locking Sticky keys may be either latched or locked e You latch a modifier key by pressing it once A latched key stays active until a non modifier key is pressed Suppose that with StickyKeys on you press the Control key It will stay pressed while you press the key giving you Control L Once you press l Control is released e You lock a modifier key by pressing it twice in succession The key stays locked until you press it again For example suppose you want to enter WR In this case you would press Shift twice to lock it Then you d press the colon key and the letters w and r To unlock Shift press it again Access for Users With Disabilities 551 MouseKeys You can bring up a Status window to see which keys are latched or locked See Displaying the Status of Buttons and Keys on page 547 StickyKeys Settings Getting a Beep Whenever a Modifier is Pressed You can have your computer beep every time you press a modifier key with StickyKeys on Since pressing these keys latches locks or releases them a beep can be a useful reminder that you ve enabled or disabled a modifier It s easy to forget this in the course of normal typing To enable this setting check the Sound when modifier pressed check box in the Settings window See Figure B 4 Turning StickyKeys Off by Pressing Two Modifiers at Once When you check this box in the
26. Virtual Memory Swap The amount of swap space on the hard disk Virtual Memory In Use If the number on the slide bar gets close to 100 contact a System Administrator for adjustment Customizing the Solaris Environment 467 17 Solaris Information These two items tell you version and release numbers with the Solaris 2 4 release Operating System The version and release number of the operating system your workstation is running Window System The name and version number of the window system that your workstation is running Using the Workspace Properties Window 468 Here is an overview of the Workspace Properties window categories They are discussed in detail in this chapter Depending on the hardware capabilities of your display the Workspace Properties window categories may have different choices available to you Color allows you to change the foreground and background color of windows data areas and the Workspace e Font allows you to choose the style and scale size of text in window titles menus buttons and other system elements Keyboard allows you to turn on or off the clicking of keys repetition of a character when its key remains pressed and keyboard equivalents of mouse actions e Mouse allows you to control mouse behavior in relation to pointer speed movement and placement multiple click intervals and button order for right and left handed users e Menu allows you to specify
27. match the contents starting at the very first character of the file A Byte Offset of 1 would start matching the contents at the second character of the file and so on Tag Type determines the type of value that is to be matched in the file contents Byte Short Long or String Most files are ASCII files consisting of the String data type that is words and characters that you can type A Byte type is a one byte numerical value a Short is a two byte numerical value and a Long is a four byte numerical value Tag Value determines what to look for in the file contents This value must be of the type defined in the Tag Type setting Tag Mask is an optional field that you can use to define a mask value for Byte Short or Long data types If a mask value is defined a logical AND operation is performed on the Tag Type in the file being bound and the Tag Mask to determine the match value the contents to be matched If that value matches the Tag Value then the file is bound This field is primarily intended for programmers developing applications to be integrated into the DeskSet environment See the magic manual page for advanced information about the Tag Type Tag Mask and Tag Value fields Solaris User s Guide September 1995 1lb Figure 16 11 shows that PostScript files can be recognized by the string at the beginning of the file Tag Offset 0 Tag Type String Tag Value Note that PostScript files can
28. 185 207 View menu 151 message headers 149 156 messages creating 152 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 deleting 152 170 finding 171 forwarding 153 organizing 183 printing 162 recovery 535 replying 153 undeleting 152 170 viewing 154 155 156 157 Precedence junk headers 204 printing messages 162 properties 194 205 Alias properties 212 allnet 215 Automatically Display Headers 196 Category menu 195 Compose Window properties 200 Custom Buttons 197 custom header fields 204 delivery properties 196 Display Characters 196 Display Headers 196 Display Lines of Text 199 Expert properties 214 Header Window 195 Hide 200 Ignore host name in address 215 Include me when I Reply to All 215 mail arrival properties 196 Mail Filing properties 206 Message Window properties 199 metoo 215 Move Copy Load menus 207 Print Script 200 Retrieve Every 196 Show To recipient 196 Show Attachment List 203 Signal With 196 template properties 210 reading messages 167 running multiple versions of Mail Tool 533 saving changes 182 templates 167 troubleshooting 533 running out of disk space 536 Vacation 153 vacation notifier 168 viewing saved messages 202 Voice button 159 windows Compose window 157 customizing window size 196 Find window 171 Mail File windows 189 Mail Files window 184 186 188 Properties window 194 Vacation Setup window 168 View Message window
29. 536 Snapshot 536 Tape Tool 537 truncate calculations 314 tty interface 280 type styles customizing 474 U umask Tape Tool 388 undeleting messages 152 170 Undo Icon Editor 436 Undo operation keyboard equivalent 11 Undo Edit menu 130 undoing undo keyboard equivalent 11 unlocking your screen 498 user defined functions Calculator 304 user name 2 username lock 535 using local aliases 214 templates 167 210 usr openwin error message 539 V vacation notifier 168 starting 169 stopping 169 Vacation Mail Tool 153 Value calculator function 306 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 var spool mail file 535 vi editor 39 View Filter Pattern File Manager 114 View menu Binder 444 File Manager 63 Icon Editor 434 Mail Tool 151 Text Editor 128 view menu Image Tool 411 View Message window Mail Tool 155 Viewer closing 504 customizing 520 functions 503 icon 504 links 508 Magnify button 521 printing a document 521 quitting 504 viewing mail 154 snapshots 418 viewing mail multiple messages 157 next message 155 previous message 155 with full header 156 Voice button Mail Tool 159 voice mail listening to 352 sending 350 Ww Wastebasket 24 91 creating new 93 wastebasket 92 week view printing 269 week view Calendar Manager 225 What field in Calendar Manager 231 What Line Number Text Editor 128 wildcard search 88 window 6 int
30. Copy and Load menus are empty Mail files are added to these menus as you access the mail files You can specify mail files that you always want to appear at the top of these menus by adding them to the Move Copy Load Menus scrolling list You can add any mail file to this list by typing the name of the mail file in the Permanent File text field and clicking SELECT on the Add button Use the Add menu to place the mail file either before or after the currently selected mail file Use the Delete button to delete the currently selected mail file and use the Change button to change the currently selected mail file to the mail file typed in the Permanent File text field See Organizing Your Mail Messages on page 183 for more information about using mail files When you have changed Mail Filing properties click SELECT on the Apply button Saving Mail to Another Location You can save mail to any location in your file system by typing in an absolute pathname This means that the location you specify is an exact location within your file system rather than one that is relative to the Folders directory Multimedia Mail Tool 207 208 Saving to an Absolute Path in Your Home Directory To save mail to an absolute location in your home directory you can precede the path with the variable HOME or with the tilde on your keyboard followed by your user account name or that of another user s home directory where you have write
31. Figure 19 19 Modifying the Contents of Your Library The AnswerBook browser opens and displays a list of available AnswerBook products Using the AnswerBook Software 519 19 Check indicates AnswerBook included in Library ow AnswerBook Navigator Modify Library Select AnswerBooks to include in Library Compiler C 3 0 iv On Line Catalog On Line Encyclopedia System AnswerBook Figure 19 20 Choosing an AnswerBook for the Library 2 Click SELECT on each AnswerBook you want to add A check mark appears next to each title you select To deselect uncheck an AnswerBook click SELECT on it again If an AnswerBook title is not checked it means it is not included in your Library When you re ready save your selections 3 Click on Apply This updates the Library to include each newly selected AnswerBook Any AnswerBook you add to the Library will be included in the Navigator Contents listing and in your searches Note If you deselect AnswerBooks to constrain searching don t forget to reselect those AnswerBooks for future browsing Customizing the Viewer 520 The View button menu provides two options for setting the display magnification of the Viewer page Press MENU on the View button to see these menu options Standard Magnification and Custom Magnification Solaris User s Guide September 1995 i Printing Magnifying the Viewer Standard Magnification is the magnification determined
32. Figure 8 1 Calculator Icon and Base Window The Calculator base window is resizable by using the resize corners it might take a few seconds to redisplay when it s resized The Calculator has various modes of operation The area below the window header displays the current number followed by a mode line that displays the current mode settings Numeric Bases 296 You can set the numeric bases to Binary Octal Decimal or Hexadecimal using the Base key pop up menu as shown in Figure 8 2 Press MENU on the Base key to display the menu Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Numeric base Binary Mode line fc Octal Figure 8 2 Numeric Base Pop up Menu The current base setting is shown as the first item in the mode line In Figure 8 2 DEC indicates Decimal base Up to 40 digits can be entered for each number regardless of the base If you need to enter a larger or smaller number use the Exp key as discussed under Number Manipulation Functions on page 300 The numeric keypad changes to display only those numbers appropriate to the current base mode Inappropriate numbers are dimmed out For example in Figure 8 2 the hexadecimal letter keys A F are dimmed The numeric base in that figure is decimal so the hexadecimal letters are not valid or accessible e Choosing Binary displays the digits 0 and 1 on the numeric keypad e Choosing Octal displays the digits 0 through 7 e Choosing Decimal displays the
33. Icon Properties The Icon Properties window displays all the information used by DeskSet applications to display and operate on files The icon properties determine how files of a particular type are displayed by DeskSet applications such as File Manager and what happens when files of that type are opened or printed You display the Icon Properties window by selecting an entry in the base window scrolling list and choosing Icon from the Props menu The default Icon Properties window shows only the information needed to display a type of files as shown in Figure 16 4 gv Binder Properties Category File Types Icon a GUIDE file Image File 4 ILfile_glyph icon Mask File e_glyph_mask icon Foregr Color o 000 Backgr Color 229 137 208 O Figure 16 4 Default Icon Properties Window You can click SELECT on the plus sign button at the lower right of the window to expand the window to display the full set of properties including information needed to open and print a class of files as shown in Figure 16 5 Binder 447 g Binder Properties Category File Types Icon AnswerBook Application navigator b SFILE Image File b_library icon Print Method Mask File 4 rary mask icon Foregr Color 000 Ca Backgr Color 153191 191 ts Figure 16 5 Expanded Icon Properties Window You can shrink the window back down to the smaller size by clicking SELECT
34. Image Tool 412 editing appointments 237 audio file 348 command line in Command Tool 279 list files 379 Mail Tool properties 205 text file 136 Editor Defaults Calendar Manager 258 266 editors Text Editor 39 vi 39 Ellipse Icon Editor 424 Empty Document Text Editor 127 Empty Wastebasket 93 Enable Page Mode 282 ENG engineering display notation Calculator 298 Enter Function 305 306 Erase Icon Editor 427 Err Exit Tape Tool 388 error messages Image Tool 409 Error calculator 524 etc aliases file 212 Exch Calculator key 303 Exclude Tape Tool 388 Exp Calculator key 301 exponential calculator function 315 exponents 301 extracting files from tape 384 Extras menu 133 F factorial calculator function 315 File 358 file copying onto tape 382 creating in Text Editor 135 editing in Text Editor 136 extracting from tape 384 saving in Text Editor 135 viewing in Text Editor 135 saved mail messages 202 file and folder properties File Manager group 96 name 96 ownership 96 permissions 96 98 File Editor menu Command Tool 278 File Manager 57 introduction 40 base window 58 clipboard 78 copying files 64 78 cut and paste 78 creating folders 62 Index creating new files 77 current folder 70 Custom Commands 110 customizing 98 Delete Method 100 deleting files 58 64 91 93 displaying files 58 63 65 70 108 by Content 107 double click accelerators
35. Opening Files 76 to display by changing the default settings from the Customize View window See New Folder Defaults on page 101 or Current Folder Settings on page 108 for more information Choose List By Size if you want to view your files from the largest file in KB to the smallest file Choose List By Date if you want to view your files from the newest date last modified to the oldest date When you select and open a data file the appropriate application is started and the data of the opened file is displayed in the application s window When you select and open an application or executable file the application is started Executable shell scripts display a Notice asking you if you want to start the script in a Shell Tool You can change your properties to have your folders open into the same window or separate windows For complete information on this refer to General Defaults on page 100 From the file pane you can open folders files and applications in the following ways Dragging and dropping selected folders onto the workspace Dragging and dropping selected files or applications onto the workspace then using the menu or double clicking SELECT on the icon or open window Choose File gt Open or double click SELECT on a data file or application icon Note When you open a file or an application from File Manager you cannot close or quit it by dragging it back onto File Manager
36. Reset Pointers uean e Ue Vee ee eee EL Yee 371 Cleat oia pe eee R tas 4s Ee eee ene hee 371 Delete Unselected rers eies Sade reret he eee eRBAseees 371 Delete All Silence aaa Uk eh ee Serer eee es a eee ees 372 Delete Silent Ends sosser irritere cedieron eee ee ee es 372 Select At cc ete teen en eee eee awa tes EENES EEE es 372 Volume Men ces exeeneeeee she heheh ee eee iedegrnn eas 372 Pidy tgceyerewecesagaGun manic tea cedadeee ty hws 372 RECON eraten e wa hd ta eee nacd ees 373 Using the Audio Control Status Panel 376 12 Tape Tool x cnstivns acca BER EEE ESE cap bIUN eee ReeEeeeeeaes 377 Tape TOOMCOiics sity se teria peeve eee eee eee bes 377 Tape Tool WINdOW scec cec ware ee eek nohis add dane tenures 378 Editing the List of Files in the Tape Contents Window 379 Contents xix XX 13 Reading Files from a Tape n nananana ee Veh ene ne ew ioe 381 Read Sel cted ceceni n ppan Eae e EEE EE ai 381 Read tine List eeeriocotecnesen bi Li tieden ar onei 381 Read Ente Tape sterteysppreceii ihi ia eben aaron 382 Copying Writing Files onto Tape 00000 382 Checking the Tape Contents i 45 i 00se0desesecaduuws 383 Retrieving Reading Files froma Tape 384 Customizing the Tape Tools oii cees ci dice dew near vnares 386 Image Tool ss eoria GSR SS eee eden anes eeeeeee Neen 389 Image Tool Icon and Window ice ewaweweeeiee cna denee ede 390 Opening Image Files and Do
37. Shell Tool and Console Window or Console These tools are essentially the same application but display different default pane pop up menus The Command Tool is an enhanced Shell Tool Command Tool and Shell Tool are standard OpenWindows shells or terminal emulators that interpret commands typed in UNIX When you use one of these applications it is as if you are working at a terminal rather than in a complex networked windowing environment The advantage is that you can display many other windows and continue running other applications at the same time These tools are useful if you need to Read reference manual pages Use a command line editor such as vi Invoke special processes and applications not available from the Workspace menu The Console is a special Command Tool designated for displaying error and system messages sent by the SunOS operating system the OpenWindows environment and some applications 273 6 Command Tool 276 Command Tool provides a scrolling pane that acts as an editable command interpreter and can also provide a standard text editing pane It can be used for a variety of tasks including moving around in your file system composing and editing files and communicating with the operating system To open a Command Tool choose Workspace gt Programs gt Command Tool Figure 6 1 shows an open Command Tool window The Command Tool icon looks the same as the Shell Tool icon shown in
38. Size K Time h ne entries Figure 1 36 The Print Tool Application Window To print a document you can drag a file icon from File Manager and drop it on the Print Tool icon or on the open Print Tool drag and drop target Another method is to type the file and pathname in the Print Tool text field and click SELECT on the Print button You can also send messages and images to the printer from Multimedia Mail Tool and from Snapshot an application that enables you to take pictures of windows and images on your workstation screen Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 43 Communicating on the Network Multimedia Mail Tool provides a convenient method of communicating with others electronically by sending and receiving messages sound files and other data files It works together with the Calendar Manager application when you want to set up group meetings and send electronic notification and automatic reminder messages and with Audio Tool when you want to send Voice Mail The Multimedia Mail Tool icon looks like a tiny in box The in box is empty when there is no mail it has stacked letters when the mail in the mailbox has been read and overflowing letters when there is new mail Figure 1 37 shows the Mail Tool icon in its different forms The icon opens up into a base window for receiving composing and sending electronic mail messages mailtool mailtool mailtool Figure 1 37 No Mail New Mail All Mail Read
39. Table 13 1 on page 392 shows the possible file extensions and list of file formats Image Tool can open 3 Select a file from the scrolling list 4 Click Open Your file or document is opened in the View Window The palette is automatically displayed when your file is opened If you do not want to automatically display the palette refer to Setting Image Tool Properties on page 408 394 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 is Getting Information About Your Image Number of colors depth Number of bytes required to store the image Image Tool provides the following information about the currently opened file height width colors or size To view this information Select View gt Image Info The Image Information window displays as shown in Figure 13 4 gy Image Tool Image Information Gives the height and width of SSS the image in inches centi meters and pixels When viewing a multiple page document this is the height and width of the document s Width 3 5 in 8 8 cm 287 pix page Height 1 6 in 74 2 cm 136 pix Colors N A File Size 3 7 KBytes File Format Sun Raster File type of the image Figure 13 4 Image Information Window Saving Image Files and Documents Saving an Image There are several options for saving files but normally only one or two choices are available For complete information on standard file saving methods refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to the
40. The Audio Tool base window shown in Figure 11 11 contains all of the controls needed to play record and edit a sound file Audio selection Play Record position pointer Filename Audio Too maintalk au volume Cursor Pointer Rev Play Interval marking Status area Recorded silent data Recorded sound data Figure 11 11 Audio Tool Base Window Audio Tool Length of file 0 01 4 0 02 9 Length 0 08 5 0 00 9 Cursor and pointer locations Drag and drop target AUC om Length of selection Level meter indicator 2m3 Audio Tool Icon When you iconize the Audio Tool base window you ll see the icon shown in Figure 11 12 Double click SELECT on the icon to restore the window Figure 11 12 Audio Tool Icon Display Canvas The display canvas provides a region for the graphic representation of audio data Sound data is represented graphically as a box Silence is represented as a thin horizontal line Sound and silence data can be selected using the SELECT and ADJUST mouse buttons An entire sound or silence segment is selected by double clicking SELECT in the segment Using ADJUST extends the selection to segment boundaries or to the hairline cursor position Triple click SELECT to select the entire audio file Audio selection in Audio Tool follows the same general conventions that are used for text selection throughout the Open Win
41. To save the Workspace first arrange your icons and windows in the locations you want them to remain and close any windows that you want to be closed to icons whenever you start the OpenWindows software Now choose Workspace gt Utilities gt Save Workspace In a few moments a notice informs you that the Workspace layout has been saved You must click SELECT on the OK button to continue The Lock Screen utility covers the Workspace and the objects in it with a moving pattern This provides a certain amount of security for your system when you are away from your desk Additionally it prevents the electron beam inside the monitor from burning an image into the internal phosphorescent coating This can happen if the beam is allowed to fire at one location for an extended period of time For information on setting the screensaver feature refer to Chapter 17 Customizing the Solaris Environment When your screen is locked the OpenWindows software continues running even though the workspace cannot be viewed Applications that were running continue running and any processes currently underway continue When you unlock your screen the workspace is exactly as it was when you locked it To engage the Lock Screen utility choose Workspace gt Utilities gt Lock Screen Utilities 497 18 Console 498 In a moment a moving pattern appears on a black background over the workspace To unlock your screen again press any key on
42. Unselected This option deletes everything that is not selected This enables you to select the part of an audio segment that you want then delete the parts that you don t want All Silence This option deletes all silent segments which are indicated by horizontal lines This is useful for example when you are sending or storing voice mail Silent Ends This option deletes only the silent segments at the beginning and end of the file This enables you to remove a pause that occurs between the time you press the Rec button and start talking or the pause between the time that you stop talking and press the Stop button Properties enables you to modify the functionality of Audio Tool Click SELECT on this menu item to display the Audio Tool Properties window shown in Figure 11 19 ow Audio Tool Properties Auto Play on Load kf Auto Play on Selection Confirm on New Load W Silence Detection W Silence Threshold EEEE EEE nnn Temp file directory tmp Figure 11 19 Audio Tool Properties Window Audio Tool 369 11 The controls on the Audio Tool Properties window are described in the following paragraphs e Auto Play on Load Causes Audio Tool to begin playing files as soon as they are loaded or dragged and dropped onto the drop target Auto Play on Selection Causes selections to be played immediately after a selection is made This option can be useful when you are working on a sp
43. When File Manager displays a folder it gets the information from the Binder database on how to display and operate on each file When a file is not bound to a specific icon its generic icon is displayed In the example shown in Figure 2 4 the files are bound to different application types File Manager usr openwin bin usr openwin bin OGL Contains 210 items 351 Mbytes 33 available audiocontrol Xx e brushtopbm gt 3 D D amp audiotool bdftosnf ma a B D 3 TANA N7 gt a S gt le Figure 2 4 Data File Icons that also Show the Application Type You can create your own images for files using the Icon Editor and bind them to the File Manager data file icons using the Binder See the chapters Icon Editor on page 421 and Binder on page 441 for more information Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll Selecting File Manager Icons In order to operate on File Manager icons you first need to select them You select a File Manager folder icon in the path pane by moving the pointer onto it and clicking SELECT You select a single icon or group of icons in the file pane by clicking SELECT on the first icon and clicking ADJUST on each additional icon that you want to include in a group Selected icons are highlighted Exclude an icon by clicking ADJUST on an icon that is already selected You can select an adjacent group of icons by pre
44. You can tell you have new mail in two ways e If Mail Tool is closed the Mail Tool icon shows the status An overflowing in box means you have new mail If Mail Tool is open new message headers preceded by N for New are displayed in the Header window Additionally a counter in the lower right corner tracks the number of new messages Mail Tool View Message 8 From hamilton artemis Thu Feb 18 11 13 PST 1993 Date Thu 18 Feb 93 11 13 33 PST From hamilton artemis Mary Hacksaw Hamilton To egret river Subject meeting reminder Content Type text Content Length 92 Hi Egret Don t forget our meeting today at 3pm Marsh Conference Room Thanks otter Figure 4 8 Header window To read a message double click SELECT on the message header The header you select is outlined as shown in Figure 4 9 and the View Message window displays the message 160 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Message status Message number in mail queue thief cici Email address of sender patten newbirth bgahl scuba ayers outhouse ayers outhouse mariac cel tic hamilton artemis abelson sharonolds aquab lu cowman 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 0 Mail Tool var mail egret Compose 7 Mail File z 18 506 46 1282 32 1110 177532 17 511 Date and time Number of lines mail received and characters Your Move Project Status Inbox status SunU Training Registration vi command summa
45. cancel the operation and dismiss the popup or cancel the operation and eject the floppy Note Macintosh Sun TAR and Sun BAR formats are not recognized File Manager 121 Unlabeled Floppy If you inserted a floppy disk that is unlabeled that is there is data on the disk but is not a recognized format the following message displays WARNING Unlabeled Floppy This floppy disk is unreadable by the system It may contain tar or bar formatted data Do you want to format it Formatting will destroy any information on the disk and is not undoable Please select a format UNIX DOS High Density NEC DOS Medium Density Disk Name Format Disk Cancel amp Eject Figure 2 53 Unlabeled Unknown Data Floppy Popup You can choose to e format the disk refer to Reformatting a Floppy Disk on page 119 for information on reformatting the disk or e cancel the operation and dismiss the popup or cancel the operation and eject the floppy 122 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll Renaming a Floppy Disk There are times when you would like to change the name of your disk 1 Insert the disk to be renamed 2 Select Check For Floppy from the File Menu 3 Choose Rename Disk from the File menu You see the rename disk window FM Rename Disk Please enter the name of the disk Disk Name Cancel Figure 2 54 The Floppy Rename Disk Window 4 Ty
46. in Figure 7 6 Note There is no digital style icon option Evin m ib viv y Figure 7 6 Analog and Roman Icon Styles 288 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 N lll 12 Hour or 24 Hour Clock If you change the face style to digital you also have the option of a 12 hour or 24 hour clock The default is a 12 hour Clock which has an A M or a P M printed next to it The 24 hour Clock uses military time For instance 1 00 P M is displayed as 13 00 Figure 7 7 shows both the 12 hour and the 24 hour clocks clock Figure 7 7 12 Hour and 24 Hour Clocks Displaying a Second Hand and the Date If you select the Seconds display option a second hand appears on the analog style clock face and icon and moves like the second hand on a physical analog clock The digital style clock face displays the passing seconds digitally Figure 7 8 shows both the 12 hour and the 24 hour clock faces with the Seconds option selected clock Figure 7 8 Seconds Option on 12 Hour and 24 Hour Clocks Clock 289 lll N Choose the Date option on the Props window if you would like to display the date at the bottom of the Clock window as shown in Figure 7 9 FE clock cd igen Sun Aug 18 Figure 7 9 Date in the Digital Clock Face Changing the Time Zone You can display the current time in a different time zone using the Time zone option The default is local To choose a new time zone 1 Open t
47. or change their order Follow these steps 1 SELECT an item in the list that is adjacent to desired location of the new item This highlights the approximate location of the new item 2 Type a name for the item in the Label field 3 Type the full path name to the command or program to be executed in the Command field 4 SELECT Paste Before or Paste After e Paste Before places the new item above the highlighted item e Paste After places the new item below the highlighted item If no item is highlighted the new item is added at the top or bottom of the list 5 SELECT Apply The new label for the command is now displayed in the list The button functionality is as follows e Change allows you to change the command or label to associate with label shown Add allows you to add new label command Customizing the Solaris Environment 485 17 Miscellaneous 486 e Cut Copy allows you to cut or copy an item e Paste Before Paste After allows you to paste a label command before or after a selected label Delete allows you to delete label command Make Default allows you to make currently selected item the default item on the Programs menu The following Workspace items can be customized from Miscellaneous e Screensaver on off Screensaver timeout e When to beep e Beep duration e Focus policy e Icon location Scrollbar placement To customize these settings choose the Miscellaneo
48. pixels sec Maximum pointer speed Ramp up time to maximum speed Beep when key is Sound when key is pressed accepted 1 0 BounceKeys 0 Acceptance delay sec ____ E initially pressed Beep when key is held long enough for input Time during which successive key Debounce time sec _ Features Test Area j to last saved values pressings are ignored Cancel all changes Save changes for this _ __ session OK Reset Carcel Help Fal Get help Figure B 4 The AccessX Settings Window 550 Sola ris User s Guide September 1995 Ss lll Individual Features StickyKeys Many people with disabilities have trouble holding down two keys at once making combinations like Control D or Shift Mouse Click difficult When StickyKeys is turned on modifier keys generally Shift Alt Control and Meta stay active while you type another key or click a mouse button Turning StickyKeys On and Off There are four ways to turn StickyKeys off Check the StickyKeys check box in the AccessX main window e Press the Shift key five times in succession valid only if you ve started OpenWindows with the accessx option Press a modifier and any other key for example Shift x or Control Shift valid only if you ve started OpenWindows with the accessx option e Press two modifier keys at once see under
49. year When a day view is printed the unit is Days and so on The selected unit always begins the sequence For example if February 13th is selected and the number of units is three then February 13th 14th and 15th are printed Number of copies to print Whether or not to include appointments created for Privacy Type Show Time and Text Show Time Only Show Nothing on the printed output When you re done choosing your Printer Settings click SELECT on the Apply button to record the changes Date Format Properties The Date Format properties shown in Figure 5 32 determine how the date is displayed in the Appointment Editor window in the Go To text field of the Multiple Calendars window and in the Browser Editor window To display this set of controls choose the Date Format item from the Calendar Manager Properties window Category menu g CM Properties egret river Category Date Format A Date Ordering MM DD YY DD MM YY YY MM DD Date Separator Pavan 7 T Figure 5 32 Date Format Properties Solaris User s Guide September 1995 5 The Date Ordering item determines the order in which the month day and year appear in the various date fields The Date Separator item determines what character separates each element of the date To change the defaults click SELECT on the settings you want When you click SELECT on Apply the new date format becomes effective immediately F
50. 00 grep mailtool KA ELIP Figure A 2 An example of a ps listing for mailtool 2 Look in the left hand column of the listing for mailtool not the listing for grep mailtool to find the process number PID The process number is the first number on each line 3 Type kill USR1 PID and press Return In the example above the process number is 1431 so you would type kill USR1 1431 4 Read your mail as you usually do from the remote location The next time you open your Mail Tool the changes you make to your In Box from the remote location are incorporated and recorded as part of the Mail Tool Caution The steps above only work with the DeskSet Mail Tool application Using these steps for other versions of Mail Tool kills Mail Tool Solaris User s Guide September 1995 A Mail Tool Lock File The Mail utility uses a lock file to prevent two or more processes from altering your mail spool file at the same time If Mail Tool quits unexpectedly the lock file may be left behind If Mail Tool takes a long time to open the In Box either when you specifically request it or when you open Mail Tool after you have chosen Done from the File menu check for a lock file Look in the directory var mail for a file named username lock where username is your login name To remove the file from a system prompt type rm var mail username lock For example if your username is mary you would type rm var
51. 10 Rotate Icon and Rotated Image 404 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 is Zooming an Image To change the size of the image with the Zoom tool first enter a value in the text field next to the buttons You can type the value use the abbreviated menu buttons or use the sliders Figure 13 11 on page 405 shows the Zoom icon and an image that has been enlarged by 25 Image Tool File Fish 25 400 Figure 13 11 Zoom Icon and Enlarged Image To cancel unsatisfactory changes e For the most recent single change panning flipping rotating or zooming choose Undo from the Edit menu e For multiple changes click SELECT on Revert This restores the last saved version of the image Image Tool 405 S Viewing Multiple Page Documents When you open a multiple page document such as a PostScript file Image Tool offers several options to help you navigate the document For example once a multiple page document has been opened for viewing the Page Up and Page Down buttons are enabled and you can use them to move through the document page by page Page Overview Use Page Overview to display a window with a scrollable list of thumbnail renderings of each page and controls for viewing specific pages To open Select View gt Page Overview Figure 13 12 on page 406 shows the Page Overview window Image Tool Page Overview Thumbnail of up to 16 pages of the document Double click on a thumbn
52. 11 periodic interest rate is 11 Clicking SELECT on Term returns 20 32 the number of years it will take to accumulate 120 000 in your account The Calculator has the logical functions shown in Figure 8 12 This pop up window is displayed when you choose Logical from the Mode key pop up menu Logical Mode Figure 8 12 Logical Functions Calculator 313 lll Co Scientific Functions 314 e Use lt to shift the displayed value treated as a 32 bit integer to the left This key has a pop up menu The number of places to shift can be selected from this menu and ranges from 1 through 15 e Use gt to shift the displayed value treated as a 32 bit integer to the right This key has a pop up menu The number of places to shift can be selected from this menu and ranges from 1 through 15 se amp 16 to truncate the current display to a 16 bit integer C G e Use amp 32 to truncate the current display to a 32 bit integer e g se Or to perform a logical OR operation on the last number and the next umber entered treating both numbers as 32 bit integers 5 e se And to perform a logical AND operation on the last number and the ext number entered treating both numbers as 32 bit integers 3 CG e Use Not to perform a logical NOT operation on the currently displayed alue lt e Cc se Xor to perform a logical XOR operation on the last number and the next umber entered treating both numbers as
53. 32 bit integers 5 e G se Xnor to perform a logical XNOR operation on the last number and the next number entered treating both numbers as 32 bit integers The Calculator has the scientific functions shown in Figure 8 13 This window is displayed when you choose Scientific from the Mode key pop up menu Scientific Mode Figure 8 13 Scientific Functions Press MENU pm the Trig key to access a pop up menu to set the trigonometric base to Degrees Radians or Gradients The current trigonometric base is indicated by the second item on the mode line Solaris User s Guide September 1995 8 Use Hyp as a toggle for setting or unsetting the hyperbolic function flag This flag affects SIN COS and TAN functions When this flag is set the word HYP appears on the mode line beneath the numeric display Use Inv as a toggle for setting or unsetting the inverse function flag This flag affects SIN COS and TAN trigonometric functions When this flag is set the word INV appears on the mode line beneath the numeric display Use ex to return e raised to the power of the currently displayed value Use 10x to return 10 raised to the power of the currently displayed value Use y x to raise the last number entered to the power of the next number Use x to return the factorial of the currently displayed value The factorial function only works for positive integers Use Cos to return the trigonometric cosine arc cosine
54. 471 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 saturation 473 Color Chooser Binder 464 Color Chooser Icon Editor 439 color X pixmap image 433 437 command interpreter 276 Command Tool 276 Clear log 277 editing command line 279 File Editor menu 278 History 277 icon 276 Mode Setting 277 pop up menu 277 Scrolling menu 278 Store log 277 term pane menu 277 troubleshooting 283 Compose menu Mail Tool 152 composing email 164 165 compounding periods 307 Con calculator key 304 Confirm on new load Audio Tool 370 Console 283 498 constants Calculator 304 context switches 326 control area 17 Copy operation keyboard equivalent 11 Copy Edit menu 130 copying from clipboard keyboard equivalent 11 to clipboard keyboard equivalent 11 files 64 78 keyboard equivalent for 11 mail messagesMail Tool messages copying 152 text 137 your email messages 205 copying files cut and paste 78 core file 539 Cos Calculator key 315 COS cosine function Calculator 315 cpio command 377 Create Folder 62 creating binding 458 calculator functions 306 links 94 local aliases 214 mail files 186 mail messages 152 new files 77 snapshot 415 templates 167 210 text 127 text file 135 cropping an image Image Tool 402 cross reference links 508 Ctrm Calculator key 307 current folder File Manager 70 Custom Buttons Mail Tool 197 Custom Commands File Manager 63 110 custom field 204 c
55. 6 88 02 08 SMI Text Extras menu Copyright c 1987 by Sun Microsystems Inc Format fmt Capitalize MENU abcd gt ABCD ABCD gt abcd abcd gt Abcd capitalize u capitalize 1 capitalize c Capitalize END Shift Lines MENU Right shift_lines t 1 Left shift_lines t 1 Shift Lines END Pretty print C indent st Insert Brackets MENU 3 insert_brackets _ insert_brackets 3 insert brackets gt ee insert_brackets Insert Brackets END Remove Brackets MENU remove_brackets remove_brackets remove_brackets remove_brackets Remove Brackets END Figure 3 14 Extras Menu File in usr lib text_extras_menu The name of each Extras menu item is surrounded by double quotation marks Each submenu begins with a MENU statement and ends with an END statement To include a backslash character in the text_extras_menu file as in the troff inline font specifications fB and fP you need to use four backslash characters for example insert_brackets fB fP Alternatively you can use quotes in place of one pair of brackets for example insert_brackets fB fP Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Qo lll The textswrc File You can associate filters programs or routines with unused function keys by modifying your own copy of the file textswrc When a text selection has been made and a function key pressed the
56. AnswerBook Software e eee eeees 499 The Contents of Your On Line Library 499 AnswerBook Navigator and Viewer 0 000000 500 Closing or Quitting the AnswerBook Navigator and Viewer 504 Finding and Displaying a Document 504 Opening an AnswerBook 0 00 cece eee eee 504 Navigating Through Sets and Books in an AnswerBook 506 Following Hypertext Cross Reference Links 508 Searching with the Navigator ies caniekeca irene en nne wn 509 Contents XXV xxvi Reusing and Changing Search Phrases 512 Customizing DCAICNES cycv sho bees hoe wee S eee ces 512 Advanced Search Techniques sns tee ecen diees 513 Scoping the Search by Modifying the Library Contents 513 Titles Only Searches iuis30tsssepseun enue teaweeea 513 Using Special Characters in Search Phrases 514 Using Bookmarks Mode 2 ccutvuvey eesti etewiwaenctes 515 Creating a New Bookmark n on 02 0004csacvevvawees 515 Viewing and Editing Your Bookmarks 516 Accessing a Bookmarked Pag cvwiceeaciw evade awe ee nee o ie 517 Modifying Your Library ij42casineea eevee eed rnnr 519 Customizing the Viewer nnna 4046 deur eer aeee een 520 Magnifying the Viewer 22544aNave annunin nnne 521 PANNE e a Geek E e EEE E rene EA 521 Solaris Troubleshooting 0 0 c cee cece cee eeecs 523 Deskoet Troubleshooting ccccaysengctew te y enee
57. Chapter 13 Image Tool Snapping the Screen You can take snapshots of the entire screen following these steps 1 Make sure the screen is set up in the configuration you want 2 Click SELECT on the Snap Type Screen setting Snapshot 417 14 Viewing a Snapshot Loading a Snapshot 418 3 Click SELECT on Hide Window During Capture unless you want the Snapshot window as part of the screen shot 4 Set the Snap Delay and Beep During Countdown if you want to use them 5 Click SELECT on the Snap button If you set the Hide Window During Capture setting the Snapshot window is removed from the display and is redisplayed when the snapshot is complete For information on saving your snapshot refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment For information on viewing your image with Image Tool refer to Chapter 13 Image Tool To view a snapshot Click SELECT on the View button A status message Starting Image Tool is displayed in the lower left corner of the window This launches Image Tool Image Tool can provide more functionality for working with your image For complete information on Image Tool refer to Chapter 13 Image Tool If you want to look at another snapshot it is displayed in place of the previous one in Image Tool Use one of these methods to load a raster file or GIF image file Click SELECT on the Load button You see the Open window For complete infor
58. Click SELECT on the Props button to display the Tape Tool Properties window and confirm that you have the correct options set You may want to check the Tape Tool Properties window each time you retrieve files since the settings are not saved if you quit Tape Tool and start it up again 2 Insert the tape into the tape drive 3 Click SELECT on the List button in the Tape Tool window A Tape Contents window displays listing the files on the tape If there are a large number of files it may take several minutes for the listing to be complete Figure 12 6 shows a list of files in Tape Tool s scrolling window Tapetool Tape Contents Files to Read File To Read Pa Selected files have an outline fhome jayna news fhome jayna protocol fhome jayna archive information fhome jayna projects Figure 12 6 File Listing from a Tape Showing Two Files Selected 384 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 12 Click SELECT on the files you want to retrieve from the list Type the destination path if necessary If you want the destination path to be somewhere other than the path you specified when the files were written copied to the tape type it in the Destination text field Choose Read gt Selected from the Tape Tool base window Alternatively because the Selected option is the default you can just click SELECT on the Read menu button Retrieving Most of the Files from a Tape If you have a long
59. Delete Reply Command 7 Next Label Messages menu Cut New Print Abbreviated Header Copy Reply menu Save Full Header Delete Reply To Sender l Done Previous Undelete menu Reply To All l Mail Files Next Undelete Last Message Reply To Sender Include Sort By menu Undelete From List Reply To All Include Sort By Time amp Date Properties Forward Sort By Sender Vacation menu l i Sort By Message Number Find Figure 4 32 Header Window Properties Command menu 3 If you want to select a new label to go with the selected command type a new label Try to keep the label as small as possible in order to keep the custom button to a reasonable size 4 Click SELECT on Apply to change the custom button in the primary Mail Tool Header window The custom button on the Mail Tool Header window is changed to the new label and command Figure 4 33 shows the Header window with the second custom button changed to Print Mail Tool 16 mullet schema Mon Feb 4 08 Figure 4 33 A New Custom Button Print on the Header Window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll Message Window Properties You use the Message Window Properties to specify the number of lines in the View Message pop up window text pane a different print script for printing messages and the headers that are not displayed when viewing a message with abbreviated headers To see the Message Window Properties shown i
60. File Manager You can open a file or application displayed in the File Manager base window by pressing MENU on its icon and choosing Open When you open a text file icon for instance a Text Editor application is started and the chosen file is opened in the Text Editor window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll Viewing the Contents of a Folder in File Manager To look at the contents of a folder you can press MENU on the icon and select Open double click SELECT on the folder icon or press SELECT on it drag it into the Workspace and release the mouse button The icon opens into a window pane displaying the items in that folder Moving Files in the File System You move files from one folder to another by selecting and dragging them with the pointer for instance from the top level of the home directory to a folder you have opened on the Workspace or by cutting them from one folder opening another folder and pasting them there Dragging and Dropping File Manager works interactively with the other DeskSet applications For example if you want to listen to an audio file you can drag it from File Manager and drop it onto the Workspace To delete a file you can drag it from its location to the Wastebasket icon To send a file to the printer you drag it and drop it on the Print Tool icon To save a file or a set of files on a tape for other processing you can drag files from File Manager to the Tape Tool applicat
61. Hour hand and Minute hand settings The default is for the hour hand to show a sample over a 20 second interval and the minute hand the average over a 2 second interval If you change the values in these fields remember to click SELECT on the Apply or Set Default button to record the changes Performance Meter 329 lll Ko Shortcuts 330 AN If you d like to save and examine individual samples check the Log Samples checkbox on the Properties window This activates the Filename text field Samples are saved in the file typed in the Filename text field If no file name is specified samples are saved in a file in your home directory called perfmeter logXXxX where XXX is replaced by a unique identifier Do not specify the same file name for more than one Performance Meter at the same time Either specify a different file name for each sample file or do not specify any file name at all and let the Performance Meter construct unique file names Caution Do not leave the Performance Meter running for a long time with Log Samples on The file with the samples will keep getting larger until your system runs out of disk space on the file s partition The Performance Meter has keyboard accelerators that you can use to quickly toggle property settings without using the Properties window To use these keyboard accelerators move the pointer anywhere into the Performance Monitor window and type the letter as follows Type d
62. L APTITUDE DES PRODUITS A REPONDRE A UNE UTILISATION PARTICULIERE OU LE FAIT QU ILS NE SOIENT PAS CONTREFAISANTS DE PRODUITS DE TIERS CETTE PUBLICATION PEUT CONTENIR DES MENTIONS TECHNIQUES ERRONEES OU DES ERREURS TYPOGRAPHIQUES DES CHANGEMENTS SONT PERIODIQUEMENT APPORTES AUX INFORMATIONS CONTENUES AUX PRESENTES CES CHANGEMENTS SERONT INCORPORES AUX NOUVELLES EDITIONS DE LA PUBLICATION SUN MICROSYSTEMS INC PEUT REALISER DES AMELIORATIONS ET OU DES CHANGEMENTS DANS LE S PRODUIT S ET OU LE S PROGRAMME S DECRITS DANS DETTE PUBLICATION A TOUS MOMENTS
63. Manag hightide egret ILE Contains 27 items Bi ab_cardcatalog Jan 19 17 30 1 10 vab_library an 19 17 30 1 JO cetables Dec 201543 5 D cshre an 11 14 32 i S a Nov 24 11 24 1f E desksetdefaults an 20 11 18 25 C frn an201716 5 D history an 2011 01 1 D login Oct 23 16 04 1 D mailre an 2011 23 14 O mailtool init Nov 13 10 24 K openwin init Nov 13 10 24 1 openwin init Bak Oct2615 50 1 i lt openwin menu programs Oct 21 11 28 Figure 2 40 File Pane with Hidden Files dot files Visible Display Files As Display Files as lets you determine the default way to display your files in the file pane You can choose any of the following settings e Icon to help you identify each file by type List to display more files in the pane and to show you more information about each individual file determined by the List Options Displaying more files is true only if no list options are set e Content to display a preview of the contents of icon and raster files All other files are displayed as icons File Manager 105 106 Show in List The Properties window option Show in List allow you to choose how much information is displayed when you display the contents of the file pane as a list with mini icons as shown in Figure 2 41 The list options in Show in List are nonexclusive settings You can choose none some or all of the options To set an option click SELECT to toggle it from off to
64. Memory register usage Register 0 120000 principal Register 1 0 00916 periodic interest rate is 11 0 12 Register 2 360 term 30 x 12 Clicking SELECT on Pmt returns 1142 06 the value in dollars of your monthly repayment Calculator 309 310 Pv Present Value Use Pv to determine the present value of an investment The Calculator computes the present value based on a series of equal payments discounted at a periodic interest rate over the number of periods in the term The following information is retrieved from the memory registers Register 0 Amount of each payment Register 1 Periodic interest rate Register 2 Term or number of payments Pv Example You have just won a million dollars The prize is awarded in 20 annual payments of 50 000 each a total of 1 000 000 over 20 years Annual payments are received at the end of each year You are given the option of receiving a single lump sum payment of 400 000 instead of the million dollars annuity You want to find out which option is worth more in today s dollars If you were to accept the annual payments of 50 000 you assume that you would invest the money at a rate of 9 compounded annually Memory register usage Register 0 50000 periodic payment Register 1 0 09 periodic interest rate is 9 Register 2 20 term Clicking SELECT on Pv returns a value of 456427 28 which tells you that the 1 000 000 paid over 20 years is worth 4
65. Mon January 11 1993 12 00am 11 59 Bike to Work 2 00pm 3 00p Bike to work 11 00am 12 30 4B Beta Check I 10 00am 11 00 gy CM Show Calendar 1 1 w Steve 10 00am 11 00 Status Report D User Name mariac celtig Calendar mariac celtic displayed Calendar Manager 255 5 Setting the Calendar Manager Time Zone 256 When you browse another calendar Calendar Manager automatically adjusts the times to your time zone For example if you are on the west coast of the United States and you are browsing the calendar of someone on the East Coast a 9 00 a m appointment will appear as 6 00 a m to you This is an important feature when using Multiple Calendars because it assures that all calendars are synchronized If you are just browsing a single calendar however you might want to view the appointments in their native time zone You can do this easily by using Time Zone from the View menu to change your time zone to that of the calendar you are browsing If you change your time zone to something other than your own the name of the time zone is displayed in the right side of the footer of the Calendar Manager base window Figure 5 25 shows the Time Zone menu with US Mountain Time selected Note If you change your time zone in order to browse another calendar make sure to change it back to your native time zone when you are done This is important in order to keep your appointment times synchronized with each other and
66. Properties window is shown in Figure 2 35 gy FM Properties Category New Folder Defaults Default Name New Folder Longest Name 15 __ ay icon Layeut Sort By Name Size Date Hidden Files Display Files As Icons Content Show in List View Content As Date Size H Owner Group Links Permissions Apply Save as Defaults Reset Figure 2 35 New Folder Defaults Window File Manager 101 102 Default Name The current default name when a new folder is created is NewFolder You can change this to anything you like Longest Name The Longest Name field allows you to choose how many characters based on the average width of the characters of each file name are displayed in the file pane of File Manager You can type any number from 0 to 255 Note The number of characters actually displayed for each file name may vary when using variable width fonts because the width is calculated based on the width of the average character in the font Names that do not fit within the specified length are followed by a greater than sign gt to show that the complete name is not displayed Figure 2 36 shows an example of the file pane with shorter file names set amp File Manager hightide egret File v view v Edit v GoTo 7 r hightide egret ILLI Contains 27 items 874 Mbytes O ab_cardca gt desksetde
67. Saving the Modified File as a New File 136 Editing Files 22 topcase cheesey eee inia aa a kan eee 136 Adding and Deleting Text 2 0 0 04 6iccdewnceeveares 137 Copying and Moving Text lt ccscedraieeniurianetenesew 137 Tips on Cutting and Pasting sever arawadirndeeeneee we 138 Printing Text Editor Files 442 c 5aniw iis sesccececresss cess 139 Splitting Panes sses esssiiiei ieii e e 6 cee E i eon 139 Drag and Drop Feature n nunnan nnn nrrn rnnr 140 Dragging Selected Text from the Text Editor 141 Dragging Complete Text Editor Files 142 Customizing Your Text Editor ii 04s eee twee eee eens eee 143 The text_extras_menu Pile sos ou dcen ee eegeedvaekee ees 143 The textswre Files ceca a neen eh 14 RERE E AEROC TEE 145 Format of the textswrce File n Va eran acd eters 145 Multimedia Mail Tool 030 4 scssiedar eis ieencas snes edua 147 How Mail Tool Is Organized ciicsass cee eee Sec eues ews 148 Header Window ICONS s 00 e peed eee een ears ue cater 148 Mail Tool Header Window lt vs eee e eecd dee da eee oeene et 148 Mail Message Headers ac ices oe eekdaiaieeneneeee enone 149 Contents ix Message Header Status Messages 005 150 Selecting Message Headems sscssvssivevstaxennans 150 Mail Tool Controls and Menus oc00i4 Lace deede iris 150 Pile Men 560 cette sssde kernel teers cae 151 View MENU ten camriaacdet o55e50tge4e iyki a 151 Edit ME
68. Settings window you allow yourself to turn off StickyKeys by pressing two modifiers at once such as Control and Shift Some people find this easier than clicking with a mouse or pressing Shift five times If you have trouble using a mouse use MouseKeys to make the numeric keypad on your keyboard emulate mouse actions You can move the pointer around your screen as you would with a mouse and click or press mouse buttons Turning MouseKeys On and Off There are two ways to turn MouseKeys on and off Check the MouseKeys check box on the AccessX main window e Press the Alt Shift and Num Lock keys at once Valid only if you ve started OpenWindows with the accessx option Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Ss lll Keyboard Emulations of Mouse Actions When MouseKeys is turned on the keys on the numeric pad have three different kinds of functions Keys 1 4 and 6 9 move the pointer around the screen The 5 plus 0 zero and decimal point keys simulate mouse button clicks and presses The slash multiply and minus keys switch the keyboard mapping between various mouse buttons You can bring up a Status window to see which mouse keys are currently pressed Note Your keyboard and mouse may differ choose ADJUST mouse button choose SELECT mouse button oe MENU mouse button PgUp release mouse button click mouse button yoa DOGO OOO POC double click mouse but
69. System Openwindows Version 3 2 Figure 17 1 Workstation Information Window Basic information available to you from the Workstation Information window is as follows Your Workstation Information The following information tells you the name and type of workstation you have or are using Workstation Name This is also known as the machine name or host name It is the unique name you or your system administrator gave to the machine you are using This is usually not the same name as your user name or login name This is the machine name that other users see over the network such as from electronic mail Workstation Type This is usually the product name or type for your workstation It may reflect the model number of the workstation 466 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 17 Networking Information These three items provide some networking information HostID A unique CPU number assigned to your machine This is sometimes used for licensing software Internet Address Your unique machine address that allows other machines to talk to your machine over the network Network Domain Name of the NIS domain to which your machine belongs Contains password information and other network machine addresses System Memory Information These three items provide some simple information on how the system is using memory Physical Memory RAM This tells you how much Random Access Memory RAM is installed
70. Templates submenu can be added to a message at any time while you are composing it When you choose the item from the Include menu the template is inserted at the caret location Figure 4 13 shows an example of a signature template Multimedia Mail Tool 167 168 Mail Tool To amp Subject Ce Briana Halvorsen Technical Writer Sun Microsystems Inc Figure 4 13 Example of a Signature Template Using the Vacation Notifier When you are away from your office you can use the Vacation notifier on the Compose menu to automatically respond to each email message you receive Mail Tool provides you with a generic message form that you can edit and customize to suit your individual needs Figure 4 14 shows the Vacation Setup pop up window with the generic message Choose the Start Change item on the Vacation submenu to display the Vacation Setup window Mail Tool Vacation Setup ubject I am on vacation recedence junk Your mail regarding SUBJECT will be read when I return If you have something urgent please contact Figure 4 14 Vacation Setup Pop up Window You can edit this message in the same way you edit messages in the Compose window The string SUBJECT in the message text automatically extracts the subject from the message being responded to and includes it in the reply Solaris User s Guide September 1995 message The Precedence junk line tells the mail delivery a
71. The message that lost the From header will appear to be lost You can find it appended to the previous message Show Attachment List By default a Compose window includes a pane at the bottom of the text area where you can add attachments to your message If you never or rarely use attachments you can turn off the Attachments pane for new Compose windows Use the Show Attachment List setting of the Compose Window Properties Category to determine if the Attachments pane is shown by default If you turn off the default Show Attachments List setting you can display the Attachments pane on an as needed basis by choosing Show Attachments from the Include menu of the Compose window Multimedia Mail Tool 203 204 Compose Window Custom Header Fields The header of your Compose window always has To Subject and Cc fields In addition Bcc is available via the Header menu You can add custom headers to the Header menu by adding them to the Custom Fields scrolling list on the Compose Window Properties category Some useful headers that you might want to use are the following Precedence junk If the mail system cannot send a message with this header the message will not be bounced back to you This is handy if you are sending out a message to a large alias and you do not wish to receive notices whenever the message cannot be delivered to an individual Reply To email address When you reply to a message with this
72. The Custom Command feature assumes that you have some working knowledge of the UNIX operating system If you are not familiar with UNIX or have problems you might want to have your system administrator help you create any desired custom commands Solaris User s Guide September 1995 g Category Cus FM Properties tom Commands Type in command to be listed in the Custom Commands menu UNIX Command Menu Label Prompt Window Prompt Output Window String Search Add Item grep ARG FIL Custom Commands Menu Items String Search PrintScript Yes Yes Figure 2 45 Custom Command Pop up Window The scrolling list shows your current custom commands You use this window to add delete and change the order of your custom commands Follow the step s below to add a new custom command to the Custom Commands Menu Items scroll box Follow the examples to add a custom command to search for a particular text string in the selected files or folders 1 Type the actual UNIX command in the UNIX Command text field You can add SF ILE or ARG to the command to represent the currently selected file or special arguments options that you can specify at the time you choose the command In this example type grep ARG FILE in the UNIX command text field 2 Type the name of the command that you want to appear in the Menu Label text field This Menu L abel doe
73. The view changes to your personal database listing the newly copied entry and any others that you may have The copied entry has the temporary name unnamed_1l Figure 16 3 shows a private Binder database with the newly copied entry Binder 445 16 Binder Properties 446 Binder edited Binder Entries Personal H calctool pr 2664 prog HEBE cat prog unnamed_1 Figure 16 3 Private Binder Database Note If you run Binder as root without the system or network command line options listed above you will only be able to modify the personal Binder entries for user root Make sure to use the command line options if you want to modify the system or network entries When you want to modify or add new bindings use the Props menu or the Props keyboard key to display the Properties window You fill in or change the information on these properties windows to specify your bindings There are two categories of Binder properties Icon properties and File Type properties These categories are described in the following sections The Apply and Reset buttons at the bottom of the Properties window apply or reset the changes made to both categories Icon and File Type at the same time If you want to make both Icon and File Type changes you only need to click SELECT on Apply once after you have finished making both sets of changes Solaris User s Guide September 1995 1lb
74. Thu 11 Fri 12 8 00am 12 00 9 00am 11 00a 9 00am 11 00al 12 00am 11 5 12 00am 11 5 Appointment Appointment Appointment Appointment Appointment 12 00pm 2 00 11 00am 12 0 11 00am 12 0 9 00am 11 00a 10 00am 11 0 Appointment Appointment Appointment Appointment Appointment 2 00pm 3 00p 12 30pm 3 00 12 00pm 1 00 2 00pm 3 00p Appointment Appointment Appointment Appointment 3 30pm 4 30p 3 00pm 4 00p 2 00pm 3 00p Appointment Appointment Appointment 4 00pm 5 00p 3 00pm 4 00p Appointment Appointment CM Show Calendar 7 8 9 ab ab ob nN 6 NOQOQson Figure 5 23 Browsing a Week View Calendar When You Don t Have Browse Access To change back to your own calendar choose your user name from the Browse menu Solaris User s Guide September 1995 nN lll Browsing a Single Remote Calendar One Time Only Sometimes you may need to browse a single user s calendar just for a certain appointment only It does not make sense to add this user to your list of frequently browsed calendars To show a single calendar one time only 1 Choose Browse gt Show Calendar You see the Show Calendar window 2 Type the user s name for the calendar to be displayed in the User Name text field and select Show Depending on which view is displayed you see the calendar of the user name you entered Figure 5 24 shows a calendar selected from the Show Calendar window Week Starting
75. Workspace in the Workspace menu and in the window frames of any applications open on the Workspace Depending on your system configuration application control areas in open windows use the previous color until you quit and restart the application s Customizing the Solaris Environment 473 I Customizing Fonts OpenWindows DeskSet applications are set up with default fonts that appear on all items such as icons menus and windows Normally you do not need to customize the style or point size of these fonts However if you would like to increase or decrease the size of the default or if you are partial to a particular font it is possible to change the default font style and size for the system font from the Fonts category The following sections on fonts describe two methods of customizing fonts a basic method of changing the scale of the font which also affects the window scale and a method of changing the font style The first method simply increases or decreases the font size to small large or extra large and its window size while the second provides greater flexibility in defining the style Choosing a Font Scale The scale allows you to choose from four font sizes for windows You can change the default so that all applications subsequently open in the size you specify Note that when you scale the font the window scales with it You can choose from these four sizes small medium the default large e e
76. You quit any window or icon on the workspace by choosing Quit from the Window menu Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll Creating New Files and Folders You can create new files and folders in the file pane which puts them in the folder where they are created To create a new file or folder follow the steps below 1 Check to be sure you are in the folder where you want to create the new file or folder If necessary select another folder and click Open 2 Choose either Create Document or Create Folder from the File menu An empty file called NewDocument for a file or NewFolder for a folder is created in the file pane Subsequent new documents or folders are numbered in sequence For example if you create a file called NewDocument and a file with this name already exists the new file will be called NewDocument 1 The next new document will be called NewDocument 2 and so forth The name of the new document or folder is highlighted and underlined when it is first displayed which means it is ready to be renamed Figure 2 17 shows a new folder in the file pane A a Gts Figure 2 17 New Folder in the File Pane File Manager 77 Naming a Document or Folder When the name of a file or folder is highlighted and underlined the name is an editable text field You can change the name of any folder or file by clicking SELECT on its name to select it and display an editable text field You c
77. Your TMG coccce tan ee ekes eeeeeeeeeeanags 42 Printing Your Documents s c52058 14 teed ede tetek ies 43 Communicating on the Network 05 44 Customizing the OpenWindows Environment 44 Hidden Piles cs i2 2t2teut boesae reece st ki mdudu eas 44 Getting Helps is tana ie Dee peed eed RR EE oe 45 Magnify Helps sses iesrissrre ved Leica ddd dn cua pace ce 45 M re H lpec tke cree eneee aE an reste eaauy 46 Dismissing a Help Window c0vurereeaderedsenee ewe 46 No Help lt cererenitedegemlagn els ier eneueer yey oes 47 Help ViEwers cccscaqinthetots ion06 ore E saken 47 Desktop Introduction xccxiehasaver sees eRe Rea aaeee 47 Helpon Help 2 iste ee iewee net T reer renee ees bee 49 Other Handbooks aici veils serene evade eee ri ae sere sees 50 Quick Access to Help Handbooks 51 Navigating through Handbooks 0 51 Closing the Help VieWets vn cic wi el is tageedasteter ins 55 Exiting the Help Viewer s c iiene s tekeec oweetereees 56 On line Documentation AnswerBooks 04 56 2 File Managet i 00 0606 5 8995995459 SPINS ORR eee SEES 57 File Maniarer WON t 0 2cecncue peed ennu ade teed e eee ees 58 File Manager Base WindOWs to rise haeeex dee de ceeds 58 File Manager File Icons n nnana anann nnne 59 Contents v Selecting File Manager Icons n nunnana nnn nnn 61 Control Area Menus 1c cecnecs see ees ebasunceeteeana deme 62 File Men ameter d
78. a complete listing of print filters available and information about the lpfilter command refer to System Administration Guide Volume II The Override default print method option allows you to use alternate command line print methods within Print Tool If you need to print a file with another print method such as troff you need to override the default print method You must also use the following environment variables listed here with their meaning SFILE Name of your file SPRINTER SLPDEST Printer name COPIES Number of copies to be printed HEADER Print header page with job You can type any command line print method including UNIX pipes and shell scripts The print method must be an executable command in your path For example if you want to pretty print a C source file using the vgrind command you would follow these steps 1 Click SELECT on the Properties button 2 Click the Override Default Print Method checkbox and press Apply 3 In the Print Method text field type vgrind FILE dpost lp d PRINTER n COPIES Tpostscript 4 Type the name of the file in the File text field or drag and drop the file to be printed onto the Print Tool icon or drag and drop target Note The SunOS 5 X print system does not recognize the type of the file to be printed You must supply the appropriate filter for the file type when using an alternate print method Otherwise the file will be printed as
79. a tape have a complete path name absolute path name the files are always put in the directory specified on the tape regardless of what you type in the Destination field To strip files of their absolute path name when you archive them set the Strip Path option in the Tape Tool Properties window to All and click SELECT on the Apply button Each of the Tape Tool operations is described in more detail in the following sections Editing the List of Files in the Tape Contents Window Once the files are listed by pressing the List button in the Tape Contents window you can retrieve all of the files in the list retrieve specific selected files or edit the list to remove files you do not want to retrieve The Tape Contents window has a Read Functions pop up menu shown in Figure 12 3 To display this menu move the pointer into the Tape Contents window and press MENU Tape Tool 379 12 380 Tapetool Tape Contents Files to Read E File To Read a usr2 brenda mailr usr2 brenda newsre usr2 brenda record Figure 12 3 Read Functions Pop up Menu in the Tape Contents Window Select All from the Read Functions menu selects all files on the tape You can edit a group of files by clicking SELECT on the name of each file that you want to delete Clicking SELECT on a selected file deselects it Files such as group licenses and passwd are highlighted as shown in Figure 12 4 Tapetool Tape Contents Files t
80. accounts and calendars on remote workstations named sea and ocean He would add egret sea and egret ocean to his calendar access list and give these users full Browse Insert and Delete permissions See the section Chapter 5 Calendar Manager for instructions 2 When you are logged in at the remote workstations browse your real calendar Since you have full access permissions you can read all your appointments change your appointments and so forth In the previous example when Egret is logged in to sea or ocean he can browse the calendar egret work to access his real calendar Note Do not mount the usr spool calendar directory from a remote disk Doing so may result in loss of Calendar data Running Different Versions of OpenWindows and Calendar Manager If you run an older version of OpenWindows after running the current version of OpenWindows the older version of Calendar Manager will not be able to read your appointment data file To avoid this problem back up the following file before starting the current version of Calendar Manager usr spool calendar callog lt user gt Before you return to an older version of Calendar Manager restore your old file making sure you maintain the permissions on the directory and file If you browse a calendar that is running a different version from your own it should work Solaris Troubleshooting 529 530 Clock Troubleshooting Dis
81. also be recognized by files ending with ps as described previously in the section Identify By Name Binder gy Binder Properties Binder Entries perfmeter prog ify by Content EA ps Identify by Content My postscript file Content a T Tag Offset 0 Sha printtool prog Tag Type readme file Tag Value shell script i DS Tag Mask Pattern lO Read Read Only Entry Figure 16 11 The postscript file Content File Type Entry Figure 16 12 shows the sun raster File Type entry This class of files is defined as all files starting with the Long value 0x59a66a95 Binder 457 16 Binder gv Binder Properties Binder Entries amp shelltool prog gt Content E snapshot prog Identify by Content Tag Value 0x59a66a95 sun executable sun raster e sun icon image Tag Mask Pattern GED ojo Read Only Entry 4 Read Only Entry Figure 16 12 The sun raster File Type Entry Creating a New Binding The following steps explain how to create a new binding The example binds the cat icon described in Chapter 15 Icon Editor to the cat program file in your bin directory 1 If an icon does not exist for the new binding use the Icon Editor to create a 32 by 32 XView format pixel icon See Chapter 15 Icon Editor for instructions The icon for the binding is the
82. area foreground and background then it might mean that XView doesn t respond to these resources yet Try to set window color foreground and window color backgroundin SHOME Xdefaults manually for XView applications Message Regarding Colormap Usage From the Color Properties if you receive a message about colormap usage and the program can t continue it might mean the colormap is full Try to exit the application s that make heavy use of colormap resources restart the Properties and try again Solaris User s Guide September 1995 on lll Fonts Extend Beyond Button Boundaries Layouts Appear Misaligned Some programs don t properly handle all font scales Icon Backgrounds Don t Match Workspace Pattern XView applications control the icons they don t use bitmaps Color Category Missing Color settings availability is dependant on hardware Accented Characters Do Not Appear in C Locale The C locale does not support 8 bit characters that is G1 set or right hand side of the ISO 8859 1 character set such as characters with diareses Use the en_US locale to display 8 bit characters in the English language environment To empower the en_US locale you can pull down the Workspace Properties menu under the category Localization select en_US Alternatively if you are a Bourne Shell user you can add the following to your profile file LANG en_US export LANG If you are a C shell user
83. available to you are listed on the Printer scroll list Printers are in separate directories under etc lp printers If you need to add or delete printers to your system configuration you must use the admin tool See System Administration Guide Volume I and System Administration Guide Volume II for more information 340 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 About This Chapter Audio Tool Capabilities Audio Tool T11 Audio Tool is an application that is used to record play and edit audio files Audio Tool works in conjunction with the Audio Control application which controls and configures the desktop s audio capabilities Audio Tool also works with Multimedia Mail Tool to provide the audio capabilities for composing sending and receiving Multimedia Mail The first part of this chapter explains how to perform common Audio Tool tasks such as playing recording editing and saving audio files The rest of the chapter which is in a reference format contains detailed descriptions of Audio Tool s base window and the File Edit and Volume menus Refer to these reference sections for more information about a particular button or menu option Before using Audio Tool make sure that your machine supports at a minimum basic monaural audio capabilities and that a speaker and microphone are installed Refer to your system s documentation for this information Many computers support stereo and higher quality audio such as
84. be displayed in Can t Remember Password Subsection in Users Guide his leave capital letters out of your username when you Network Access Your NIS Password Subsection in User s yped Password ive miskeyed something If on the third try you still aur system administrator Delete Bookmark Comment for 4 User s Guide Basic Troubleshooting don t use these characters jing in with home is no directory set up for your use on the system If this z in to another machine on the network it may not pens when you log in to your own system then you need administrator to have him or her set up a home I ELEI0 a hy Solaris User s Guide Basic Troubleshooting Figure 19 18 Using a Bookmark to Go to a Page in the Viewer Solaris User s Guide September 1995 i Modifying Your Library Modify Library button You can add AnswerBooks to your Library provided they have been installed and configured for your use You can also remove AnswerBooks from your Library to constrain browsing and searching Note The System Administration Guide Volume I provides information for system administrators on how to make an AnswerBook available to users 1 Click SELECT on the Modify Library button at the top of the Navigator AnswerBook Navigator Modify Library New Bookmark Location gt Library Contents of Library Solaris User AnswerBook a
85. be opened Solaris User s Guide September 1995 A Drag and Drop Failed An unknown internal error occurred while trying to establish a drag and drop connection DND Bad Time An unknown internal error occurred while trying to establish a drag and drop connection Try the drag and drop operation again File Manager Troubleshooting This section describes the solutions to common File Manager questions and problems Cannot Format a Floppy Using the File Manager Format Option If you try to format a floppy using Format from the File Manager File menu and it does not work your system may not be set up to run the format program Contact your system administrator for assistance Custom Icons Not Displayed If you think you changed a file s icon with the Binder but you do not see the change in the File Manager make sure that you restarted the File Manager after you saved the Binder changes If you have already restarted the File Manager recheck your changes with the Binder Make sure the entry you changed was saved to your user database with the Binder Save button Also make sure the file displayed really falls into the class of files changed with the Binder If your File Manager displays only the three generic types of icons folders applications and documents the File Manager was unable to connect with the Binder database Check your Console window for error messages indicating where the problem occurred Sola
86. by the publisher of the documents that is the default You can set other magnification values by choosing Custom Magnification This opens the Custom Magnification window ow Custom Magnification Magnification Percentage 114 59 xx 200 Figure 19 21 Custom Magnification Window 1 Drag the slider to the desired value Press SELECT on the slider control as you move it The amount of magnification is specified in the Magnification Percentage field 2 Click SELECT on Apply This puts the new page magnification into effect Clicking SELECT on Reset reverts to the previous setting Single clicks on the left or right of the slider cause one percent increments up or down the scale Use the Print button in the Viewer when you want to print books chapters sections subsections or single pages In the Print window that is displayed you can choose printing options Figure 19 22 The default printing option is Current Viewer Page which prints just the page you see in the Viewer Using the AnswerBook Software 521 19 AnswerBook Viewer Print H Print Choices Choose the item you want to print DeskSet Reference 2 AudioTool Scroll up or down to set the number of copies between 1 and 10 o The number of copies multiplied by the number of Destination pages in the document Printer pubs i A s Choose print order to suit your Print Order First Page Fi
87. click SELECT before typing 488 definition 9 Focus Follow Pointer 488 Insert 134 Insert Brackets Text Editor 134 insert point 9 Int Calculator key 301 integer 301 international keyboard 493 Introducing Your Sun Desktop tutorial xxx Inv Calculator key 315 inverse function flag 315 inverse hyperbolic cosine function Calculator 315 inverse hyperbolic sine function Calculator 315 inverse hyperbolic tangent 315 Invert Icon Editor 437 J jumbled characters 540 K keyboard erase functions 478 international 493 move caret functions 478 navigation commands 479 remapping 478 keyboard accelerators Clock 293 Performance Meter 330 keyboard access for handicapped users 545 keyboard equivalents Calculator 305 316 keyboard equivalents accelerators OpenWindows 10 to 11 keyboard equivalents of mouse buttons 552 Keys 302 keys accelerator 477 controlling repeat behavior 555 ignore multiple presses 557 latching and locking 551 modifier 551 rate of repeat 555 keystrokes for AccessX features 558 L latching keys AccessX 551 left handed use of mouse buttons 481 Line Icon Editor 423 link 94 creating 94 removing 95 linking files File Manager 57 94 links 508 Index list files Tape Tool 378 Ln Calculator key 315 ln command 94 Load In Box 151 182 loading a file Audio Tool 361 Icon Editor 432 loading a file in Text Editor 135 loading new files keyboard eq
88. contents of the pane move along with the pointer Repeat these steps if necessary to reach the desired location The control area has four menu buttons File View Edit and Go To Go To has a text field This section shows each of these controls and provides a brief introduction to each of the items Figure 2 5 shows the menu buttons within the File Manager control area File Manager View v Edit 7 GoTo 7 e _ Menu Buttons Path Pane Figure 2 5 File Manager Control Area Menu Buttons The File menu provides choices that you can use to perform filing functions Use Open to open selected folders and files Open is inactive unless you have made a selection in the file pane or path pane se Open in Editor to open the file in the Text Editor se Create Document to create a new document U U e Use Create Folder to create a new folder Use Duplicate to create another version of the selected item s U se Print One to print your selection to your default printer Print is inactive unless you have made a selection in the file pane Use Print to print selected files using your own print method and specified printer You can select the number of copies to print Print is inactive unless you have made a selection in the file pane Solaris User s Guide September 1995 2 View Menu e Use Find to display a pop up window that you can use to find files See Using the Find Pop up Window on
89. cor You will receive a message in that shell that tells you the origin of the core file Provide this information to your system administrator Solaris Troubleshooting 539 Those with knowledge of the operating system software may want to analyze the core file on their own Information regarding two basic debugging tools is available in the man pages for adb and dbx Blank Screen If you have set the screensaver option described in Chapter 17 Customizing the Solaris Environment and your screen turns blank you can restore your desktop by moving the mouse in any direction Although input from any keyboard key or mouse button will restore your screen it is advised that you move the mouse instead This is because pressing a key creates system input which means as an example that if the pointer is positioned in a text file you may insert a character in the text SPARC Jumbled Text Characters If you are running applications of several different types SunView and OpenWindows applications for instance the characters you type in a window may occasionally appear jumbled To solve this problem place the pointer in the workspace background and choose Workspace gt Utilities gt Reset Input Note This section applies only to SPARC based machines Problems with xinitrc If you have an xinitrc file in your home directory and you are seeing problems with applications that rely on global OpenWindows r
90. digits 0 through 9 e Choosing Hexadecimal displays the digits 0 through 9 and also activates the alphabetic keys at the top of the numeric keypad Figure 8 3 shows the keypads for both Binary and Hexadecimal numeric bases Calculator 297 lll Co Figure 8 3 The Binary Keypad and Hexadecimal Keypad Display Notation You can choose to display Calculator results in Fixed point Engineering or Scientific notation by using the Disp Display key menu shown in Figure 8 4 Press MENU on the Disp key to display the menu x Calculator m rype HEX DEG FIX BASIC Engineering Scientific Tr K y _ a Figure 8 4 Display Type Pop up Menu for Display Notation Mode The current display notation is displayed as the third item in the mode line In Figure 8 4 the mode line shows FIX indicating Fixed Point notation When the current display notation is Engineering ENG appears on the mode line When the current notation is Scientific SCI is displayed When the current notation is Fixed Point the Calculator will revert to Scientific notation if a number is larger than the display will allow 298 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Co lll Major Calculator Modes There are four major Calculator modes that determine the available functions Basic e Financial Logical e Scientific You can choose these four modes using the Mode pop up menu shown in Figure 8 5 Press MENU on the Mode key to display the
91. double click SELECT on the subdirectory to display its contents in the scrolling list 4 Choose Move Message into Mail File or Copy Message into Mail File from the Save menu The selected messages are moved or copied to the selected mail file Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll Viewing a Mail File You can view the messages stored in a mail file using either the Mail Files window or the Load menu of the Mail Tool Header window Once the mail file is loaded you access the messages of the mail file exactly the same way as you access the messages of your In Box To return to the In Box after you are done viewing a mail file choose Load In Box from the File menu Viewing a Mail File Using the Header Window Controls Follow these steps to view the messages in a mail file using the Header window controls 1 If the desired mail file is not already on the Load menu choose the desired mail file from the Mail File menu Alternatively you can type the name of the mail file in the Mail File text field Choose the mail file from the Load menu on the Mail Tool Header window If the desired mail file is listed in the Mail File text field you can just click SELECT on the Load button Viewing a Mail File Using the Mail Files Window Follow these steps to view mail file messages using the Mail Files window 1 Choose Mail Files from the File menu to display the Mail Files popup window Select the mail fi
92. eee beeen datos 173 Opening Mail Attachments 000005 174 Opening Ordinary Attachments 005 174 Viewing Special Attachments 4s icciicicescaceasaes 175 Sending Mail Attachments y lt ss0sncieseecuenieeedeea es 176 Adding Mail Attachments adoaoa so te fe 28 Se eeNn eee 178 Renaming Mail Attachments 0 005 179 Moving Mail Attachments 00 00000000 ee 180 Deleting Mail Attachments 22 2 ever se saws cus ews 182 Saving Changes for Mail Tool e cee ewsave teen yore ers 182 Organizing Your Mail Messages 00000 000 183 Mail File Menus ccexeneue heb eee See eon edd Kha dana aes 185 Creatine a New Mail Vile icc c4c0 4 tak cacadeeeety tuk 186 Adding Messages to an Existing Mail File 188 Viewing a Mail File 23222222io9ose000 06 d0 menu edtnidiens 189 Viewing a Mail File Using the Header Window Controls 189 Viewing a Mail File Using the Mail Files Window 189 Editing a Mail File Emptying Renaming Deleting 190 Sorting the Contents of a Mail File 4 190 Contents Xi Loading Saved Messages Back into Mail Tool 191 Loading a Message from the Mail Files Directory 191 Loading a Message from Another Directory 191 Loading the INM BOX recs cererceti bs ii coe ewe teres 192 Using Drag and Drop with Mail Tool 192 Dragging Mail to Other Applic
93. elevator and click SELECT several times the elevator catches up with the pointer and you must move the pointer to continue scrolling in the same direction Customizing Pop up Pointer Jumping Use the Pointer Jumping Pop up check box to specify whether or not you want the pointer to jump into a pop up window automatically when it comes up If this setting is checked when a pop up window with a notice is displayed the pointer jumps to the default button that is your anticipated choice For example when you choose Exit from the Workspace menu a notice asks your to confirm that you want to leave the window system The notice has two buttons Exit and Cancel The pointer jumps to Cancel when the notice window is displayed The pointer jumps so quickly that you see no movement In Figure 17 6 on page 480 this option is on When the box is not checked the pointer does not jump to the default button in the pop up window but remains where it was when the pop up window appeared Move the pointer onto the appropriate button and click SELECT To turn off the pop up pointer jumping click SELECT on the check mark The check mark disappears and the option is turned off Customizing the Solaris Environment 483 17 Menu Setting the Drag Right Distance of Menus The drag right distance is the distance that you must move the pointer to the right before a menu is displayed This distance is measured on the screen in pixels o
94. entry The image on the left is the icon image and determines what is outlined in the foreground color The image on the right is the icon mask and determines the area of the icon colored with the background color Figure 16 6 The printtool prog Icon and printtool prog Icon Mask Image File and Mask File Line These text lines specify the path directory location to the icon and the icon s mask a stencil of the image that determines the area of the icon colored with the background color To modify the current icon in its appearance on the workspace do not modify these paths Foregr Foreground Color The foreground color is the color that the icon itself is drawn icon outline within the File Manager and other DeskSet applications If no value is given for this field the foreground color is black If you want to pick a new foreground color click SELECT on the window button to the right of the Foregr Color text field to invoke the Color Chooser application See Using the Color Chooser Palette with Binder on page 464 for more information Alternatively you can type three numbers in the Foregr Color text field to indicate the amount each of red green and blue in the foreground color Color saturation values range from 0 through 255 For example 255 0 0 represents a bright solid red color Binder 449 16 450 Backgr Background Color The background color is the color the icon is colored within the lines of
95. errre 433 Clearing the Canvas 1k siubeerevivecisveraawe resent 433 Printing an TOON eccess a ee eee ee eee PERE eee eee ees 433 View MENU cine cad nena eneee se eee bees eee ree eae sian He 434 Crid 0 30 i a eee eee ee ee ee eee ee 435 Edit Ment 221 gba0 va ceeeah aren aageee ener 436 Undo and Redo ccnc ucivhciwhehih ieee canker 436 Clea ccter rsirasteacdoi Veo beep et e Ee nE E Rea 436 Cut Copy and Past sscsiserrses ornis tiss eee ee eases 436 JEANA E E E E E E eee tenes 437 Properties Mentee seese epeei Enn teehee eet 437 ICOM FOUN Sos reba eee et ee E AEA RRRA 437 xxii Title of Book Month 1992 ICON SIZE ee cc dated hee wae ee eee e EIE eee 438 Icon Editor Color Chooser Palette 0 eee ee eens 439 16s BiNndGt eccniion aes aenea es os exeaweusaddsaeR eee ees 441 Binder Icon and Window 22 02 ieis bib heeeeened eerie es 442 Binder Control Area 1224 sis2b05 2 ee sean ewee Pasnes 442 Binder Databases rei ci ttesd con sbre erer hs eteten eiet 443 Updating and Viewing Private Binder Entries 443 Updating and Viewing System and Network Binder Entries 444 binder Propernes nx iche rene thaws adnan pire Dee eee ROY 446 Icon Prop trties ii cece ek ed eine wee EW EN Re eRe RIES 447 File Type Properties aic eiuiagws ve Ver en gueer eeu cece 451 Creating a New Binding 2int 0tvieia 0 soe eereekeseken 458 Deleting a Binder PMiry cuasiseehads dose be vee ARSE eRe 462 Changing a Binding c
96. et distribu avec des licences qui en restreignent l utilisation la copie et la d compliation Aucune partie de ce produit ou de sa documentation associ e ne peuvent Etre reproduits sous aucune forme par quelque moyen que ce soit sans l autorisation pr alable et crite de Sun et de ses bailleurs de licence s il ena Des parties de ce produit pourront etre derivees du syst me UNIX licenci par UNIX Systems Laboratories Inc filiale entierement detenue par Novell Inc ainsi que par le syst me 4 3 de Berkeley licenci par l Universit de Californie Le logiciel d tenu par des tiers et qui comprend la technologie relative aux polices de caract res est prot g par un copyright et licenci par des fourmisseurs de Sun LEGENDE RELATIVE AUX DROITS RESTREINTS l utilisation la duplication ou la divulgation par l administation americaine sont soumises aux restrictions vis es a l alin a c 1 ii de la clause relative aux droits des donn es techniques et aux logiciels informatiques du DFAR 252 227 7013 et FAR 52 227 19 Le produit d crit dans ce manuel peut Etre protege par un ou plusieurs brevet s americain s etranger s ou par des demandes en cours d enregistrement MARQUES Sun Sun Microsystems le logo Sun Solaris sont des marques depos es ou enregistr es par Sun Microsystems Inc aux Etats Unis et dans certains autres pays UNIX est une marque enregistr e aux Etats Unis et dans d autres pays et exclusivem
97. from File Manager and reorganize your file system by moving or copying files between folders You can also use File Manager to link files and to transfer files to other machines In addition the icons representing individual parts of the file system can be dragged out of the File Manager window onto the workspace or onto other DeskSet application icons or windows Note Solaris supports SPARC x86 and PowerPC based machines whose keyboards differ Consequently some keyboard equivalents of commands found in OpenWindows menus differ according to keyboard For most keyboard equivalents Solaris supports a Meta key combination that can be used on both platforms See Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment for a list of command functions and their various keyboard equivalents 57 2 File Manager Icon The primary icon for File Manager looks like a file folder The name of the current directory is displayed beneath the folder as shown in Figure 2 1 Figure 2 1 File Manager Icon File Manager Base Windows The primary File Manager base window displays your file system and allows you to manipulate it The secondary base window is a Wastebasket that you can use to remove files from your file system When you start File Manager the Wastebasket window is normally started and displayed as an icon The Wastebasket is described in the section Using the Wastebasket on page 91 The primary File Man
98. from application programs and input you provide through the mouse and the keyboard to display windows on your screen The window server is the foundation for the OpenWindows environment It is the X Window System server Version 11 Release 5 X11R5 with a Display PostScript DPS imaging system extension It implements a client server model of window systems Workspace The background screen area on which windows and icons are displayed Workspace menu The menu from which the DeskSet applications and utilities can be opened H Workspace Utilities b Properties Exit Workspace Properties window The Property window accessed from the Workspace menu through which you customize the Workspace environment Xdefaults file An OpenWindows file in the your home directory that stores the current properties of the Workspace These properties include the color of the Workspace and windows the locations of icons and so on The Xdefaults file can be edited either with the Workspace Properties window available from the Workspace menu or directly edited using a text editor Glossary 575 576 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Index Symbols Calculator key 301 amp 16 Calculator key 314 amp 32 Calculator key 314 Calculator key 301 Calculator key 301 wildcard search 88 Calculator key 301 lt Calculator key 314 gt Calculator key 314 Numerics 1 x Calculator key 301 10x Cal
99. gt mailtoo vab_library frm openwin gt wastebask gt dead le A dead letter mai i gt DD L D Pad ter gt TestApps Figure 2 36 File Pane with Shorter File Names Specified If you want to see the complete file name you can click SELECT on the name In this example the file ab_cardca gt is selected and the full name is displayed in an editable text field as shown in the example in Figure 2 37 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll E File Manager hightide egret File v View v Edit 7 GoTo 7 hightide egret ILE Contains 27 items 874 Mbytes 9 pega 0 a ab_cardca gt desksetde gt M dead letter mail Dag a nD a ab_library fm openwin gt wastebask gt dead letter gt TestApps Figure 2 37 Displaying a complete file name when short names are specified Icon Layout The Icon Layout setting determines whether files in the file pane are listed in rows horizontally or columns vertically The default is row order For example if files are sorted alphabetically by Name in rows they are listed in from left to right with the first files on the top row then the second row and so on If files are sorted alphabetically by Name in columns they are listed from top to bottom with the first files in the left column then the second column etc Figure 2 38 shows files sorted by Name in rows and Figure 2 39 shows the sam
100. help windows choose the subject that interests you from the main window s Help menu To open this menu either use the MENU mouse button or press F10 and the letter h Use the arrow keys to move through the menu ay accessx Status Help General StickeyKeys L Sound tone when features turned on o MouseKeys m Enable AccessX Turn on Features ToggleKeys r StickeyKeys ToggleKeys 4 SlowKej PePeatKeys SlowKeys E MouseKeys L RepeatKeys lt Bouncet BounceKeys Figure B 3 The Help Menu Click the Settings button in the AccessX main window to display the Settings window This window displays adjustable parameters for various AccessX features These parameters are discussed in the section covering each individual feature 549 lll Se AccessX Settings Beep when Shift Alt and so on is latched or locked StickeyKeys Is Sound when modifier pressed Disable StickyKeys by es tian Turn off when two modifiesr pressed at once pressing two modifiers Time a key must be pressed before input starts ees How fast a key repeats Length of time a key must be pressed Try out features by typing here Reset all settings MouseKeys 610 0 RepeatKeys 1 0 m Repeat delay sec _ mm 1 0 Repeat rate keys sec m SlowKeys Speed delay sec Max Pointer speed
101. how quickly a submenu is displayed based on how far the mouse is dragged to the right Some menu characteristics are determined by mouse actions You can also choose whether to display the menu when you click SELECT on a menu button or to carry out the default command without displaying the menu Solaris User s Guide September 1995 i Programs menu allows you to rearrange items on the Programs menu displayed by choosing Programs from the Workspace menu You can also add and delete items e Miscellaneous category has several settings e Screen saver protects your screen life when the computer is not in use You can turn it on or off and set the timeout e Beeping alerts you to various conditions You can turn it on or off or turn it on for notices only e Set Active window selection allows you to activate a window either by moving the pointer into the window or by clicking in the desired window Only one window can be active at a time e Icon and scrollbar allow you to choose where to place icons and scrollbars Locale allows you to select settings appropriate for your language and cultural notation All of these items can be set through the Workspace Properties window 1 To open the Workspace Properties window choose Workspace gt Properties Depending on the hardware capabilities of your display the Workspace Properties window categories may have different choices available to you You choose the categor
102. iiciccse ee cienssdadsaanarvacees 286 Changing to a Digital Style Clock Face 288 Changing to a Roman Style Clock Icon 288 12 Hour or 24 Hour Clock s3si53 0 0 ses S22 e8ee eee ee Yes 289 Displaying a Second Hand and the Date 289 Changing the Time ZONG i0 Ssh S24 os ee vee PESER SERIO 290 Using the Stopwatch 2siubeerePivedisveraawe eects 292 Alarm Settings 3 4cik a ee nee ee been ede eee es eee e eee ees 293 Clock Keyboard Accelerators ununun eke teeeaaine we 293 8 ColcnlalOfintcdavsrcccn de ceted en e a rete ene eels 295 Calculator Icon and Base Window 00005 296 Modes of Operation ditt iahahehs taeee cack eres 296 Numeric Bases 0200 eee eee eee 296 Display Notation 12t2ceuisioesssetviwe beh ee eats own 298 Major Calculator Modes ccue yen Wee ee ween keene 299 Number Manipulation Functions 05 300 Miscellaneous Functions i456 si lt 0000ckes eee ne eben anne ows 302 Contents xv xvi Memory RegistefS i nccneendee nperi Ennu ee ehh ivewe nee ey 303 User Defined Functions cc c 5e nee pedo eH ELN ei ewen nae we 304 Performing Simple Calculations 208i cia eced centres 304 Creating and Saving a Function 364544 Aeros acteeeciis 305 Financial Functions si1i12tdobeSebeeoe bea deavariceeces D4 306 Ctrm Compounding Term iyi eve teow sssr rsrsr rrn 307 Ddb Double Declining Depreciation 308 Fv Futin
103. its window menu You can access this by placing the pointer in the header or on the window border holding down the MENU mouse button and highlighting Close as shown in Figure 1 28 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 29 Starting an Application 30 Choose Close from the Window menu cmdtool bin csh Resize Back Refresh Quit Figure 1 28 Window Menu with Close Highlighted When you release the mouse button the window closes to its icon form Alternatively because Close is the default choice in the window menu you can click SELECT on the abbreviated menu button in the window header The menu in the window header also includes a Quit option To quit a window from the Workspace move the pointer onto the header or the abbreviated menu button press the MENU mouse button and highlight Quit When you release the mouse button the window is dismissed from the Workspace and the application quits You start applications from the Workspace menu which you display by placing the pointer in the Workspace and holding down the MENU button To start an application of your choice you drag the pointer to the right to display the Programs submenu and then to the name of the application When the name is highlighted you release the mouse button After a moment the application is displayed on the Workspace Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll Elements of an Application s Base Window Heade
104. jpg jpeg JPG JPEG Lisp Machine Bit Array lispm MGR mgr MTV PRT Ray Tracer mtv MacPaint mac PBM _pbm PC Paintbrush pcx PGM pgm PICT pict PPM _ppm ORT Ray Tracer qrt 392 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 13 Table 13 1 Image Tool File Formats and Extensions Continued File Format File Name Extension Raw Grayscale Raw RGB Sun Icon Sun Raster TIFF TrueVision Targa Usenix FaceSaver X Bitmap X11 Window Dump XPM Xerox Doodle Brush Xim rawg aw icon im1 monochrome im8 8 bit color im24 24 bit color im32 32 bit color Ss tif tiff TIF TIFF tga fs xbm xwd xpm brush xim Opening Your File in a Specific Format If Image Tool cannot recognize the file format you want to open you may need to specify the format as described in the following section To do so 1 Choose File gt Open As The Open As window displays as shown in Figure 13 3 with the current folder location and document file type Image Tool 393 13 0 Image Tool Open As Type in the path to the folder and press Return Current Folder fhightide egret Fish Select a file or folder and click Open T co up one folder O cod Cee D itflip rs O salmon Seafood Swordfish O Tuna File Format Sun Raster TIFF TrueVision Targa Usenix FaceSaver Figure 13 3 The Open As Window 2 Select a file type from File Format
105. list type the new values in the Header Field and Default Value text fields click SELECT on the Change button then click SELECT on Apply Automatically Storing Copies of Messages You Send You can set up Mail Tool so that you record a copy of each email message you send To do this follow these steps 1 From the Mail Tool base window choose Edit gt Properties A Properties window appears 2 In the Properties window position the pointer on the abbreviated menu button labeled Category and choose the Compose Window category The properties choices for the Compose Window appear in the Properties window 3 In the text field labeled Logged Messages File type the name of a file in which you would like to log copies of your mail messages For instance to save the mail in an invisible file in your home directory you could name the file HOME mail save Note HOME is a variable that points to your home directory You can also use the tilde symbol to indicate your home directory Multimedia Mail Tool 205 206 4 Click SELECT on the Apply button at the bottom of the Properties window Now when you send a message a copy is logged in the file you created additional messages you send are appended to the end of the file Mail Filing Properties You use the Mail Filing Properties category to choose where your mail files are stored and to customize the Move Copy and Load menus of the Mail Tool Header wind
106. list of files and you want to retrieve all but a few of them 1 Click SELECT on the Props button to display the Tape Tool Properties window and confirm that you have the correct options set You may want to check the Tape Tool Properties window each time you retrieve files since the settings are not saved if you quit Tape Tool and start it up again Insert the tape into the tape drive Click SELECT on the List button in the Tape Tool base window Deselect the files you do not want in the Tape Contents window Click SELECT on those files that you do not want to include in the file extraction Choose Delete gt Selected from the Tape Contents window Read Functions menu The files you have selected are removed from the list Choose Read gt Entire List from the Tape Tool base window The files remaining in the list are extracted from the tape If you have archived a group of files you can retrieve the whole group or just a few of them Unless you removed or changed the path names of the files when you archived them they are automatically restored to their original directories If you have removed or changed the path names then the files are restored to the new paths with which you archived them Tape Tool 385 12 Retrieving All Files from a Tape If you want to retrieve everything on the tape and do not want to list the contents first 1 Click SELECT on the Props button to display the Tape Tool Prop
107. name click SELECT on the name in the scrolling list of the Template Properties window click SELECT on the Delete button then click SELECT on the Apply button To change a template click SELECT on the item in the Template Properties window scrolling list type the new values in the Name and File text fields click SELECT on the Change button then click SELECT on Apply Alias Properties You can create your own distribution lists containing groups of user names Then instead of typing a distribution list of many names you can type the single name that you specify as the name of the alias in the To text field There are two kinds of distribution lists or aliases you can create Private aliases that only you can use e Aliasesin your etc aliases file that anyone can use See Creating and Using Public Aliases in etc aliases on page 214 for information about this kind of alias You use the Alias Properties category shown in Figure 4 41 to create your own private distribution list aliases Display the Alias properties by choosing Alias from the Category menu at the top of the Properties window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll Ao Mail Tool Properties Category Alias Aliases docgroup elizabeth Eng brenda jungle pan Alias docgroup Addresses glizabeth Eng brenda jungle paws thecomma jtaylor gt Figure 4 41 Alias Properties To add a privat
108. pixmap image Save the icon as an Xview icon if you want to display your icon in the File Manager by binding it to an application or data file using the Binder See Chapter 16 Binder for more information Save the icon as an X bitmap if you want to include it in a C program If a file of the same name already exists a Notice is displayed asking you whether you want to overwrite the existing file or cancel the operation Clearing the Canvas To clear the canvas for another drawing choose Edit Clear Printing an Icon Use the Print window shown in Figure 15 15 to print icon files This window displays when you choose Print from the File menu Icon Editor 433 19 View Menu 434 H Iconedit Print Destination Printer Options Width 1 00 Height 1 00 Position 1 00 Inches from left 1 00 Inches from bottom Copies 1 Figure 15 15 Icon Editor Print Pop up Window You can specify the following options from the Icon Editor Print window e Destination of the printed output Printer or File Printer name and printer options or file destination and file name If the Destination is Printer as in Figure 15 15 a field called Options is displayed You can type in UNIX commands in this field to customize your printer option defaults e Width and height of the printed image Left and bottom margins of the printed image Number of copies to print When you ve chosen your Printer Settings c
109. print queue 2 Move the pointer onto the job you want to cancel and click SELECT To stop more than one job point to the additional jobs and click SELECT The Stop printing button is enabled once a job is selected 3 Click SELECT on the Stop Printing button shown in Figure 10 5 Job Size K Tine mimeo Feb 22 19 49 mimeo 8 Feb 22 19 50 mimeo 9 Feb 22 19 50 mimeo 10 Feb 22 19 50 mimeo 11 Feb 22 19 50 I ELEI Applies to current print run only Stop Printing Figure 10 5 Stopping a Print Job Note When you stop printing one or more print jobs the Print Tool remains busy and does not accept further input until the printer acknowledges the request Depending on the number of jobs selected and the status of the printer queue it may take several minutes for the printer to respond to your request Print Tool 337 10 Changing Print Tool Properties 338 The Print Tool properties window allows you to change certain of functions of Print Tool Click SELECT on the Properties button from the Print Tool window The Print Tool Properties window is shown in Figure 10 6 Override Default Print Method fy Print Tool Properties Header Page f SELECT this checkbox to turn the header page on or off Notify when ALL jobs done SELECT a beep and or flash to notify you when all your jobs sent to the printer have been completed Show text field SELECT this to provide your
110. printing options from the Printer Settings Properties window To display this set of controls choose the Printer Settings item from the Calendar Manager Properties window Category menu Figure 5 31 shows the default settings for the Printer Settings window 264 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 nN lll Q CM Properties egret river Category Printer Settings Destination Printer ocean Options Width 7 50 Height 10 09 Position 1 00 Inches from left 1 00 Inches from bottom Units ajs Include Show Time and Text Appts Show Time Only Appts Show Nothing Appts Figure 5 31 Printer Settings Properties Window You can specify the following options from the Printer Options window e Destination of the printed output Printer or File Printer name and printer options or file destination and file name If the Destination is Printer as in Figure 5 31 a field called Options is displayed You can type in UNIX print options in this field to customize your printer option defaults If the Destination is File the Printer and Options fields are replaced by Directory and File fields Use these fields to type in the directory and file name of the file that you want to print to e Width and height of the printed image Left and bottom margins position e Number of units that print Calendar Manager 265 266 The unit is the number of calendar views to print day week month or
111. run the Binder with the system option all new entries are added to your system database In this case you use the View menu as follows Choose All Entries to display a merged list of all the system and network entries If you copy a network entry to the system database only the system version of the entry is displayed in the merged list Choose Shared Entries to display only the network entries e Choose Local Entries to display only the system entries If you run the Binder with the network option all new entries are added to the network database In this case the View menu is dimmed and unavailable Only the network entries are displayed Solaris User s Guide September 1995 1lb To modify entries for local use on your machine you need to copy them from the system and network databases into your private database To copy an entry to your database first scroll through the list of Binder entries in the Binder base window until you see the one you want to modify 1 Click SELECT on the Binder entry you want to modify A rectangle appears around the chosen entry The example in Figure 16 2 is the icon for the Mail Tool application Binder Binder Entries lotus spreadsheet mail file SSA mail message DA Read Only Entry Figure 16 2 Choosing the Mail Tool Icon Entry 2 Click SELECT on the Duplicate button The entry is copied into your private database 3 Choose View gt Personal Entries
112. save the new file The file is stored in the designated directory and file For complete information on saving a file refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment Using Text Editor you can add and delete text from a file copy text from one location to be pasted in another and search for text strings in a file Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Qo lll Adding and Deleting Text You can add new text to a file by placing the insert point anywhere in the file click SELECT in the desired location and typing the new text there Likewise you can delete characters by placing the text caret at the end of the character string you want to delete and backspacing over those characters Another way to delete a character string is to cut it This places the text string in a system clipboard and if you want you can paste it elsewhere To cut and paste a text string do the following 1 Click SELECT to the left of the first character in the string that you would like to cut 2 Click ADJUST to the right of the last character in the string The text string is highlighted 3 Press MENU to display the window pane s pop up menu drag the pointer down to highlight Edit and to the right to highlight Cut The text string is placed in the system clipboard Alternatively you can use the Cut button on the keyboard if there is one or Meta x 4 Move the pointer to the destination where you would like to pas
113. second interval and the long one or minute hand tracks current performance over a 2 second interval The display is updated every two seconds You can change these default interval times from the Performance Meter Properties window See Customizing Performance Meters on page 326 for information about setting Performance Meter properties The name of the performance option being measured is displayed in the lower left corner of the window Its maximum value is shown in the lower right corner For example if the Performance Meter measures percentage the long hand pointing straight up would indicate 50 percent You can use the Performance Meter Properties window to change the display to a graph See Performance Meter Display Options on page 328 With a graph display performance data is shown as a strip chart Figure 9 3 shows an example of the Performance Meter window with a graph display intr 400 Le l Figure 9 3 Performance Meter Window with a Graph Display The graph can be a line graph as shown in Figure 9 3 or a solid graph See Performance Meter Display Options on page 328 for information about displaying a solid graph The window has resize corners that you can use to change the area of the window when you are displaying a graph A resized Performance Meter window is shown in Figure 9 4 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Ne lll Figure 9 4 Resized Performance Meter Window If there
114. settings to specify whether the alarm should happen just one time or every day at the given time The alarm will not occur if the Repeat setting is none If you want a command to take place hourly type that command in the Hourly command text field Clock processes this command as hourly and alarm commands for example SHOME clock hourly Clock Keyboard Accelerators You can change many of the Clock settings without using the Properties window by moving the pointer anywhere within the open Clock window and typing the following keyboard accelerators Type 1 to set the 12 hour display mode if the current Clock is digital Type 2 to set the 24 hour display mode if the current Clock is digital Type c to toggle the Clock face between analog and digital displays Type d to toggle the Date display on and off Type i to toggle the icon face between analog and Roman e Type s to toggle the seconds display on and off Clock 293 294 e Type S to set the stopwatch Type S again to start the stopwatch Type S a third time to stop the stopwatch You can then type S to reset the stopwatch again and so on Type c when you want to reset the Clock to the normal clock display Type t to toggle the time zone between local and other You must have a valid Other time zone set on the Properties window for this to work Note that you can have more than one Clock running at a time This is useful if you want one clock to disp
115. the sender of the message Multimedia Mail Tool 149 The fourth field contains the day date and time the message was received If the message is over 11 months old the year is shown instead of the time The fifth field tells you how big the message is The first number tells you the number of lines in the message and the second number tells you the number of characters These numbers include the number of lines and characters of the full message header as well as the text of the message e The sixth field contains the subject of the message when the person who sent the message provides a subject line Message Header Status Messages Status messages are displayed at the right side of the footer These messages tell you how many messages are in your mail file how many new messages you have and how many you have currently deleted In Figure 4 2 the status message tells you there are 4 items 4 new messages and 0 deleted messages Selecting Message Headers You can select each message header by moving the pointer onto the line and clicking SELECT A selected header has a box around it To select additional messages move the pointer into the line and click ADJUST If a message is already selected clicking ADJUST deselects it You can select all the messages sent by or to a particular person or alias and or about a particular subject by using the Mail Tool Find feature Mail Tool Controls and Menus 150 The control a
116. time slot for the new appointment If you are unsure how to do this see the section Finding a Time Slot for a New Appointment for Many Users on page 248 for complete information Solaris User s Guide September 1995 5 2 Move the pointer to the block of time that you want to schedule the appointment for and click SELECT The selected time must be for one hour in the Multiple Calendars display but you can change the time or duration when you schedule the appointment 3 Click SELECT on Multiple Calendars Schedule Alternatively you can just double click SELECT on the block of time in step 2 The CM Appointment Editor is shown in Figure 5 21 on page 251 CM Appointment Editor egret river Date 2 12 93 Appointment Month Day Year Start 7 10 00 Appointments 10 00 Staff Meeting Stop 11 00 am a al Pm 11 00 Engineering Team Mee What Staff Meeting 3 00 Writer s Team Meeting I CLE Ii Calendars Insert Access 5 egret river mariac celtic N hami ton artemis N iy KO EF 3 2 Repeat 7 weekly o For 7 52 weeks Mail To egret river Privacy 7 Show Time and Text Insert _ Delete Change Reset 4uthor egret Figure 5 21 CM Appointment Editor The CM Appointment Editor is displayed The selected date and time are filled in and the selected calendars are listed on the Calendars scrolling list If you have Insert Access to any of these calendars tha
117. troubleshooting can t start Binder as root 444 View button 442 binding 441 blank screen 540 Block I O Tape Tool 387 bookmark creating 515 BounceKeys 557 set the debounce time 557 bringing up AccessX 546 Browse menu 254 browse menu deleting a user 247 browser calendars adding users 245 579 adding users to the access list 263 changing access list 264 deleting users from access list 264 browsing calendars 242 browsing remote calendars 254 Bsp Calculator key 302 C calctool man page 316 calctoolrc file 304 Calculator 295 calctoolrc file 304 accuracy Acc key 302 base window 296 basic keys 301 301 1 x 301 Abs 301 Acc 302 Asc 301 Base 296 to 298 Bsp 302 Clr 302 Con 304 Disp 298 Exch 303 Exp 301 Frac 301 Fun 304 Int 301 Keys 302 Mem 303 Mode 299 parentheses 301 Quit 302 Rcl 303 Sqrt 301 Sto 303 x 2 301 financial keys Ctrm 307 Ddb 308 580 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Fv 308 Pmt 309 Pv 310 Rate 310 SIn 311 Syd 312 Term 313 function keys 316 functions user defined 304 icon 296 keyboard equivalents 305 316 keyboard mapping 302 logical keys amp 16 314 amp 32 314 lt shift left 314 gt shift right 314 And 314 Not 314 Or 314 Xnor 314 Xor 314 memory registers 303 miscellaneous functions 302 modes 296 basic 299 financial 306 logical 313 scientific 314 perfor
118. view If you do pin the View Message window a new View Message window will be displayed for the next message you view and you can display multiple View Message windows at the same time Viewing the Next or Previous Message You can view the next message by clicking SELECT on the View button then on the Next button If the View Message window is displayed but not pinned the next message is displayed in the existing View Message window Note You must display the View menu and choose Next Also note that the Next button is a custom button and may not be available on the header control area if you have changed the value of this custom button Multimedia Mail Tool 155 156 To display the previous message choose Previous from the View menu You can also use the up and down arrow keys on your keyboard to display the previous and next messages The Mail Tool Header window must be the currently active window for this to work Alternatively you can always view any message by double clicking SELECT on the desired message header Viewing Messages With a Full Header Mail Tool messages are normally displayed with an abbreviated header To display a message with the full message header select the desired message header and choose Full Header from the Messages submenu of the View menu Figure 4 5 shows an example of a full message header Mail Tool View Message 7 From mariac celtic Thu Feb 18 11 00 PST 1993 eturn Path lt m
119. which you can choose times The hours displayed on this menu are determined by the setting of day boundaries from the Properties window Each hour item has a submenu with 00 15 30 and 45 minute items Highlight the time you want and release MENU to enter the time in the text field When you choose a time from the menu the correct a m or p m setting is automatically chosen for you If you choose the menu item None no time is associated with the appointment If you choose All Day the appointment is set from 12 00 a m to 11 59 p m Alternatively you type a time in the Start text field If necessary click SELECT on the PM setting The time in the Stop text field is automatically set to one hour later than the time in the Start text field 4 To change the duration for the appointment from the default of one hour move the pointer onto the Stop menu button and press MENU to display the time menu as described in Step 2 Alternatively you can type a time in the Stop text field If necessary click SELECT on the PM setting 5 If the appointment is one that is repeated on a regular basis choose the appropriate Repeat setting from the menu displayed through the Repeat abbreviated menu button You can use the Repeat menu to choose a variety of intervals These are outlined in the Appointment Editor Options on page 230 When Repeat is set to One Time the For text field is inactive and is dimmed to show you that it will not acce
120. window 2 Select the appointment in the scrolling list that you want to edit 3 Change the information in the Appointment Editor window to reflect the new information for the appointment 4 Click SELECT on the Change button at the bottom of the Appointment Editor window If you change a repeating appointment a Notice is displayed allowing you to change the appointment for the selected appointment only for all future appointments in the repeating series for all scheduled appointments or to cancel the operation Calendar Manager 297 z Appointment Reminders You may want to receive a reminder before a scheduled appointment You can make your system beep flash or send you an electronic mail message or you can set your calendar to display a pop up window containing the appointment details You can also choose some combination of those events To receive a reminder do the following 1 Begin a new appointment or edit an existing appointment in the Appointment Editor 2 Click SELECT on the button or buttons for the Alarm reminders you would like to receive before that appointment The buttons you choose are highlighted Figure 5 13 shows the appointment reminders when they have been selected CM Appointment Editor egret river Date 2 12 93 Appointment Month Day Year Start 7 10 00 PM Appointments 10 00 Staff Meeting Stop 11 00 AM PM E am 11 00 Engineering Team Mee What Staff Meeting 3 00
121. window to create and edit appointments For information about using the Insert Delete Change and Reset buttons see the sections Scheduling Appointments and To Do Items on page 233 Deleting an Appointment on page 236 and Editing an Appointment on page 237 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 nN lll Scheduling Appointments and To Do Items To schedule an appointment on your calendar do the following 1 Double click SELECT on the day you would like to schedule an appointment This opens an Appointment Editor window shown in Figure 5 9 CM Appointment Editor egret river Date 2 12 93 Appointment Month Day Year Start 10 00 PM Appointments 10 00 Staff Meeting Stop 11 00 AM PM l W am 11 00 Engineering Team Mee What Staff Meeting 3 00 Writer s Team Meeting Calendars Insert Access Alarm peep egret river Flash PopUp Repeat 7 weekly Mail a For 52 weeks Mail To egret river S rie Show Time and Text Author egret Figure 5 9 Calendar Manager Appointment Window 2 If the commitment is a task rather than an appointment click SELECT on the To Do box The Appt appointment box is selected by default You may enter a To Do item with or without an associated time Calendar Manager 233 234 3 To set the time move the pointer onto the Start abbreviated menu button and press MENU to display a menu from
122. you can access a file to change it To change file properties type new information in the text fields of the Information window Click SELECT on a check box to either add or remove a check When you have changed the properties click SELECT on the Apply button to apply them The changes take effect immediately You can change common properties on more than one file in the same manner Customizing Your File Manager 98 You can customize your File Manager from the Properties menu in the following ways Customize General Defaults such as open a new folder into a different window view the Folder View horizontally or vertically change the Wastebasket to delete or destroy or change the default document name e Customize New Folder Defaults Customize Current Folder Settings e Customize the Go To menu Create your own custom commands and add them to the Custom Commands submenu that you access from the File menu e Customize Advanced settings such as print method default editor how you view floppies and so forth Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll These methods are described in the sections that follow You can access the Properties by choosing Edit gt Properties The different properties categories are shown in Figure 2 33 gy FM Properties Category General Defaults General Defaults New Folder Defaults Folder View Properties categories Current Folder Settings Show Hor
123. 0ereyemw ewe dacied 116 Using a Floppy Disk with File Manager 116 Checking fora Floppy Disk cvvi ex 44 vieweneieeanenes 117 Viewing a File from the Contents of a Floppy Disk or CD 117 Removing a Floppy Disk or CD from the Disk Drive 119 Reformatting a Floppy Disks vssveeeeewarnreduee cae ie 119 Unformatted Floppy vice aiaiud ee ee nener 121 Unlabeled Floppy icatiatrwtots ious eavunraghesaken 122 Renaming a Floppy Diskenus iia svi ss oe eee ey tens eein 123 Dragging and Dropping Files from Floppy Disk or CD to File MANA CD 2 2256cueeu senna eee h oh aa yaw Renee ene 123 Copying Files from Floppy Disk or CD to Floppy Disk 124 3 Text Editor s eccrssso veeni tog seve vena tease ee EESE 125 Text Editor C N s errretnreiski iiine iieii er erinine aee 125 Text Editor Base Window 2 2cciit10 s vie veneueegueudeen 126 Text Edit r Menus ss ssseseeer ev eve nerereedt etiaai ine 127 Text Pane Pop Up Menu c ves ede ceeds eee ae eeee 127 Pile MCA 2cnuterecneenetetegeeea capri ese REE 127 View MEDU sopi isit ataie eiee e aa a Ea RAOR AR a eR SE oe ERO 128 Edit Menti qese rote a CL eee ee EE EE 130 Title of Book Month 1992 Find Menu 0 eee eee eee eee eee 130 Extras WICH s lt 5 c8neeeeee yao abe PORE CHE UNE Uy care mgs 133 Creating a New File vec esiiiakpilis Aad da raana a ee 135 Working with an Existing File aa is ees teeta 135 Saving the Existing Pile 2122 23 54 0n0 eseaweueedaceda 135
124. 1 In File Manager click SELECT on the file icon that you want to load File Manager 81 82 2 Drag the file onto the application icon or drag and drop target and release SELECT The file is loaded into the application Note that when you drag and drop a file to an application outside of File Manager the file is always copied The original file remains in File Manager For example if you move a file from File Manager to Print Tool the original file is not deleted after it is printed If the application cannot accept the file format the file is not loaded When you drop an icon of an incompatible file type onto an open window or when you drop an icon onto an inappropriate location an error message is displayed in the footer of the destination window Dragging and Dropping Mail onto File Manager When you receive a mail message you can drag and drop individual mail attachments onto File Manager or you can drag and drop the entire mail message onto File Manager See Mail Tool Attachments on page 173 for information about mail attachments Copying Mail Attachments onto File Manager When you receive a mail message that contains attachments you can access the attachments by dragging and dropping any or all of them onto File Manager The attachment files are then available for you to use just like any other File Manager file You can drag and drop the attachments onto File Manager using the following steps 1 Open both F
125. 154 Mail Tool templates 210 mailrc file 215 man page adb 1 540 date 1 285 dbx 1 540 Mask File Binder 448 Mem Calculator key 303 memory registers Calculator 303 Memory Calculator 303 menu introduction 12 button 14 changing default choice 16 default choice 16 Programs 13 secondary 13 window 14 Workspace 12 customizing 16 MENU mouse button 8 menu Workspace 37 menus Xxx message header 156 selecting 150 Messages 151 Meta key 10 Index metoo Mail Tool 215 miscellaneousCalculator functions 302 Mod Time Tape Tool 388 Mode setting Command Tool 277 Mode on History menu 277 modifier keys 551 modifying OpenWindows defaults 468 Monitor settings Performance Meter 327 Monochrome X pixmap image 433 437 month view printing 270 more command 282 mouse Xxx introduction 7 buttons SELECT ADJUST MENU 8 customizing click time out 481 customizing press whether menu selection is automatic 485 how to use 8 keyboard substitution 477 remapping for left handed users 481 mouse access for handicapped users 545 MouseKeys 552 change maximum speed of pointer 554 changing ramp up speed 554 keyboard equivalents 553 move buttons Icon Editor 431 move definition 9 moving data files to workspace File Manager 80 files 78 files to a folder File Manager 80 files to another application File Manager 81 folder to workspace File Manager 80 moving files cut and paste
126. 232 235 pop up window menu 14 PowerPC machines OpenWindows keyboard equivalents accelerators 10 to 11 Precedence junk header Mail Tool 204 present value calculations 310 Press MENU definition 9 Pretty print C code 134 Previous Mail Tool 151 Print Method Binder 450 Print operation keyboard equivalent 11 Print Script Mail Tool 200 Print Tool 331 introduction 43 base window 332 drag and drop 331 335 features 43 how to stop a print job 337 icon 331 printer choosing 335 default 340 queue status 336 status messages 333 troubleshooting 536 Printer Settings Calendar Manager 264 printing 86 day view 267 drag and drop 163 331 593 594 File Manager 62 86 icons 433 keyboard equivalent for 11 mail messages 151 162 mail messages with Print Tool 335 month view 270 queue status 336 Text Editor files 139 week view 269 year view 270 Printing Images 399 program names 37 Programs menu 13 Programs submenu 37 programs See application prompt 18 properties Binder 443 446 Calculator 320 Calendar Manager 257 changing file properties File Manager 98 day boundaries 259 default view 261 file and folder File Manager 96 for the Workspace 468 Icon Editor 437 Image Tool 408 Mail Tool 152 194 Performance Meter 326 327 Tape Tool 379 template 210 property window displaying keyboard equivalent 11 Props operation keyboard equivalent 11 pushpin 14 Pv Calculat
127. 24 Week VieW lt esenne iedesiewee eee poen eee da ener ene et 225 Month VIEW serernireri netist oranini En ee EREE 226 Meat VIEW a toc uyeuk dA RE EEE ER AIE ANEA EAA R E RRES 227 Appointment List and To Do List Views 228 Displaying an Appointment or To Do List 229 Edit Men oo4 Jocks eseeeeeehadeaWs ds soo oe Ree EENET eee 229 Appointment Editor OptGns 242e lt eeirsei eave cere 230 Scheduling Appointments and To Do Items 233 Deleting an A ppOmMemMenbcj27s2cneecbr ein yuo ea baaen ie 236 Editing an Appointment n n naass sssr neh eee nena 237 Appointment Reminders aass sssr reenn errer 238 Finding a Calendar Appointment 0 csc eeeece ces 239 Finding a Specific Calendar Date 00 240 Dragging an Appointment Message from Mail Tool 240 Multiple Calendars Base Window 2 c 6 sssee cee ceeceres 242 Using Multiple Calendars 001 vedic duediwanadened ee 242 Browsing a Single Remote Calendar 04 254 Contents xiii Xiv Browsing a Single Remote Calendar One Time Only 255 Setting the Calendar Manager Time Zone 256 Customizing Your Calendar Manager 257 Editor Defaults Properties jcia051 0 caeeeeact ities 258 Display Settings Prepetties 3 12460 0 0seuwewdedacaun 259 Access List and Permissions Properties 261 Adding Users to the Access List 0005 26
128. 3 Deleting Users from the Access List 0 264 Changing the Access List 2 cst20 iret vintners aeeed saws 264 Printer Settings Properties nic verewewecerar rn daeaeae oe 264 Date Format Properties cadodne ee ted ee chee SN EN 266 Printing Calendar Views nanas oss 2tvure views ban 267 Current VIEW ss os edueeeWh a eeii are taruni iieiea 267 Day VIEW 2544 eee h ii ene rere etenee rause Tete 267 Week VIEW ts505c i008 iint ep EEEa enna ets eee eee hers 269 Month VIEW cccccnerennees pnrt tattis EEVEE EEEREN 270 Yet VIEW aes 0 205 eee BES R PEET eh eee eee ERE ER 270 Printing Appointment and To Do Lists 272 Using Calendar Manager with Mail Tool 272 Sending Appointment Mail from Calendar Manager 272 Creating an Appointment Message from Mail Tool 272 Displaying the Calendar Manager Monthly Icon 273 Accessing Your Calendar from a Shell Tool or Command Tool 274 6 Command Tool Shell Tool and Console Window 275 Title of Book Month 1992 Command Tool 0 cee eee eee eee eens 276 Command Tool Term Pane Menu 0 277 Shell Tool ts co ace stant banker ket bbe nee eeete eras 280 Shell Tool Term Pane Menu 282 CONSUIE se cccel hawt bb SEe SG SS bs eE bene EE ee 283 De NOM cu P rescence heh ebhes E needed saeae ins 285 Clock Icon and Window scene coe ere eee eee ee ee eee 285 Customizing the Clock oi
129. 3 Print Tool 331 Shell Tool 280 Snapshot 414 Tape Tool 377 Text Editor 125 Viewer 504 Icon Editor 421 adding text to canvas 424 587 base window 422 canvas 422 clearing the canvas 436 Color Chooser 439 color controls 430 color X pixmap 433 control area 422 drawing controls 422 423 drawing mode 423 circle 424 ellipse 424 erase 427 line 423 point 423 region 426 square 424 text 424 editing icon 427 erasing in drawing canvas 429 fill choices 430 formats 433 437 color X pixmap 437 Monochrome X pixmap 433 437 X bitmap 433 437 Xview icon 433 437 grid 435 icon 421 icon size 437 438 Invert 437 menus Edit menu 436 Properties menu 437 View menu 434 move buttons 431 preview area 422 printing 433 icons keyboard equivalents 11 ignore multiple key presses 557 Image File Binder 448 Image Tool 389 controls 410 cropping 402 dragging and dropping 409 edit menu 412 file menu 410 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 flipping 403 formats 391 help button 409 icon 390 information 395 multiple page documents 406 open as 394 opening an image 391 palette 401 panning 402 printing 399 properties 408 rotating 404 save as 397 save page as Image 399 save selection as 398 saving an image 395 standard operations 412 view menu 411 View window 390 zooming 405 image tool 389 Include File Text Editor 127 Include Mail Tool 158 input area
130. 46 1282 Project Status bgahl scuba Thu 32 1110 Inbox status ayers outhouse Thu 177532 SunU Training Registration ayers outhouse Thu 17 511 vi command summary mariac celtic Thu 90 2531 Project Schedule hamilton artemis Thu 22 611 meeting reminder abelson sharonolds Thu H 32 1232 Your position paper aquabl u cowman Thu 21 64 Summer Collaboration 1 2 3 4 5 8 3 0 11 items 1 new 2 deleted F Figure 1 6 Multimedia Mail Tool Header Window Closing a Window to an Icon When a window is not in use you can close it and keep it on the Workspace for further use When closed an application becomes an icon a small symbol that represents the application If you will not be using that application for some time you can quit it entirely which clears it from the Workspace and start it again later Figure 1 7 shows the icon for the Text Editor application Chapter 3 Text Editor discusses Text Editor in more detail Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll Figure 1 7 Text Editor Icon Opening an Icon to a Window You can open an application icon into a window from its closed icon by positioning the mouse pointer over the icon and pressing the MENU button and selecting Open from the Window menu or by double clicking SELECT With double clicking the first click highlights a border around the icon and the second click opens it into a window For information on using the mouse refer to
131. 547 Displaying the Status of Buttons and Keys 547 Getting a Beep When a Feature is Turned On or Off 548 Setting the Automatic Shutoff Timer 548 Getting On Line Help 12033049 ss pricseugunbaredwcien 549 The Settings Window nci2tuciiosws pie dwshes Pode a tates 549 Individual Features a0 5 caweset eee eh Peden hee 551 Seky KEyS ce ressa rer ele En EEE TE VERTENE be 551 MOUSEKGVS lt rinine E E E AAR ERRARE E 552 Contents xxvii ToggleK eysi ccna ea E E re ew ity 554 Rep atKeySe ressaire p ee Ee e EE E 555 DIOW NEVs 2 epeen an e a ia a O a 556 BOUNCER CYS see Peatee tera ates entener tu Anr 557 Keystrokes for AccessX Features 00 000s eens 558 SIOSSALY t o 2 00 beta Dev ed ee KES Ere a EEEE E ese ow heehee eee en 559 i e eee ee ee es eee ae eee 577 xxviii Title of Book Month 1992 Audience Preface This manual provides new and experienced users with the basic information needed to get started with the Solaris user environment using OpenWindows and DeskSet applications The Solaris user environment is based on the OPEN LOOK Graphical User Interface Additional topics covered here include how to modify the OpenWindows Workspace how to access AnswerBook to view documents on line and troubleshooting This guide should help you become familiar with the basics of the OpenWindows environment and user interface concepts The information in this guide should help y
132. 56 427 in present dollars Based on your assumptions the lump sum payment of 400 000 is worth less than the million dollar ordinary annuity in present dollars before taxes Rate Periodic Interest Rate Use Rate to compute the periodic interest rate It returns the periodic interest necessary for a present value to grow to a future value over the specified number of compounding periods in the term Store the following information in the memory registers Register 0 Future value Register 1 Present value Register 2 Term or number of compounding periods Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Co lll Rate Example You have invested 20 000 in a bond The bond matures in five years and has a maturity value of 30 000 Interest is compounded monthly You want to determine the periodic interest rate for this investment Note Before entering the information into the memory registers choose 5 radix places from the Acc accuracy key pop up menu to produce more accurate results Memory register usage Register 0 30000 future value Register 1 20000 present value Register 2 60 term 5 x 12 Clicking SELECT on Rate returns 00678 which tells you that the periodic monthly interest rate is 0 678 under 1 per month To determine the annual rate multiply the above formula by 12 which yields a result of 8 14 Sin Straight line Depreciation Use Sin to compute the straight line depreciation of
133. 6 shows the Compose window with an included message indented with gt Note The right angle bracket is at the start of the included message when you select Reply to Sender Include or Reply to All or Include from the compose menu in the Header window Multimedia Mail Tool 201 202 7 Mail Tool Compose Message To a Subject Re Your position paper Ce gt gt Date Thu 18 Feb 93 11 35 09 P gt From abelson sharonolds tkathy icicons gt To egret river gt Subject Your position paper gt Content Type text gt Content Length 703 gt gt gt gt gt Dear Maria co From abelson sharonolds Thu ab a 11 34 PST 1993 R I wholeheartedly approve your position paper that has been so hotly cont gstedlately by other members of the organization As we discussed in ou j Attachments Figure 4 36 An Indented Included Message Logged Messages File for Outgoing Mail If you want to log outgoing mail messages in a file type the name of the desired log file in the Logged Messages File text field of the Compose Window Properties Category If a log file name is specified a Log check box appears on the Compose window as shown in Figure 4 36 above When the Log option is checked on your Compose window the message is logged in the log file when it is sent Use the Log all messages setting on the Compose Window Properties Category to determine whether the Log checkbox on
134. 61 drag and drop 79 Edit menu 64 Empty Wastebasket 93 File menu 62 file pane 58 73 file properties group 96 name 96 owner 96 permissions 96 98 Find pop up window 89 finding files 63 87 90 Hidden files 105 icon 58 icons 59 applications 59 data file 59 folder 59 linking files 57 94 Longest File Name 102 moving data files to workspace 80 moving files 78 cut and paste 78 moving files to a folder 80 moving files to another application 81 moving folder to workspace 80 naming a document or folder 78 opening files 62 76 path display 70 path pane 58 path that is displayed 71 printing files 62 86 properties 93 96 112 114 changing file properties 98 date modified 96 file and folder properties 96 585 File Properties window 96 folder 96 Tool Properties 112 to 114 Tool Properties Window 112 removing files 58 91 renaming files 78 Select All 64 selecting files 61 subfolders 70 transfering files 57 transferring files 86 tree display 65 troubleshooting 531 copying files on remote systems 532 drag and drop error 532 files not displayed 532 icons not displayed 531 view By Content takes too long 532 using Goto 88 View Filter Pattern 114 View menu 63 Wastebasket 91 File menu Audio Tool 358 Binder 442 File Manager 62 Icon Editor 432 Mail Tool 151 Text Editor 127 file menu Image Tool 410 file pane File Manager 58 73 File Properties window 96 f
135. 78 moving icons 28 moving windows 25 multi click timeout 481 591 592 My Eyes Only Calendar Manager 231 N Name calculator function 305 naming document or folder File Manager 78 natural logarithm calculator function 315 Navigator closing 504 icon 504 modes Bookmarks 515 Search 509 quitting 504 New operation keyboard equivalent 11 New Mail Tool 152 NewDocument File Manager 77 NewFolder File Manager 77 Next Mail Tool 151 No Check Tape Tool 388 No SCCS Tape Tool 387 No SCCS Tape Tool 387 noauth OpenWindows option 444 Not Calculator key 314 NOT logical 314 number bases 296 Binary 297 Decimal 297 Hexadecimal 297 Octal 297 O octal base number mode Calculator 297 on line help 45 open icon into a window 7 text file 135 Open File operation keyboard equivalent 11 OPEN LOOK xxix Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Open Window operation keyboard equivalent 11 Open window Audio Tool 361 opening files 62 keyboard equivalent 11 folders 62 Image Tool files 391 opening files File Manager 76 OpenWindows keyboard equivalents accelerators 10 to 11 overview of features 5 reducing use of mouse 477 Or Calculator key 314 OR logical 314 organizing mail messages 183 Orig Mode Tape Tool 388 owner change file properties File Manager 98 P page overview Image Tool 406 page viewing controls Image Tool 407 Palette Imag
136. 9 Change display mode to engineering e fixed point f or scientific s Change calculator mode to default basic mode b or to financial f logical l or scientific s mode Set display accuracy to 0 through 9 significant digits Display a constant value The constants are labeled from 0 through 9 and can be defined by entries in the calctoolrc file Default values are 0 0 621 kms per hour mph 1 1 41421 square root of 2 2 2 71828 e 3 3 14159 pi 4 2 54 cms inch 5 57 2958 degrees in radian 6 1048576 0 2 to power of 20 7 0 0353 gms oz 8 0 948 kilojoules thermals 9 0 0610 cubic cms cubic in Execute a function There are 10 functions labeled 0 through 9 taken from calctoolrc Calculator 317 lll Co Other Operations Financial Mode Operations 318 Table 8 1 Calculator Function Keyboard Equivalents 3 of 5 Function Keyboard Equivalent Description Rel R 0 9 Retrieve value in memory register There are 10 memory registers labeled 0 through 9 Sto S 0 9 Store value in memory register 0 through 9 Exch X 0 9 Exchange current entry with contents of memory register 0 through 9 Clr Delete Clear calculator display Bsp Back Space Delete rightmost character and recalculate and and Set arithmetic precedence Exp E Turn current entry into scientific notation mantissa Next entry becomes exponent Keys k Toggl
137. 9 5 AnswerBook Navigator and Viewer Icons Close each window by choosing Close from its window menu or by pressing the Open key on your keyboard which toggles Open Close You can quit each window or its icon by choosing Quit from its window menu When you quit the Navigator you quit both the Navigator and the Viewer quitting the Viewer quits only the Viewer You can also use the keyboard equivalents that apply to all DeskSet applications to close or quit the Navigator and Viewer For more information see Chapter 17 Customizing the Solaris Environment Finding and Displaying a Document The default mode in the AnswerBook Navigator is Contents In Contents mode the Navigator has two panes Location and Contents Initially the Location pane lists your Library and the lower Contents pane lists the AnswerBook sets in the Library Opening an AnswerBook To see more of the contents of an AnswerBook In the lower Contents pane double click SELECT on a bold AnswerBook title The title expands to show more contents Solaris User s Guide September 1995 1 FE AnswerBook Navigator Modify Library New Bookmark Location Library gt Solaris User s AnswerBook Double click SELECT to open expand the book s contents LLEI rail Solaris Product Notes Pr Contents of Solaris User s AnswerBook il AnswerBook Navigator Solaris User s Guide Modify Library New
138. Bookmark Reference Guide Location Library Solaris User s AnswerBook a gt Solaris User s Guide Book Expanded book contents Contents of Solaris User s Guide appeal Nee Credits Contents Preface Starting up the Solaris User Environment Introduction Desktop Management Tools Productivity Tools Media Tools Customizing Tools Utilities Lk Figure 19 6 Opening Expanding a Title in the Navigator Using the AnswerBook Software 505 19 506 Navigating Through Sets and Books in an AnswerBook With the AnswerBook contents expanded you can browse its sets and books Some books appear in more than one set To expand any boldface listing double click SELECT on it When you do so the listing expands to show more of its contents AnswerBook Navigator z AnswerBook Navigator Modify Library New Bookmark q Modify Library New Bookmark Location Location Library Library Solaris User s AnswerBook Solaris User s AnswerBook a gt Solaris User s Guide Book Solaris User s Guide Book E Preface Contents of Se Contents of i o Sie Conventions Resources afid Support KIHEI I KIHEI Starting up the User Environment Introduction Desktop Management Tools Productivity Tools Media Tools Customizing Tools Utilities fh Figure 19 7 Expanding the Contents of a Book in the AnswerBook Navigator With each expansion the
139. CD and DAT quality Audio Tool automatically recognizes the capabilities of the computer s audio devices Therefore the features of Audio Tool that you can 341 11 Required Accessories Invoking Audio Tool 342 use depend on your particular system configuration This chapter describes all of the features and controls of Audio Tool However if your computer supports only monaural audio you will not see some controls such as a balance slider For recording creating voice audio files use the microphone that is shipped with your computer or a commercial variety microphone Connect the microphone to your computer s microphone jack You can listen to audio output in one of these ways either from your computer s speaker or headphones or from externally powered speakers connected to the speaker output You can invoke Audio Tool in several ways from the desktop menu by choosing Workspace gt Programs gt Audio Tool from the Mail Tool by choosing Attach gt Voice from the Compose window from an audio file attachment to a mail message by double clicking SELECT on the audio file glyph from the File Manager by double clicking SELECT on an audio file glyph e from the command line with the audiotool command Refer to the audiotool 1 manual page for information about the Audio Tool command s syntax Solaris User s Guide September 1995 ie i About Audio Tool s Base Window
140. Calculator will be laid out with the number keys on the right as shown in Figure 8 15 Calculator 321 Vs Calculator Figure 8 15 Right hand Layout of Calculator Display Click SELECT on the Save as Defaults button to make your Appearance Base Mode Display Accuracy Contents Functions and Style settings the default every time you start a new Calculator Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Performance Meter 2 The Performance Meter designed to meet application developer needs allows you to monitor many aspects of system performance such as processor performance network performance and I O performance You can use a single Performance Meter to monitor different factors one at a time or you can use several meters to monitor separate factors simultaneously However running a number of Performance Meters simultaneously degrades system performance To start Performance Meter choose Workspace gt Programs gt Performance Meter The Performance Meter icon is shown in Figure 9 1 _perfmeter Figure 9 1 Performance Meter Icon Performance Meter Displays There are two types of display for the Performance Meter dial and graph The dial display shown in Figure 9 2 is a speedometer like dial with two needles 323 324 Figure 9 2 Performance Meter Window with a Dial Display The needles move as system conditions change The short needle or hour hand tracks average performance over a 20
141. Change settings if desired If you change Page Size Image Size Image Orientation or Image Position you may want to preview the image before printing 400 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 i 3 Choose Print to start printing or Cancel to dismiss the window A very large raster image may be larger than a single sheet of paper If so the entire image is printed on multiple pages Note PostScript pages are printed as bitmapped images if printed on single pages Using the Image Tool Palette Use Pan to move the contents of the View window with the hand Image Tool s Palette shown in Figure 13 7 is useful for simple changes to an image Use Selector to save an area of the View window as a new image Flips the image left to right or top to bottom 180 100 a 25 400 Rotates an image right or left by degrees Zoom reduces or enlarges the image by value entered in ield D Cancels any unsaved changes and reverts to the last saved version Figure 13 7 Image Tool Palette 1 Choose Palette from the Edit menu 2 Modify the image You can modify the image by panning using the selector or by flipping rotating or zooming it Refer to Panning an Image on page 402 Selecting An Area to Be Saved on page 402 Flipping an Image on page 403 Rotating an Image on page 404 or Zooming an Image on page 405 Image Tool 401 13
142. Chapter 6 Command Tool Shell Tool and Console Window for information about the Command and Shell Tools 2 Atthe system prompt type ps e grep rpc cmsd and press Return This asks for a listing of all processes containing the string rpc cmsd Solaris User s Guide September 1995 A 3 Look at the listing displayed in the window Figure A 1 shows a listing that contains the Calendar Manager service process You can ignore the entry grep rpc cmsd in your ps listing ps e grep rpc cmsd 196 co IW 0 07 rpc cmsd 3759 p0 Ss 0 00 grep rpc cmsd a Figure A 1 A ps Listing Showing the rpc cmsd Process If you do not have an rpc cmsd process running follow these steps Note If you have a Calendar Manager application running quit the Calendar Manager by choosing Quit from the Window menu 1 Become root 2 At the system prompt type vi etc inetd CONF 3 Look for the entry Roc cmsd Make sure the pathname specified is correct and that an Rpc cmsd entry exists in the specified pathname If not change the path to point to where the Rpc cmsd exists Then view the pid of inetd by typing ps e grep inetd Then reread the inetd CONF file by typing kill 1 inetd pid 4 Restart Calendar Manager 5 To make sure that the Calendar Manager Service is now running type ps e grep rpc cmsd and press Return Upgrading SunOS and Calendar Manager If you are upgrading the SunOS you need to back up t
143. Compose subwindow and when you begin typing the text you type does not appear in the window it is likely that the window is inactive and you must click SELECT in the window to activate it Note that the insert point in a text window changes in appearance depending upon whether that window is active or inactive If the insert point is active it looks like a triangle If it is inactive it looks like a dimmed diamond Figure 19 23 shows an insert point that is active and one that is inactive Solaris Troubleshooting 541 Active a Inactive Figure 19 23 Active and Inactive Insert Points You can modify your Workspace Properties so that a window s input area automatically becomes active when you move the pointer into it enabling you to bypass the step of clicking SELECT in the window This works for the base window an application s main window but in some cases such as the Mail Tool s Compose subwindow you always need to click SELECT in the window to activate it See Chapter 17 Customizing the Solaris Environment for more information Workspace Properties Troubleshooting 542 These are problems you can experience while using the Workspace Properties Property Settings Are Not Preserved Across Sessions This is due to an obsolete xinitrc file For more information refer to Problems with xinitre on page 540 Colors Settings Are Not Taking Effect If changes you made for the window foreground data
144. Contents list grows to reflect deeper levels of the documentation sets books chapters and headings For example if you double click on a set title the title moves up into the Location pane and the list of books contained in that set is displayed in the Contents pane below When you double click SELECT on any listing at or below the book level the first page of that topic or document opens in the AnswerBook Viewer Solaris User s Guide September 1995 v To display entries that have scrolled out of sight use the scrollbar or Scrolling List menu displayed by pressing MENU in either pane to locate it as shown in Figure 19 8 a Scrolling List Sun Administra Locate Choice Sun Developer ____ i Sun Hardware Set Sun User s Set Figure 19 8 Scrolling in the Location or Contents Pane Viewing a Book In the AnswerBook Viewer you can turn the pages of a book chapter or section almost as if you were reading a printed book You can also follow hypertext cross reference links between sections chapters and books Turning Pages To turn pages click SELECT on the page turning buttons at the top of the AnswerBook Viewer or click SELECT on the Go Back button to retrace your steps successively page by page See Figure 19 4 Keyboard Shortcuts You can use keyboard shortcuts for the paging commands PgUp works like the previous page button PgDn works like the next page button Undo wor
145. Depending on the view selected the day is shown or highlighted Dragging an Appointment Message from Mail Tool 240 When you receive a mail message that has an appointment icon attached to it or a mail reminder generated by another Calendar Manager application you can drag and drop the message or appointment icon onto Calendar Manager to schedule your appointment by following these steps 1 Open the Mail Tool window that displays your mail message headers 2 Point to the header and click SELECT to select it Solaris User s Guide September 1995 5 3 Press the SELECT mouse button and drag the pointer a short distance The pointer changes to the duplicate pointer and a small envelope representing the mail message is displayed as shown in Figure 5 15 eee 18 elvis Fri Mad U 19 elvis Fri May U 20 elvis Fri May U 21 elvis Fri May h Data transfer in progress Figure 5 15 Dragging a Mail Message 4 Drag the envelope onto the Calendar Manager You can drop it onto the Calendar Manager icon or anywhere on the open Calendar Manager window 5 Release SELECT When the appointment has been successfully scheduled a message is displayed in the footer of the Calendar Manager window Figure 5 16 shows an example of such a message L Appointment scheduled for 11 19 89 3 00 Figure 5 16 Example of a Message for a Scheduled Appointment For complete information on the appointment icon refer to Chapter 4
146. ER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OR NON INFRINGEMENT THIS PUBLICATION COULD INCLUDE TECHNICAL INACCURACIES OR TYPOGRAPHICAL ERRORS CHANGES ARE PERIODICALLY ADDED TO THE INFORMATION HEREIN THESE CHANGES WILL BE INCORPORATED IN NEW EDITIONS OF THE PUBLICATION SUN MICROSYSTEMS INC MAY MAKE IMPROVEMENTS AND OR CHANGES IN THE PRODUCT S AND OR THE PROGRAMS S DESCRIBED IN THIS PUBLICATION AT ANY TIME QO amp O oe ga Contents Prefas eere erai pad cradles a Dace eae Saad eohdd dda a O ences Xxix 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment Logging In and Logging Out i dass cecew cna aworns oon ee Te Logging ete were eid ee ed ee eee ee ou ee ER ER ER Sy e s Logging Outi reer ae gre ceni sieg aga ER REE AERA Eee Overview of the OpenWindows Environment Windows and Icons 2 s22 t1iesiedees so ieee arran Closing a Window to an Icon 1 2 0 0 006 c eee eee Opening an Icon to a Window 6 00 000000 Mouse and POMmtel lt cccccneeehappeeeeta teri eeack ase ae Versions of the Pointer ye cksee ees vdawekr yey secane dee Using the Mouse Buttons 20 20 00 ccc eee cence eee O DA N NN DD OBO F amp F N N m Pointer and Input Area ccain tp neki ia kee ee eaters ies Pointer Jumping ie n xad cede eee ve eave ON Greate enews 10 Keyboard Equivalents onnaa anaana rnnr 10 iii Me
147. Each folder file and application in your file system has the following information also known as properties associated with it Name e Ownership Group e Permissions read write execute You can display these properties for an individual selected file choosing Information from the File menu You can change these properties if you own the file and have the correct permissions set The File Information window also displays the following about each file File Size in bytes File Type Date the file was last modified Date the file was last accessed File Permissions and Information Owner Group World Owner name and Group name These more advanced topics can be accessed by pressing the plus button at the lower right corner of the Information window Once the information is displayed you can hide it by pressing the minus sign at the lower right corner Method to open file Method to print file Mount point Mounted from Free space Figure 2 32 shows an example of a File Properties window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Last Modified Last Accessed FM Information Name Seafood A Size 16 kbytes Type directory wed Jan 20 16 26 02 1993 PST wed Jan 20 16 30 44 1993 PST Permissions Read write Execute Owner W A A Group M O A world W o A Owner egret Group staff Open Method Print Method Mount Point Mounted From Free Space hightide dev dsk co
148. Edit submenu in the Text Pane menu Alternatively you can press the Paste button on the keyboard if there is one or Meta v Tips on Cutting and Pasting e For some it is more convenient to use the Cut and Paste buttons on the keyboard rather than the Edit menu Note x86 and PowerPC keyboards do not have Cut Copy and Paste keys Use Ctrl Alt x Ctrl Alt c and Ctrl Alt v respectively Clicking SELECT twice on a word highlights that word for cutting or copying e Clicking SELECT three times on a text line highlights the whole line for cutting or copying Solaris User s Guide September 1995 3 e Clicking SELECT four times anywhere in the file highlights the entire contents of the document Printing Text Editor Files Splitting Panes Before printing a Text Editor file you may need to choose Format from the Extras menu to reformat selected long lines of text into physical lines of no more than 72 characters A line of text is defined as ending with a carriage return The Text Editor wraps a long line into several displayed lines so what looks like several lines on your screen may actually just be one long line You print Text Editor files by dragging and dropping the file onto the Print Tool application To drag the entire Text Editor file press SELECT on the text glyph inside the drag and drop target drag the pointer to the Print Tool icon or drag and drop target and release SELECT The drag and drop ta
149. Engi 10 00a Prod Writer s Se 6 00p Rob s 25 28 10 00a 1 1 E 10 00a Prod 1 00p writ Figure 5 2 Default Calendar Manager Window The default Calendar Manager display is the current month at a glance which shows appointment scheduling for a one month period You can however change the default from the Properties window The current day is automatically selected when you open the Calendar Manager window The selected day has a double border On color workstations the inside border is the color of your Windows as determined by the Workspace Properties Color category In Figure 5 2 August 6th is the selected day You can select any other day by pointing to the day and clicking SELECT Calendar Manager Controls and Menus There are four menu buttons at the top of the Calendar Manager window View Edit Browse and Print and three Navigation Controls The related menu functions are listed here Calendar Manager 221 222 View Menu Edit Menu The View menu allows you to alternate between day week month and year views change time zones locate an appointment and go directly to a selected date Day displays a view of the currently selected day list of scheduled appointments for the day and a daily To Do list Week displays a mini view of the current week list of scheduled weekly appointments and weekly To Do list items Month displays a full month view with the current date highlig
150. Extras menu Format Choose Format to reformat selected long lines of text into physical lines of no more than 72 characters This is useful for example when reading mail with lines longer than the width of the window Formatting text before printing is also useful to make sure the lines will not be truncated by the printer Format uses the UNIX fmt command It does not split words between lines and it preserves blank lines and the spacing between words Note Format and fmt work only on lines of no more than 1024 characters Text Editor 133 134 Capitalize Use Capitalize on the Extras menu to capitalize selected text e The first item on the Capitalize submenu abcd gt ABCD capitalizes every letter of the selected text The second item on the Capitalize submenu ABCD gt abcd turns all the letters of the selected text into lower case e The last item of the Capitalize submenu abcd gt Abcd capitalizes the first letter of every selected word Uppercase letters within a word are not changed Shift Lines Choose the Shift Lines item to insert or remove a Tab character at the beginning of each line in the selected text Use the Shift Lines submenu to specify whether to shift right or left Shift right inserts a Tab character and shift left removes a Tab character Pretty print C This item uses the UNIX indent command to format C program listings It formats the selection according to standard specifica
151. Figure 6 4 cmdtool bin csh 26 castle winsor Figure 6 1 Command Tool Window A Command Tool window has a header with a Window menu button a Window menu resize corners a scrollbar and a text terminal emulator pane For more information on these elements refer Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment Solaris User s Guide September 1995 O lll Command Tool Term Pane Menu In a Command Tool the Term Pane pop up menu has the Edit Find and Extras items of the standard text editing pop up menu described in Chapter 3 Text Editor plus three additional items the History File Editor and Scrolling submenus Move the pointer anywhere onto the Command Tool pane and press MENU to display the Term Pane menu History Submenu The History of a Command Tool is a log of all the characters displayed You can access this log by scrolling the Term Pane with the scrollbar or by saving the log to a file This may be useful for example if you have performed a complicated sequence of operations that you want to save or send as part of a mail message for troubleshooting or debugging The History submenu provides options to modify the history log The Mode setting determines whether the history log is Editable within the Command Tool or Read Only If you set the mode to Read Only in order to protect against accidental changes you can still save the log to a file and edit that file using th
152. Hz Sample Rate 11 025kHz Channels stereo Channels stereo Update Status Change Figure 11 23 Audio Control Status Window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Tape Tool Icon Tape Tool 12 Tape Tool enables you to copy files and directories onto a tape cartridge You may need to do this to make backup copies or to archive files that you want to retain but that you do not need on a regular basis Or you may need to copy files or directories onto tape in order to pass them on to someone else with a compatible system who can then extract them from the tape Tape Tool provides a user interface to the UNIX tar tape archiving and retrieval functions Refer to the manual page for tar for more detailed information Note Tape Tool is not intended to be an all purpose system backup tool It cannot read tapes that have been written using the cpio command To open Tape Tool choose Workspace gt Programs gt Tape Tool The Tape Tool icon has an image of a tape cartridge as shown in Figure 12 1 a ta petool Figure 12 1 Tape Tool Icon wT i You can select files and folders from the File Manager to be archived on tape You can drag and drop them as a group or individually onto the Tape Tool icon or onto the open Tape Tool window to accumulate a list of files to be written to a tape or archive file Tape Tool Window The Tape Tool base window is shown in Figure 12 2 Tapetool Dr
153. Keys on page 555 545 lll Se Starting AccessX Prevent a key that you hit accidentally from inputting to the system See SlowKeys on page 556 e Make a key accept input as intended even if you are unable to hold the key down steadily See BounceKeys on page 557 AccessX is an extension to OpenWindows To start OpenWindows with the AccessX extension type openwin accessx This enables you to activate and deactivate AccessX features both with buttons in AccessX windows and with certain keystroke combinations For example you can turn StickyKeys on and off by pressing the Shift key five times Alternately you can start OpenWindows without the accessx option You still have the full AccessX functionality however you can t use the special keystroke sequences to turn features on or off You must use buttons in AccessX windows instead The accessx option does not affect the use of other OpenWindows options If OpenWindows comes up automatically from your or login file you may want to add the accessx option to the line that calls OpenWindows AccessX Windows 546 If you ve brought up OpenWindows and no AccessX windows are already up on your screen type accessx amp ina command window If you re running AccessX and want to have AccessX windows come up automatically when you start OpenWindows choose Save Workspace from the Utilities submenu of the main background OpenWindows
154. Keys window 10 Release the language button 11 Begin typing in the XView application window from which you opened the keyboard The characters you type appear in the chosen character set Switching Between Virtual Keyboards You can access a few characters or symbols from another language or alternate character sets interactively and then return to typing with your usual character set For example you might want to type a few Greek characters inside a document that is in English To change to a different character set and back again 1 Open the document and enter the text in your local language 2 When you want to switch languages press and hold the Language key This key is labled R2 or Print Screen Solaris User s Guide September 1995 18 3 In the Function Keys window click SELECT on the button for the language to which you want to change temporarily Continue to press the Language key 4 Type in the characters you want to add These characters appear in the document in the language you have chosen 5 Release the Language key Anything you type now appears in your local language Window Controls The Window Controls menu items cover basic window operations such as opening closing and resizing windows behind other windows This utility is especially useful for performing operations on multiple windows or icons simultaneously To open Window Controls choose Workspace gt Utilities gt Window Contr
155. Mail Tool Save Attachment As popup window as shown in Figure 4 24 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll oH Mail Tool Save Attachment As Type in the path to the folder and press Return Current Folder fhightide egret Fish Select a file or folder and click Open Folder P Co up one folder coma Save As Salmon Hidden Files Open Folder Cancel Figure 4 24 Save Attachment As Popup Window a Select the directory and filename to be moved Alternatively you can type the directory name in the Directory text field b Click SELECT on the Save button A copy of the file is stored in the specified directory with the file name derived from the name of the attachment Multimedia Mail Tool 181 Deleting Mail Attachments To delete attachments from a message in the View or Compose window select the attachment or attachments you want to delete and choose Delete from the Edit button in the control area of the Attachments pane Use the Undelete item to restore the most recently deleted attachment This item is grayed out if there are currently no deleted attachments Saving Changes for Mail Tool 182 To improve system performance Mail Tool does not automatically save changes that you make when you close it to an icon Messages that you have deleted remain available to you when you open the Mail Tool Header window To free up disk space and keep your mail box a manageab
156. Manager usr bin eT Cer GLY EDE amp amp amp amp n bouncedemo cal calendar canyas_demo R Ro Ro capitalize cat cb cc Figure 16 14 The New Image in the File Manager Deleting a Binder Entry Changing a Binding 462 To delete a Binder entry select the entry in the Binder base window scrolling list and click SELECT on the Delete button Then click SELECT on the Save button The Delete button is dimmed and inactive if the currently selected entry is a read only entry Note When you delete a Binder entry the File Type entry associated with it is not deleted If you want to delete the File Type entry make sure to delete it from the File Type scrolling list before you delete the Binder entry To delete the File Type entry select the Binder entry in the base window scrolling list display the File Type Properties window select the File Type in the File Types scrolling list and click SELECT on the Properties window Delete button To change a binding 1 Select the entry in the Binder base window scrolling list 2 Modify the Icon and File Type properties fields that you want to change Make sure to click SELECT on the Apply and Save buttons to apply your Properties changes and then save them to the Binder database Solaris User s Guide September 1995 1lb If the binding that you want to change is a read only entry you can select the entry and then click SELECT on the Duplic
157. Most Recently Accessed Mail Files Multimedia Mail Tool 185 186 If you have a set of mail files that you want to always appear on the Move Copy and Load menus you can specify these files in the Mail Filing category of the Properties window You can also control the maximum height of these menus See Mail Filing Properties on page 206 for information Creating a New Mail File You can create a new mail file using only the controls on the Header window or using the Mail Files popup window Creating a New Mail File Using the Header Window Controls Follow these steps to create a mail file using only the Header window controls 1 2 Select one or more messages to move or copy to the new mail file Type the name of the new mail file in the Mail File text field on the Header window and then click SELECT on the Move or Copy button When you just type a file name such as projectreports Mail Tool puts the mail file in the Mail File directory that you specify from the Mail Filing Properties window Alternatively you can type a complete path name such as home username projects projectreports to put the mail file somewhere else in your file structure or you can type a relative path name such as projects projectreports to put the mail file in a subdirectory of your Mail File directory The new mail file becomes the first and default item of the Move Copy and Load menus Click SELECT on the Move or Copy button
158. NU crer orinincisperer eo et ikisi kiue eased 152 Compose Met sec cen eevee eed E RR E iyn eee 152 Custom Mail Tool Buttons nunnana aers 153 Mail File Text Field and Menus 0005 153 Pop up Men s ve cae kki eie ees era agan aR er ARRERA E 154 Mail Tool View Message Window 2 00 0000s 154 Using the Pushpin in the View Message Window 155 Viewing the Next or Previous Message 155 Viewing Messages With a Full Header 156 Viewing Multiple Mail Messages 005 157 Mail Tool Compose Window 0 00 cece e eee eee 157 Reading Messag s io ccuennys bebe hich enwer nes ed mean nassi 160 Printing Messages sev nce teehee bees tte een tee eee 162 Printing Mail Messages Using Mail Tool 162 Printing Mail Messages Using Print Tool 163 Composing Messages iii ic csi eect ere ss ete heb eeues estos 164 Composing a New Message 0 5000 c eee 164 Replying to a Message cpiveeteta Sey teeese an erenece 166 Forwarding Messages to Third Parties 166 Title of Book Month 1992 Using Tem lates cc cteceernee en pee cree E na ee ee toe 167 Using the Vacation Notifier ss cscsesk weeeuncexenaaws 168 Del ti g Messages ciciciKGi Diep hs Abe da g TE Ees 170 Undeleting Messages o on nuanua Seetetesbitriess 170 Finding Messrs 326t2 22 Fsb4esc heed rerne 171 Mail Tool Attachments 224 225s 04450 e000
159. NU to display the Clock menu The Clock menu shown in Figure 7 3 is displayed i v clock Clock Sun Jul 14 Figure 7 3 Clock Pop up Menu Solaris User s Guide September 1995 N lll c Choose Properties from the Clock menu The Clock Properties window shown in Figure 7 4 is displayed Clock Properties Clock Face Icon display Digital display Display options Timezone US Pacific Alarm Alarm command Hourly command Figure 7 4 Clock Properties Window 3 Change the settings as desired The settings are described in the following sections e If you are dissatisfied with your changes revert to previous settings by clicking SELECT on Reset If you want the new settings to become the default every time you start a new Clock click SELECT on Save as Defaults 4 Click SELECT on Apply The new settings take effect immediately Clock 287 lll N Changing to a Digital Style Clock Face The Clock face and icon are displayed in analog style by default To change the Clock face to digital display click SELECT on the digital box in the Properties window and then click SELECT on the Apply button The digital style clock is shown in Figure 7 5 Figure 7 5 Digital Style Clock Face Changing to a Roman Style Clock Icon To change the icon style from basic analog to Roman click SELECT on the roman box and then click SELECT on the Apply button Both styles are shown
160. PowerPC platform specific section or procedure Platform specific notes are indicated as follows SPARC This note is specific to the SPARC platform x86 This note is specific to the x86 platform PowerPC This note is specific to the PowerPC platform Platform specific bullet items are indicated as follows SPARC This bullet is specific to the SPARC platform x86 This bullet is specific to the x86 platform PowerPC This bullet is specific to the PowerPC platform If a code sample table or figure pertains to a specific platform the name of the particular platform appears at the beginning of the title For example Table 1 1 SPARC Title Specific to SPARC Platform Table 1 2 x86 Title Specific to x86 Platform Table 1 3 PowerPC Title Specific to PowerPC Platform Preface xxxiii Other Books For additional information refer to the following Solaris books Solaris Advanced User s Guide SPARC Installing Solaris Software x86 Installing Solaris Software System Administration Guide Volume I System Administration Guide Volume II XXxiV Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 1 This chapter provides an introduction to the Solaris User environment which consists of the OpenWindows environment and the DeskSet applications The DeskSet is a set of default programs such as an electronic mail application and a text editor
161. Print Window settings to print one copy Previewing Before Printing 1 Choose Print Preview from the File menu The Print Preview window displays a reduced image with dotted lines representing page boundaries The page boundaries are determined by the Page Size setting in the Printer window 2 Click SELECT on Cancel or Print Cancel dismisses the window and Print displays the Print window Image Tool 399 13 Printing after Checking or Changing Settings You can verify printer settings and start the printing job from the Print window 1 Choose Print from the File menu or click SELECT on Print in the Print Preview window The Print window shown in Figure 13 6 is displayed Image Tool Print Enter the number of copies to be printed Copies 1 x Header Page Print Choose wheither or not a header page should be printed Printer Choose the printer name mimeo from the scrolling li Page Size Choose a page size tha 8 5 x 11 in letter your printer can 8 5 x 14 in Legal accomodate 11 x 17 in Ledger Page Range n Ranges for multiple page i i documents only Scale the size of the image by typing the percentage Image Size number or using the slider Prerrrrenrnge 400 Print image vertically portrait g y p Image Orientation or horizontally landscape Image Position Center the image or specify the page margin Cancel Cii Cancel Figure 13 6 Print Window 2
162. Properties EA perfmeter prog ra ostscript file Ba ps Identify by Content Content A Tag Offset 9 printtool prog readme file shell script D Tag Type Tag Vaiue Tag Mask Pattern pS Read olo Only Entry f Read Only Entry Figure 16 10 The ps File Type Entry An exception to the rule about matching the pattern with the file name occurs with the Binder entries default app default dir and default doc The File Manager application uses these entries to determine the bindings for its default application files directories folders and documents The File Type patterns for these bindings are default app default dir and default doc You will never however actually find a file called default app default dir or default doc See Changing a Binding on page 462 for information about how to change these default File Manager bindings Binder 455 16 456 Identify by Content If the Identify choice is by Content files are recognized by matching file contents instead of the file name When you choose by Content the four fields underneath the Identify setting become active These fields define what the file contents should be to define files of the current File Type as follows Tag Offset determines the starting position in the file counting from 0 where the contents should be matched The default value is 0 meaning
163. Settings window for setting how you want to be notified of a key s status when SlowKeys is in effect By checking these boxes you can have your machine beep When a key is initially pressed When the key press is accepted Both when the key is first pressed and when the key press is accepted Not at all Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Ss lll Setting the Acceptance Delay The acceptance delay is the interval between when you first press a key and when it transmits input You can set this with the Acceptance delay sec slider located in the Settings window See Figure B 4 This delay can range from zero to five seconds BounceKeys BounceKeys aids people who have trouble holding down a key or who tend to hit a key repeatedly when they mean to press it only once BounceKeys sets the window system to ignore rapid repeated pressings of a single key Note Both SlowKeys and BounceKeys cannot be active at once Turning BounceKeys On and Off To turn BounceKeys on and off check the BounceKeys check box on the AccessX main window BounceKey Settings Setting the Debounce Time The Debounce Time is the interval that must pass before a second pressing of a key is accepted You can set this interval with the Debounce time sec slider See Figure B 4 This delay can range from zero to five seconds Access for Users With Disabilities 557 B Keystrokes for AccessX Features Table B 1 s
164. Single Page Images and Multiple Page Documents If the image you opened is a single page image the View window resizes to the size of the image unless the image extends beyond the size of the screen You can now save your image as described in Saving an Image on page 395 print your image as described in Printing Images on page 399 or use the palette with your image as described in Using the Image Tool Palette on page 401 If your document is a multiple page document refer to Viewing Multiple Page Documents on page 406 Formats that Image Tool Can Open Table 13 1 lists the file formats that Image Tool can open along with recommended file name extensions These extensions may help you recognize file formats Note PostScript file formats are for PostScript and Encapsulated PostScript File EPSF documents For simplicity in the rest of this chapter the term PostScript includes EPSF Image Tool 391 i Table 13 1 Image Tool File Formats and Extensions File Format File Name Extension Encapsulated PostScript File ps eps epsf PostScript ps 3 Portable Graymap rgb3 Abekas YUV yuv Andrew Toolkit atk Atari Compressed spc Atari Uncompressed Spectrum spu Atari Degas 1 pil Atari Degas 3 pi3 AutoCAD Slide sld Benet Yee Face File ybm CMU Window Manager cmu FITS fits GEM img GIF gif GIF Gould Scanner gould Group 3 Fax 23 HIPS hips IFF ILBM ilbm HP PaintJet Pj JFIF JPEG
165. SolansUsersGuide EESE p amp SunSoft A Sun Microsystems Inc Busi 1995 Sun Microsystems Inc 2550 Garcia Avenue Mountain View California 94043 1100 U S A All rights reserved This product or document is protected by copyright and distributed under licenses restricting its use copying distribution and decompilation No part of this product or document may be reproduced in any form by any means without prior written authorization of Sun and its licensors if any Portions of this product may be derived from the UNIX system and from the Berkeley 4 3 BSD system licensed from the University of California Third party software including font technology in this product is protected by copyright and licensed from Sun s Suppliers RESTRICTED RIGHTS LEGEND Use duplication or disclosure by the government is subject to restrictions as set forth in subparagraph c 1 ii of the Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software clause at DFARS 252 227 7013 and FAR 52 227 19 The product described in this manual may be protected by one or more U S patents foreign patents or pending applications TRADEMARKS Sun Sun Microsystems the Sun logo SunSoft the SunSoft logo Solaris SunOS OpenWindows DeskSet ONC ONC and NFS are trademarks or registered trademarks of Sun Microsystems Inc in the United States and may be protected as trademarks in other countries UNIX is a registered trademark in the United States and other countries ex
166. Solaris User Environment To save a raster image or multiple page document and keep the current file name directory and attributes choose Save from the File menu To save an image whole or in part and change the file name directory or attributes choose one of the Save As command items e Save As applies to the entire image e Save Selection As applies to a region that you defined using the Selector tool Image Tool 395 13 e Save Page As Image applies only to a single page of a multiple page document If the file format for the opened file is not supported the Save button is dimmed and unavailable Figure 13 5 shows the Image Tool Save As window g Image Tool Save As Type in the path to the folder and press Return Current Folder fhightide egret Fish Select a file or folder and click Open Folder t Go up one folder Seafood Save As Fish File Format JFIF PEG PostScript Sun Raster TIFF Compression None Colors 256 Open Folder Figure 13 5 Image Tool Save As Window 396 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 13 Save As You can change the settings for e File Format EPSF GIF JFIF JPEG PostScript Sun Raster or TIFF e Compression e None e UNIX Standard UNIX file compression utility available for ESPF PostScript Sun Raster and TIFF formats e Encoded run length Available for Sun Raster e LZW Available for TIFF fi
167. The Audio Tool base window shown in Figure 11 1 contains all of the controls needed to play record and edit a sound file Play Record position pointer Drag and drop target Audio Tool maintalk au 0 01 4 0 02 39 Cursor Pointer a Display canvas Cursor mark JUL ey Play Fw voice Format Length 0 08 5 0 00 wo t p Figure 11 1 Audio Tool Base Window The top center of the Audio Tool window displays the name of a sound file along with the file s status Three menu buttons are located near the top of the window File Edit and Volume Use these buttons to edit audio files and the audio configuration parameters such as play and record volume The four buttons located near the bottom of the window Rev Play Fwd and Rec function like buttons on a tape recorder Audio Tool 343 11 Loading and Playing an Audio File 344 To load and play an audio file do the following 1 With the pointer inside Audio Tool choose File gt Open The Audio Tool Open window is displayed as shown in Figure 11 2 I eo Audio Tool Open Type in the path to the folder and press Return Current Folder d0faudio Getfiles Select a file or folder and click Open ca Go up one folder audio test audiotestaudio Q Testfiles testmail audio voicefile audio Show All Files Audio Files Figure 11 2 Open Window 2 Double click SELECT
168. The default choice under the Programs submenu is File Manager When you choose Programs from the Workspace menu the File Manager is displayed Changing the Menu Default If you find that you often make a menu choice other than the default you might want to define that item as the default choice To change the default choice 1 Display the menu to be modified Press MENU and drag the pointer to display that menu 2 Position the pointer on the default choice and press MENU again 3 Press the Control key on your keyboard while pressing MENU 4 Drag the pointer up or down until the new default menu item is highlighted 5 Release the Control key Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll 6 Release the mouse button When you click SELECT on that menu your chosen application is the default Window Controls Application title listed in the header Button choices One item can be chosen at a time Multiple items can be chosen at once Check boxes Text field The basic controls for an application are displayed in control areas within the base window An application can have a single control area in a single base window or may have additional control areas elsewhere in the base window or subwindows Figure 1 17 shows the variety of controls possible for window applications Base Window Menu button Abbreviated menu button Exclusive settings Nonexclusive settings Check boxes Choice
169. The key referred to as Return is labeled Enter on some keyboards Names of mouse buttons are referred to by function not by location and are capitalized For example Press SELECT is used not Press left This convention is used because the mouse buttons are customizable so the left mouse button might not be the SELECT button for everyone See Chapter 17 Customizing the Solaris Environment and Chapter 18 Utilities to learn how to customize your mouse button function assignments SELECT SELECT ADJUST ADJUST Shift SELECT MENU MENU Figure P 1 Default Functions of the Mouse Buttons For a three button mouse the default function assignments are e SELECT the left mouse button e ADJUST the middle mouse button e MENU the right mouse button Preface XXXI For a two button mouse the default function assignments are e SELECT the left mouse button e MENU the right mouse button To use the ADJUST function on a two button mouse press and hold the keyboard Shift key and click the SELECT mouse button When the entire menu is discussed or when the default menu item is discussed a default ring surrounds the default item of the menu By default clicking SELECT on a menu button displays the entire menu You can change this default behavior so that without displaying the menu the default menu item is chosen This book assumes you have this setting e Illustrations that depict screen images are mean
170. This command selects all of the audio data in the display canvas This is the same as triple clicking SELECT in the display canvas The Volume menu has options for controlling play volume and recording level These functions are part of Audio Control a separate application that cooperates with Audio Tool Click MENU on Volume to display these options Play controls audio output Click SELECT on Play to display the Audio Control Play window shown in Figure 11 21 The controls on this panel affect the entire desktop audio environment Audio Control Play Headphone Line Out Record Play Volume 66 Balance Left j Right Figure 11 21 Audio Control Play Window Note Depending on the audio capabilities of your computer you may or may not see all of the choices shown in the figure e g if your computer does not support stereo the balance slider is not displayed Solaris User s Guide September 1995 11 Record Speaker Headphone and Line Out Buttons Click SELECT on these buttons to select audio output devices The buttons that are available depend on your hardware configuration For example some configurations support only speakers and headphones Other configurations support all three devices and some configurations allow you to select more than one device at a time Also some configurations recognize whether a plug has been inserted into a jack In these configu
171. Tool var mail egret CES Claes CHES Compas Maller O O co 1 egret Tue Sep 29 11 29 25 560 Look 2 Mailer Daemon Fri Oct 9 11 06 35 872 Returned mail U 3 mariac celtic Thu Jan 7 16 52 18 496 Ne Sat Jan 9 23 42 21 534 File Manager hightide egret Fish View v Edit v GoTo v hightide egret Fish ILD Contains 4 items 881 Mbytes 99 available DO cod O salmon O swordfish O Tuna Text Editor NONE edited dir hightide e File v View v Edit v Find v This is a text file created with text editor g Figure 1 5 Partial View of the Workspace with Three Open Windows Introduction to the Solaris User Environment lll bd Windows and Icons You interact with the applications using the keyboard the mouse and an arrow on the Workspace called a pointer that moves in correspondence with the mouse Several default applications appear on the Workspace when you start the Solaris software Each application runs in its own window When you use the OpenWindows environment you open the applications that you need You can use several applications simultaneously such as electronic mail your daily calendar and a text editor Mail Tool var mail egret DDD Gama ne thief cici CEE Your Move patten newbi rth Thu
172. Turn on Features Figure B 2 The Status Menu Note If you re using StickyKeys or MouseKeys it s a good idea to display the status window for that feature Otherwise you may encounter unexpected behavior that can be very confusing In StickyKeys for example if the Control key is locked down pressing the letter c sends a Control C to the computer The StickyKeys status window reminds you that Control is active Getting a Beep When a Feature is Turned On or Off The main window has a check box labeled Sound when features turned On Off See Figure B 1 If you check this box any time a feature such as StickyKeys or SlowKeys is activated or deactivated the computer beeps Setting the Automatic Shutoff Timer If you share your computer with someone who doesn t use AccessX you may want to have AccessX turn itself off automatically if the machine isn t used for a certain period of time That way neither you nor the person who uses your machine after you has to remember to shut off AccessX To activate this timeout check the Off after time out min check box See Figure B 1 Move the associated slider to set the amount of time AccessX should wait without input before disabling itself You can set this time to be anywhere from zero to six minutes Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Ss lll Getting On Line Help The Settings Window Access for Users With Disabilities AccessX has several
173. Writer s Team Meeting Calendars Insert Access Alarm Beep 5 egret river All alarms are 5 turned on PopUp 5 v s Repeat 7 weekly Default advance For 52 weeks warning times appear Mail To egretGriver Privacy Show Time and Text Author egret Figure 5 13 All Appointment Reminders Selected 3 If needed change the default advance warning times as follows a Click SELECT to the right of the time and press the Backspace key on your keyboard to delete the default time 238 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 nN lll b Type in the desired time 4 Add mail addresses to the Mail To text field as needed By default your own mail address appears on the text field If you add more addresses the names will scroll out of sight You can scroll them back into view using the arrow keys on your keyboard 5 Save the appointment in one of the following ways a If you are changing an existing appointment press the Change button to enter your modifications b If you are creating a new appointment with reminders press Insert to enter your new appointment Finding a Calendar Appointment If you want to find an appointment but you can t remember exactly when it was scheduled you can use the Calendar Manager Find feature To display the Find window choose View gt Find From the Find window type the appointment you want to sear
174. You can add new attachments to a mail message delete attachments or rename them Multimedia Mail Tool 173 174 Opening Mail Attachments There are two groups of mail attachments e Ordinary attachments which are bound to their applications You open them and their applications directly from the Attachments pane For example Calendar Manager appointments mail messages icons and images voicemail and executable files Special attachments which are not bound to their application You cannot open these files directly from the Attachments pane For example specially formatted text files created with desktop publishing software Note If there are more attachments than can be displayed in one row you need to scroll down with the Attachments pane scrollbar to see all the files Opening Ordinary Attachments AN To open most attachments Double click SELECT on an icon in the Attachments pane Launching appears in the message area beneath the Attachments pane and in a moment the application opens and the file is displayed Caution When starting an executable from the Mail Tool Attachments pane you receive a warning message asking if you want to run the executable program or cancel Before you click SELECT on Run it make sure you know what the outcome will be and that the sender is someone you trust Executables such as shell scripts can be used to perform operations on the files in your f
175. a plain ASCII file Print Tool 339 10 Changing the Print Method with the Binder You can use the Binder application to view or change the print method bound to specific types of files This information is stored in the non ASCII file called cetables in the usr openwin lib cetables directory and can be viewed using Binder Once you use Binder to customize this file the information is stored as cetables directory in your home directory For complete information on using Binder refer to Chapter 16 Binder Starting Print Tool from the Command Line When started from the command line Print Tool looks at the following to determine the default printer 1 If the Print Tool was started in a Shell Tool or Command Tool and the printer was specified with the P command line argument Print Tool uses that printer as the default For example the printer named mimeo is the default if Print Tool is started by typing printtool P mimeo 2 If a printer was not specified with a command line argument Print Tool looks for the environment variable SPRINTER or SLPDEST if the SPRINTER environment variable has not been set If this environment variable is set the printer it specifies becomes the Print Tool default 3 If neither a command line argument was specified nor the SPRINTER or LPDEST environment variable was set Print Tool automatically selects the name of your system default printer All printers that are
176. a window and put it on the clipboard Also to change the location of selected windows icons text or graphics by dragging to a new location A system of interconnected computer workstations and servers A list of nonexclusive choices indicated by separated rectangles The chosen settings are surrounded by a bold border Window that is displayed when an application generates warning and error messages that require an action before you can proceed A Notice blocks input to the system until you click on one of its buttons A text input field with increment and decrement buttons that is used for numeric input 1 A registered trademark of AT amp T 2 The graphical user interface specification upon which the OpenWindows design is based A set of coordinated colors provided for defining the color of the Workspace window background selection and caret Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Pane The quick brown fox jumped over the lazy dog M Tin Paste Path name Pinned menu Q Position o 4 Cc 5 gt aay KS Pixel Pointer Pointer jumping Pop up menu Text Cut Copy Paste Paginate A bordered rectangle in a window where the application displays its data To insert data from the clipboard into a window Selected data is placed on the clipboard with the Copy or Cut key An identifier for the position of a file or directory within the file system For instan
177. ach Calculator function with its keyboard equivalent See the manual page for calctool for a more complete description of each function The manual page for calctool also lists Calculator command line options and various resources that can be set in your Xdefaults or desksetdefaults files Keyboard equivalents listed in brackets indicate a choice of options For example the keyboard equivalent for the Disp function is D e f s This means that you can enter De Df or Ds Similarly the Exch function keyboard equivalent is F 0 9 which means you can enter FO F1 F2 etc through F9 Table 8 1 Calculator Function Keyboard Equivalents 1 of 5 Function Keyboard Equivalent Description Int Control i Integer portion of current entry Frac Control f Fractional portion of entry Abs Control u Absolute value of current entry C Change arithmetic sign 1 x r 1 divided by current entry x 2 Square of current entry Percentage using current entry and next entry Sqrt s Square root Asc Control a char Displays ASCII value of character typed after Control a Base B b o d h Change the base to binary b octal o decimal d or hexadecimal h Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Co lll Table 8 1 Calculator Function Keyboard Equivalents 2 of 5 Function Keyboard Equivalent Description Disp Mode Acc Con Fun D e f s M b f L s A 0 9 0 9 defaults F 0
178. af Choice2 Text Field Path file Slider 69 D _ j 100 Slider control Scrollbar and scrolling window Figure 1 17 Window Controls Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 17 18 Prompt Scrollbars Some windows contain scrollbars that enable you to scroll though lists or see previous commands The Text Editor is an example of a scrolling window By default most scrollbars appear on the right side of scrolling windows although you can move them to the left side See Chapter 17 Customizing the Solaris Environment for information You scroll up incrementally to view previous commands by placing the pointer on an up arrow in the Scrollbar elevator and clicking SELECT You can scroll down again by placing the pointer on the down arrow and clicking SELECT You can also press SELECT on the drag area and slide the elevator up or down Figure 1 18 shows Command Tool s scrollbar and its elements cmdtool bin csh Scrollbar cable Cable anchor Figure 1 18 Command Tool s Scrollbar By contrast the Shell Tool is a nonscrolling window If you type a long series of command lines in a nonscrolling window you cannot see lines that scroll above the top of the window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll Abbreviated menu button Button Menus Button Menus or Window buttons appear in the control areas of many applications Some window buttons provide a single option and ot
179. ag and drop Lists files on target the tape Copies files Destination home bookhouse brenda Tape Tool from the tape Properties Location of files Scrolling or destination of window for files read from listing files the tape to write Local Host Figure 12 2 Tape Tool Window You can perform the following operations from the Tape Tool window List the files from a streaming tape cartridge or archive file that have been archived using the tar command Read some or all of the files from the tape or archive file into the directory that you specify e Write specific files or directories that you specify onto a streaming tape cartridge or into an archive file Display a window in which you set the properties for the tar command from the Tape Tool Properties window 378 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 iZ The control area provides controls for listing reading to tape writing from tape and setting Tape Tool properties Use the File To Write button and text field to type in the names of files that you want to write to tape The scrolling list displays a list of the files you specify by typing file names or by dragging and dropping icons from the File Manager If files were archived without a path name or with a relative path name you can specify in the Destination field where those files are put in your file system when they are read from the tape The default destination is your current working directory If the files on
180. age can be disabled in the Edit gt Properties window You cannot undo a New operation Audio Format Choices Click SELECT on the format of your choice You can retain the current format or choose one of the standard formats Voice CD or DAT If an audio format is not supported by the audio hardware the corresponding menu item is disabled User defined formats may also be included and you can choose New Format to define a new format Solaris User s Guide September 1995 ie i New Format Click SELECT on the New Format choice in the New menu to select create or edit the characteristics of a recording format The Audio Tool New Format window shown in Figure 11 13 is displayed ow Audio Tool New Format Encoding 16 bit linear Sample Rate 7 8kHz Channels stereo New Format Reset E9 Figure 11 13 Audio Tool New Format Window Encoding Open this menu with a MENU click to select a type of encoding Then click SELECT on your choice of 8 bit u law 8 bit A law or 16 bit linear The 16 bit linear encoding provides better accuracy signal to noise ratio than the two 8 bit encodings However the 16 bit linear encoding requires twice the storage capacity Stereo audio data must use 16 bit linear encoding to play ona machine with stereo capability Sample Rate Open this menu with a MENU click to select a sample rate Higher sample rates provide better high frequency r
181. ager Wastebasket Calendar Manager with specific format restrictions Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 21 22 Mail Tool Attachments can be dropped onto these DeskSet applications File Manager Wastebasket Print Tool Text Editor Image Tool Icon Editor if it is an icon file Snapshot if it is a raster file Audio Tool if it is an audio file Text selections from Text Editor files can be dropped onto these applications Mail Tool Text Editor Print Tool Calendar Manager with specific format restrictions Icon Editor if it is an icon file File Manager Wastebasket Command Tool Text files from the Text Editor drag and drop target can be dropped onto these applications File Manager Wastebasket Print Tool Mail Tool Calendar Manager with specific format restrictions Command Tool If an error occurs during a drag and drop sequence refer to Appendix A Solaris Troubleshooting Drag and Drop Examples Sometimes an application has a drag and drop target typically located in the top right of an application s control area The drag and drop target is shown in Figure 1 21 Note that on a color workstation the drag and drop target will appear lightly shaded Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll LI Figure 1 21 Drag and Drop Target When you drop an object onto a drag and drop target the object is loaded into the application replacing whatever was currently loa
182. ager A class of files is recognized either by Name or by Content as defined in the following sections Identify By Name If the Identify choice is by Name files are recognized by the pattern in the Pattern text field In this case the Pattern is often the name of an application For example Figure 16 9 shows the clock File Type entry that is bound to the clock prog Binder entry Any file called clock will be displayed by the File Manager with the clock icon and colors displayed in the base window scrolling list The icon and colors are defined by the clock prog Icon properties gv Binder Properties clock prog Ei cm prog E cmdtool prog amp colorchooser Pe compose prog clock Identify by Content Faq Offset 9 Tag Type Tag Yajue Yaq Mask Pattern clock o TEINIEN E Read Only Entry 4 Read Only Entry Figure 16 9 Clock File Type Entry Solaris User s Guide September 1995 1lb Binder CD Binder Entries When the Identify choice is by Name and the Pattern text field contains an asterisk the asterisk in the Pattern means match any file name here For example the File Type Entry ps shown in Figure 16 10 matches all files that end with ps These files are PostScript files and are displayed in the DeskSet with the postscript file icon displayed in the Binder base window scrolling list gv Binder
183. ager window shown in Figure 2 2 provides a set of controls that you can use to manipulate your file system The window has a path pane that displays the file system hierarchy and a scrollable file pane that displays the contents of the open folder in the path You can open many windows from within File Manager and File Manager works the same way within each window 58 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll File Manager hightide egret Ea Ces e Cats E Path Pane hightide egret Status Bar Contains 8 items 875 Mbytes 98 ava rtfiles dead letter mo Q Fish my_printscript File Pane Figure 2 2 Primary File Manager Window File Manager File Icons The files in your file system by default are represented by three kinds of icons which are similar to application icons on the workspace Directories are displayed as folders Files such as documents graphic files and spreadsheet files are displayed as dog eared sheets of paper Executable files applications are displayed as an application icon Figure 2 3 shows these three file type icons mo Folder my_file my_printscript Figure 2 3 Three Types of File Icons File Manager 59 60 File Manager checks the Binder database for information bound to each file being operated on Every file displayed can have its own file type Each file type can have its own icon open method and print method stored in the Binder database
184. agnification Speaker Rex output KN Microphone a input ea Figure2 1 Audio I O Adapter Cable Audio Tool Icon and Base Window The Audio Toal icon is shown in Figure 2 4 Fgure2 2 AudioTool Icon The AudioTool base window shown in BEME contains all of the controls needed to record and manipulate a sound file Figure 19 11 Following a Link Note If when you attempt to follow a link you see the message Can t follow hypertext link at the bottom of the Viewer window probably the link points to a document that is not in any of the currently selected AnswerBooks in the Library See Modifying Your Library on page 519 Searching with the Navigator In Search mode the Navigator can match your requests by searching through the text and titles of all documents you have included in your Library You can enter search phrases in your own words and enhance your searches see Advanced Search Techniques on page 513 Using the AnswerBook Software 509 19 510 Put Navigator in search mode Type search phrase To change to Search mode click SELECT on the Search setting in the control area AnswerBook Navigator Modify Library New Bookmark E Start Search Search Settings Documents Found KIMEI Figure 19 12 AnswerBook Navigator in Search Mode To search for a topic of interest 1 Begin a search by typing a search phrase a word phrase or sentence in the pane
185. ail to go directly to a page Page 14 or type the number of the page to be displayed in the Go To Page field and Select the Display Page button Go To Page 1 Figure 13 12 Page Overview Window 406 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 13 Page Viewing Controls Choose View Page Viewing Controls Use Page Viewing Controls to set the viewing orientation to portrait vertical or landscape horizontal page display order first page first or last page first and page size of a multiple page document The page size options are 8 5x11 Letter 8 5x14 Legal 11x14 Ledger 29 7x42cm A3 21x29 7cm A4 17 6x25cm B5 Figure 13 13 on page 407 shows the Page Viewing Controls ow Image Tool Page Viewing Controls Order First Page First Last Page First 8 5 11 in Letter 8 5 x 14 in Legal 11 x 14 in Ledger Figure 13 13 Page Viewing Controls Image Tool 407 13 Setting Image Tool Properties 408 The Properties window lets you choose your preferences for display characteristics Depending on the hardware capabilities of your display the properties window may have different choices under View Image In 1 Choose Properties from the Edit menu The Properties window shown in Figure 13 14 is displayed These are Image Tool Properties device dependant Can set the view for an image Colors 256 Select the number of colors used for renderin
186. ain a file When a file is opened from the application or dropped onto the drag and drop target the target changes in appearance Figure 1 20 shows an empty drag and drop target and one that contains a file Drag and drop target with loaded file Figure 1 20 Drag and Drop Targets Follow the steps below for any drag and drop operations 1 Select an object or objects to be dragged For example you might want to select a set of files in the File Manager by pointing at the first file and clicking SELECT and then clicking ADJUST on the additional files Or you might want to select a section of text from the Text Editor by pressing SELECT at the start of the desired text dragging through the text to be moved and releasing SELECT If you want to drag just one file or the contents of a drag and drop target you can skip this first step 2 Initiate a move by pointing at a file glyph the shaded area in a drag and drop target or a selected object Then press SELECT and drag the pointer If you want to copy the object instead of move it you can do so by pressing the Control key on the keyboard before pressing SELECT Keep the Control key held down until after the drag is initiated Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll 3 When the hot spot of the pointer the tip of the pointer arrow is at an appropriate place drop the selection by releasing SELECT The selection is dropped at the new location Depending o
187. also be used as a stopwatch or alarm clock The Clock relies on the date and time being correctly set If you have not yet set the date and time on your system refer to the manual page for date This chapter describes how to use and customize the Clock To display the Clock choose Workspace gt Programs gt Clock Clock Icon and Window The clock icon displays an analog clock with or without roman numerals as shown in the examples in Figure 7 1 See the section Customizing the Clock on page 286 for information about how to display a Roman clock icon Loa te BEET k ix ii oe O x m i wil m 7 tet ivv oy Figure 7 1 Clock Icons Analog and Roman 285 lll N Customizing the Clock 286 When you open the Clock icon the clock is displayed in the pane of a base window as shown in Figure 7 2 The current time zone is displayed beneath the clock if it is not the local time zone clock V3 3 Figure 7 2 Clock Window The Clock window has a header and resize corners You can use the resize corners to change the area of the window making the clock larger or smaller You can also disable the header See the manual page for clock for information about this and other customization features You can customize the Clock using the settings in the Clock Properties window 1 Open the Clock if it is in icon form 2 Display the Clock Properties window a Move the pointer into the Clock pane b Press ME
188. an asset for one period The straight line method of depreciation divides the depreciable cost actual cost minus salvage value evenly over the useful life of an asset The useful life is the number of periods typically years over which an asset is depreciated Use the memory registers to store the following information Register 0 Cost of the asset Register 1 Salvage value of the asset Register 2 Useful life of the asset SIn Example You have purchased an office machine for 8 000 The useful life of this machine is six years and the salvage value in eight years will be 900 You want to compute yearly depreciation expense using the straight line method Calculator S11 312 Memory register usage Register 0 8000 cost of the asset Register 1 900 salvage value of the asset Register 2 6 useful life of the asset Clicking SELECT on Sln returns 1183 33 the yearly dollar depreciation allowance Syd Sum of the years digits Depreciation Use Syd to compute the sum of the years digits depreciation This method of depreciation accelerates the rate of depreciation so that more depreciation expense occurs in earlier periods than in later ones The depreciable cost is the actual cost minus salvage value The useful life is the number of periods typically years over which an asset is depreciated Store the following information in the memory registers Register 0 Cost of the asset Register 1 Sal
189. an do anything else on the desktop In some cases you can speed up command operations by using a sequence of keystrokes called keyboard accelerators that duplicate the operations of the mouse and menus and of the pre configured keyboard keys The following table lists several command operations and the keyboard equivalents for SPARC x86 and PowerPC based machines Note The Meta key is the lt gt key on SPARC keyboards and is obtained on x86 and PowerPC keyboards by pressing Ctrl Alt To carry out a keyboard accelerator operation press and hold the first key Meta or Control Alt together and type the second key For example to cut selected text press and hold the Meta key and press x on a SPARC sytem on an x86 system press and hold Control and Alt together and press x simultaneously Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll Table 1 1 Keyboard Accelerators Operation Again Copy Cut Find Help New Open File Open Window Paste Print Props Redo Save Stop Undo Keyboard Equivalent Meta a Meta c Meta x Meta f Help or F1 Meta n Meta o Meta w Meta v Meta p Meta i Shift Meta p Meta s Stop or Esc Meta u Action Repeats the previous operation Copies the selection to the clipboard Cuts the selection and puts it on the clipboard Finds the selection to the right of the caret Displays a help window with con
190. an edit the contents of this text field in the same way you edit any other text field When you have changed the file name press Return or click SELECT on the background of the file pane You can also change the name of a file using the Information popup window See File and Folder Information on page 96 for more information Moving and Copying Files 78 You can move and copy icons that are displayed in the File pane using cut copy paste choosing Duplicate from the File menu or using the drag and drop operation Using Cut Copy Paste You can move or copy files within File Manager using the Cut Copy Paste commands Cut Copy Paste commands are provided on the Edit menu the File Pane pop up menu and as function keys on the keyboard Some keyboards will have Cut Copy and Paste keys otherwise you can use the keyboard equivalents described in Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment When you cut material it is not deleted It is put on a clipboard where it is stored temporarily Only one item or group of items is stored on the clipboard at a time Note If you do another cut without using what is on the clipboard the previous information is lost Moving or Copying Files and Folders Using Cut and Paste To move or copy folders and files using the clipboard follow these steps Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll 1 Select the file or files you want to copy or move The
191. an example of a file pane with all rs files File Manager hightide e hightide egret Apps ScreenShots JIELL Contains 80 items basewindow rs cmapptfullsize rs cme cmaccesslistrs cmbrowser2 rs cmdaybot Figure 2 24 Using Pattern Matching with Go To to Select Related Files 88 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll Pattern Matching in the File Pane You can also use pattern matching to find files by moving the pointer into the File Pane and typing the pattern that you want to match The pattern you type is displayed in the footer As the pattern is typed all the files starting with the current pattern are selected For example when you type c the pattern is c and all the files starting with c are selected If you then type h the pattern becomes ch and only the files starting with ch are selected If you then type a the pattern becomes cha and the files starting with cha are selected and so on To finish the pattern press Return If there are no files that match the pattern an error message appears in the footer Using the Find Pop up Window When you do not know or cannot remember the specific location of a folder or file or when you want to locate a group of files according to specific criteria use the Find pop up window To display the Find window choose Find from the File menu The Find pop up window is displayed as shown in Figure 2 25 FM Find Find in and below folde
192. and release SELECT Icon Editor 423 19 424 Type text to be added to icon here Choose Square to draw open or filled squares or rectangles using any of the fill patterns described in the section Fill Choices on page 430 The fill patterns are active only when the Draw option is a fillable shape such as a square circle or ellipse Position the pointer at one corner of the square press SELECT drag the pointer to the opposite corner of the square or rectangle and release SELECT Choose Circle to draw open or filled circles using any of the fill patterns Position the pointer at the center of the circle and press SELECT drag the pointer to any point to the outside radius of the circle and release SELECT Choose Ellipse to draw open or filled ellipses Position the pointer at the center of the ellipse and press SELECT drag the pointer to the outside radius of the ellipse and release SELECT If you define a horizontal or vertical line the ellipse is interpreted as a straight line Choosing Text abc displays a pop up window shown in Figure 15 5 that allows you to type text that is associated with the icon Icon Editor Text avantgarde book Style oblique Size default Figure 15 5 Text Pop up Window Adding Text to the Canvas To add text to the canvas follow these steps 1 Click SELECT on the Text drawing mode option This displays the Text pop up window 2 Choose the font you want t
193. ands by modifying the file text_extras_menu By default and depending on how your system is configured the Text Editor uses the information found in the file usr openwin lib locale lt locale gt xview text_extras_menu lt locale gt is a subdirectory that contains locale specific text files The default is C but may vary depending on the country locale You can create your own copy of this file and tell the Text Editor to use it instead of the default in either of the following two ways e Change the value of the Xdefaults parameter text extrasMenuFilename or Text ExtrasMenuFilename to the path and file name of your customized file See the manual page for XView for information about the Xdefaults file e Set the environment variable EXTRASMENU to the desired file name If you specify both options the xXdefaults parameter will be used The standard Extras menu file is usr openwin lib locale C xview text_extras_menu and is shown in Figure 3 14 It will give you ideas about how to implement your own extras menu file Once you ve created a custom file and indicated where to find it using one of the previous methods you can make changes to the file and see them immediately implemented in the Extras menu These changes also affect other text panes in DeskSet applications such as the Mail Tool Compose window Text Editor 143 144 Text Editor text_extras_menu dir usr lib C text_extras_menu 1
194. another location in that or some other application The area in the middle of the scrollbar elevator or slider Keys on the keyboard that modify dragging actions when they are pressed in conjunction with a mouse button A facility that enables the exchange of information addressed to a particular individual or a group using computer communications facilities The part of the scrollbar that has up and down arrows and a drag area The elevator rides the scrollbar cable and shows the position of the view in the pane relative to the total data available Small rectangular buttons on a slider that are used to set the minimum or maximum setting A control that is used for mutually exclusive settings and is shown by touching rectangles The chosen setting is shown with a bold border around it A collection of data stored on a disk and assigned a name A DeskSet application that provides access to the file system through graphical icons that represent various file types File Manager can be used to load store and browse through files from the Workspace and from within an application Solaris User s Guide September 1995 File server File system Footer Foreground Full size Glyph Grab handles Header P a oH Took Load A sophisticated form of disk server that maintains a complete logical file system Networked computer you can independently access information on the file server Contrast this har
195. ans the documents found will be listed grouped by book with topics within a given book listed by relevance Limit Findings to Click SELECT to increase or decrease the default number of 30 findings per search Click SELECT on Apply to preserve your settings or click SELECT on Reset to undo your choices and restore the previous ones Advanced Search Techniques To make your searches more precise and more productive you can e Restrict modify the contents of your Library to constrain the scope of the search Choose the search setting Titles Only to search through book chapter and section titles rather than searching through the full text of documents Use special characters to mark your search phrases for literal suffix expansion and nearness matching Scoping the Search by Modifying the Library Contents By adding or removing an AnswerBook from your Library you can widen or narrow the scope of your search See Modifying Your Library on page 519 Titles Only Searches The Titles Only option restricts searches to book titles and chapter and section headings This search method is useful if you already know terms used in the titles or headings of documents you are looking for Using the AnswerBook Software 513 514 Using Special Characters in Search Phrases By adding special characters quotation marks parentheses and asterisks to your search phrases you can make searching more precise You
196. aph the Graph Type setting is activated on the Properties window Choose Line to display a single line graph and choose Solid to display a solid graph Figure 9 9 shows a Performance Meter with a line graph on the left and a solid graph on the right MIs cntxt cntxt A L Figure 9 9 Line Graph and Solid Graph Displays Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Ne lll Performance Meter Machine You can monitor performance for your own system or for another system on the network To monitor a remote system follow these steps 1 Click SELECT on the Remote Machine setting of the Performance Meter Properties window The Machine name text field is activated 2 Type the name of the machine you want to monitor in the text field 3 Click SELECT on the Apply or Set Default button The Performance Meter displays the name of the remote system at the bottom of the pane under the name of the value you are monitoring as shown in Figure 9 10 Click SELECT on Set Default to make the remote system the default monitored system every time you run the Performance Meter Figure 9 10 Monitoring a Remote Machine To change back to your system click SELECT on Local then click SELECT on the Apply or Set Default button Performance Meter Display and Sample Intervals You can change the Sample Time the frequency that the meters are updated and the units measured by the hour and minute hands on the dial display with the Sample time
197. ariac celtic gt Received from celtic Eng Sun COM by river Eng Sun CoM 5 0 SMI SYR4 id AA00670 Thu 18 Feb 93 11 00 10 PST Received by celtic Eng Sun COM 4 1 SMI 4 1 id 4404215 Thu 18 Feb 93 10 55 09 PST Date Thu 18 Feb 93 10 55 09 PST From mariac celtic Maria A Cherem Message Id lt 9302181855 4404215 celtic Eng Sun COM gt To egret river Subject Project Schedule Content Type X sun attachment K Lines 73 Status RO Content Length 2010 Here s the latest Project Schedule ae Attachments 1 attachment 1693 bytes Figure 4 5 Full Message Header The contents of the abbreviated header are determined by the Hide items on the Message Window Properties scrolling list All mail headers are displayed except those listed in the Hide scrolling list See Message Window Properties on page 199 for information about customizing your default abbreviated header with the Hide scrolling list Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll Viewing Multiple Mail Messages If you select multiple mail messages and display them by choosing Messages from the View menu a View Message window is opened for each message layered one on top of another in numerical order not in the order that you selected them Another way to view multiple mail messages is to pin an existing View window and then double click SELECT on another mail message header The new message will be displayed in a new View window Mail T
198. ars available to be browsed Setup menu button from which you type the user names login and system name of the calendars that you want to add to the browser scrolling list Multiple Calendars display on which any number of calendars can be overlaid to show a composite schedule Calendar Manager 243 244 In Figure 5 17 there is one calendar displayed A footer message tells you how many calendars are being displayed at any time The gray areas of the calendar display indicate the times that the selected user has scheduled an appointment If several calendars are being displayed the gray blocks have varying shades Darker blocks indicate more existing appointments during that time slot There are only up to three shades of gray so a time slot with four existing appointments will not appear any darker than a time slot with three appointments The white areas indicate times in which none of the selected users are busy Figure 5 18 shows Multiple Calendars with five calendars displayed The calendars displayed are those of the five users selected in the scrolling list The unshaded white area on Monday at 11 00 indicates that this is a time when the five selected users are all available gy CM Multiple Calendars Gua ae Calendars Busy At Time Selected CJ hamilton artemis lt patten phosphor wm sebring curry Setup Menu January 1993 5 Calendars Displayed Figure 5 18 Multi
199. ata Auto Adjust Button This button enables you to automatically set the optimum recording level This is recommended before a recording session begins or whenever the microphone is moved or the input source is changed Click SELECT on Auto Adjust to initiate scanning of the input sound data to determine its loudness The current level of the input signal is examined and if necessary minor adjustments are made to set a Record level If no signal is found the Record level jumps to the maximum then automatically adjusts down until the optimal level is achieved An LED like input level meter displays the sound level During the auto adjust operation no data is recorded The auto adjust procedure continues until a satisfactory level has been maintained for three to five seconds To adjust the level of your voice talk into the microphone in a normal speaking voice Speak continuously during the entire time for instance counting until the auto adjust operation ends If the input signal does not register on the level meter check the ON OFF switch on the microphone or replace the microphone battery You should also use the auto adjust operation to set the optimal recording level for input sources connected directly to the microphone jack such as a CD player or tape deck For best results play the loudest section of your audio Audio Tool 379 11 source during the auto adjust operation You can use the Monitor Volume to listen to th
200. ate Properties on page 210 for more information about templates If you are not going to include any attachments you can use the Include menu to turn off the Attachments pane at the bottom of the Compose Window allowing recipients to see more of the mail message The Deliver menu button provides choices for how the Compose window behaves once the message is sent The Header menu button provides choices for the number and type of text fields that make up the message header The default choice is Bcc which allows you to add or delete the blind carbon copy a copy of the message is sent to another recipient without the original recipient knowing field to the message header You can add other fields to this menu with the Custom Fields scrolling list in the Compose Window Properties sheet See Compose Window Properties on page 200 for more information The Aliases item brings up the Alias properties window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 The Clear button clears the contents of the window Your message is saved in the file dead letter whenever you use the Clear button or the Clear message item from the Compose window s Deliver menu See the man page for mailx 1 for information about dead letter and the save variable The Attach menu button brings up Voice which accesses AudioTool and allows you to compose a voice message See Chapter 11 Audio Tool for information about Audio Tool It also br
201. ate button to make a private copy of the entry You can then modify your private copy of the Binder entry For example suppose you want to change the color that File Manager uses to display folders Follow these steps 1 Select the entry default dir in the Binder base window scrolling list The footer message in the bottom right corner of the Binder indicates that this is a read only entry Click SELECT on the Duplicate button to copy the entry to your user database A new Binder entry is created called unnamed_1 with all the same Icon properties as the original default dir Binder entry You can modify this new user entry Rename the new Binder entry default dir This will put an entry called default dir in your personal user Binder database This personal entry will override the System or Network entry of the same name Note If you later create a second user entry called default dir only the entry created first will be recognized Change the background color to the new desired color You can either type in new RGB red green blue values in the Backgr Color text field or click SELECT on the Backgr Color window button to display the Color Chooser See the sections Backgr Background Color on page 450 and Using the Color Chooser Palette with Binder on page 464 for more information Click SELECT on the Apply button This updates the Icon name and color in the new Binder entry C
202. ate the new mail file or subdirectory Multimedia Mail Tool 187 188 Adding Messages to an Existing Mail File You can add messages to an existing mail file using only the controls on the Header window or using the Mail Files pop up window Both of these methods are described in the following sections Adding Messages to a Mail File Using the Header Window Controls Follow these steps to add messages to a mail file using only the controls on the Header window 1 Select the mail headers that you want to move or copy to the mail file 2 Move or copy the selected messages to an existing or new mail file as follows a If the desired mail file already exists and is listed in the Move and Copy menus simply choose the mail file from the Move or Copy menu b If the desired mail file already exists but is not listed on the Move and Copy menus choose the desired mail file from the Mail File menu and then click SELECT on the Move or Copy button The new mail file becomes the first and default item of the Move Copy and Load menus Adding Messages to a Mail File Using the Mail Files Popup Window Follow these steps to add messages to a mail file using the Mail Files window 1 Select the headers of the mail messages that you want to move or copy 2 Choose Mail Files from the File menu to display the Mail Files window 3 Select a mail file in the Mail Files window scrolling list If the desired mail file is in a subdirectory
203. ations 192 Dropping Files onto the Mail Tool 194 Customizing Mail Tool nnana ee eee ie tee nenne 194 Header Window Properties nunana aaen snn 195 Message Window Properties nauuna naa 199 Compose Window Propertiesiiiins sei evcece cede us yes 200 Automatically Storing Copies of Messages You Send 205 Mail Filing Properties icxc2ivkaeav ei coe ere cee SOB 206 Saving Mail to Another Location 005 207 Template Properties iss iu vecereevawe seeds ee ee reso 210 Alias Properties cncaeeensheb neues depen eve vusencseny 212 Expert PROperes cerere terenit ariani E nanan dx om 214 5 Calendar Manaterin io ieiawavwveisdsatavdavcaee een ener 219 Calendar Manager Icons uielaieiiieceececbet erin 220 CONS 2 both sees ct6 leet e ei i 220 Calendar Manager Base Window 00 0000s eee 220 Views by Day Week Month and Year 220 Calendar Manager Controls and Menus 221 View MENU miee sere te ee eE RA E iat Aa RE R 222 xii Title of Book Month 1992 Edit Menu 0 0 cee ee tuuu CEN EEUN k eens 222 Browse M nu 94 e nese eee e sp eme Phe CHEN een E 223 Print Men e erer rhea unueta a ae 223 Navigation Controls 2i tiviiadeiels sesse ereere 223 Resizing Your Calendar nsun nunnana rnrn 223 Calendar Views ciicctdiccuiveedes ooteie he eh eeu dadgews 224 OE VieW ak cn cine ee ene eee ed ERE AA her 2
204. attached to an electronic mail message when you notify the application that you have finished recording The mail recipient can hear the contents of the audio file by double clicking SELECT on the audio attachment glyph from Mail Tool Refer to Chapter 4 Multimedia Mail Tool for information on using Mail Tool To record an audio file and attach it to a mail message do the following 1 Click SELECT on the Compose button in the Mail Tool control area and address the mail Click SELECT on the Attach gt Voice button in the Mail Tool Compose window control area The Audio Tool window appears as shown in Figure 11 9 Note that the mail button labeled Done appears only when Audio Tool is invoked from the Mail Tool Attach button Solaris User s Guide September 1995 11 AudioTool Untitled From mailtool File v Edit 7 Volume 7 gO oo Cc Cc Cc e gt gt gt e 2 Cc Rev Play Fwd Rec Done C Selection Request Completed Figure 11 9 Audio Tool Window Opened From the Mail Tool Compose Window 3 Record your voice message as described in the section Recording Sound on page 345 4 Make any editing changes as described in the section Editing an Audio File on page 348 5 Click SELECT on the Done button The audio attachment glyph appears in the Attachments window Figure 11 10 Note also that if you have a pre recorded message in Audio Too
205. ave The audio file format is incompatible with the audio device You may Convert to a playable format and load as a new file Load the file as is play and record will be disabled or Cancel this operation Load Cancel Figure 11 16 File Conversion Pop Up Click SELECT on the Convert button to convert the file into a format that is supported by your computer s hardware Click SELECT on the Load button to load the file into Audio Tool s canvas If you load the file you will not be able to play it However you can perform editing operations on the file such as cutting and pasting segments and save the result into a new format Cancel Button Click SELECT this button to close the Open window If you open a compressed audio file the conversion can take a long time The Cancel button remains active and can be used to cancel the in progress load conversion Save enables you to save changes made to the current audio file Click SELECT on the Save menu item to save the file If a file has been named and previously saved clicking SELECT on Save replaces the old copy with the current version If the audio data has not been saved previously or has not yet been edited the Audio Tool Save As window is displayed The Save item is dimmed if no audio file is loaded following a New operation for example or if the audio file has not been edited since a previous Save Audio Tool 363 11 Save As Save As enabl
206. can combine the characters to further refine your search Quotation Marks Searching for Literal Phrases Place the search phrase between double quotation marks to find documents that contain that literal phrase For example the search phrase reading mail finds documents containing that phrase On the other hand if you type reading mail you will find documents containing one or both words Parentheses Searching for Words in Proximity Place words between parentheses to find documents with those words in proximity to each other For example the search phrase reading mail will find all documents that have reading and mail within a few lines of each other in either order Asterisks and Hyphens Searching for Variations on a Word Place an asterisk at the end of a word to match all possible endings of the word For example the search phrase chang will expand to change changed changes changing and so on If you do not know whether a term is one word two words or hyphenated in the documentation you can insert the hyphen to look for all three forms For example to search for mail tool mailtool and mail tool type mail tool in the Search For pane Connecting Punctuation Words connected by punctuation other than a hyphen are treated character for character as literal phrases for example usr local bin win_client_data and in rlogind Solaris User s Guide Sep
207. ce if the location of OPENWINHOME is usr local bin then usr local bin is the path name A menu that has its pushpin pushed in A pinned menu is a pop up window that remains on the Workspace until you dismiss it by clicking SELECT on the pushpin An abbreviation for picture element the smallest unit that can be displayed on a computer screen Any graphic representation of the location of the input focus on the screen When the pointer automatically moves to a specific location such as to a pop up window A menu accessed by pressing the MENU mouse button on any area of the Workspace that is not a control The menu that is displayed depends on the location of the mouse pointer Glossary 569 Pop up window Pop up window menu Window Back Refresh Owner PostScript Press Prompt Properties Property window 570 A window that is displayed to perform a specific function and is then dismissed Command windows property windows help windows and Notices are all pop up windows The window menu that is displayed when you press the MENU mouse button in a window A programming language used to produce text and graphics on a printer or display originated by Adobe Systems To push and hold a mouse button The location at which you enter commands This is often the machine s host name followed by a percent sign such as examples When you are in superuser mode t
208. ch command from the Custom Commands submenu and type the text string to search for in the window that is displayed Press RETURN to quit or SELECT Quit from the output window Advanced Settings You can change the way File Manager behaves and the way it presents certain information by changing controls in the Advanced Settings window To display the Advanced Settings window choose Advanced Settings from Category The File Manager Tool Properties window is shown in Figure 2 46 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll FM Properties Category amp Advanced Settings Print Method Update File System Every cat FILE mp lo Ip 5 Ie seconds Follow Symbolic Links Yes View Filter Pattern Default Editor Text Editor Open File Manager window upon insertion of CDROM Use generic icons for faster display Floppy Disk CDROM No ves Figure 2 46 Tool Properties Window Print Method The Print Method text field allows you to specify a default UNIX print script for files that are printed from File Manager that do not have a print method defined in the Binder database The print script shown in Figure 2 46 prints your files in landscape mode on your default printer using the mp PostScript pretty printer If you want to change the print script make sure to type FILI in the script where the file name should be inserted GJ File Manager 113 114 View Filter Pattern T
209. ch for in the text field The Find window contains a text field where you type in the appointment that you want to search for The text that you type can be any part of the appointment description and can be in upper or lower case For example Figure 5 14 shows a Find window with the word Dentist typed in the Match Appt text field This will find the next appointment with the word dentist upper or lower case in the What field including Dentist appointment See the dentist DENTIST Pay dentist bill and so forth gy CM Find Match Appt Dentist Months 12 a y Find Forward Find Backward Figure 5 14 Calendar Manager Find Window Calendar Manager 239 Use the Months text field and increment decrement buttons to specify the number of months that you want to search for an appointment starting with the currently displayed month Clicking SELECT on Find Forward searches forward for the number of months specified and clicking SELECT on Find Backward searches backward for that number of months Finding a Specific Calendar Date Sometimes you may need to look at or go to a specific date very quickly Instead of using the navigator buttons to do this you can use the Go To function 1 Choose View gt GoTo You see the Go To Date window 2 Type the exact date on the Date line and SELECT the GoTo button The date must be in the format specified in the Date Format Properties
210. changes the display of the Calculator keys to show the keyboard equivalents of each Calculator key for mouseless operation of the Calculator See the section Calculator Function Keys on page 316 or the calctool manual page for more information about the Calculator keyboard mapping e Accuracy Acc chooses the number of digits of precision used in the calculator display This key has a pop up menu associated with it which lets you specify 0 through 9 radix places The default value is 2 radix places e Quit quits the Calculator 302 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Co lll Memory Registers The Calculator has 10 memory registers that you can access using the keys shown in Figure 8 9 Figure 8 9 Memory Register Keys Memory Mem displays a pop up window showing the values of the 10 memory registers in the current base to the current accuracy Store Sto stores the current value in the memory register that you choose from the Store pop up menu Recall Rcl retrieves a value from the memory register that you choose from the Recall pop up menu Register Exchange Exch exchanges the contents of the current display with the current value in the memory register that you choose from the Exch key pop up menu To display the Exch Sto and Rcl pop up menus press MENU on the buttons Calculator 303 8 User Defined Functions The Calculator allows you to enter your own set of constants and to define
211. choices indicate the current value of the four custom buttons You select one of these choices to change the value of that custom button The Command setting shows you the command of the currently selected button that is what the button does The Command menu button provides a menu of all of the available commands from the File View Edit and Compose menus The Label text field determines what the custom button says Usually this is the same as the command but it doesn t have to be Sometimes the command is too long to fit in the button so the Label might be an abbreviation of the actual command To change the value of a custom button follow the steps below 1 Select the Custom Buttons choice that you want to change The first choice represents the first button on the second row of the Header window the second choice represents the second button and so on 2 Choose the desired command from the Command menu shown in Figure 4 32 The first column in the Command menu displays all the choices available from the Mail Tool File menu the second column displays the choices from the View menu the third displays the choices from the Edit menu and the last column displays the choices from the Compose menu Multimedia Mail Tool 197 198 Q Mail Tool Properties Category w Header window Sort By Subject Sort By Size Sort By Status Custom Buttons Done
212. click SELECT on enter 75 then click SELECT on The Calculator returns the result 30 Sqrt returns the square root of the currently displayed value Parentheses give a calculation arithmetic precedence All calculations within parentheses are calculated first Parentheses can be nested The result of an operation containing parentheses is not performed until the last parenthesis is matched Exp starts exponential input Any number entered after you choose Exp is taken to be the exponent portion of this number The numbers entered before the Exp key are taken to be the mantissa If no numerical input has occurred when the Exp key is entered a mantissa of 1 0 is assumed You can use the key after entering the exponent to change its arithmetic sign Asc displays the ASCII value of a character in the appropriate numeric base Clicking on the Asc key displays a small pop up window Type the character that you want an ASCII equivalent for in the Character text field of the Get ASCII window and then click SELECT on the ASCII button The ASCII equivalent becomes the current value in the Calculator base window Calculator 301 8 Miscellaneous Functions The Calculator has five miscellaneous functions shown in Figure 8 8 Figure 8 8 Miscellaneous Functions e Clear Clr clears the current value from the display Backspace Bsp deletes the rightmost character of the current display and recalculates its value Keys
213. clipboard but is not removed from the icon If you don t have a region currently defined the entire icon is copied to the clipboard Before choosing Paste on the Edit menu define the region where you want to paste the contents of the clipboard When you choose Paste on the Edit menu the contents of the clipboard are copied to the icon placed so that the upper left corner of the clipboard contents matches the upper left corner of the current region If you choose Paste from the keyboard depending on your keyboard type the contents of the clipboard are placed so that the upper left corner of the image goes to the position of the mouse Choose the Invert item on the Edit menu when you have a black and white icon to change black pixels to white and vice versa in your current region If you do not have a region selected Invert works on the entire icon If your icon is color the Invert item is dimmed and unavailable The Properties menu provides options to change the icon format and size Use the Format item to specify the default format for the icon to be saved in After you select a format that format will be used when you choose Save on the File menu That format also becomes the default item of the Save menu on the File pop up window See Loading and Saving a File on page 432 for more information The following icon formats are available If your icon is in color it can be saved as a color X pixmap image This type of ic
214. clusively licensed through X Open Company Ltd OPEN LOOK is a registered trademark of Novell Inc PostScript and Display PostScript are trademarks of Adobe Systems Inc All other product service or company names mentioned herein are claimed as trademarks and trade names by their respective companies All SPARC trademarks including the SCD Compliant Logo are trademarks or registered trademarks of SPARC International Inc in the United States and may be protected as trademarks in other countries SPARCcenter SPARCcluster SPARCompiler SPARCdesign SPARC811 SPARCengine SPARCprinter SPARCserver SPARCstation SPARCstorage SPARCworks microSPARC microSPARC II and UltraSPARC are licensed exclusively to Sun Microsystems Inc Products bearing SPARC trademarks are based upon an architecture developed by Sun Microsystems Inc The OPEN LOOK and Sun Graphical User Interfaces were developed by Sun Microsystems Inc for its users and licensees Sun acknowledges the pioneering efforts of Xerox in researching and developing the concept of visual or graphical user interfaces for the computer industry Sun holds a non exclusive license from Xerox to the Xerox Graphical User Interface which license also covers Sun s licensees who implement OPEN LOOK GUI s and otherwise comply with Sun s written license agreements X Window System is a trademark of X Consortium Inc THIS PUBLICATION IS PROVIDED AS IS WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND EITH
215. crolling list in Figure 4 34 You can add any header to the Hide list that you see when viewing messages You can type the header in any case For example adding the header content length hides the headers Content Length content length CONTENT LENGTH and so forth When you have changed Message Window properties click SELECT on the Apply button The Print Script and Hide property settings become effective immediately Compose Window Properties You use the Compose Window Properties category to customize items on the Compose window To see the Compose Window Properties shown in Figure 4 35 choose Compose Window from the Category menu at the top of the Properties popup window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll No Mail Tool Properties Category E Compose Window Included Text Marker gt Logged Messages File record W Log all messages Defaults W Request confirmations W Show attachment list Custom Fields Header Field Default Value Figure 4 35 Compose Window Properties Included Text Marker Use the Included Text Marker field to specify the characters that precede each line of an included text message The default value is gt This puts the right arrow character at the start of the included message when you choose Indented from the compose window Include menu Tabs are not accepted as an indent character but spaces are Figure 4 3
216. cross the Workspace to a new location A border box the size of the window moves with the pointer 3 Release SELECT The window appears in the new location Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 25 26 Moving Multiple Windows You can group windows together so that they move as a unit For instance you may want to arrange several windows on the Workspace in relationship to one another and then move the whole arrangement to a new location One way to group several windows is to click SELECT on one of the windows and ADJUST on each additional window Alternatively you can drag the pointer across the Workspace to form a box around the windows you want to group You can do this as follows 1 Place the pointer in the Workspace at one corner of the set of windows you want to group 2 Press SELECT and drag the pointer diagonally to the opposite corner of the group This forms a rectangle around any windows and icons that are fully enclosed within the border box 3 Release the mouse button The items are selected as a unit 4 Place the pointer on the edge of one of the grouped windows as described in the last section Positioning Windows and Pinned Menus press SELECT and drag the pointer to a new location The group of windows moves to the new location 5 To un group the applications press SELECT anywhere on the Workspace Moving a Window Front or Back To move a window in back of another window 1 Mo
217. ction will do to your icon because of this feature If you don t like the results simply use Undo and Redo to restore the icon to the way you like it best Each time you Undo an action that action becomes available to you as a Redo action up to a maximum of seven actions Each Redo performs the most recent Undo action The number of Undo actions and Redo actions that are available to you at any time is displayed in the Icon Editor footer You can clear the canvas by choosing Clear from the Edit menu No warning notice is displayed If you change your mind choose Undo from the Edit menu Cut Copy and Paste You can use the Cut Copy and Paste items to move and copy regions of your icon or the entire icon When you choose Cut on the Edit menu the current region is removed from the icon and put on the clipboard If you don t have a region currently defined the entire icon is deleted and put on the clipboard To define a region choose the Region drawing mode move the pointer to the canvas where you want to start the region press SELECT drag the pointer to the opposite corner of the desired region and release SELECT The region is displayed by a dashed line border The lines of the border appear to be blinking like the lighted sign of a theater marquee Solaris User s Guide September 1995 if Invert Properties Menu Icon Format When you choose Copy on the Edit menu the current region is copied to the
218. culator key 315 A Abbreviated Header Mail Tool 156 Abs Calculator key 301 absolute value 301 Acc Calculator key 302 accelerator keys 477 accented characters 543 Access List and Permissions properties 261 AccessX 545 to 558 automatic shut off 548 beeping on locked keys 554 BounceKeys 557 controlling repeat behavior of keys 555 holding a key down 551 ignore multiple key presses 557 initial delay of repeating keys 555 keyboard equivalent of mouse buttons 552 keystrokes for features 558 latching and locking keys 551 main window 547 MouseKeys 552 pressing two keys at once 551 preventing accidental input 556 RepeatKeys 555 setting rate of repeating keys 555 Settings window 549 SlowKeys 556 sound when feature enabled disabled 548 starting 546 StickyKeys 551 ToggleKeys 554 accidental input preventing 556 Accuracy Acc key Calculator 302 Add Tree s Parent File Manager 67 adding and deleting text 137 Oe 578 ADJUST mouse button 8 Again operation keyboard equivalent 11 Again Edit menu 130 Alarm controls Calendar Manager 232 235 alarm Clock 293 aliases local 214 private 212 All Entries Binder 444 allnet Mail Tool 215 And Calculator key 314 AND logical 314 AnswerBook bookmarks 515 searching 509 application default 13 See also applications by their respective names 36 starting 36 application icon File Manager 59 Application text field Bin
219. cuments 4 391 Viewing Single Page Images and Multiple Page Documents 391 Formats that Image Tool Can Open 045 391 Opening Your File in a Specific Format 393 Getting Information About Your Image 395 Saving Image Files and Documents o oo nunnan 395 Saving an IMage cane eee eee Bese see ee EEK Eee axe ma e 395 PAVE AS tc sioetu a ake eaeecece eee 397 Save Selection AS 2 cccivh ae a ieee canker 398 Save Page As IMaSC lt ic capbosetneiehereui Ree decaes 399 Printing Mages serer crete wk peepee dose yb nd HERR Eee een 399 Using the Image Tool Palette eve vers peedeeew seer este 401 Panning an lMape sce coche erated en ee ee eae ee 402 Selecting An Area to Be SAVEd 644s cncdadigeneceed seas 402 Title of Book Month 1992 Flipping an Im g s erriei epres teter LENE eens any 403 Rotating an Image n a wees tak ee nunnan narran 404 Zooming an Image 5 eee e eee eee nrnna eee ees 405 Viewing Multiple Page Documents 04 24 c0 60beiiaes 406 Page OVERVIEW 11504254255 9oe5ore8 boone eee ieee tees 406 Page Viewing Controls 121i 9ii s5s pieven Gus eqeeedaues 407 Setting Image Tool Properties eve 1isededekawe ner nnne 408 Status Messages Error Messages and Help 409 Dragging and Dropping iid ntnectenianits ceria eeneuny 409 Image Tool Controls and Menus 00 000000 410 Pile Men ere ee serian aean sey eee SEER E EES Ea 410 View Ment c
220. d When you choose Move or Copy the chosen mail file in your mailbox is stored in a file named myfile in the subdirectory named tmp under the root directory Modifying the Default Location Using Mail Tool s Properties window you can permanently change the default location for your saved mail For instance you could change the name of the Folders directory or you could save your mail to a location directly relative to your home directory To change the default location for your saved mail follow these steps 1 From the Mail Tool base window s control area choose Edit gt Properties The Mail Tool Properties window appears 2 Position the pointer on the Category menu button and choose Mail Filing The Mail Filing properties appear in the Properties window 3 Double click SELECT on the word Folders on the text field Folders is highlighted for example 4 Choose the default location for your saved mail a To change the name of the Folders directory type in a new name such as Mail b To save mail directly under your home directory type SHOME This will expand to the actual path name of your home directory 5 Click SELECT on the Apply button A pop up message asks if SHOME should be expanded to the path name of your home directory 6 Click SELECT on the Expand String button The Properties window is dismissed Multimedia Mail Tool 209 210 Saving Mail to the New Default Location Sa
221. d The Beep and Flash settings cause the Calendar Manager icon to beep and flash if it is closed The Calendar Manager window itself will beep and flash if it is open If you choose PopUp at the time specified for PopUp the appointment Reminder window is displayed showing the appointment information Choosing the Mail setting automatically mails a reminder to the email addresses you type into the Mail To text field Repeat controls specify the following if the appointment is individual Daily Weekly Every Two Weeks Monthly By Date this is the date of the appointment such as the first or the fifteenth of the month Monthly By Weekday this is the weekday of the appointment such as every third Tuesday of the month Yearly Monday thru Friday Mon Wed Fri Tuesday Thursday or repeat the appointment for a set amount of days weeks or months Repeat Every When an appointment repeats use the For field to set the number of times the appointment is repeated during the day week or month You can also set a limit on the amount of day s week s or month s it is repeated e You can drag and drop appointments from Mail Tool onto the Appointment Editor You can change the default settings for the Appointment Editor window from the Calendar Manager Properties window See Customizing Your Calendar Manager on page 257 for more information about properties Use the set of buttons at the bottom of the default Appointment Editor
222. d above and then choose Open Close from the Window Controls menu Similarly you can close a group of applications to their icon form without having to close each one individually Resizing a Group of Applications or Icons To increase the size of several applications on the workspace select the group of windows and choose Full Restore Size from the Window Controls submenu This operation increases the size of the selected application windows to the full height of the screen Choosing Full Restore Size in the Window Controls submenu a second time without deselecting any of the windows decreases the size of each of the windows in the group to its former size Moving a Group of Applications to the Back Selecting a group of windows quickly and moving them behind another window To do this select the group you want to move to the back and choose Back from the Window Controls submenu Solaris User s Guide September 1995 18 Save Workspace Lock Screen Quitting a Group of Windows You can quit a number of applications at once by selecting the group of windows or icons and choosing Quit from the Window Controls submenu When you have applications you want to display on the workspace on a regular basis you may want to save the workspace layout This means applications will display when you exit the Solaris environment and enter again You can save the workspace as often as you like whenever you develop a new arrangement
223. ded For example if you drop a file or text selection onto the Text Editor s drag and drop target the entire contents of the Text Editor are replaced by the dropped file or text Some drag and drop targets contain lines to indicate that the entire contents of the current application can be dragged out of the drop target For example when you drag the lined area from the Text Editor drag and drop target the entire contents of the Text Editor are dragged Figure 1 22 Drag and Drop Target Containing a Draggable Object You can sometimes drop an object directly into a pane that contains data in order to add the object instead of loading it For example you might want to drop text somewhere within a text pane to insert the dropped text into the existing text of the pane instead of replacing the existing text which would happen if you dropped the text on the drag and drop target Another common example is to drop a file onto a folder in the File Manager to add that file to the folder There are many ways to drag and drop files among DeskSet Applications The following are several examples e You can print a file by dragging it and dropping it onto the Print Tool icon or its drag and drop target Figure 1 23 shows Print Tool s drag and drop target Chapter 10 Print Tool discusses Print Tool in detail Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 23 24 Print Tool Drag and Drop arget for Print ool Filename Head
224. der e Use Hide Sub Folders to hide all sub folders below the selection U se Start Folder View Here to begin showing the folder view from the selected folder e Use Add Parent the parent of the folder selected folder Go To can be used the same way as described in Go To Menu and Text Field on page 64 Folder View Options The Folder View contains commands that you can use to prune the Folder or tree view so that it contains branches of the tree that are useful to you and hides other folders that you may not need to access If you frequently move or copy files between folders you may find that using the Folder View allows you to perform more operations using drag and drop since more folders can be displayed in the Folder View Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll When you open the Folder View window you can choose the following options e Hide Sub Folders e Show All Sub Folders Begin Tree Here Add Tree s Parent Subfolders are folders that are farther down the tree than the current folder Figure 2 7 shows a Folder View that contains most of the folders from the root directory downward FM Folder View hightide egret Seafood FreshwaterFish New Folder OceanFish Figure 2 7 Example of a Folder View The following examples show a series of progressions using each of the view modification commands from the Folder View File Manager 67 l
225. der 450 appointment reminders 238 scheduling 233 appointment list Calendar Manager 228 appointments Appointment Editor 229 pop up window 230 deleting 236 editing 237 finding 239 repeating 234 scheduling 229 Appt ToDo Calendar Manager 231 arc cosine function Calculator 315 arc sine function Calculator 315 arc tangent function Calculator 315 arithmetic precedence 301 Asc Calculator key 301 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 ASCII 301 ASCII text editor 125 attached file caution about executables 174 attachments Mail Tool 149 173 adding 178 attachments pane 159 deleting 182 drag and drop 194 moving 180 opening 174 printing 162 renaming 179 sending 176 Audio Control Auto Adjust button 375 Play window 372 Record window 373 Audio Tool 341 to 376 Auto play on load 370 Auto play on selection 370 Confirm on new load 370 converting audio files 362 cursor location 354 deleting 349 drag and drop target 355 drag and drop to Mail Tool 351 Edit menu 367 editing an audio file 348 file conversion window 362 File menu 358 Fwd fast forward button 357 inserting audio data 366 loading a file 361 loading an audio file 344 Open window illustration 361 Play button 356 play position pointer 355 playing an audio file 344 pointer location 354 Rec record stop button 357 recording sound with 345 Rev reverse button 356 saving an audio file 347 363 sending v
226. der to folder by double clicking SELECT to open each one Folder View expands to show subfolders and rearranges the other branches of the file system tree After you open a folder an open folder icon indicates that the folder has been opened For example in Figure 2 13 the folder labelled home has been opened You can expand or reduce the number of folders in the Folder View by choosing View items from the Folder View menu You can toggle between showing Horizontal and Vertical views Show All Sub Folders Hide Sub Folders Start Folder View and Add the folder s Parent Once you have chosen one of these items from the menu File Manager remembers it When you choose Folder View again the view displayed is the last format that you chose for the Folder View See Customizing Your File Manager on page 98 for examples of these other kinds of displays Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll File Pane The file pane displays the contents of the open folder in the path pane When you first start File Manager the file pane displays icons with names beneath them as shown in Figure 2 14 File Manager hightide eg Cie Ger Git Ges Path Pane hightide egret IELI Contains 8 items rtfiles dead letter O Q Fish my_printscript Figure 2 14 Icons in the File Pane File Pane Pop up Menu To use the File Pane pop up menu Press MENU from within the File Pane File Manager 73 De
227. dio File on page 348 for information on how to do this Saving an Audio File To save your file do the following 1 Choose File gt Save As The Audio Tool Save As window appears as shown in Figure 11 6 ow Audio Tool Save As Type in the path to the folder and press Return Current Folder fhome robertg Latestaudiotool Use the scrollbar to choose a directory Select a file or folder and click Open Folder ca ff Go up one folder J Save As Format 7 16 bit linear 22 05kHz stereo Compress None File Size 5 7 Mbytes 207 1 Mb Available Show ll Files Figure 11 6 Saving a File in the Save As Window 2 Double click SELECT on the directory destination for the file from the scrolling directory list 3 Type the file name in the Save As text field Audio Tool 347 11 Editing an Audio File 348 4 Click MENU on the Format menu button to choose an appropriate format The current format is displayed next to the menu button 5 Click MENU on the Compress menu button to make a compression choice The current compression setting is displayed next to the menu button 6 Click SELECT on the Save button The file you named is saved in the selected directory You can cancel a file save operation by clicking SELECT on the Cancel button in the Save As window Or you can press the keyboard s Stop key while the mouse cursor is in Audio Tool s base wind
228. displays the selected day and lists scheduled appointments in the scrolling list as shown in Figure 5 8 Calendar Manager 229 lll nN Displays selected Date Set appointment time here Type information about the appointment here Alarm controls Advance settings CM Appointment Editor egret river Drag and Drop Date 2 12 93 Appointment Target Month Day Year art 7 10 00 _ Appointments Choose between Stop 11 00 10 00 Staff Meeting Appointment and 11 00 Engineering Team Mee To Do What Staff Meeting 3 00 Writer s Team Meeting Existing appts Calendars Insert Acces Access setting egret river Yy Mmg Repeat 7 One Time For repeating Appts ne Fer E Mail To omni Privacy Show Time and Text Privacy settings insert Delete Change Reset Author egret Editing Buttons Figure 5 8 Appointment Editor Pop up Window Appointment Editor Options 230 The Appointment Editor window contains the following controls e A Date field that automatically displays the selected date You can type in another date to schedule additional appointments You can change the format of the Date field with the Calendar Manager Properties window See Date Format Properties on page 266 for more information A Start and Stop set of controls that you use to set the time of the appointment You can either use the time menu or type in a number in the t
229. ditor Their default pane menus To open a Shell Tool window choose Workspace gt Programs gt Shell Tool Note Open as many Shell Tools as you need but remember that as you add more applications to the Workspace you may compromise system performance Figure 6 4 shows the Shell Tool icon and Figure 6 5 shows an open Shell Tool window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 O lll Figure 6 4 Shell Tool Icon shelltool bin csh Figure 6 5 Shell Tool Window A Shell Tool window has a header with a Window menu button a Window menu resize corners and a terminal emulator pane A Shell Tool window does not have a scrollbar at start up but you can enable scrolling if desired The insert point is shown by a block cursor When the insert point is not in the Shell Tool the block cursor is displayed as an outline of the block cursor Editing is limited to the end of the current line For example you can only delete characters on the current line Once you press Return the characters on the line are interpreted as a command If you are not familiar with these window elements refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment Command Tool Shell Tool and Console Window 281 282 Shell Tool Term Pane Menu To display the Shell Tool terminal emulator pane menu move the pointer anywhere into the Shell Tool pane and press MENU Choose Enable Page Mode to display only
230. ditor Defaults properties 258 hour display 261 Printer Settings properties 264 reminders Beep 232 235 Flash 232 235 Mail 232 235 PopUp 232 235 scheduling appointments 233 time zone 256 ToDo list 228 views appointment list view 228 day view 224 ToDo list view 228 week view 225 year view 227 Calendar template 167 211 Capitalize Text Editor 134 caret 9 Cc Mail Tool 159 change arithmetic sign 301 Change Line Wrap 128 changing appointments 237 binding 462 day boundaries 259 changing default menu item 16 changing ramp up speed of pointer 554 characters accented 543 581 582 characters jumbled 540 checksum 388 checksumerror 537 Circle Icon Editor 424 Clear log 277 Clear log Command Tool 277 Clear Calculator 302 Clear Icon Editor 436 Clear Mail Tool 159 Click ADJUST definition 9 Click SELECT definition 9 click definition 8 clicking mouse buttons how to set time out period 481 Click to Type 488 Clip Lines Text Editor 130 clipboard 130 clipboard File Manager 78 Clock 285 Alarm settings 293 base window 286 changing timezone 290 customizing 286 icon 285 keyboard accelerators 293 properties 287 troubleshooting 530 closing Help Viewer 55 Navigator 504 Viewer 504 window 29 Clr Calculator key 302 cm_delete 274 cm_insert 274 cm_lookup 274 Cmd Modes submenu 278 collisions 326 color brightness 473 hue 473 in Workspace and windows
231. dow on the WorkSpace as shown in Figure 2 48 If the diskette is not formatted you see the window in Figure 2 51 on page 120 File Manager 119 lll No 3 Choose Format Floppy from the File menu Make sure the floppy window is active Format Floppy Are you sure you want to format this floppy disk WARNING Formatting will destroy any information on the disk and is not undoable Please select a format UNIX DOS High Density NEC DOS Medium Density Disk Name Format Disk Figure 2 51 The Floppy Format Disk Window If you choose to Format the disk this is your last chance to Cancel 4 Click Format Disk When the initialization has been complete you see the File Manager window on the WorkSpace as shown in Figure 2 48 120 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll Unformatted Floppy If you inserted an unformatted floppy disk the following popup displays Unformatted Floppy This floppy disk is unreadable It may be blank or contain data in an unreadable format Do you want to format it WARNING Formatting will destroy any information on the disk and is not undoable Please select a format UNIX DOS High Density NEC DOS Medium Density Disk Name Format Disk Cancel amp Eject Figure 2 52 Unformatted Floppy Popup You can choose to e format the disk refer to Reformatting a Floppy Disk on page 119 for information on reformatting the disk or
232. dow represents a single electronic mail message and is called the header for the mail message Mail Tool var mail egret Mail File thief cici Thu Feb 18 10 42 18 506 Your Move patten newbirth Thu Feb 18 10 49 46 1282 Project Status bgahl scuba Thu Feb 18 10 50 32 1110 Inbox status ayers outhouse Thu Feb 18 10 51 177532 SunU Training Registration ayers outhouse Thu Feb 18 10 51 17 511 vi command summary mhariac celtic Thu Feb 18 11 00 90 2531 Project Schedule hamilton artemis Thu Feb 18 11 13 22 611 meeting reminder abelson sharonolds Thu Feb 18 11 34 32 1232 Your position paper aquab lu cowman Thu Feb 18 13 58 21 647 Summer Collaboration Message Headers 1 2 3 4 5 8 3 0 11 items 1 new 2 deleted F Figure 4 2 Primary Mail Tool Header Window Mail Message Headers Each message header has six fields or columns of information as follows The first field shows you the status of the mail message e An arrow points to current messages messages currently displayed e An N shows you that the message is new e A U shows that a message is unread that is it has been saved without having been read A blank is displayed after you have viewed the message e A diamond indicates that the message contains attachments The second field contains a message number that is automatically assigned to messages by the Mail Tool in the order in which they are loaded e The third field contains the mail address of
233. dows environment In Figure 11 11 the selected audio data includes both sound and silence Once a segment has been selected clicking SELECT on Play activates only that selection Selected data can be dragged and dropped into other applications such as Mail Tool and File Manager or other invocations of Audio Tool Using multiple Audio Tool windows enables you to assemble audio data from multiple files or break large files into smaller sections Audio attachments to a mail file are discussed earlier in this chapter as well as in the Mail Tool chapter Cursor and Pointer Location Cursor and Pointer locations are displayed in the upper right corner of the Audio Tool window with time offset of MM SS d where MM is minutes SS is seconds and d is tenths of seconds Whenever the mouse position marker is Solaris User s Guide September 1995 LS moved into the display canvas and when a file is loaded the marker is shown as a thin vertical line hairline cursor and its location is displayed as a time offset In Figure 11 11 the cursor is located near the beginning of the audio file location 0 01 4 The Play Record pointer information shows the location of the play record position pointer in the display canvas The position pointer marks the data that is currently being played recorded or where playing or recording will begin when the Play or Rec button is pressed It also marks where include drag and drop and paste operati
234. ds per key to 10 that is ten keys per second The higher you set this value the faster the key repeats Set this to a low value to keep a pressed key from repeating or from repeating too quickly Move the Repeat rate slider to the value you want See Figure B 4 Access for Users With Disabilities 555 556 SlowKeys Users who have trouble typing often hit the wrong key or keys while trying to type They may for example hit r while reaching to type t When SlowKeys is turned on only keys that are held down for a minimum specified time will be accepted as input Keys that are hit inadvertently will not register Note Both SlowKeys and BounceKeys cannot be active at once Turning SlowKeys On and Off Turn SlowKeys on and off in either of these ways e Check the SlowKeys check box on the AccessX main window Hold either Shift key down for at least eight seconds The machine will beep at four seconds to let you know you re turning this feature on or off Valid only if you ve started OpenWindows with the accessx option Note Holding down the Shift key for eight seconds also turns on RepeatKeys SlowKeys Settings Setting the Notification Style You may want to be notified of a key s status while SlowKeys is active That way you don t have to guess whether you ve held the key down long enough for it to be accepted There are two check boxes pressed and accepted in the
235. dware term with the software term window server In the case of the SunOS system software a tree structured network of files and directories through which you can move to access the various files The bottom area of a window The footer is used by an application for information and error messages The controls and the pane of a window To increase the size of a window to its maximum as determined by the application Full Size is an item on the window menu that allows you to perform that function After you make a window full size the label in the item toggles to Restore Size A picture or graphical representation of an object The graphical shapes marking the edges of a window Using the mouse and pointer you can grab the grab handles of the window to stretch or reduce its size The band across the top of every window Each header has a centered title Base windows have a Window menu button on the left pop up windows have a pushpin on the left Glossary 565 9 Application Help Pushpin Use the pushpin to keep a pop up window pinned t Highlighting Hypertext Icon printtool Input area Insert point Keyboard accelerator Locale 566 An OPEN LOOK UI implementation that provides on screen help for each element in a window The application provides help for application functions and elements The Help function is available from the keyboard by pressing Help or F1 de
236. e extra large Note Not all fonts styles and sizes appear on the screen satisfactorily If the size is too large some items such as menu buttons may be obscured Specifying the Font Style 474 Default fonts include e Windows Lucida Sans in 12 point medium e Window headers Lucida Sans Bold Text subwindows Lucida Sans Typewriter If you prefer you can specify another font style and size Solaris User s Guide September 1995 17 To select a different typeface 1 Select a typeface from the scrolling list A sample of the typeface is displayed in the preview area If you are not satisfied select another typeface 2 Click SELECT on Apply Listing the Available Fonts When the Standard selection is chosen you can scroll through all of the typefaces installed with OPEN LOOK style the Custom Selection refers to all fonts available on your system Note The list generated from x1sfonts is very long there are over 400 fonts available If the listing on your screen does not contain the expected number of fonts check with your system administrator It is possible that a subset of the available fonts was installed Previewing Selected Font Settings You can look at the selected typeface and scale settings in the Preview box This shows you how text appears in Control settings places like buttons and text fields scrolling lists in your window system Control labels places
237. e September 1995 HS lll File Manager hightide egret Fish hightide egret Fish Contains 10 items 872 Mbytes 98 available A rE Mail Tool Compose Message Seafood Include Deliver 7 Header v Clear Attach 7 To mariac celtic Subject Requested file Ce Attached is the file you requested Attachments Figure 4 20 Selecting a File for dragging onto the Compose Window Attachments Pane 4 Release SELECT The file is displayed in the Attachments pane as an icon and will be included as part of the mail message Note If you drag and drop a file onto the text area of the Compose window the file is included in the text as ASCII text Some types of files such as binary program files are unreadable in the text pane If you want to include the file as a separate attachment in its native format make sure to drag and drop the file onto the Attachments pane If you drag data that is not a file onto the Attachments pane the name of the icon that appears in the Attachments pane is the data type For example if you want to drag and drop the text in the Text Editor pane you can press SELECT on the drag and drop target that appears in the Text Editor header drag the pointer to the Compose window Attachments pane and release SELECT The new icon in the Attachments pane is named default Multimedia Mail Tool 177 lll HS Adding Mail Attachments Y
238. e from the Sort By submenu of the View menu Files Too Large for the Mail Tool Attachment Window Mail Tool may run out of swap space if you drag and drop a file that is too large into MailTool Attachment window You can remedy this by increasing your swap space Print Tool Troubleshooting If a file has an inappropriate print script in the binder database this is not an ASCII file and the possible location is usr openwin lib cetables the Print Tool may hang when you use it to print that file The print script may be missing the FILE PRINTER or COPIES variable See Chapter 16 Binder for information about how to change print scripts using the Binder If you print a file and the appropriate filter is not available on the printer you will receive an error message SnapShot Troubleshooting A potential problem with Snapshot is creating a raster file that has the wrong dimensions for use with another application This is described in the following section Using Snapshot Files with Other Applications If you experience difficulty in using Snapshot files with other applications it may be because you are trying to incorporate a snapshot from a grayscale or color monitor into an application that can only handle black and white images Solaris User s Guide September 1995 A Raster files have three dimensions height width and depth Black and white raster files are 1 bit deep Grayscale and color raster
239. e Done to incorporate changes and to close Mail Tool to an icon U Use Mail Files to display a window that helps you organize your mail messages into separate mail files See Organizing Your Mail Messages on page 183 for more information about mail files The default item of the File Menu is Load In Box Selecting this loads your inbox The View menu has choices for different ways to view messages and move between them and for finding particular mail messages e Use Messages to view messages with an abbreviated or full header e Use Previous or Next to view the message before or after the current message Multimedia Mail Tool 151 152 Edit Menu e Use Sort By to sort messages in your In Box or mail files See Sorting the Contents of a Mail File on page 190 for more information e Use Find to find messages in your In Box or mail file by sender recipient and or by subject See Saving Changes for Mail Tool on page 182 See Mail Tool View Message Window on page 154 for more information about the first three items on the View menu The default item of the View menu is Next When you select Next the next message is displayed The Edit menu has choices for editing and deleting mail messages and configuring your Mail Tool from the Mail Tool Properties window e Use Cut and Copy to put selected messages onto the clipboard You can then paste these messages from the clipboard into other windows usin
240. e File Editor option described in the next section If the mode is editable you can edit text anywhere in the Term Pane and use the editing items on the Term Pane menu See Chapter 3 Text Editor for information on the editing functions Choose Store log as new file to save the current history log to a file When you choose this option the Text Save As window is displayed For complete information on saving files refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment You can treat this new file as you would any other text file You can edit it and save it again or drag and drop it from the File Manager onto a Mail Tool Compose or Text Editor window Choose Clear log to clear the current history log This resets the Command Tool history log as if you just started the Command Tool application This does not change the output of the UNIX history command Command Tool Shell Tool and Console Window 277 278 File Editor Submenu The items on the File Editor submenu determine whether a Text Editor Pane is displayed When you enable the File Editor the Command Tool is split into two panes a Command Tool pane and a Text Editor pane The Text Editor pane is described in Chapter 3 Text Editor Figure 6 2 shows a Command Tool with the File Editor enabled cmdtool bin csh File 7 View v Edit v Find 7 Figure 6 2 Command Tool with the File Editor Scrolling Submenu The c
241. e Page As Image displays a window from which you can save the currently displayed page of a multiple page document as a new image file Print One uses the current settings of the Print window to print a single copy of the currently displayed image or page Print Preview displays the Print Preview window that shows how the contents of the View window will appear when printed The Print Preview window uses dotted lines to depict the boundaries of the printed page You can control which area of the image gets printed by dragging the image within the dotted lines Solaris User s Guide September 1995 ic View Menu Print displays the Print window that contains these options for controlling how the contents of the View window are printed Copies number of Header Page whether one should be printed Printer which device Page Size Letter Legal Ledger A3 A4 B5 Page Range for multiple page documents Image Size scaling Image Orientation Portrait or Landscape Image Position centered or specify margins The View menu contains image information page overview and multiple page options The functions of each item are Image Info displays a window that contains the following information about the currently displayed image or page e Height and Width e Number of colors depth e File size File Format Page Overview Available only for multiple page documents this option displays a window with a scrol
242. e Shell Tool into a Command Tool When you choose Enable Scrolling the name stripe at the top of the Shell Tool still says shelltool but the application acts like a Command Tool See the section Command Tool on page 276 for details Solaris User s Guide September 1995 O lll Console The Console is a special Command Tool window that is used to display error and system messages for the SunOS operating system the OpenWindows environment and some applications You can recognize a Console window by the term CONSOLE in the Command Tool header If you do not have a Console window messages are displayed in large type at the bottom of the screen To clear such messages choose Refresh from the Workspace menu Always have one and only one Console window running If you have more than one Console window running messages are displayed in the most recently opened Console window You may miss important system messages if you have more than one Console window running and do not look for messages in the newest one or if you have opened a new Console window and then quit the most recently opened one Command Tool Shell Tool and Console Window 283 lll O 284 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Clock Fg The Clock application displays the current time in a window or icon The current time can be displayed in either an analog or digital form for any time zone around the world The Clock application can
243. e Tool 401 pane terminal emulator 281 text editing 154 panes splitting 139 Panning Image Tool 402 parent directory 66 parentheses Calculator 301 password 3 Paste operation keyboard equivalent 11 Paste Edit menu 130 Paste File Manager 64 Path Commands menu File Manager 71 path pane File Manager 58 70 path File Manager 70 Pattern Binder 453 pattern matching 88 percentage 301 perfmeter man page 523 Performance Meter 323 customizing 326 displays 328 dial 324 icon 323 keyboard accelerators 330 Log Samples 330 monitoring remote machine 329 monitors 327 needles 324 Properties window 327 Sample Time 329 Show collisions 326 Show context 326 Show cpu 325 Show disk 326 Show errors 326 Show interrupts 326 Show load 326 Show packets 325 Show page 326 Show swap 326 performing calculations Calculator 304 periodic interest rate 310 periodic payment calculation 309 permissions files and folders 96 98 group 98 owner 98 world 98 Play button Audio Tool 356 Play window Audio Control 372 playing sound with Audio Tool 344 Calculator key 301 Pmt Calculator key 309 Point Icon Editor 423 pointer Index introduction 7 and input area 488 change speed of 554 drag distance 484 jumping 10 list of types 7 movement on scrollbar 483 on pop up windows 483 pointer speed changing 554 changing ramp up 554 pop up menu 277 PopUp setting Calendar Manager
244. e Val e erise serseri korri odiu ene renee es 308 Pmt Periodic Payment a se drain iia edead sade 309 Pv Present Vale s hice ea es aane aE R A R RAAE es 310 Rate Periodic Interest Rate ua 250 nunnana anuanu 310 Sin Straight line Depreciation nnna sans ssss snn 311 Syd Sum of the years digits Depreciation 312 Term Payment Period si crepe iveci tees naw eatete 313 Logical PUNChONSt 04ica re ie chee bie cae ever e eee ees ees 313 Scientific Functions ceceeuneeps peeeteesiny Che tageanenee 314 Calculator Function Keys ics ved eae keiweenedudennn nema 316 Customizing Your Caleoulatot si 606 4 se eeedeeeteis 320 Performance Met s2s0s ccesceks Kdsaeenadan se ees wees 323 Performance Meter Displays 000 eee eens 323 Performance Meter Menu c icisscs0 ssc erwe eet edadu de bun 325 Customizing Performance Meters 2 0 4 lt c sseeenceeeenes 326 Performance Meter Monitors 0 000e eee 327 Performance Meter Display Options 328 Title of Book Month 1992 Performance Meter Machine 00 000 eee 329 Performance Meter Display and Sample Intervals 329 BROMUS cacetec ee een knee ees een ase ee aN 330 10 Print Toh cccwuns cos seccaedececesiwinndvansased ee ee oes 331 Print Tool ICONS ian ntbtetk eb 0Se bee oe beens ERNE RESO SA 331 Print Tool WindOW vin lt 2etentveeses ooeeew eeu hee de dedon 332 Printing Pileseis vie wean eee eee eee
245. e Workspace gt Programs gt application where application is the appropriate application name Starting DeskSet Applications You typically access DeskSet applications from the Programs submenu of the Workspace menu You access the Workspace menu by pressing MENU with the pointer anywhere on the background of your DeskSet environment and off of all applications When the DeskSet applications are installed on your system they are automatically provided as items in the Programs submenu You can also start any of the DeskSet applications from a system prompt in a Command Tool or Shell Tool window by typing the file name If you want to continue doing work in the Command or Shell Tool while the DeskSet Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 37 application is running follow the application name with a space and the ampersand symbol amp Table 1 1 shows what you should type to start each DeskSet application Table 1 2 What to Type to Start DeskSet Applications What you should Application Name Type 38 AnswerBook answerbook amp Audio Tool audiotool amp Binder binder amp Calculator calctool amp Calendar cm amp Manager Clock clock amp Command Tool cmdtool amp Console cmdtool C amp File Manager Icon Editor Image Tool filemgr amp iconedit amp imagetool amp Mail Tool mailtool amp Performance perfmeter amp Meter Print Tool Shell Tool Snapshot Tape Tool
246. e distribution list alias follow these steps 1 Type the name of the alias in the Alias text field In Figure 4 41 the alias name is docgroup 2 In the Addresses field type the email address of each person in the distribution list Separate each name by either a comma a space or both 3 Click SELECT on the Add button The item is added to the scrolling list in alphabetical order 4 Click SELECT on the Apply button The items in the scrolling list are added to your private aliases To use the alias simply type the name of the alias for example docgroup in the To Cc or Bcc line of the Compose Messages window The names you typed in the field are expanded and included as part of the outgoing message Use the Delete button to delete the currently selected alias and use the Change button to change the currently selected alias to the text typed in the Alias Field text field Multimedia Mail Tool 213 214 Creating and Using Public Aliases in etc aliases To create an alias that anyone can use you must have root access to your system Edit your etc aliases file using any text editor Under the Local Aliases category on a separate line type aliasname username username Separate each item with a comma and end the group with a Return You can include a space after each comma if desired Figure 4 42 shows an example of an alias group in etc aliases textedit aliases dir etc friends al a gbird fred s
247. e files sorted in columns File Manager hightide egret Fish Ces Wars Cats hightide egret Fish GL Contains 10 items 873 Mbytes Seafood Cod DeskSetDefaults Eel Salmon S E Z Z Tuna image rs FlounderMail mailfile Figure 2 38 Icons Listed in Rows Horizontally in the File Pane File Manager 103 lll No File Manager hightide egre Ces Were Cats hightide egret Fish OGL Contains 10 items a Seafood Tuna Cod image rs A DeskSetDefaults FlounderMail A Eel mailfile Figure 2 39 Icons Listed in Columns Vertically in the File Pane Sort By Options The Sort By Options allow you to choose how the files in the file pane are sorted You can choose any of the following settings Name to sort the files alphabetically e Type to sort the files in alphabetical groups by file type with folders first followed by files then by applications e Size to sort the files by size largest to smallest e Date to sort the files in reverse chronological order newest to oldest 104 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll Hidden Files The Hidden Files settings allow you to choose whether or not to display hidden system files or dot files as they are sometimes called Hidden files are usually system or configuration files and the filename is preceded by a dot Figure 2 40 shows an example of a listing with hidden files displayed r File
248. e labels on calculator buttons between mouse and keyboard equivalents Mem m Display window showing 10 memory register values Quit qorQ Exit Calculator Ctrm Control t Compounding term Ddb Control d Double declining depreciation Fv v Future value Pmt P Periodic payment Pv p Present value Rate Control r Periodic interest rate SIn Control s Straight line depreciation Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Co lll Logical Mode Operations Scientific Mode Operations Table 8 1 Calculator Function Keyboard Equivalents 4 of 5 Function Keyboard Equivalent Description Syd Control y Sum of the years digits depreciation Term T Payment period lt lt Shift current entry left gt gt Shift current entry right amp 16 Truncate to 16 bit unsigned integer amp 32 Truncate to 32 bit unsigned integer Or Logical OR of current and next entries And amp Logical AND of current and next entries Not Logical NOT of current entry Xor A Logical XOR or current and next entries Xnor n Logical XNOR of current and next entries Trig T d g r Set trigonometrical base to degrees d gradians g or radians r Hyp h Toggle hyperbolic function indicator Inv i Toggle inverse function indicator ex e raised to the power of current entry 10x 10 raised to the power of current entry Calculator 319 lll Co Table 8 1 Calculator Function Keyboard Equivalents 5 of 5 Func
249. e source while you are setting the volume level as well as while you are recording Note If you cannot achieve a satisfactory signal level with a commercial microphone it may be necessary to speak closer to the microphone or to obtain a microphone preamplifier Using the Audio Control Status Panel 376 The Audio Control application includes a status window that displays the current state of the audio device The status window provides information that can be useful for debugging audio applications and for determining whether applications are holding an audio device open To display the status window Figure 11 23 click MENU in the background of the Audio Control Play or Audio Control Record windows then click SELECT on the Status button The check boxes display the status of the tool The check boxes are informational you cannot modify them Click SELECT on the Status Change button to cause the displays to be updated only when one of the status items changes Click SELECT on the Continuous button to cause the displays to be updated continuously Refer to the audio 7 manual page for a description of status indicators Audio Control dev audio Status Play Status Record Status Open Open Paused Paused Active Active Underflow Overflow Open Waiting Open Wwaiting EOF Count 0 Samples 0 Samples 0 Input Delay 0 125 secs Encoding 16 bit linear Encoding 16 bit linear Sample Rate 11 025k
250. ea The preview area is the large square at the left of the palette 2 Click SELECT on the Apply button to record the color change Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Customizing the Solaris Environment You can customize many aspects of the Workspace environment to suit your needs For instance you can use the Workspace Properties window to change the colors of the Workspace and windows and modify the location of the window scrollbars and how the mouse buttons and pointer behave This chapter discusses these and other methods of customizing your OpenWindows environment Viewing Information About Your Workstation As things change within your operating environment or if changes are made to your system you may be asked for certain basic information about your system This information can also be helpful to a system administrator if you are having system problems Some basic information about your workstation can be found on the Workstation Information window shown in Figure 17 1 To open the Workspace Information window choose Workspace gt Workstation Info 465 17 Workstation Information workstation Name river Workstation Type Sun 4 50 SPARCstation IPX Host ID 57211b35 Internet Address 129 144 152 246 Network Domain DGDO Eng Sun COM Physical Memory RAM 32 Megabytes Virtual Memory Swap 143 Megabytes Virtual Memory In Use C percent 0 100 Operating System SunOS Release 5 1 Window
251. eader window Using Drag and Drop with Mail Tool 192 You can use the OpenWindows drag and drop capability to drag mail messages out to other applications and to drop information from other applications onto your Compose window to be included as text or as a separate attachment This section gives an overview of the ways you can use drag and drop with Mail Tool and the other DeskSet applications described in this guide Dragging Mail to Other Applications You can select single or multiple headers in the Mail Tool window and drag them to other DeskSet applications When you drag a mail header the entire mail message is moved along with it including any mail attachments You can also select single or multiple mail attachments and move just the attachments to other applications Dragging Message Headers to Other Applications You can drag and drop message headers onto the File Manager Text Editor Print Tool Calendar Manager or any other application that accepts files via drag and drop Solaris User s Guide September 1995 To drag and drop a copy of a mail message select the message header then drag the pointer to the destination A small Text file glyph moves with the pointer to show that you are dragging a Text file as shown in the example in Figure 4 30 When you select multiple message headers a group of Text glyphs is dragged with the pointer E Mail Tool var mail egret File v View 7 CEdit 7
252. eae nee 333 Typing the Filename in the Print Window 334 Dragging and Dropping the File 02 iensavscnneeue 334 Choosing Another Printer cc neeeeawewn eee erenadeneee oe 335 Checking the Print Queue Status isis s usana na Se cues eyes 336 Stopping a Print ODie2tend i iotees ova ete ui eeeeeben 337 Changing Print Tool Properties 0 00000 338 Changing the Print Method in the Print Tool 339 Changing the Print Method with the Binder 340 Starting Print Tool from the Command Line 340 11 Audio Tool sjicasea sehen 08d eaves AAEREN EN EEA 341 About This Chapter s ecsesss iene Abeeten deine 341 Audio Tool Capabities 22 02 iahaleh teeeeca cbt 341 Required Accessories i2i122i 73 t40p cicodneenianiedesin 342 Invoking Audio Tool 2212215 its so eewebeh eee ee awn 342 About Audio Tool s Base Window 60000 eee eee 343 Loading and Playing an Audio File 0 344 Recording S d es reree ree iaeiei anaa an 345 Contents xvii Paving ahn Audio Pilee wc cecec ney hee eee rdsu VE been neat 347 Editing an Audio File n nn hee ee he RCE NE EEE eee nee ash 348 Undome an Edit eactsttachune eh hae aanne 349 Tips for Editing Audio Files ci ui0 i kai oe new ketenes 350 Sending a Voice Mail Message 0 000s ee eae 350 Listening to a Voice Mail Message 0000005 352 Audio Tool Reference nnnunsennuunenne nne
253. ecific editing task because the entire selection replays each time that you make or change a selection Confirm on New Load Causes a confirmation message to be displayed if a file contains unsaved data when a New or Load operation is performed Silence Detection Turns silence detection ON or OFF If this option is turned off no silence detection occurs and the entire audio file is displayed as a single sound segment Turning off this option speeds up the time it takes to load an audio file Note Silence detection is automatically suppressed for audio file formats that have a sample rate greater than 16kHz regardless of the silence detection setting in the Edit gt Properties window Silence Threshold Changes the parameters for silence detection Moving the slider to the left increases the sensitivity to short pauses This should increase the number of sound and silence segments Moving the slider to the right decreases the sensitivity to short pauses This should decrease the number of segments Temp file directory This displays the name of the directory where temporary sound files are placed All newly recorded data is stored in this directory until the data is saved Note Recorded audio can quickly use up disk space Set the temp file directory to a file system that contains adequate disk space Also if you are using high sampling rates e g CD or DAT format you may have difficulty recordi
254. ed them for your use The Contents of Your On Line Library When the AnswerBook Navigator opens it displays the contents of your on line Library Your on line Library may contain the Solaris 2 5 User AnswerBook a collection of basic manuals to help get you started using your Sun system Your library may also contain more than one AnswerBook provided that e Your system site administrator has installed them and configured them for your use and You or your administrator has included them in your Library see Modifying Your Library on page 519 499 AnswerBook Navigator and Viewer Together the AnswerBook Navigator and Viewer give you access to your Library You locate what you want to read in the Navigator and then read it in the Viewer where it appears page for page as it would in a printed book AnswerBook Viewer i w AnswerBook Viewer AnswerBook Naviga j z AnswerBook Navigator f Modify Library New Bookmark sGuide Location Library 3 Arrow indicates Solaris User s AnswerBook where you are in the a gt Solaris User s Guide Book Library i e which document is open Contents of Solaris User s Guide Pa The expanded Credits A contents of the Contents document or topic Preface Starting up the Solaris User Environment Introduction Desktop Management Tools Productivity Tools Media Tools Customizing Tools Utilities Figure 19 1 Docu
255. ed when the SELECT button is down and the view changes to the Week view when the SELECT button is released You can also display a monthly list of Appointments or To Do items See Appointment List and To Do List Views on page 228 for more information Solaris User s Guide September 1995 nN lll Year View To change the view in the Calendar Manager window so that it displays the calendar for the current year choose View gt Year The view in the Calendar Manager window changes to display the current year Figure 5 6 shows the Calendar Manager window with a year display m Calendar Manager egret river 1993 January February March SMT SMTWTFS SMTWTES 123456 123456 345 T 8 910111213 8 91011 12 13 1011121 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 17 18 19 2 21 22 23 24 25 26 2 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 24 25 26 2 28 28 29 30 31 31 April May June SMT SMTWTFS SMTWTES 1 12345 456 2345678 67 8 9101112 11 12 13 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 18 19 20 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 25 26 27 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 27 28 29 30 30 31 July August September SMTWTFS SMTWTFS SMHMTWTES 123123456 123 4 4567 8 910 8 91011121314 5 67 8 91011 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 1516171819 20 21 1213 14 15 16 17 18 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 29 30 31 26 27 28 29 30 October November December Figure 5 6 Year View You can also d
256. egion of the XView application window To display the keyboard of your choice 1 2 9 Choose Workspace gt Utilities gt Function Keys Pin the Function Keys window to the workspace Click SELECT in an XView application window such as a Command Tool in which you would like to use a set of international characters Press the Language key on your keyboard and continue to press it until instructed to release it This key is labeled PrSC or Print Screen Each of the function keys labels displays one of the international languages that the virtual keyboard supports as shown in Figure 18 2 Function Keys F11 F12 Fl F2 F3 F4 F5 F6 F7 F8 F9 F10 Us English UK English French Canadian German Italian Dutch Portugese Spanish Show Set More Figure 18 2 Function Keys Mapped with the Supported Languages Utilities 493 18 494 5 Click SELECT on More to cycle through the available character sets 6 Click SELECT on the button for the language you would like to use 7 Click SELECT on the Show button The virtual keyboard for that language appears on the workspace The French keyboard is shown in Figure 18 3 French Virtual Keyboard CD OO SCONES EEEE T XI OOO DOA IEDC e Sree CII OCI CIC ICICIED shift _ inFd Figure 18 3 French Virtual Keyboard 8 Pin the keyboard window 9 Click SELECT on the Set button in the Function
257. elp When you release the mouse button the Help Viewer displays the help handbook table of contents that lists handbooks as shown in Figure 1 43 Mx Help Viewer q View _ Go Back Jej B Help Handbooks Double click SELECT on any of the choices below LJ Introducing Your Desktop About AnswerBooks About Binder Choose a About Calculator handbook About Calendar Manager About Clock About Command Windows About File Manager About Icon Editor About Image Tool About Mail Tool About Performance Meter About Print Tool About Snapshot About Tape Tool About Text Editor About the Workspace ip a About Help by Help Handbooks at 100 Figure 1 43 Help Viewer 50 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll 3 Double click SELECT on the topic of your choice The Help Viewer then displays the table of contents for the selected handbook Quick Access to Help Handbooks You can accelerate access to a help handbook from any DeskSet application icon or menu by pressing Shift and Help or F1 on your keyboard As an example position the pointer over an area of interest such as the Mail Tool application window and press Shift Help The Help Viewer appears on the Workspace displaying the appropriate handbook in this case About Mail Tool Note
258. en you have set the day boundaries click SELECT on the Apply button to record them Your new boundaries are now in effect Solaris User s Guide September 1995 nN lll Changing the Hour Display You can specify the way hours are displayed with the Hour Display setting on the Properties window The default setting is 12 Hour which displays the hours from 1 00 to 12 00 with an a m or p m extension You can use the 24 Hour setting to display the hours in 24 hour time An appointment that goes from 11 30 am to 1 00 pm with the 12 Hour setting will go from 1130 to 1300 with the 24 Hour setting To change the hour display click SELECT on the setting you want and then click SELECT on the Apply button The change takes effect immediately Changing the Default View You can set the default view of the Calendar Manager window to Year Month Week or Day using the Default View settings on the Properties window After you have changed the default view click SELECT on the Apply button The changes take effect immediately Changing the Initial Calendar View You can specify the default calendar initial calendar to be viewed with the Initial Calendar View text field the first time Calendar Manager is started After you have changed the calendar view click SELECT on the Apply button The changes take effect immediately Access List and Permissions Properties Calendar Manager allows you to browse the appointments of o
259. encounter some of the following problems described here This section offers some possible solutions to these described problems 1 OpenWindows startup fails and you receive this error message usr openwin bin openwin command not found If you receive this error message you need to check to make certain that OPENWINHOME is properly set to point to the location in which the OpenWindows software was installed Refer to Chapter 17 Customizing the Solaris Environment in your installation manual for assistance in setting up your environment 2 The OpenWindows software starts up but some or all of the applications are not available If you experience this problem you need to make certain that your path is set such that usr openwin bin precedes the rest of your path entry Occasionally you may find that a process or application fails leaving a file named core in the directory from which you began the process A core file can take up a lot of disk space so it is a good idea to provide information to your system administrator regarding the failed program and the location of the core file for analysis and once it is analyzed delete it If you are not certain what process or application failed open a shell window and do the following at your system prompt substituting your directory name for core directory example ed core directory Change directory to the location of the core file o xample file
260. endar to Multiple Calendars and the Browse Menu on page 245 for information 3 Select all the calendars of the meeting participants by clicking SELECT on each user s calendar in the scrolling list Each selected calendar is overlaid in the Multiple Calendars display area 4 If the week you want is not currently displayed use the Go To menu or text field to display the desired week See Selecting a Week to Browse on page 247 for more information Solaris User s Guide September 1995 5 5 When all calendars are selected and overlaid find an unshaded block of time for the meeting This represents a time when everyone is available For example in Figure 5 20 all selected calendars have an open time slot on Tuesday from 1 00 to 2 00 and from 3 00 to 5 00 gy CM Multiple Calendars Ge aa Calendars Busy At Time Selected gt sebring curry Setup Menu January 1993 L5 Calendars Displayed Figure 5 20 Multiple Calendars window with Five Users Selected Calendar Manager 249 250 6 If there is not a large enough available time slot for all the selected calendars select a time slot that is lightly shaded and look at the clock s in the scrolling list to see who has a time conflict Keep trying this until you find a time slot with the least number of conflicts or where only the people who don t have to be at the meeting have conflicts Alternatively you can deselect the ca
261. enerated beep actions errors messages in your Console and so on only when a notice is displayed or never Figure 17 10 on page 487 shows the beep settings To customize the system beeps click SELECT on the chosen beep setting in the Miscellaneous category of the Workspace Properties You can move the slider from Beep Duration to increase the length of time the system beeps Setting the Active Window Use the Set Active Window setting to specify whether you must click SELECT on the window to change input focus or whether you simply move the pointer into the window to specify that window as the active input area The active input area is where you enter text whether in a text pane of a base window or a text field of a window control area The two choices Click Mouse and Move Pointer are also called Click to Type and Focus Follow Pointer In Figure 17 10 on page 487 the Click Mouse choice is selected The default is Click Mouse The Click Mouse option requires that when you move the pointer from one window to another you must click SELECT before you can type any text into the window If you choose the Move Pointer option you don t need to click in the window to make it active and ready for input The presence of the pointer within the boundaries of the window tells the current window that now it is the focus of the user s attention To change the setting click SELECT on the setting you prefer Setting the Default Locations fo
262. ent licenci e par X Open Company Ltd OPEN LOOK est une marque enregistr e de Novell Inc PostScript et Display PostScript sont des marques d Adobe Systems Inc Toutes les marques SPARC sont des marques depos es ou enregitr es de SPARC International Inc aux Etats Unis et dans d autres pays SPARCcenter SPARCcluster SPARCompiler SPARCdesign SPARC811 SPARCengine SPARCprinter SPARCserver SPARstation SPARCstorage SPARCworks microSPARC microSPARC II et UltraSPARC sont exclusivement licenci es a Sun Microsystems Inc Les produits portant les marques sont bas s sur une architecture d velopp e par Sun Microsytems Inc Les utilisateurs d interfaces graphiques OPEN LOOK et Sun ont t d velopp s par Sun Microsystems Inc pour ses utilisateurs et licenci s Sun reconnait les efforts de pionniers de Xerox pour la recherche et le d veloppement du concept des interfaces d utilisation visuelle ou graphique pour l industrie de l informatique Sun d tient une licence non exclusive de Xerox sur l interface d utilisation graphique cette licence couvrant aussi les licencies de Sun qui mettent en place OPEN LOOK GUIs et qui en outre se conforment aux licences crites de Sun Le syst me X Window est un produit du X Consortium Inc CETTE PUBLICATION EST FOURNIE EN L ETAT SANS GARANTIE D AUCUNE SORTE NI EXPRESSE NI IMPLICITE Y COMPRIS ET SANS QUE CETTE LISTE NE SOIT LIMITATIVE DES GARANTIES CONCERNANT LA VALEUR MARCHANDE
263. enu button in the window control area the portion of a window that contains menu buttons and other controls A pop up menu available from the window pane the bordered area where window data are displayed Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll Abbreviated menu button Button menu Window pane pop up menu Text Editor m NONB edited dir hightide et This is a text file created with text editor co e Text Pane oi COD View e f Edit ef Find gt Extras o Figure 1 15 Three Kinds of Window Menus Using Window Menus To choose a menu item 1 Position the pointer on one of the three window areas A window header s abbreviated menu button or the header itself A menu button e A window pane 2 Press MENU and drag the pointer down to the right to highlight the item of your choice 3 Release MENU Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 15 16 Choosing Menu Defaults Most of the menus in the Workspace and windows have default choices A default menu item is usually the first item in the menu It is encircled with a small black line The default choice on the Workspace menu as shown in Figure 1 16 is the Programs submenu Default g Workspace menu selection _ tities b Properties workstation Info Help Exit Figure 1 16 Default Choice on the Workspace Menu All menus and submenus have default choices
264. er Printer a Information mimeo Size K no entries Figure 1 23 Print Tool s Drag and Drop Target You can delete a file you no longer need by pressing SELECT on the file icon in File Manager or in the Attachments window of a Multimedia Mail Tool message dragging it to the wastebasket icon and releasing the mouse button You can drag a text file folder or other icons from File Manager and drop them on the Workspace to view it You can drag files attached to a Multimedia Mail Tool message window and drop them onto the Workspace the application with which the file was created such as File Manager Text Editor Audio Tool or Icon Editor is invoked and the file is opened in the application window Refer to Chapter 2 File Manager or Chapter 4 Multimedia Mail Tool for more information about dragging and dropping with these tools Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll Positioning Windows and Pinned Menus You can position your windows and pinned menus anywhere on the Workspace and can move a window or menu in front of other windows To move a window to a new location on the Workspace 1 Move the pointer to the black line that surrounds an open window or pinned menu and press SELECT Figure 1 24 shows the pointer on a window edge for repositioning Press SELECT on the window outline Figure 1 24 Moving an Application Window 2 Drag the pointer a
265. er 326 Show packets Performance Meter 325 Show page Performance Meter 326 Show swap Performance Meter 326 shut off AccessX 548 Signal With Mail Tool 196 Silence detection Audio Tool 370 Silence threshold Audio Tool 370 Sin Calculator key 315 SIN sine function Calculator 315 size of windows modifying 28 SIn Calculator key 311 SlowKeys 556 setting notification parameters 556 595 596 setting the acceptance delay 557 Snap Type 414 Snapshot 414 base window 414 capturing screen pointer 415 creating a snapshot 415 Hide Window During Capture 415 icon 414 Snap Delay 415 snapping a region 416 snapping the screen 417 snapping window 415 timer 415 troubleshooting 536 types 414 viewing 418 Sort By Mail Tool 152 sorting mail files 190 SPARC machines OpenWindows keyboard equivalents accelerators 10 to 11 speed of pointer changing 554 changing ramp up 554 splitting panes 139 splitting text panes 139 Sqrt Calculator key 301 square root 301 Square Icon Editor 424 wildcard search 88 Start field Calendar Manager 230 starting an application 13 36 starting AccessX 546 starting applications 37 starting the vacation notifier 169 status messages Image Tool 409 status print queue 336 StickyKeys 551 disable by pressing two modifier keys 552 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 sound when modifier key is pressed 552 Sto Calculator key 303 stop Play bu
266. er left corner then choose Exit from the menu 412 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Snapshot 4 The Snapshot application allows you to take black and white or grayscale and color snapshots of regions windows or the entire computer screen These pictures are called raster images and can be stored as raster files witha rs file extension These pictures are called raster images because they are taken from the screen which is defined by a grid called a raster When you use Snapshot on a black and white monitor the snapshots created are always black and white When you take snapshots on a color monitor the snapshots are usually in color On some color monitors you can run OpenWindows and the DeskSet in black and white in which case the snapshots created are black and white Snapshot works together with Image Tool to allow you to view and manipulate your raster images For complete information refer to Chapter 13 Image Tool You can take pictures of the entire screen of any rectangular region of the screen you define or of any window or window pane on the screen To open the Snapshot application choose Workspace gt Programs Snapshot 413 14 Snapshot Icon and Base Window Snap a single window a chosen region or entire screen Snap immediately or after a delay If checked Snapshot window is dismissed during snap Snaps picture Snapshot Controls 414 Snap Types The Snapsho
267. erties window and confirm that you have the correct options set You may want to check the Tape Tool Properties window each time you retrieve files since the settings are not saved if you quit Tape Tool and start it up again 2 Insert the tape in the tape drive 3 Choose Read gt Entire Tape The contents of the entire tape are copied onto your system Customizing the Tape Tool 386 Before you read to or write from a tape or archive file you may want to confirm that the properties you want to use are set correctly as shown in Figure 12 7 To display the Properties window click SELECT on the Props button Solaris User s Guide September 1995 12 Tapetool Properties Device dev rmt Omb Host Name river Tar Options Write No SCCS No SCCS Block 1 0 Sym Links Show Errs Suppress Strip Path All Pattern Read No Check Mod Time Orig Mode Other Exclude Figure 12 7 Tape Tool Properties Window e Device text field identifies the tape drive to your system The most common device numbers for a tape drive are dev rmt Omb m is for medium density and dev rmt 01b 1 is for low density Alternatively you can specify a file name in this field if you wish to read or write files to and from one big archive file instead of a tape Host Name text field identifies the name of the workstation where the reading or archiving of files is to take place The defa
268. es a file name that contains a list of files and or directories that you want to exclude from reading from the tape This item can be useful when the tape contains many files and you want to retrieve all but a few of them When you have set the options you want click SELECT on the Apply button to apply the changes These options will remain in effect until you quit the Tape Tool application Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Image Tool DS Image Tool is an application that you can use to view multiple page documents such as PostScript files and single page image files such as Sun Raster You can also use it to manipulate or translate a file Image Tool works with other DeskSet applications such as Mail Tool and Snapshot Image Tool is the default viewer for Mail Tool so if you receive and open an attached multiple page document for example Mail Tool launches Image Tool to display the attachment Once you have taken a picture of an image with Snapshot you can view it manipulate it or print it using Image Tool For complete information on Snapshot refer to Chapter 14 Snapshot Image Tool works with color and monochrome monitors Color monitors vary in their ability to display color so Image Tool adapts color images to suit the type of monitor Monochrome monitors display all images in black and white Color monitors may display images in fewer colors than the original For example a 24 bit image appears on an 8 b
269. es you to save a copy of the current sound file to a new file Click SELECT on the Save As menu item to display the Audio Tool Save As window Figure 11 17 To save a file enter its name into the Save As field and click SELECT on the Save button ow Audio Tool Save As Type in the path to the folder and press Return Current Folder dO audio Getfiles Select a file or folder and click Open Folder om j AP Go up one folder Q Testfiles Save As newaudio voice Format 7 Voice Format Compress None File Size 20 Mbytes 67 2 Mb Available Show Audio Files Figure 11 17 Audio Tool Save As Window The Go To button and field Current Folder field scrolling list All Files and Audio Files buttons and the Cancel button work the same as their counterparts in the Open window The Save As window has additional items that the Open window does not have Use the Format and Compress menus to save an audio file in different formats 364 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 LS Format Click MENU on the Format button to display the list of formats The standard formats are Current Voice DAT or CD Click SELECT on Current Format to match the format that is being used in the display canvas In the list of formats click SELECT on New Format to display the Audio Tool Save Format window Figure 11 18 Use the selections in this window to save the audio data in a differen
270. ese steps 1 Type the name of the template in the Name field on the Properties window 2 Type the path and name of the file containing the template in the File field 3 Choose Before or After from the Add menu 4 Click SELECT on the Apply button The items in the scrolling list are added to the Templates submenu of the Compose window Include menu A Calendar template is automatically provided when you have no other templates installed Otherwise if you want to use the Calendar template you must add it to the Template menu yourself following the steps above Your template can contain text to be included in a message and it can also include header information If you include header information make sure that there Multimedia Mail Tool 211 212 are no lines in the template file before the header lines Figure 4 40 shows an example of a template that contains both header information and text Make sure there is at least one blank line between the header lines and the message text To mail team Subject Staff meeting It s time for our staff meeting Figure 4 40 Contents of a Template File with Text and Header Information To use a template choose the item from the Templates submenu of the Compose window Include menu The text from the template file is then displayed in the Compose text pane If your template contains headers the headers in the Compose window are automatically filled out To delete a template
271. esh the Workspace choose Workspace gt Utilities gt Refresh After a few moments the artifacts are cleared from the Workspace 491 18 SPARC Reset Input Function Keys 492 If you are running several types of applications at once particularly if you are using SunView applications simultaneously with OpenWindows applications you may occasionally find that characters you type in a window are garbled This is because of an inherent incompatibility between the way the applications handle the keyboard The Reset Input utility corrects the problem If the problem occurs choose Workspace gt Utilities gt Reset Input Note This function applies only to SPARC based machines This utility was implemented in compliance with OPEN LOOK functional specifications and is provided for use by application developers and for users to program their function keys It is not supported by the default DeskSet applications at this time The OpenWindows Function Keys utility is a dynamic on screen version of the function keys on the keyboard Note that this feature is currently supported on Type 4 keyboards only The function keys on the on screen utility display the functions of the current application providing that application has function keys support Otherwise the keys are blank The key labels are automatically updated when the pointer is moved to another application Because the Function Keys panel is equivalent to the
272. esource settings one method of troubleshooting is to rename the file to xinitrc orig and restart OpenWindows If this solves your problem you need to either merge changes between the system version located in usr openwin lib Xinitrc and your xinitrc or remove it if it is no longer needed Solaris User s Guide September 1995 A Window Damage Artifacts or remnants of other windows sometimes remain on a window when overlapping windows are cleared away This is known as window damage To redraw the screen choose Workspace gt Utilities gt Refresh Momentarily the artifacts will be cleared If the damage occurs to one application window only you can refresh that application window by choosing Refresh from the pop up menu in that window s header Window Frozen when Opening an Application If you opened an application from the command line in a Shell Tool or Command Tool window as in the example below you may find that your window freezes up example cmdtool The best way to open any DeskSet or other XView application on the command line is to append the command with the ampersand amp For example example cmdtool amp This starts the application in the background so that the parent window from which you started the application is free for further use Window Does Not Accept Input If you position your pointer in a text window such as in Text Editor or the Mail Tool
273. esponse at the cost of larger file sizes Click SELECT on your choice Channels Open this menu with a MENU click and click SELECT on your choice of channels mono or stereo New Format Button Click SELECT on the New Format button to clear the current audio file and reset the data format to match the currently selected audio format Audio Tool 359 11 360 Reset Button Click SELECT on the Reset button to restore the panel so that it displays the current audio format Button Click SELECT on the button in the New Format window to display an extended window shown in Figure 11 14 The Format scrolling list displays the formats available to you Note that formats are stored on a per user basis so that the formats listed other than the standard Voice CD and DAT have been created under your user name Note Audio formats and preferences are stored in the HOME audiorc file where HOME is the name of your home directory You can use the New Format window to name a format type to appear in the New and Save As menus You can also use this window to add change or delete an audio format Click SELECT the button to close the extended part of the New Format window Audio Tool New Format Encoding 16 bit linear Format am Add 7 Voice Format Sample Rate 7 44 1kHz CD Format DAT Format Ch Is stereo annelsr l new format Name CD Format
274. et for a new folder except there is no Default Name field For complete information on these settings refer to New Folder Defaults on page 101 g FM Properties Category amp Current Folder Settings Longest Name 15 4 Icon Layout Sort By Name Size Date Hidden Files Display Files As Icon Content Show in List View Content as These settings apply to currently active folder window ONLY Figure 2 43 Current Folder Settings Menu Note The Current Folder Settings window displays the same information for the active selected folder window only You can use this to change the settings for the designated active window 108 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll Go To Menu Defaults This allows you to change the defaults of the Go To menu You can set the Go To menu properties to show a trail of the directory paths you last visited and you can set up special paths to directories that you visit often The Go To menu has several sections divided by spaces Typically you see a default label for home a label for your home directory pathname application specific defaults that include Waste and Folder View then the paths to the directories you last visited gy FM Properties Category w Go To Menu Defaults Type in the folder s path and click Add Item Pathname hightide egret home Fish Menu Label OtherFiles Go To Menu Items co ry Edit Ho
275. etermine a time when the majority or a particular subset of users are available This makes it much easier to figure out the best time for a meeting Once you have figured out the best time for a meeting you can schedule the appointment for all the users who have given you Insert access to their calendars In addition you can send mail to the meeting participants in a format that the users can drag from the Mail Tool and drop onto their Calendar Manager in order to schedule the appointment themselves Multiple Calendars Window You access Multiple Calendars by choosing Show Multiple Calendars from the Browse menu This displays the Multiple Calendars window Figure 5 17 displays the Multiple Calendars icon and the default window with one calendar displayed Using Show Multiple Calendars to display multiple calendars is described later in this section Solaris User s Guide September 1995 nN lll CM Multiple Calendars gv Gagne Calendars Busy At Time Selected co e mariac river E sebring curry a Setup Menu January 1993 1 Calendar Displayed Figure 5 17 Multiple Calendars Icon and Window The Multiple Calendars window has the following controls Schedule Mail and Go To buttons that you use to schedule appointments for many users at once mail information about new appointments and change the display of Multiple Calendars to show a different week or month Scrolling list of calend
276. ethods to be in this format cat SFILE pipel pipe2 Defining a print method of another type may produce unexpected results with the deskset tools See also Chapter 10 Print Tool for information on overriding a default Print Method File Type Properties You use the File Type Properties window to define the set of files that are bound to the icon colors and applications defined in the Icon Properties window You display the File Type properties by choosing File Types from the Props menu or the Category choice on the Properties window The default File Type Properties window is shown in Figure 16 7 gv Binder Properties Category File Types Pattern Figure 16 7 Default File Type Properties window Binder 451 You can click SELECT on the plus sign button to expand the window to display the full set of properties including information needed to identify a class of files as shown in Figure 16 8 gv Binder Properties Category File Types Fag Value Tag Mask Pattern Figure 16 8 Expanded File Type Properties window You can shrink the window back down to the smaller size by clicking SELECT on the minus sign button at the bottom of the expanded window This section describes the fields in the File Type Properties window File Type Scrolling List Each entry in the File Type scrolling list defines how a file or a group of files is recogni
277. except the window header reflects the current task For example you ll see a reference to the application such as Text and the name of the task following it like Open Save Save As Include or Attach Text Open Type in the path to the folder and press Return Cry Current Folder fhightide egret Fish Select a file or folder and click Open B Go up one folder O cod DeskSetDefaults Eel O Floundermail O image rs mailfile C Noname O salmon Seafood Hidden Files open save include This menu bar title changes depending on the task you are completing such as Open Save Include and so forth Displays the current location within the file system The Scrollbar allows you to scroll through all of the files and directories within the current folder Hidden files are the same thing as dot files and you can choose to hide or show them Dismisses the window Figure 1 30 An example of the Open Window Note You can use File Manager to keep track of documents and folders directories and files Refer to Chapter 2 File Manager for information on how to use it Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll Opening a Document To open a document from an application 1 Choose Open from the File menu An Open window similar to the one in Figure 1 30 is displayed 2 Select the name of the folder from the scrolling list Click SELECT on
278. ext fields The time menu is available through the Start and Stop abbreviated menu buttons The choice of times on this menu is determined by the Day Bounds settings from the Properties window See Customizing Your Calendar Manager on page 257 for more information Solaris User s Guide September 1995 5 When you set a start time the stop time is automatically set to one hour later If the appointment is longer than an hour you can set a new stop time by choosing a time from the time menu or by typing a time in the text field The last choices on the time menu are No Time and All Day Use No Time if you don t want a time associated with an appointment When you choose All Day the appointment is set for 12 00 a m to 11 59 p m This is useful for appointments that refer to the entire day such as Vacation Day A What field in which you type information about the appointment or To Do item The first line of this field is displayed in the Day Week and Month views so the first line should describe the appointment You can also include details about the appointment such as the appointment place a brief meeting agenda or a reminder to bring something to the appointment A scrolling list that displays existing appointments for the selected date An Appt To Do setting that lets you choose whether the item is to be considered an Appointment or a To Do item See Displaying an Appointment or To Do List on
279. f applications which come with the Solaris software The DeskSet applications are the default set available from the Workspace Programs submenu The following sections discuss the tasks you will most likely perform on a regular basis and introduce the applications you need to accomplish those tasks Each of the applications is discussed in detail in following chapters To start an application 1 Move the pointer onto the Workspace the OpenWindows background 2 Press and hold MENU 3 When the Workspace menu is displayed drag the pointer to display either the Programs or Utilities submenu Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll 4 Drag the pointer down to highlight the application you would like to start When you release the mouse button the application appears on the Workspace Figure 1 32 shows an application being selected from the Program s submenu workspac 9 Programs Programs File Manager p Utilities Text Editor Properties Mail Tool workstation Info CalendariManagers Help Command Tool Exit Shell Tool Clock Calculator Performance Meter Print Tool Audio Tool Tape Tool Image Tool Snapshot Icon Editor Binder Answer Book Demos Figure 1 32 Choosing an Application Follow these instructions whenever you want to start a DeskSet application The instructions from now on will say choos
280. fault item on this menu The rest of the items on the menu show a default of ten of your most recently accessed folders You can make the amount of items greater or smaller You can change back to any of these folders by choosing the path to the folder from the Go To menu You can also add your own items to the menu For information on how to make these changes refer to Go To Menu Defaults on page 109 File Manager 87 lll No When you know the path of the folder you want to open or the path and file name of a file that you want to select you can type the path or the path and file name in the Go To text field Then either press Return or SELECT the Go To button When a path is typed the folder specified is opened and its contents are displayed in the file pane When a path and file name are typed the specified folder is opened its contents are displayed in the file pane and the file is located scrolled into view and selected Using Pattern Matching to Find Files You can use wildcard characters to select groups of related files in the currently displayed file pane by typing a pattern matching sequence in the Go To text field or with the pointer anywhere in the File Pane Pattern Matching in the Go To Text Field The star symbol can be used to match any string so typing rs in the Go To text field and either pressing Return or clicking SELECT on the Go To button will select all files ending in rs Figure 2 24 shows
281. file system contains icon and raster files created by applications such as Icon Editor and Snapshot you can display an image of the contents of the file in place of the standard data file icon The images are displayed to scale in a 64 by 64 pixel square Choosing Content as your default Display Mode in the New Folder Defaults window displays the contents of black and white and color icons rasters X bitmap files or any combination of these Folders applications and other files are displayed as icons Figure 2 42 is an example of a Contents file display File Manager hightide egret Fish Ces Gers Cite hightide egret Fish Contains 10 items 873 Mbytes 98 available Seafood B amp S E ER ER Tuna image rs FlounderMail mailfile Figure 2 42 Contents File Display Note Choosing to display the contents of icon and raster files can delay the reading and displaying of other types of files and folders since File Manager must perform some additional processing to provide the preview File Manager 107 lll No You can select any or all of the options as follows e Monochrome Icons to preview black and white Sun icons e Monochrome Images to preview black and white Sun raster and X Bitmap images e Color Icons to preview XPM files Current Folder Settings This allows you to change the settings of the current folder These settings are identical to the property settings that can be s
282. files are usually 8 bits deep True color raster files are 24 bits deep If you take a snapshot on a 4 bit screen it is saved as an 8 bit raster file You can see the depth of a raster file by typing file rasterfilenameina Shell Tool or Command Tool prompt or by selecting the file from the File Manager and displaying the Information window In the example shown in Figure A 3 the listing shows the file properties for all files ending in rs As you can see from the listing there is one 8 bit raster file snapshot rs and the rest are 1 bit files 42 castlefwinsor file rs cmdtoolmenu rs rasterfile 461x236x1 standard format image samplesnap rs rasterfile 114x285x1 standard format image snapshot rs rasterfile 250x287x8 standard format image ssprintmenu rs rasterfile 463x126x1 standard format image ssprintwindow rs rasterfile 293x322x1 standard format image sssnapmsg rs rasterfile 461x236x1 standard format image sswindow rs rasterfile 461x236x1 standard format image 43 castle winsor Figure A 3 Example of a File Command Listing The best way to convert an image to the same depth as your monitor is to use Image Tool You can take the snapshot View it and use Save as to select b amp w as the number of colors Refer to Chapter 13 Image Tool Tape Tool Troubleshooting This section describes some common problems you may encounter with the Tape Tool and it offers possible solutions
283. function keys on your keyboard you can choose items from the on screen function keys by clicking SELECT on the appropriate key or from the keyboard itself To display the Function Keys utility window choose Workspace gt Utilities gt Function Keys When you release the mouse button the Function Keys pop up window is displayed at the bottom of the screen Note You must have the Click Select or click to type option set for the Function Keys utility to work properly See Chapter 17 Customizing the Solaris Environment for information regarding this option Solaris User s Guide September 1995 18 Figure 18 1 shows the Function Keys window In this example the function keys have been programmed to modify colors on the workspace 9 Function Keys F1 Fa Fa F4 F5 Fe F F8 F9 F10 F11 Fiz Brick Blue Maroon Orchid Violet Black Green Magenta Red Clear Figure 18 1 Function Keys Window International Keyboard Support A range of international keyboards are available through the Function Keys utility s multiple language support feature This feature displays an on screen keyboard with keys that correspond to those on the physical keyboard When you display one of the international keyboards through a DeskSet or other XView application the keys you type on your physical keyboard remap to the international characters and those characters appear in the text r
284. g Mail Attachments on page 180 2 Open the file from the application in which the file was created Consult the user manual that came with the application for details Multimedia Mail Tool 175 176 Sending Mail Attachments To include attachments in a mail message you are composing select the file icons that you want to include from the File Manager and drag and drop them onto the Attachments pane of the Compose window You can also drag and drop files or data from the Text Editor or any other application that supports drag and drop Alternatively you can use the Attachments pane Add Attachments popup to include attachments in your message as described in Adding Mail Attachments on page 178 Follow these steps to drag and drop a file from the File Manager onto Mail Tool to be included in a mail message 1 Open the File Manager application and the Mail Tool Compose window of the message you are sending If the Attachments pane is not showing at the bottom of the Compose window choose Show Attachments from the Compose window Include menu In the File Manager click SELECT on the file that you want to include as a mail attachment Click ADJUST on any additional files that you want to include Press SELECT on one of the highlighted files and drag the pointer to the Attachments pane of the Compose window as shown in Figure 4 20 The pointer changes while the file is being dragged Solaris User s Guid
285. g images Display Palette On Opening Documen Selecting this automatically displays the palette when an image is opened in the View window Figure 13 14 Image Tool Properties Window 2 Change the settings as desired The View Image In and Colors settings work together to produce an optimal display of color and color depth based on your monitor s color capabilities 3 Choose Apply to implement the new settings or Reset to discard the changes These changes take effect the next time Image Tool is started Solaris User s Guide September 1995 is Status Messages Error Messages and Help The footer of the Image Tool base window displays two kinds of messages Status messages on the right describe multiple pages For example page 1 of 5 Error messages on the left Conditions that require decisions on your part are displayed in pop up notices e You can get information on how to use Help from Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment Magnify Help and the Help Button are also available to you Dragging and Dropping You can drag files from the following tools and drop them onto Image Tool s drag and drop target File Manager e Mail Tool e Snapshot If Image Tool is already open dragging and dropping replaces any images already displayed You can drag images from Image Tool and drop them onto the following tools File Manager e Mail Tool e Print Tool F
286. g the Text Pane menu These options are dimmed if you do not have any selected messages Use Delete to delete selected messages This option is dimmed if you do not have any selected messages or are not currently viewing any Use Undelete to restore deleted messages When you save your Mail Tool changes deleted messages are really deleted and can no longer be restored The Undelete option is dimmed if you do not have any deleted messages Use Properties to customize your Mail Tool See Customizing Mail Tool on page 194 for information about Mail Tool properties The default item of the Edit menu is Delete When you choose Delete the currently selected messages are deleted or the currently viewed messages are deleted if no messages are selected Compose Menu The Compose menu has choices for opening Compose windows from which you can write and send mail messages Use New to open a new Compose window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 e Use Reply to open a Compose window to respond to a selected message See Replying to a Message on page 166 for more information e Use Forward to open a Compose window that includes the selected message for forwarding If the message has attachments the attachments are also included in the forwarded message e Use Vacation to initiate or stop an automatic response to incoming messages when you are away from your mail See Using the Vacation Notifier on page 168 fo
287. gent to set this mail to a lower priority and not to return any error messages to this mail message Figure 4 15 shows an example of a vacation message that has been customized Mail Tool Vacation Setup I am on vacation Precedence junk I m on vacation from December 18 through December 25 Li Your mail regarding SUBJECT will be read when I return Hope you have a happy holiday season Jan Figure 4 15 Modified Vacation Message To start the vacation message click SELECT on the Start button The word Vacation is displayed in the header of the Mail Tool window to remind you that the vacation notifier is turned on While the vacation notifier is turned on incoming mail messages are stored in your In Box and are readily available when you return to the office When the vacation notifier is turned on it replies to each person who sends mail to you Each sender receives a reply from the vacation notifier but it replies to the same sender only once in each seven day period If your name is listed in a public alias and a message is sent to the alias the vacation notifier does not respond to the sender of that message The vacation notifier will respond to names included as part of a private alias See Alias Properties on page 212 for information about mail aliases Once you have activated the vacation notifier the Stop item on the Vacation submenu is also activated To stop the vacation
288. ghest level window in the window system A utility that blanks the display screen after a predetermined length of time The screensaver feature reduces image burns on the display screen You move the mouse on its pad to clear the screensaver and return to the Workspace A control that is used to move the view of the data displayed in the pane Glossary 7 Scrollbar menu Scrollbar Here to Top Top to Here Previous Split View Join Views Scrolling Scrolling button 6 w 9 e Scrolling list Font Avante Garde Courier Gothic Helvetica Modern O BIL SELECT mouse button 000 e Server Settings Bre A pop up menu associated with each scrollbar that is used to reposition the data in the pane Moving through data that cannot be viewed entirely in a pane An abbreviated button with a solid triangular arrowhead inside the border that is used for scrolling A pane containing a list of items The list can be read only or it can be edited The left mouse button which is used to choose objects set the insert point manipulate controls and drag objects Unless you have switched the order of the buttons with xmodmap in which case SELECT and MENU are swapped 1 Ina computer network a unit that provides a specific service such as data storage and compute services to network users 2 A program that provides input and display services for window system clien
289. h the Calculator by using parentheses 2 3 4 The Calculator has the financial functions shown in Figure 8 11 Choose Financial from the Mode key pop up menu to display the Financial Mode window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Financial Mode Figure 8 11 Financial Functions The financial functions retrieve needed information from the memory registers For example in order to determine the amount of an installment payment the Calculator needs to know the amount of the loan the interest rate and the term of the loan You must store this information in the appropriate registers before you click SELECT on the financial function button See Memory Registers on page 303 to learn how to store numbers in the registers The following function descriptions include information about what the Calculator expects to find in each register for each function plus examples of how to use each function Ctrm Compounding Term Use Ctrm to compute the number of compounding periods it will take an investment of present value to grow to a future value earning a fixed interest rate per compounding period Store the following numbers in the memory registers Register 0 Periodic interest rate Register 1 Future value of the investment Register 2 Present value of the investment Ctrm Example You have just deposited 8 000 in an account that pays an annual interest rate of 9 compounded monthly You want to determ
290. hanges discards changes reincorporating any deleted messages as part of the In Box and quits Mail Tool Choosing Cancel cancels the quit operation and leaves Mail Tool running Organizing Your Mail Messages A convenient way to organize your mail is to group related messages together in a mail file A mail file is a file that can contain multiple mail messages If you view a mail file outside of Mail Tool it looks like a single file with multiple mail messages appended to one another When you view a mail file using Mail Tool each separate message header is displayed in the header pane and you can view edit delete and respond to each message individually You can use the Mail Files pop up window to create delete and rename mail files and subdirectories of mail files to add messages to mail files or to view mail files To display the Mail Files window shown in Figure 4 26 choose Mail Files from the File Menu Multimedia Mail Tool 183 184 Mail Tool Mail Files Name ee fhightide egret B Go up one folder Coartfiles G Fish G Folder TestApps Cofilename Q mail root Figure 4 26 Mail Files Window The Mail Files popup window contains a scrolling list of all your mail files or mailfolders There are three groups of entries listed in the mailfolder scrolling list as follows Double click SELECT on that entry to display the mail files up one directory level The next entries
291. haracters are displayed Modified Use of the Keyboard and Mouse This section lists accelerator key commands that you can substitute for mouse and menu operations Accelerator keys help you use the interface efficiently by performing operations that normally require several mouse actions This is especially useful to those who prefer the use of the keyboard over the use of the mouse but can be helpful to anyone who wants to increase efficiency through fewer hand movements away from the keyboard Keyboard Accelerators The following sections describe basic editing operations navigating your way through files and windows and opening menus without using the mouse buttons Customizing the Solaris Environment 477 ar For a list of commands such as Cut and Paste and their keyboard equivalents see Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment For instructions on remapping a SPARC or x86 keyboard see the Solaris Advanced User s Guide Note The commands for navigating in text files pertain to the Text Editor application window Erase Functions Table 17 2 Commands that Erase Characters Words or Lines Sequence Action Backspace Erases character to the left of the insert point Shift Backspace Erases character to the right of the insert point Control w Erases word to the left of the insert point Control Shift w Erases word to the right of the insert point Control u Erases to the beginning of the line Contro
292. hat lead to the current folder which is the folder that is open Any folders below it in the tree are subfolders An example of a path is given in the window in Figure 2 12 which shows the path for root hightide egret 70 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll pas Path Pane Contains 7 items Cr Ei Fish mail Figure 2 12 A home Directory in the Path Pane Path that is Displayed When you start File Manager for the first time it displays the path of the directory from which you started it The next time you start File Manager it remembers your last location before quitting and you see the things the way you left them If you choose File Manager from the Programs submenu it displays the path for your home directory The last folder in the chain is open and its contents are displayed in the file pane as shown in Figure 2 12 Use the Open Folder item on the Path pane pop up menu to open a selected folder Display the Path pane pop up menu by moving the pointer on the background of the Path pane and pressing MENU Once a folder has been selected in the Path Pane all of the Base window commands are available to you except the following Duplicate Print One Print Format Disk Rename Disk File Manager 71 7a FM Folder View hightide egret Seafood FreshwaterFish OceanFish Figure 2 13 Example of a Horizontal Folder View Tree Structure As you move around from fol
293. he DeskSet applications and the File Type properties that determine which files are bound to the Icon properties See the section Binder Properties on page 446 for more information The scrolling list in the Binder base window displays the bindings stored in three different databases a network database a system database and a private user database These are the Binder databases used by all applications in the DeskSet environment to determine how to display print and open any file The network database consists of the Binder entries shared by many workstations across a network The system database consists of the Binder entries shared by multiple users on one workstation Your private database consists of the Binder entries that apply only to you Updating and Viewing Private Binder Entries If you start Binder from the Workspace menu or from the command line without any command line options you can save only the changes to your private user database Most users will run the Binder application this way The first time you run the Binder application all your bindings will be system or network entries If you want to customize a system or network entry you can copy it to your user database and then modify the user entry When you add a new binding it will be added as a private entry A message in the footer of the Binder window tells you whether the currently selected entry is a Read Only Entry These are the system and network e
294. he Properties window if not already opened This is described in the section Customizing the Clock on page 286 2 Click SELECT on the other option in the Timezone category as shown in Figure 7 10 An abbreviated menu button appears Timezone local other i Figure 7 10 Timezone Category 3 Press MENU on the abbreviated menu button drag the pointer to the desired time zone and release Figure 7 11 shows the list of time zones Note that countries with more than one time zone have submenus containing the time zones for that country 290 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 N lll Iceland Brazil Israel Canada e Japan Chile e Mexico gt EET NZ GB Eire PRC GMT Poland GMT 1 ROC GMT 10 ROK GMT 11 Singapore GMT 12 Turkey GMT 13 US fro GMT 2 Ww SU GMT 3 WET GMT 4 asia GMT 5 australasia GMT 6 etcetera GMT 7 europe GMT 8 northamerica GMT 9 pacificnew GMT 1 southamerica GMT 10 CET GMT 11 CSTBCDT GMT 12 EST GMT 2 ESTSEDT GMT 3 Greenwich GMT 4 HST GMT 5S MST GMT 6 MST 7MDT GMT 7 Navajo MET PSTSPDT GMT 8 UCT GMT 9 UTC Hongkong Universal Figure 7 11 Time Zones Example 4 Click SELECT on the Apply button The time for that zone then appears on the clock face or icon Clock 291 292 Using the Stopwatch To use the stopwatch 1 2 Open the Clock if it is in icon form With the pointer on the Clock press MENU and choose Properties from the Clock menu Select digital b
295. he View Filter Pattern text field allows you to specify that only files of a certain type are displayed in the file pane of File Manager In the example shown in Figure 2 47 the filter pattern rs shows only the raster files in a directory even though other files are there Note that the header of the window shows you what filter pattern is set w File Manager rs hightide egret Apps ScreenShots File 7 View 9 Edit 7 GoTo 7 Elle 7 view v Edit 2 Go Toi Y hightide egret Apps ScreenShots ILLI Contains 95 items 874 Mbytes 9 basewindow rs cmapptfullsize rs cmdateoptions rs cmaccesslistrs cmbrowser2 rs cmdayboundariesandview rs Figure 2 47 File Pane with a rs Filter Pattern Set Default Editor e Use Default Editor to specify what default editor File Manager uses to display the text of files that are not specifically bound to another application If you click SELECT on Other a text field is displayed in which you can type the name of a different text editor application If you specify a different text editor that does not display its own window you must specify that a Shell Tool is started before the text editor Note Running command line programs such as rm or rlogin without specifying a Shell Tool to run the program in can lead to unpredictable File Manager behavior Unless a program starts with its own window such as textedit or mailtool prepend shelltool t
296. he control area When you have not listed the contents of a tape choosing Selected displays the Tape Contents window without a listing If you know the names of specific files that you want to retrieve you can type a name in the File To Read text field then press the Return key or click SELECT on the File To Read button to add them to the list Read Entire List When you have listed the files from a tape choosing Entire List from the Read menu reads the entire list of files from the Tape Contents window When you have not listed the contents of a tape choosing Entire List displays the Tape Contents window without a listing While the files are being read messages are displayed in the footer of the Tape Tool window showing you the percentage of files that have been read As the files are read they are removed from the Tape Contents window When the process is complete a message is displayed in the footer of the Tape Tool window telling you how many files were read Tape Tool 381 12 If there are a large number of files it may take several minutes for the files to be copied to your system Read Entire Tape Choosing Entire Tape from the Read menu copies all of the files on the tape to the destination directory without displaying the Tape Contents window Copying Writing Files onto Tape To copy write one or more files or directories onto a tape cartridge 1 Click SELECT on the Props button to display the Tape Tool Pr
297. he files you want to transfer To transfer a file from a remote machine to your machine follow these steps 1 2 Type the name of the remote machine in the Source Machine text field Type the full path and file name of the file you want to transfer under Source in the Path Name text field Leave the Destination text fields blank or type your machine name Type the path and file name for the file under Destination in the Path Name text field Click SELECT Copy File to start the transfer The Copy button is dimmed until the transfer is complete If there are problems with the transfer error messages will appear in the footer of the current File Manager window Click SELECT on the Copy button to start the transfer The Copy button is dimmed until the transfer is complete If there are problems with the transfer error messages appear in a pop up window that explains the problem You can print files from File Manager in three ways Select files in the file pane and drag and drop them onto the Print Tool application Files are printed using the default print instructions bound to the icon in the Binder database See Chapter 10 Print Tool for more information about using the Print Tool and Chapter 16 Binder for information about print bindings Select files in the file pane and choose Print or Print One from the File menu or the File Pane pop up menu The Print or Print One item is inactive unless f
298. he following directory to preserve the information there var spool calendar Solaris Troubleshooting 525 526 Use whatever backup medium is available to you and restore the directory when the operating system upgrade is complete Missing Calendar Data or NO NAME in Header If your appointments are not displayed make sure you have run the installation script as necessary See RPC Problems and Calendar Manager Installation on page 524 for information Before trying the following procedure try restarting Calendar Manager first If your appointments are still not displayed and you see the string NO NAME in your Calendar Manager header the permissions are probably wrong for the usr spool calendar directory and files Make sure they are exactly as described in the following steps 1 Type ls lsa usr spool and check the permissions for the directory usr spool calendar The permissions need to be exactly drwxrwsrwt This should be owned by daemon in the daemon group Get help from your system administrator to change the permissions if necessary To check the permissions of your calendar database type ls lsa usr spool calendar callog lt username gt Substitute your user name in place of lt username gt For example type 1s lsa usr spool calendar callog egret The permissions need to be exactly r rw Also this file needs to be owned by the user and in the daemon group Remote Access Pr
299. he following sections describe what happens when these settings are checked or not checked Only the names listed in parentheses are used below when referring to the options That is the options are called metoo allnet and use network aware mail file locking These are the names used in the mailrc file as described in the mailx 1 manual page Multimedia Mail Tool 215 216 When Metoo is Checked When the metoo option is checked and your email address appears in the To or Cc field when you do a Reply to All you will receive the reply Your mail address is recognized in all forms that include your login address such as yourname machine and yourname host Where machine is the name of your machine and host is the name of any host that is not your machine For example suppose you Reply to All to a message with the following header From salmon sea Fri Aug 23 10 36 21 1991 To yourname machine yourname host tuna ocean Your reply will include the following To line To yourname machine yourname host tuna ocean salmon sea When Metoo is Not Checked If the metoo option is not checked the message header of your reply depends on the allnet option The allnet option determines whether your mail address is recognized in all forms that include your login address or only in the form yourname machine Note The allnet option only has an effect when the metoo option is not checked When Allnet is Checked a
300. he percent sign changes to a pound sign example If the window server is not running there is one prompt on the screen If the window server is running you can access the prompt by opening any terminal emulator window such as a Shell Tool or Command Tool Characteristics of an object that you can customize such as the color of a window The OpenWindows Properties Window is available from the Workspace menu A pop up window that is used to set properties associated with an object an application or a window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Pushpin HS Raster file Reference manual page Refresh Release Resize corner F Root window Screensaver Scrollbar T Used to keep a menu property window or command window displayed on the screen A data file containing an image composed of an array of picture elements pixels composed of consecutive lines similar to the scans on a television screen See man page The process of redisplaying the information on a display screen Refresh an option on the Utilities submenu of the Workspace menu should be used if there are spurious characters or artifacts from dismissed windows on the Workspace To stop pressing a mouse button Areas that provide an unconstrained resizing of the boundaries of the window without changing the scale of the contents of the window Only windows that can be resized have resize corners See grab handles The hi
301. he snapshot To cancel the operation click either the ADJUST or MENU mouse buttons When the pointer is anywhere in the window the entire window is snapped including the header and footer When the snapshot is complete a message is displayed in the footer of the Snapshot window telling you that the Snap succeeded You can now save or view your snapshot For information on saving your snapshot refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment For information on viewing your image with Image Tool refer to Chapter 13 Image Tool Snapping a Region You can take snapshots of any rectangular area that you specify using the Snap Region setting The following example shows how to take a snapshot of a region 1 Set up the region on your screen that you want to snap For example to take a snapshot of the menu for the Command Tool pane open a Command Tool window Make sure the Command Tool pane is not obscured by overlapping windows Decide where in the Command Tool window you want to put the menu then display the menu to determine what size region you need to define This is also helpful if you need to show a submenu Click SELECT on the Snap Type Region setting Solaris User s Guide September 1995 14 3 If necessary set the Snap Delay timer and turn on the Beep During Countdown setting This is necessary if you want to change something about the region after you initiate the snapshot For exam
302. header the reply is sent to the email address in the Reply To header field instead of being sent to the sender of the message Return Receipt To email address When you send a message with this header you will receive a Return Receipt from the mail system when the message is successfully delivered To create a custom header field follow these steps 1 Type the label for the field in the Header Field line of the Properties window Do not type a colon following the label The colon is automatically provided by Mail Tool 2 If you want the field to be filled in with a default value type this value in the Default Value field 3 Choose either Before or After from the Add menu to add the new header field to the scrolling list 4 To apply the change to Mail Tool click SELECT on the Compose Window Properties Apply button 5 To include the new header field in a mail message choose the item from the Compose window Header menu as shown in the menu at the left Figure 4 37 shows an example of a custom header field added to the Compose window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Mail Tool Compose Message Figure 4 37 Example of a Custom Field Added to the Compose Window To delete a custom field click SELECT on the item in the Custom Fields scrolling list click SELECT on the Delete button and click SELECT on Apply To change a custom field click SELECT on the item in the Custom Fields scrolling
303. hers provide menus of choices The Edit submenu in the Text Editor application for instance provides editing options for cutting copying and pasting text as well as repeating or undoing an edit Text Editor s abbreviated menu button in the upper left corner displays options common to most DeskSet applications such as Open Close and Quit The Text Editor menu buttons are shown in Figure 1 19 Text Editor NONE d Menu iv Button menu Figure 1 19 Text Editor s Menu Buttons There are four buttons at the top of the Text Editor window each with a hollow triangle pointing down indicating that there are further menu choices beneath each button You can see these choices by placing the pointer on one of the buttons and pressing MENU The window buttons for all of the applications are discussed in their respective sections Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 19 lll Drag and Drop Empty drag and drop target 20 The OpenWindows drag and drop feature enables you to use your applications together To send a file from one application to another you drag a file in icon form from the first application and drop it on the second application icon or its drag and drop target a small rectangle in the application window In most applications the drag and drop target is in the upper right corner An application s drag and drop target is an empty rectangle if the application does not currently cont
304. hoice from the Scrolling submenu of the Command Tool Term Pane menu determines whether a scrollbar is displayed When you disable scrolling the Command Tool acts like a Shell Tool Typing Commands in Command Tool You can access all of the files and directories in your file system from the Command Tool Use of the Command Tool requires familiarity with the operating system and with your file system Solaris User s Guide September 1995 6 Command line In the sample session that follows the cd command changes directories to your home directory the mkdir command creates a new directory there and the cp command copies that directory to a new directory with a different name You execute each command when you press Return at the end of the command line examples ced Press Return example mkdir Directoryl Press Return example cp r Directoryl Directory2 Press Return Viewing Your Command History The Command Tool is a scrolling window The scrollbar at the side of the window enables you to go back and view commands that are no longer visible in the window You can scroll back to see the commands typed during the entire life of the window Editing the Command Line In the Command Tool the command line can be edited You can move the pointer to any location on the command that you have typed and click SELECT to position the insert point there You can then type in that location or erase the previously typed cha
305. hows the various AccessX features and their associated keystrokes You must start OpenWindows with the accessx option to use these keystrokes Table B 1 Features and Their Keystrokes Feature Turn StickyKeys on or off Keystroke Press Shift five times Turn StickyKeys off Press any two modifiers e g Shift and Alt at once Note You must turn this ability on from the Settings menu Turn MouseKeys on or off Alt Shift Num Lock Move the pointer when MouseKeys is turned on 1 4 6 9 keys on the numeric keypad MouseKeys ADJUST mb2 MENU mb3 Click 5 Double click 0 Press Release SELECT mb1 Turn RepeatKeys on or off Hold down Shift for eight seconds beeps at four seconds Turn SlowKeys on or off Hold down Shift for eight seconds beeps at four seconds 558 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Abbreviated menu button ed ADJUST mouse button Shift Application ASCII Glossary A menu button that is displayed as a small square with a hollow triangle inside the border The triangle points downward when the menu is displayed below the menu button and to the right when the menu is displayed to the right Abbreviated menu buttons function just like menu buttons The middle mouse button on a three button mouse which is used to adjust extend or reduce the selection On a two button mouse ADJUST is obtained by simu
306. hted a list of scheduled monthly appointments and a monthly To Do list Year displays a view of the current year a list of appointments scheduled throughout the year and a yearly To Do list Time Zone lets you change your time zone to another time zone and allows you to view another user s calendar in their native time zone Find lets you search for an appointment See the section Finding a Calendar Appointment on page 239 Go To allows you to search through your entire calendar for a specific date For complete information refer to Finding a Calendar Appointment on page 239 The View menu allows you to change the view For information on displaying more detail as well as displaying past present and future time see Resizing Your Calendar on page 223 and Navigation Controls on page 223 For information on using appointment and To Do lists see Displaying an Appointment or To Do List on page 229 The Edit menu items have the following functions Appointment allows you to schedule appointments and To Do items The Appointment Editor pop up window is displayed Properties lets you customize various features of the Calendar Manager including settings for the appointment and calendar display date format printing and security access Solaris User s Guide September 1995 nN lll Browse Menu The Browse menu allows you to view Multiple calendars browse a single Calendar set up the Br
307. hyperbolic cosine or inverse hyperbolic cosine of the current value depending on the settings of the hyperbolic and inverse function toggles See Hyp and Inv listed previously The result is displayed in the current trigonometric base Use Sin to return the trigonometric sine arc sine hyperbolic sine or inverse hyperbolic sine of the current value depending on the settings of the hyperbolic and inverse function toggles See Hyp and Inv The result is displayed in the current trigonometric base degrees radians or gradients Use Tan to return the trigonometric tangent arc tangent hyperbolic tangent or inverse hyperbolic tangent of the current value depending on the settings of the hyperbolic and inverse function toggles See Hyp and Inv The result is displayed in the current trigonometric base degrees radians or gradients Use Ln to return the natural logarithm of the currently displayed value Use Log to return the base 10 logarithm of the currently displayed value Use Rand to return a random number between 0 0 and 1 0 Click SELECT on the Set Default button to make your Appearance Base Mode Display Accuracy Contents Functions and Style settings the default every time you start a new Calculator Calculator 315 8 Calculator Function Keys Number Manipulation Operators Menu Operators 316 Every function in the Calculator application has a keyboard equivalent associated with it Table 8 1 lists e
308. i Click Intervals sivetuee ce nee cane eke Pees ee ee ee es 481 Mouse Button Order sscs54o24eeebe bh narena rnaen 481 Mouse Pointer Jumping nsnasnnnan nnr anrann nnn 482 Mentec aa equated LA E E i 484 Setting the Drag Right Distance of Menus 484 Customizing Menu Operation 000005 485 Progrdins Menu 222 44 cdi ent pee ere bose tini Hee os 485 Miscellaneous 5000 055s2eeee eee Ob Peek eee eer news 486 Setting the Screensaver Feature 0 005 487 Setting the System Beeps 5 seseesecnnd chien adeeesa ae 488 xxiv Title of Book Month 1992 petting the Active WINdOW isssssee beet eye eseaaaaey 488 Setting the Default Locations for Icons 488 Changing Scrollbar Placement ic4 i ii ecadedtetcins 489 Locale peee ene O teeta hs 1a eee aee ees 489 18 UGGS aan ueia e be bnew ear der ere EE EE EEEE 491 REfr S ho eosecio nein ret detevieerees ode ews ee EENE E 491 SPARC Reset Mipits 24220 deceduneeeeee reve Tee re 492 Function Keys onccsee teeta tees ei deaea dade eee siene 492 International Keyboard Support 005 493 Switching Between Virtual Keyboards 494 Window Controls eea ea tase n R AEE SE EA E eae 495 Using Window Controls tac sasivesseenataadet eins 496 Save Workspace ss sss eee Rae e eed hn tripi eL ERY COREE Eade 497 Lock Sereni nosed endeeeeeedath4 ote a EE E a Aa a 497 Conse enon r irran EREE EEREN E E E EEA 498 19 Using the
309. i agaceun a amine Lae dae eee at 62 View Menu 2266s cere ici whaheheh Pe a haw ketenes 63 Edit MENU Gs cit ee2e 55Gb kekeno entis beh eeeteneon 64 Go To Menu and Text Field n eceu bes ede dedeaws 64 Folder VIEW issii orca p ua e E E eee ee er 65 Folder View OptiOns ccrcsree se sssri rsidasasri naitte 66 PA PANE 262 a aee e e ntk ae Gow E EA REE ARAARA AE 70 Parts of the Path and Folder View 0 70 Path that is Displayed 2cc iaged ve lee ease Secure ue eves 71 File Pane 6 4 460 i eee eee eed che dans he eee eh ee 73 File Pane Pop up Menitiz c2 44 save soee eee eee deese 73 Alternative Display Options i cvi veer er cies ena ee ensues 74 Large loon VIEW lt 0224e nee er kew ewes Pee rE eee eee ees 74 Small Icon VieW 0ceneesees eeeebe Cheek s konan kananan 74 Icom By NaMe so cig see k eea RE RESE EEEE xem ee 75 lecon By Tye nee weciocseeketeet i e eE E eas 75 List By Nam ssa eck whole a a Ee cae EE 75 List BY SIZE reke n a e a 76 List By Date icircceristesci serep es betwee ol weedeat en 76 Opening MICs iessceessesnnst pen ET Aedes ee E 76 Creating New Files and Folders o 2 2 40sedeseaceune oc 77 Naming a Document or Folder 005 78 Title of Book Month 1992 Moving and Copying Files n were eee Keb aee ne ew Wee 78 Using Cut Copy Paste ce inss eyed ededesereceencevandaws 78 Using Drag and Drop in File Manager 79 Dragging and Dropping Between Too
310. icon displayed by the File Manager Mail Tool and other applications in the DeskSet environment If you want to color only part of the icon when it is displayed in the File Manager or other DeskSet applications use the Icon Editor to create a 32 by 32 XView format pixel icon mask which defines the area of the icon to be colored See Mask File on page 448 for information about icon masks 2 Click SELECT on the New button at the bottom of the base window A new entry is automatically created called unnamed_1 and the Binder Properties window is displayed showing the Icon category as shown in Figure 16 13 If an entry called unnamed_i already exists the new entry is called unnamed_2 and so forth 458 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 16 Binder edited gy Binder Properties Binder Entries D textedit prog amp window prog xpm file Icon L unnamed ty Application textedit Image File 4 c Doc_glyph icon Print Method Mask File 4 glyph_maskicon Foregr Color o 000 OO 229 91 193 unnamed_1 olo Figure 16 13 A New Binder Entry 3 Replace the name in the Icon text field of the Properties window with the name you want for the new Binder entry In this example type cat_prog in the Icon text field Type the path and file name of a 32 by 32 XView format pixel icon in the Image File text field In this example type the path and name of the cat ic
311. icon is selected If you want to move a group of files or folders click ADJUST on individual icons to add them to the group If the icon is already selected clicking ADJUST deselects it removing it from the group 2 Choose Cut or Copy from the Edit menu Use Cut or Copy to copy a file The file or files are moved or copied to the clipboard If your keyboard has Cut and Copy keys you can use them or Meta x Cut and Meta c Copy On x86 and PowerPC systems Meta is Control Alt An instruction message is displayed in the footer as shown in Figure 2 18 IG LD Copy these file s by opening the target folder and selecting Paste Figure 2 18 Messages when Files are Cut to the Clipboard 3 Open the folder you want to receive the files 4 Choose Paste from the Edit menu or the File Pane pop up menu If your keyboard has a Paste key you can use that You may also use Meta v On x86 and PowerPC systems Meta is Control Alt Using Drag and Drop in File Manager You can use the drag and drop operation to copy and move files from the Folder View path pane or file pane to the following destinations Any icon onto any folder icon in pathpane file pane or folder view Onto the background of any open File Manager file pane Onto the Wastebasket icon or window Onto the any folder icon on the workspace You can use drag and drop between tools such as e Onto the Mail Tool Compose icon or window attachment
312. ies egret river Category E Access List and Permissions User Name salmon seq Add Name Choose this to add the entered user name User Name Permissions Choose this to remove Remove world B the selected user name Choose this to sort alphabetically Permissions Choose permissions Figure 5 30 Adding a Name to the Access List Calendar Manager 263 lll nN 4 Click SELECT on the Apply button to record the changes Deleting Users from the Access List To delete a user from the access list select the user name in the scrolling list choose Remove from the Properties menu or the scrolling list pop up menu and click SELECT on the Apply button to record the changes Changing the Access List To change the existing permissions for a user already on the Access List follow these steps 1 Click SELECT on the user name in the scrolling list If you want to change several users at one time click SELECT on each additional user name you want to change 2 Select the new permissions you want to give the user In Figure 5 30 Browse and Insert are selected to replace the existing permission of Insert for salmon sea 3 Click SELECT on Add Name from the Calendar menu or the scrolling list pane menu Add Name is used to add a new user and it s also used to change the access permissions of an existing user 4 Click SELECT on the Apply button to record the changes Printer Settings Properties You can set
313. iew This view displays the current month in a format that allows you to see all of the appointments for that month Resizing the window scales the view as appropriate letting you see more appointments on a given day More Figure 1 39 Window with More Button Dismissing a Help Window A pop up window is dismissed when you close or quit the application If you would like to close the Magnify Help window before you quit the application you can click SELECT on the pushpin in the upper left corner of the Magnify Help window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll No Help A small pop up window appears if no Magnify Help is available stating that there is no help for that item The pointer jumps to the OK button and you must click SELECT to continue Help Viewer The help handbooks provide introductory information to guide you through the OpenWindows environment These are presented in a concise format in the Help Viewer The Introducing Your Desktop handbook is a tutorial that describes basic OpenWindows operations The other handbooks provide task oriented steps on individual topics In addition there is a handbook that describes how to navigate in the on line help system You can browse all of the handbooks in any order you choose Desktop Introduction You can access the introductory handbook Introducing Your Desktop from the Workspace menu as follows 1 Move the pointer onto the Wor
314. iew the week containing the currently selected day is displayed e If the current view is the Week view the current week is displayed e If the current view is the Year view the first week of the currently selected month is displayed Calendar Manager 247 248 To change the week displayed in Multiple Calendars use the Go To menu and text field To display a specific week type a date during the desired week in the Go To text field and click SELECT on the GoTo button Type the date using the format set on the Date Format Properties window The default format is MM DD YY See the section Date Format Properties on page 266 for more information You can also use the items of the Go To menu to change the Multiple Calendars week display as follows Choose Prev Week or Next Week to display the previous or next week Choose This Week to display the week of the day currently selected in the Calendar Manager base window Choose Prev Month or Next Month to display a week one month before or after the current Multiple Calendars week Finding a Time Slot for a New Appointment for Many Users If you want to schedule a meeting or other appointment that involves many users follow these steps 1 Choose Multiple Calendars from the Browse menu if the Multiple Calendars window is not currently displayed 2 Add the calendars to the Multiple Calendars scrolling list for all the meeting participants See Adding a Cal
315. igure 5 33 shows the Appointment Editor with the DD MM1 YY date ordering and the date separator CM Appointment Editor egret river Alternate date format Date 13 1 93 oppor Kent Day Z Month Z Year etast mM onn Poet 1 Appointments Figure 5 33 Appointment Editor with an Alternate Date Format Printing Calendar Views Calendar Manager provides high quality printed output for day week month and year views as well as daily weekly monthly or yearly appointment and To Do lists You set the printer name and options from the Printer Settings Property window described in Printer Settings Properties on page 264 You use the Print menu to print specific views appointment lists and To Do lists Current View Day View This allows you to print the view you have selected To print the Day view for the current day choose Day from the Print menu To print appointments for a day other than the current one move the pointer onto the day you want to print and click SELECT Then choose Day from the Print menu The schedule for the day is printed in the format shown in Figure 5 34 Calendar Manager 267 lll nN Fri February 12 1993 21953 0 14 pm egregprtrer Prge tori De rew by Cre ndar bianmger Figure 5 34 Printed Day View You can also print a daily list of Appointments or To Do items See Printing Appointment and To Do Lists on page 272 for more information 268 Solaris User s Guide Septe
316. il carbon copied to a person or alias but not sent directly type the name in the Cc field To search for messages by subject type a word or phrase in the Subject text field To search for messages by sender receiver and by subject type the appropriate information in each text field and click SELECT on one of the buttons at the bottom of the Find window Only mail messages that satisfy all the conditions will be found Clicking SELECT on Clear removes all the text typed in the Find Messages window text fields Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll Mail Tool Attachments A mail message can contain attachments which are files of any type in their own file formats For example a mail message might contain an image attachment and an audio attachment providing an illustration and voice mail When a message contains attachments the View Message pop up window displays a separate Attachments pane at the bottom as shown in Figure 4 18 Mail Tool Compose Message To mariac celtic Subject Two Files Ce co Maria Attached are two files that you might find useful a Attachments 2 attachments 8920 bytes 1 L my_file my_printscript Figure 4 18 View Message Pop up Window with Attachments You can move attachments to the File Manager or any other application that accepts files of the attachment s file type You can also open the attachments without moving them out of the Mail Tool
317. ile Manager and Mail Tool 2 Open the folder window in File Manager where you want to put the attachment s 3 In the Mail Tool application click SELECT on the attachment that you want to move or copy Click ADJUST on any additional attachments that you want to include 4 Press SELECT and drag the pointer A small glyph of the type of file being moved is displayed as shown in Figure 2 20 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 File Manager hightide egret root home EE Mail Tool None A AA AAAA Mail File Ga jae Up v Mail Tool Compose Message Subject ej Ce Fish ir F fe oO 2 2 oO Contains 5 items Freshwater gt 5 OceanFish New Folder Attachments 1 Ba 4 files 3 appointment apt Data t fi Figure 2 20 Dragging a Mail Attachment onto File Manager 5 Drag the pointer onto the File Manager file pane and release SELECT The attachment appears in File Manager with its original name and data type Copying Entire Mail Messages onto File Manager You can copy an entire mail message to File Manager including all attachments The message and attachments are then combined into one file If you drag and drop a mail message onto File Manager that doesn t have any attachments the message is saved as a simple text file To copy an entire mail message to File Manager follow these steps 1 Open both File Manager and Mai
318. ile properties File Manager date accessed 96 date modified 96 file type 96 free space 96 mount point 96 mounted from 96 open method 96 print method 96 file system 40 586 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 File to Write button Tape Tool 379 File Type Properties Binder 451 files deleting 91 linking 94 loading new keyboard equivalent 11 opening keyboard equivalent 11 saving keyboard equivalent 11 Fill menu Icon Editor 430 financial functions 306 Find and Replace pop up window 131 Find Marked Text item Text Editor 132 Find menu Text Editor 130 Find operation keyboard equivalent 11 Find pop up window 171 Find pop up window File Manager 89 Find Selection Text Editor 132 Find File Manager 63 finding appointments 239 files 87 90 mail messages 171 FIX fixed point display notation Calculator 298 Flash setting Calendar Manager 232 235 flipping an image Image Tool 403 Focus Follow Pointer 488 folder 59 fonts changing default 474 customizing 474 listing 475 scale 474 Foreground Color Binder 449 format lines of text Text Editor 133 Forward Mail Tool 153 Frac Calculator key 301 Full Header Mail Tool 156 Fun calculator key 304 Function Keys utility 492 functions financial 306 logical 313 miscellaneous Calculator 302 scientific 314 user defined Calculator 304 future value of investment 308 Fv Calculator key 308 Fwd fast forward button Audio To
319. ile system Figure 4 19 shows a mail message with a voice mail attachment opened up in the AudioTool application See the chapter Audio Tool on page 341 for information about using AudioTool to listen to the message Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll zer Mail Tool View Message 12 From mariac celtic Wed Feb 24 15 32 PST 1993 Date Wed 24 Feb 93 15 27 07 PST From mariac celtic Maria A Cherem To egret river Subject Last Week s Conversation Content Type X sun attachment Content Length 23876 Egret Here s a recording of the short conversation I had with Rob and Keith last week amp Audio Tool File 7 Edit 7 Volume 7 Attachments m e Ie e Rev Play Fwd Rec Tn Voice Format Figure 4 19 Mail Message with an Opened Voice Mail Attachment Note PostScript attachments are displayed in Image Tool For complete information on how to use Image Tool refer to Chapter 13 Image Tool Viewing Special Attachments You will need access on your system or file server to the software used to create the attachment Also you probably need to be running the same version of the software If you do not have access to the correct software you might want to request that the sender convert the file into PostScript format and resend the file To view specially formatted text files 1 Copy the attachment into File Manager See Movin
320. iles are selected Print One prints files using the print method in the Binder database if it exists Otherwise Print prints files using the default print method from the File Manager Properties window See Solaris User s Guide September 1995 2 Customizing Your File Manager on page 98 for information about tool properties and the chapter Chapter 16 Binder for information about print bindings e Highlight the Print or Print One item from the File menu or the File Pane pop up menu drag right to display the Print submenu and choose Print to display the Print Options window This is useful when you want to print a file using a method other than the default print method or if you want to print a file to a different printer Figure 2 23 shows the Print window with an alternate printer specified in the text field Specify F ILE where you want the file name to be in your print script g FM Print Print Method cat FILE mp lo Ip Figure 2 23 Print Popup Window Finding Files and Folders File Manager provides three ways to locate folders and files Go To text field and button Pattern matching with a string typed in the File Pane Find pop up window This section describes how to use these methods to find folders and files Using the Go To Text Field and Menu The Go To menu includes a list of the folders that you have accessed since you started File Manager Your home folder is the de
321. in color when you select B amp W the icon becomes black and white Caution If you change your icon from color to black and white the colors will not be restored when you switch back to color If you inadvertently switch from color to black and white use the Undo item on the Edit menu to restore the color Move Buttons Use the move buttons the arrows shown in Figure 15 14 to adjust the position of the drawing on the canvas or to move a region within the canvas To move a selected region click SELECT on one of the left right up or down arrow buttons to move the region one pixel in the designated direction If no region is selected the entire drawing is moved SONOMA ow Figure 15 14 Icon Editor Move Buttons Note If you move or rotate part of the image off the canvas the pixels are cropped from the image and are not restored when you move the image in the opposite direction Use the Undo item on the Edit menu to restore the image Icon Editor 431 19 To move a region 1 Choose Region from the Mode choices Region is the last item on the top row of the Mode choices 2 Move the pointer to the corner of the region you want to move and press SELECT 3 Drag the pointer to define the region and release SELECT 4 Click SELECT on one of the arrow buttons to move the region one pixel in the designated direction You can repeat this operation as often as you like The fifth and sixth buttons shown i
322. in the mailfolder scrolling list are your subdirectories or folders of mail files You can double click SELECT on these entries to display the mail files of each subdirectory The last entries in the mailfolder scrolling list are the regular mail files that you can load or save messages to You specify the directory where the mail files reside in your file structure using the Mail Filing category in the Properties window See Mail Filing Properties on page 206 for more information Any mail files that you create in this directory are displayed as items in the Mail File menu on the Header window control area described in the section Mail File Menus on page 185 The default mail file directory is your home directory If you want to specify a different directory it s a good idea to do so before you create new mail files In addition to using the Mail Files window you can also create new mail files add messages to mail files or view a mail file using the Mail File menu and the Move Copy and Load menus on the Mail Tool Header window control area These menus are described in the next section Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll Mail File Menus The Mail File menu of the Header window contains a list of files and subdirectories in your mail file directory as shown in Figure 4 27 Use this menu as an easy way to fill in the name of a mail file in the Mail File text field File v View v CEdit 7 C
323. indow is displayed showing the appointment information Figure 5 10 shows an example of the Reminder pop up window oH Calendar Reminder 5 7 91 Staff meeting From 3 45 to 4 45 Bldg 5 Bradbury Conf Rm Take Design Committee material for status presentation Figure 5 10 Example of the Reminder Pop up Window Choosing the Mail setting automatically mails a reminder to the email addresses you type into the To text field 8 Change the Alarm times if necessary by typing a new number into the appropriate text field Decimals and fractions are not accepted formats You can also change the default Alarm times from the Properties window See Customizing Your Calendar Manager on page 257 for information Calendar Manager 235 9 When you have entered all the information for the appointment click SELECT on the Insert button The appointment is added to the scrolling list in the Appointment Editor window and to the Calendar Manager window If you want to enter appointments for another day double click SELECT on the new day in the Calendar Manager window or type a new date in the Date field Deleting an Appointment 236 To delete an existing Appointment or To Do item follow these steps 1 Select a date and display the Appointment Editor pop up window 2 Select the appointment in the scrolling list that you want to delete The appointment is highlighted as shown in Figure 5 11 the appointment information is disp
324. indow shown in Figure 5 26 gy CM Properties egret river Category Ba Editor Defaults Editor Defaults Display Settings Access List and Permissions Printer Settings Date Format Mail To egret river Privacy Show Time and Text Figure 5 26 Properties Window Calendar Manager 257 258 To display a particular category of properties Choose the item from the Category menu at the top of the Properties window When you release MENU the contents of the Properties window show the properties you can set for that category When you have changed properties you must apply them by clicking SELECT on the Apply button This only applies the properties currently displayed To change properties of a different category display the new category change the desired settings and click SELECT on the Apply button again Alternatively you can click SELECT on the Reset button to reset all the options to be the same as they were since the last time you applied changes Click SELECT on the Defaults button to reset all the options to their default settings Editor Defaults Properties The Editor Defaults properties shown in Figure 5 27 specify the defaults for the Appointment Editor pop up window When you set the editor defaults from the Properties window they are automatically set each time you display the Appointment Editor window The Mail To text field determines who receives reminder mail when you u
325. indow appears Figure 11 4 Audio Tool 345 asl 11 Audio Control Record Press the Auto Adjust button to set the record volume Record Volume 50 _ gt Balance Left Right Monitor Volume 0 O Figure 11 4 Audio Control Record Window 3 In the Audio Control Record window select a source either click SELECT on the Microphone button or on the Line In button 4 Click SELECT on the Auto Adjust button and speak into the microphone for three to five seconds Or play a selection from the sound source that s connected to your audio hardware s line in Auto adjust automatically sets the recording level You can also move the Record Volume slider to adjust the recording level manually 5 Click SELECT on the Rec button in Audio Tool s base window The Rec button changes to Stop as shown in Figure 11 5 Audio Tool Untitled Modified Pointer 0 00 0 Rec becomes Stop L Recording Length 0 21 4 0 15 6 f Figure 11 5 Record Button Changed to Stop 6 Begin speaking into the microphone or playing the music or other sound source 346 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 ie i 7 When you have finished recording click SELECT on the Stop button If you make a mistake you can either choose File gt New which cannot be undone to clear all the sound data and start over or you can edit the sound later Refer to Editing an Au
326. ine how long it will take to double you investment Register 0 0 01 interest rate 9 12 Register 1 16000 future value Register 2 8000 present value Calculator 307 Clicking SELECT on Ctrm returns 92 77 which tells you that it would take 92 77 months or almost eight years to double your 8 000 Ddb Double Declining Depreciation Use Ddb to compute the depreciation allowance on an asset for a specified period of time using the double declining balance method Store the following information in the memory registers Register 0 Amount paid for asset Register 1 Salvage value of asset at end of life Register 2 Useful life of an asset Register 3 Time period for depreciation allowance Ddb Example You have purchased an office machine for 8 000 The useful life of this machine is six years The salvage value after six years is 900 You want to compute the depreciate expense for the fourth year using the double declining balance method Memory register usage Register 0 8000 amount paid for asset Register 1 900 value of asset at end of its life Register 2 6 useful life of the asset Register 3 4 time period for depreciation allowance Clicking SELECT on Ddb returns 790 12 which tells you that the depreciation expense for the fourth year will be 790 12 Fo Future Value Use Fv to determine the future value of an investment The Calculator computes the future value based on a se
327. ing the Snapshot window In such cases click SELECT on the Hide Window During Capture setting to remove the Snapshot window from the screen while the snapshot is in progress When the Hide Window During Capture setting is on Snapshot automatically adjusts the Snap Delay setting to eight seconds This is to guarantee that there will be enough time to remove the Snapshot window before the snapshot is taken Remember to reset the Snap Delay setting after you turn off the Hide Snapshot During Capture setting Creating a Snapshot This section describes how to create a snapshot of a window region or screen Remember to save your snapshot afterwards Snapping a Window You can take snapshots of windows and icons following these steps 1 Make sure the window or icon you want to snap is completely visible If the window or icon to be snapped is partially obscured by overlapping windows the overlapping windows are included in the snapshot 2 Click SELECT on the Snap Type Window setting Snapshot 415 14 416 Set the Snap Delay and Beep During Countdown settings if you want to use them If you want to hide Snapshot during the capture operation click SELECT on the Hide Window During Capture setting Click SELECT on the Snap button The Snap button displays the standard busy pattern and a message is displayed in the footer Move the pointer into the header of the window you want to snap and click SELECT to start t
328. ings up Appt an appointment editor window for creating appointments to be used with Calendar Manager For information on how to do this refer to Chapter 5 Calendar Manager The Log check box determines whether or not the mail you are composing is recorded in a file You specify the file where messages are recorded using the Mail Tool Properties window See Compose Window Properties on page 200 for more information The Log check box does not appear on the Compose window if you have not specified a log file name with the Compose Window properties The To Subject and Cc text fields are used to type the email addresses of the recipients the subject of the message and the email addresses for those to receive copies of the message respectively The text pane of the Compose window is used to type the text of the message you want to send The text pane uses the standard text editing conventions available from the Text Editor See the chapter Text Editor on page 125 for more information about editing The Attachments pane at the bottom of the Compose window is used to add attachments to your mail Attachments can be any kind of file and can be used to send images voice mail documents that retain their word processor file formats Calendar Manager appointments and so forth See Mail Tool Attachments on page 173 for information about mail attachments Multimedia Mail Tool 159 4 Reading Messages
329. ion Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 41 lll Managing Your Time The OpenWindows environment provides an icon based Clock program and an icon based calendar called Calendar Manager Figure 1 35 shows the Calendar Manager base window Calendar Manager egret river TITE January 1993 Sun Mon Tue Wed Thu Fri Sat 4 5 7 10 00a 1 1 10 00a Staff 1 00p Engi 10 00a Prod 12 00p Mari 11 12 13 14 15 10 00a 1 1 10 00a Staff 1 00p Liz s 10 00a Prod 5 00p Mar 3 00p Mar 1 00p writ 18 19 10 00a 1 1 10 00a Staff 1 00p Engi 6 00p Rob s 25 26 28 10 00 a 1 1 10 00a Staff 10 00a Prod 1 00p writ Figure 1 35 Calendar Manager Base Window Calendar Manager is an interactive application that lets you schedule your appointments and will send you messages about them on request For instance you can request that Calendar Manager beep or send an electronic mail message to your mailbox to remind you of important meetings and you can check the calendars of others on your network 42 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll Printing Your Documents To print documents you use Print Tool Print Tool enables you to print documents from a variety of formats including ASCII troff PostScript text and raster images Figure 1 36 shows the Print Tool application window Print Tool Filename E Header F Printer l i Information co
330. ipses This menu is only active when the current mode is a fillable shape square circle or ellipse Figure 15 12 The Icon Editor Fill Choices The first fill choice an open square draws an outline of the chosen shape using a 1 pixel wide black pattern The other fill choices represent patterns from white to black that you can use to fill the square circle or ellipse modes Icon Editor Color Controls You can create color or black and white icons by choosing Color or B amp W as shown in Figure 15 13 Color is not available if your workstation is black and white B amp W Figure 15 13 Icon Editor Color Choice When the Color choice is selected you can draw using black white or any of the colors provided on the Color Chooser window You display the Color Chooser with the Palette button on the Icon Editor header When you select a Solaris User s Guide September 1995 i Fe color from the Color Chooser the cursor changes to that color as a reminder of your current color choice See the section Icon Editor Color Chooser Palette on page 439 for information about using color When the B amp W choice is selected only the colors black and white are available The Palette button on the Icon Editor header changes to a Black or White choice setting When Black is selected your icon is drawn with a black pen When White is selected your icon is drawn with a white pen If the icon you are creating is currently
331. is not enough room to display all the text associated with a graph as much of the text is displayed as possible and the last character is a This indicates that you should resize the window to be wider in order to see all the text Performance Meter Menu You can change the performance value to be monitored in a Performance Meter window by choosing an item from the Performance Meter pop up menu shown in Figure 9 5 To display this pop up menu move the pointer to anywhere in the Performance Meter window and press MENU Performance Meter Show packets Show page Show swap Show interrupts Show disk Show context a Show load Show collisions Show errors Properties Figure 9 5 The Performance Meter Pop up Menu Here are the performance values you can display Show cpu monitors the percent of CPU being used e Show packets monitors the number of Ethernet packets per second Performance Meter 325 Show page monitors the paging activity in pages per second Show swap monitors the number of jobs swapped per second Show interrupts monitors the number of device interrupts per second Show disk monitors disk traffic in transfers per second Show context monitors the number of context switches per second Show load monitors the average number of runnable processes over the last minute Show collisions monitors the number of collisions per second detected on the Ethernet Show error
332. isplay a monthly list of Appointments or To Do items See Appointment List and To Do List Views on page 228 Calendar Manager 227 z Appointment List and To Do List Views 228 In addition to displaying your schedule for a day week month or year you can also display separate windows of lists of all the Appointments and To Do items for a particular day week month or year The appointments and To Do items also appear on your base window schedule Figure 5 7 shows a day view displayed along with the Appointment and To Do lists for that day w Calendar Manager egret river View Edit 7 Browse v Print 7 Prev Today Next January 1993 Fri February 12 1993 9 00 10 00 Staff Meeting g Appt List Fri February 12 1993 j February 1993 11 00 12 00 Eng 1 9 00am 10 00am Staff Meeting 2 11 00am 12 00pm Engineering Team Meeting g To Do List Fri February 12 1993 f 1 O Start user guide outline CLE 2 O Review Engineering Spec 3 O Complete 1st draft of Proposal Figure 5 7 Day View with an Appointment List and To Do List An Appointment List displays all the appointments for a particular time period while a To Do list displays all the To Do items for a particular time period To help you keep track of tasks that need to be done the To Do list include
333. it color monitor as an 8 bit color image This Chapter describes how to use Image Tool to Open an image or document for viewing Save an image file in the same or different format Print an image or document Use the Image Tool palette to manipulate a document To open Image Tool choose Workspace gt Programs gt Image Tool 389 i Image Tool Icon and Window The Image Tool icon is shown in Figure 13 1 and the Image Tool View window is shown in Figure 13 2 The icon includes a file name if the View window contains an image Image Tool File Fish i i EK drag and Drop Target mi Paging Up and Down buttons Become active with a multiple page Help butto document View Window Figure 13 2 Image Tool Base Window 390 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 is Opening Image Files and Documents There are several ways to open or display an image for viewing depending on your starting point Open an image by selecting File gt Open See Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment for standard information on opening a file In Mail Tool open an attached image file or multiple page document Drag and drop a file from another application to the Image Tool View window In Snapshot after an image has been snapped choose the View option Once Image Tool is launched from Mail Tool or Snapshot you don t have to open Image Tool again to view other images Viewing
334. itor 141 142 Dragging Complete Text Editor Files Text Editor files can be dragged and dropped onto any place in the DeskSet environment that accepts ASCII files This operation is always done as a copy To drag a complete Text Editor file 1 Press SELECT on the text glyph inside the drag and drop target The text glyph is the figure inside the drag and drop target that represents the entire text file 2 Drag the pointer a short distance A text file move pointer is displayed as shown in Figure 3 13 Pointer and icon ok so it started out with me driving to work Based on my wrinkles and a few gray hairs I d say this was about 10 years or so into the future I passed the usual exit and ended up in East Peyton Place As I walked through the electric fence gates it was obvious that we had just recently moved Everyone was unpacking and Mary declared that she had done some figuring and this was her 32nd office since being at the company Figure 3 13 Dragging a Text Editor File 3 Drag the pointer to the destination of the text and release SELECT Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Qo lll Customizing Your Text Editor There are two files used by the Text Editor that you can modify to customize the Extras submenu of the Text Pane pop up menu and to specify function key mappings This section describes these two files The text_extras_menu File You can customize the Extras menu to include your own comm
335. ively you can specify the actual names of colors instead of the trio of numbers as follows filemgr fg blu bg gray50 amp File Manager 115 lll No To see the available list of color names look at the file usr openwin lib rgb txt If you do not like the colors of the icons displayed in File Manager use the Binder with its Color Chooser to change the colors to your liking See Changing a Binding on page 462 of the chapter Binder for information File Manager first looks for entries in the Binder database to determine colors of the icons it displays If File Manager cannot make contact with the Binder database it issues a warning message and then uses the colors set up via X resources described in the filemgr manual page Using Floppy and CD Media File Manager allows you to use removable media such as Floppy Disks or CD ROM Compact disk read only memory on the WorkSpace You can view your Floppy disks or CDs if you have a system with at least 1 floppy drive or 1 CD ROM drive and are running Solaris 2 4 Refer to the documentation that came with your computer for information on how to insert a floppy disk or CD into the drive Using a Floppy Disk with File Manager The following explains what to do with your floppy disk once you have inserted it into your drive You may encounter these cases when you insert a Floppy disk The disk is formatted and labeled In this case you see the wind
336. izontal available Go To Menu Defaults Custom Commands Advanced Settings the waste window File is not recoverable Applies changes but does not save them Default Document Name NewDocument if you quit File Manager Saves changes as Apply Resets to last saved new defaults default Figure 2 33 File Manager Properties Menu In addition you can customize your File Manager and other DeskSet applications with items such as font type and size that can be set in the Workspace Properties menu See Using the Workspace Properties Window on page 468 for more information File Manager 99 lll No General Defaults To change the General Default Properties Choose Properties gt General Defaults from Category The General Defaults Properties window is shown in Figure 2 34 gy FM Properties Category General Defaults Open Folder into Folder View Show Vertical Separate Window Show Horizontal Edit Menu item is File is recoverable from the Waste window File is not recoverable Default Document Name NewDocument Apply Save as Defaults Reset Figure 2 34 General Defaults Properties Window e Use Open Folder any time you open a folder You can set the folder to open it into the same window as your existing folders or have the folder open into a new window each time e Use Folder View to lay out your folder structure horizon
337. ket is empty If you quit File Manager and restart it the new File Manager will not remember the original locations of files in the Wastebasket If you choose Undelete in this case File Manager sends the message Original location for lt file gt not saved please restore manually See Moving or Copying Files and Folders Using Cut and Paste on page 78 or Moving or Copying Files and Folders Using Drag and Drop on page 80 for information about how to move the file out of the Wastebasket and back into the desired folder Use Cut to move the selected files from the Wastebasket to the clipboard This option is inactive if no files in the Wastebasket are selected Use Copy to copy the selected files from the Wastebasket to the clipboard This option is inactive if no files in the Wastebasket are selected Use Paste to move the contents of the clipboard into the Wastebasket Creating a New Wastebasket If you quit the Wastebasket window you can create a new one by following these steps 1 Make sure the File Manager Tool General Defaults Properties Edit Menu item is Delete The Delete option is the default setting See Customizing Your File Manager on page 98 for information about setting the File Manager Tool Properties File Manager 93 lll No Linking Files 2 In File Manager select a folder or file that you want to put into the Wastebasket 3 Choose Delete from the Edit menu or the Fi
338. ks like the Go Back button Home displays the first page of the chapter you re in If you re already at the first page of a chapter Home displays the first page of the previous chapter End displays the first page of the next chapter Checking Your Location in the AnswerBook Choose Page Info from the View button menu in the Viewer to look up the origin of the page currently on display The Page Info window shown in Figure 19 9 is displayed Using the AnswerBook Software 507 19 ow Page Info The current page is i User s Guide Book Preface How this Manual is Organized Section Figure 19 9 Page Info Window Each time you choose the Page Info option you see an update of the information for the current page Following Hypertext Cross Reference Links Hypertext cross reference links appear as text boxed with a thin outline For information about booting or halting a workstation over a network see ystem and Network Adwumisirahon Figure 19 10 Hypertext Link in Text You can follow hypertext cross reference links within or between books The quickest way to follow a cross reference link is to double click SELECT on the boxed link Or you can click SELECT on the hypertext link then press MENU on the View button and choose Follow Link as shown in Figure 19 11 508 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 1 7 AnswerBook Viewer Follow Link Page Info Standard Magnification Custom M
339. kspace and press MENU The Workspace menu appears as shown in Figure 1 40 gy Works pace Utilities fe Properties workstation Info Help Choose Help Exit Figure 1 40 Workspace Menu Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 47 lll bd 2 Drag the pointer to choose Help When you release the mouse button the Help Viewer appears displaying a list of handbooks 3 Double click SELECT on Introducing Your Desktop Figure 1 41 shows the Help Viewer selection Help Viewer Help Handbooks Double click SELECT on any of the choices below Introducing Your Desktop About AnswerBooks About Audio Tool About Binde About Calculator About Calendar Manage Figure 1 41 Selecting Introducing Your Desktop The on line tutorial Introducing Your Desktop opens in the Help Viewer as shown in Figure 1 42 48 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll Help Viewer Menu buttons for modifying x what and how you view Introducing Your Desktop Everything on your screen is part of your desktop which includes many features to make your work easier This introduction presents the basic skills you need to start using your desktop As you begin this introduction rest the mouse on its silvery blue pad with the pad horizontal and the mouse cord pointing away from you Mbve the mouse on its pad Notice how each movement is reflected by a black arrow shaped pointe
340. kyhi gh Figure 4 42 Example of an Alias Group in etc aliases To use the alias type the name of the alias in the To Cc or Bcc line of the Compose Messages window The names you typed in the field are not expanded as part of the outgoing message The alias group itself is displayed as the user name when the message is received To use an alias on someone else s system type the alias name and their machine name in the To Cc or Bcc line of the Compose Messages window For example someone else could send mail to the friends alias in the example by typing friends castle because the friends alias is on the machine castle Expert Properties You use the Expert Properties category to set some advanced mail defaults that are provided for mailx 1 compatibility To see the expert default settings shown in Figure 4 43 choose Expert from the Category menu at the top of the Properties popup window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll g Mail Tool Properties Category 7 Expert Defaults Include me when Reply To All metoo C Ignore host name in address allnet O Use network aware mail file locking Figure 4 43 Expert Properties The expert settings determine what happens when you choose Reply to All or Reply to All Include from the Compose menu These settings only apply when your email address appears in the To or Cc list of the message you are replying to T
341. l Files is selected or are removed from the scrolling list if Audio Files is selected The commands on the Edit menu are common to most DeskSet tools Click MENU on the Edit button to display the Edit menu Whenever a command cannot be performed the corresponding menu item is dimmed For example Undo is dimmed when there are no editing operations to undo The Clear command removes the current sound data from the display canvas Click SELECT on Clear when you want to delete all the data in the canvas Note The clear operation does not change the name of the file that s being edited Take care not to accidentally save an empty canvas to an audio file The clear operation can be undone and the audio data is retained so that it can be used by a Redo operation However since newly recorded data consumes space in the temp file directory you might consider using the File gt New operation This operation which cannot be undone recovers the unused space in the filesystem The Undo command reverses the effects of the last editing command issued Click MENU on Undo to display the Undo submenu which has the following options Last Edit Restores the previous data prior to the last change This is the default action for Undo All Edits Restores all edited changes to their state as of the last time the audio file was saved loaded or cleared Audio Tool 367 11 Redo Cut Copy Paste Delete 368
342. l Shift u Erases to the end of the line Move Caret Functions Table 17 3 Commands that Move the Caret Within Text Sequence Action Control b or Left Arrow Moves the caret one character to the left Control f or Right Arrow Moves the caret one character to the right Control Shift b Moves the caret one word to the right Control Moves the caret one word to the left Control Moves the caret to the end of the word Control a Moves the caret to the start of line Control e Moves the caret to the end of the line Control p or Up Arrow Moves the caret up one line maintaining column position Control n or Down Arrow Moves the caret down one line maintaining column position 478 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 i Control Return End Moves the caret to the end of text Control Shift Return or Home Moves the caret to beginning of text Page Up Moves caret up one pane Page Down Moves caret down one pane Keyboard Mouse Equivalents The following keyboard accelerators require that you use mouseless mode You can set this from the Properties menu 1 Select either Basic or All Functions from the Keyboard Mouse Equivalent 2 Press SELECT on Apply Global Navigation Functions Table 17 4 Commands for Navigating About the Workspace Sequence Action Alt w Moves focus to the next window within the current application Shift Alt w Moves focus to the previous window within the current application Alt n Moves focus t
343. l Tool File Manager 83 2 Open the folder window in File Manager where you want to put the mail message s 3 In the Mail Tool application click SELECT on the header of the mail message to be copied or moved 4 Press SELECT and drag the pointer A small mail file icon is displayed as shown in Figure 2 21 You can release the Control key any time after the envelope is displayed i E File Manager hightide egret Fish hightide egret Fish Jem Contains 10 items 873 Mb l w Mail Tool var mail egr Cod pd File 7 View 7 Edit 7 Compose 7 Mail File _ cj Done Next Delete Reply v Move 7 Cop 1 thief cici Thu Feb 18 10 42 18 506 Yor Seafood 2 patten newbirth Thu Feb 18 10 49 46 1282 Pri U 3 bgahl scuba Thu Feb 18 10 50 32 1110 Inl IN U 4 ayers outhouse Thu Feb 18 10 51 17 532 Su REA 5 ayers outhouse Thu Feb 18 10 51 17 511 vi mailfile 7 mariac celtic Thu Feb 18 11 00 90 2531 Pri 8 hamilton artemis Thu Feb 18 11 13 22 611 mer 9 abelson sharonolds Thu Feb 18 11 34 32 1232 You N 10 aquablu cowman Thu Feb 18 13 58 21 647 Sul Figure 2 21 Dragging a Mail Message onto File Manager 5 Drag the pointer onto the File Manager file pane and release SELECT The first time you drag a mail message onto File Manager the mail message appears in File Manager as a file called mailfile If that file already exists the mail message appears as mailfileO If mailfi
344. l Tool Window Size Use the Display Headers field to determine how many headers are displayed in your primary Mail Tool Header window You can increase the setting to display more headers at one time or decrease the setting to display fewer headers to make the Header window smaller Use the Display Characters field to determine the width of all Mail Tool panels and windows After you make changes to the Display fields you need to quit the Mail Tool application and restart it in order to see the change Delivery Properties If you want Mail Tool to automatically display the headers for incoming mail messages check the Automatically Display Headers option If you do not choose this option Mail Tool does not display headers for incoming messages unless you specifically request them by choosing Load In Box or Save Changes from the File menu If the Show To recipient option is checked the Mail Tool header of a message sent by you will display the recipient of the message instead of your mail address Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll Mail Tool Custom Buttons The first four buttons on the second row of the Mail Tool Header window are custom buttons You can change the value of these buttons to be any of the items from the File View Edit or Compose menus If there are items on these menus that you use very frequently you can change your custom buttons to activate those commands The Custom Buttons
345. l that you want to attach to a mail message you can drag the file s glyph from Audio Tool s drag and drop target to the Compose window s Attachments subwindow Audio Tool 351 11 Mail Tool Compose Message w Include v Deliver 7 Header 7 Clear Attach 7 To audiotest Subject audio test file Ce Attached is an audio test file Attachments 1 attachment 69664 bytes ai i E audio file o Data Transfer Completed Figure 11 10 Audio File Attached to a Mail Message 6 If needed type in an additional message in the Compose text region 7 Click SELECT on the Deliver button in the Mail Tool Compose window Listening to a Voice Mail Message If you have a machine equipped with a built in speaker or an attached speaker you can listen to the audio file by doing the following 1 Open Mail Tool 2 Double click SELECT on the message header containing the attached audio file in the Mail Tool base window The mail message containing the file is displayed in the View Message window 3 Double click SELECT on the audio attachment glyph in the view window Attachments area The audio file opens and begins playing 352 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 11 Audio Tool Reference Base Window Display canvas Cursor mark H voice Format This part of the chapter provides information about Audio Tool s File Edit and Volume menus
346. lable list of thumbnail renderings of each page and controls for viewing specific pages Page Viewing Controls sets these viewing controls for multiple page documents e Page orientation e Page display Order e Page size Note The page size setting affects only the view not printing Image Tool 411 13 Edit Menu The Edit menu contains the following items Undo undoes the last usage of these tools from the palette Flip Rotate Pan or Zoom e Palette contains the Pan Rotate Selector Flip and Zoom Properties displays the Properties window where you can set If images are viewed in color or gray scale The number of colors used for rendering images e If the palette is automatically displayed when an image is opened Some Standard Operations The following chart summarizes standard Image Tool operations To Do this Open Image Tool from the workspace Choose Workspace gt Programs gt Image Tool Open Image Tool from its icon Double click SELECT on the Image Tool icon Display an image Choose Open from the File menu Save a raster image Choose Save from the File menu Close the Image Tool window Click SELECT on the window menu button in the upper left corner Quit from the Image Tool icon Press MENU on the icon then choose Exit from the menu Quit from the Image Tool window Press MENU on the window menu button in the upp
347. lay the time and another to display the Stopwatch Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Calculator 8 The DeskSet Calculator is a scientific and financial calculator designed to perform a variety of mathematical functions It operates in much the same way as many hand held calculators There are financial logical and scientific modes You can store numbers in ten different memory registers and retrieve and replace them easily In addition you can store up to 10 of your own functions and constants in menus The Calculator displays numbers in fixed point notation and decimal base but you can change it to display numbers in engineering or scientific notation and in binary octal or hexadecimal base This chapter describes how to use the Calculator You can use Calculator with a mouse as you do other OpenWindows applications or without a mouse as you would a physical hand held calculator With the mouse you click SELECT on the Calculator buttons otherwise you use the keyboard To open the Calculator application choose Workspace gt Programs gt Calculator 295 8 Calculator Icon and Base Window Shows numeric base type Shows display mode Modes of Operation The Calculator icon and base window are shown in Figure 8 1 The base window has six rows of eight buttons Click SELECT on a button to activate it Calculator Display for calculations Shows mode Basic Financial Logical Scientific
348. layed in the Appointment Editor fields and the author of the appointment is displayed in the footer CM Appointment Editor egret river pisi aN Month Day Year Start 10 00 Appointments Stop 11 00 10 00 Staff Meeting 11 00 Engineering Team Mee what Staff Meeting 3 00 Writer s Team Meeting I CLEI Calendars Insert Access egret river y l e E z I i Repeat 7 One Time Fer E Mall Ta Privacy 2 Show Time and Text Insert Delete Change Reset Author egret Figure 5 11 Appointment Editor Window with a Highlighted Appointment Solaris User s Guide September 1995 5 3 Click SELECT on the Delete button at the bottom of the Appointment Editor window The appointment is deleted from both the scrolling list and the Calendar Manager window If you try to delete a repeating appointment a Notice is displayed as shown in Figure 5 12 allowing you to delete the appointment for the selected date only for forward future dates all dates or to cancel the operation Calendars insert A id i This appointment is part of a repeating series Do you want to delete oe 5 i n uw ad Figure 5 12 Notice for Repeating Events Editing an Appointment To edit an existing Appointment or To Do item follow these steps 1 Select a date and display the Appointment Editor
349. lays appointments for one day choose View gt Day The view in the Calendar Manager window changes to display the currently selected day If the current view is the year view the day displayed is the first day of the currently selected month Figure 5 4 shows an example of the day view Calendar Manager egret river December 1992 Thu January 7 1993 10 00 11 00 Product Meeting January 1993 12 00 1 00 Maria s Lunch February 1993 Figure 5 4 Day View Solaris User s Guide September 1995 5 Week View If the current view is the week view an accelerated way to change to the day display is to move the pointer into the date box at the top of the day you want to view and click SELECT You can set the range of hours that are displayed for the day view from the Properties window See Customizing Your Calendar Manager on page 257 for more information You can also display a daily list of Appointments or To Do items Displaying these lists next to the day view is particularly useful because Appointments and To Do items without times associated with them do not appear on the regular day view See the section Appointment List and To Do List Views on page 228 for more information To change the view in the Calendar Manager window so that it displays appointments for one week choose View gt Week The view in the Calendar Manager window changes to display the week containing
350. le Pane pop up menu A new Wastebasket is created to contain the files you selected A link is a symbolic connection or pointer to a single file that allows you to access it from more than one directory You can set up a link to a file ina restricted directory allowing access to the file without providing access to the directory The Link option on the Edit menu runs the standard 1n operating system command A symbolic link is created when you link files between directories When you link files in the same directory a symbolic link is created Refer to the man page for 1n for a complete description For example if you have a file named Marlin ina folder called Fish you can link it to another folder called SwordFish Once the link is established you can access Marlin from either folder Marlin has not been copied into SwordFish it has been linked with a pointer from one folder to another Any editing changes you make to a file with links are reflected in all of the folders since there is really only one file not multiple copies of it To use a linked file you can drag and drop its icon from any folder that the file is linked to Creating a Link 94 To link files to folders follow these steps 1 Select the file or files you want to link 2 Choose Link from the Edit menu or popup file pane menu An instructional message is displayed in the footer as shown in Figure 2 29 telling you how to proceed ee ee L Link the
351. le and mailfileod already exist the file is named mailfilel and so forth You can also drag and drop a mail message onto a mail file icon in File Manager to append the new message to an existing mail file Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll Transferring Files From Your System to Another To transfer files from your system to another system follow these steps 1 Display the Remote Copy popup by choosing Remote Copy from the File menu If you have selected files your host name workstation or machine name is displayed in the Source Machine Name text field and the file names are displayed in the Pathname text field as shown in Figure 2 22 Source Where does the file you want to copy reside Machine Name river What is the pathname of the file to copy Pathname hightide egret Fish Destination where do you want the file copied Machine Name celtic What is the final path name of the copied file Pathname tmp Figure 2 22 Remote Copy Pop up Window 2 Type the destination machine name in the Machine Name text field under Destination 3 Type the pathname in the Path Name text field under Destination File Manager 85 lll No Printing Files 86 4 Click SELECT on Copy File to initiate the transfer While the transfer is in process the Copy button displays the standard busy pattern To transfer files from another system to your system you must know the path and file name of t
352. le size it is a good idea to periodically delete obsolete messages and save changes You save changes using either Save Changes or Done from the File menu Use Save Changes to commit changes and incorporate new mail without closing the primary Mail Tool Header window Use Done to commit changes close the primary Mail Tool Header window to an icon and incorporate new mail the next time you open the icon Using Done leaves Mail Tool in a condition that lets you read mail using another mail program without creating conflicts in the mail spooling files Mail Tool automatically checks and incorporates new mail messages using a time period specified from the Mail Tool Properties window If you have a long time period set and want to see if you have new mail you can use Load In Box from the File menu Choosing either Save Changes or Done also checks for new mail messages See Customizing Mail Tool on page 194 for more information about Mail Tool properties When you quit the Mail Tool application a Notice is displayed as shown in Figure 4 25 asking you whether you want to save changes quit without saving changes or cancel the quit notice Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll The current mail box has been changed Do you wish to save the changes Save ganes Discard Changes Cancel Figure 4 25 Quit Notice Choosing Save Changes commits the changes and quits Mail Tool Choosing Discard C
353. le that you want to view on the Mail Files popup window scrolling list If the desired mail file is in a subdirectory double click SELECT on the subdirectory to display its contents in the scrolling list Choose Mail File from the Load menu The mail file is loaded into the Mail Tool Header window Alternatively you can just double click SELECT on the mail file in the Mail Files scrolling list to load that mail file Multimedia Mail Tool 189 4 Editing a Mail File Emptying Renaming Deleting You can empty a mail file rename it or delete it with the Edit menu of the Mail Files window To empty rename or delete a mail file you first need to select the mail file in the scrolling list on the Mail Files window If the mail file is in a subdirectory below the one displayed on the scrolling list double click SELECT on that subdirectory to display it If the mail file is in a directory higher up from the one displayed in the scrolling list double click SELECT on the Go up one folder folder item until the mail file is in the scrolling list When the mail file is in the scrolling list click SELECT on the mail file to select it To delete a mail file select the mail file in the Mail Files scrolling list then choose Delete from the Edit menu Mail Tool will give you a notice asking you to confirm that you really want to delete the mail file To empty a mail file select the mail file in the Mail Files scrolling list
354. lect it and then click on the Delete Bookmark button The Navigator asks for your confirmation before deleting Note that you cannot undelete a deleted bookmark Accessing a Bookmarked Page Bookmarks serve as links to pages you ve marked in the AnswerBook Viewer Double click SELECT on a bookmark to display the bookmarked page Using the AnswerBook Software 517 19 518 Bookmark title Bookmarked page Can t Remember Password If you forget your pasword you cannot log in You must ask your system administrator to change your password to something that is easy for you to remember Once you can log in you may want tochange your password again so that it is known only to you In general long sequences of numbers punctuation marks and other special characters are hard to remember whereas r i i i AnswerBook Navigator e meaning special only to you are easier to remember Modify Library New Bookmark in Password any character in your password characters that can be Contents dearch Bookmarks gt y the terminal such as CHEC CHEZ CHEW nd in some cases and should be avoided The these as signals rather than as text characters and this om typing in the password correctly Bookmarks jn Library Solaris Usef s AnswerBook Cover in User s Guide ame in all capitals when you log in the system will System Software AnswerBook 1al were uppercase only All letters will
355. lendar of a user who does not have to be at the meeting by clicking SELECT on that calendar in the scrolling list The Multiple Calendars display is then updated and you may now be able to find an available time slot Scheduling Appointments for a Group of Users Once you have found a good time for a new appointment for many users you can use the Appointment Editor to schedule the appointment in the calendars of all users who have given you Insert access For complete information on scheduling an appointment with the CM Appointment Editor see Appointment Editor Options on page 230 Note If a question mark appears in the Calendars Insert Access field it means that the user you are trying to access is running an older version of Calendar Manager You may or may not have access to this user s calendar and you can determine this by attempting to access the calendar The Appointments scrolling list on the CM Appointment Editor displays appointments for all of the calendars selected in the Calendars scrolling list at the time selected in the Multiple Calendars window When you select an appointment on the Appointments scrolling list the appointment information is displayed in the CM Appointment Editor fields and the Calendars scrolling list is updated to display only the owner of the appointment To schedule an appointment for a group of users at one time follow these steps 1 Use Show Multiple Calendars to find a
356. les e JPEG Available for JFIF files Available compression methods depend upon selected format Compression saves disk space e Colors Choose from Black and White 256 Millions Note The number of colors stored in GIF is at most 256 JFIF stores them in true color millions To save a file or document as one of the available formats 1 Choose File gt Save As 2 Type a new name and extension for the file if necessary 3 Select a new file format Image Tool can save files in the following formats PostScript EPSF GIF JFIF JPEG Sun Raster TIFF Image Tool 397 13 Select a Compression method if applicable The following compression methods are available None UNIX Standard UNIX file compression utility available for ESPF PostScript Sun Raster and TIFF formats Encoded run length Available for Sun Raster LZW Available for TIFF files JPEG Available for JFIF files Available compression methods depend upon selected format Compression saves disk space 5 6 Select a color attribute if applicable Available color attributes are Black and White 256 Millions Select Save Save Selection As Save Selection As is available once you have defined an area with the Selector tool on the palette For information on using the palette refer to Using the Image Tool Palette on page 401 To save a portion of the image 1 Open the image For information on openi
357. lick SELECT on the Print button to print the icon The View menu provides the option to display a Grid on the canvas Solaris User s Guide September 1995 fe Grid Display Choose Grid On or just click SELECT on the View button to display a 4 pixel grid for the canvas The grid is useful for aligning and centering all or parts of the icon When the grid is turned on the View menu item changes to Grid Off Therefore you can toggle the grid on and off by clicking SELECT on the View button Figure 15 16 shows an example with the grid turned on Icon Editor cat icon Edited E File 7 View v Edit v Properties 7 Black White o oj F j Jei oO abe GP PEE AN Bow w e gt t cat 64 X 64 3 undos 0 redos available Figure 15 16 Grid Turned On Icon Editor 435 i Edit Menu 436 The Edit menu provides standard editing options as described in the following sections The items on the Edit menu are also available on the pop up menu in the Icon Editor canvas pane Undo and Redo Clear You can undo up to seven of your last actions by choosing Undo from the Edit menu After choosing Undo you can then choose Redo to repeat the original action which restores the canvas to its condition before you chose Undo You never need to worry about what an a
358. lick SELECT on the Save button This updates your database to include the new Binder entry Now when you view the merged Binder databases the All option of the View menu your user entry will replace the System or Network entry of the same name If you want to use the System or Network entry again Binder 463 simply delete the User entry The next time you start a new File Manager application the color specified in your new user Entry will be used to display folders Using the Color Chooser Palette with Binder 464 You can use the Color Chooser with the Binder to specify foreground and background colors for the icons displayed by the File Manager or other DeskSet applications To use the Color Chooser to select Foreground or Background icon colors click SELECT on the Foregr Color or Backgr Color menu button These are the buttons to the right of the text fields The Color Chooser is then displayed as shown in Figure 16 15 vy Color Chooser Choosing Foreground Color for Binder Figure 16 15 Color Chooser for Binder s Foreground Color The icon image with the current Foreground and Background colors is displayed in the upper left corner of the palette shown in Figure 16 15 above To use a color displayed in the Color Chooser palette 1 Click SELECT on the desired color in the Color Chooser palette The selected color is highlighted and displayed in the Color Chooser preview ar
359. like captions e Data areas places like text in the Text Editor window Keyboard Menu Equivalents You can turn on or turn off the keyboard accelerator keys This means that the keyboard character of the acceleration shows up in the following e Application Window means in all applications that use them and in Open Windows menus e Application Only means only OPEN LOOK applications that use them None means will not show up in any OPEN LOOK application Customizing the Solaris Environment 475 17 This is a standard set of tasks within a DeskSet application that can be accelerated from the keyboard by using keyboard shortcuts These will be visible from the pull down menus and can be configured on or off from the Workspace Properties menu Keyboard accelerators are active for only the windows that are active If you need to turn these off you can select None from Keyboard Menu Equivalents from the Keyboard Properties The following table outlines the keyboard shortcuts and their functions Note The Meta key is the lt gt key on SPARC keyboards on x86 and PowerPC keyboards Meta is obtained by pressing Ctrl Alt Table Legend The following table uses these abbreviations FM File Manager CM Calendar Manager MT Mail Tool TE Text Editor SS Snapshot IE Icon Editor B Binder PT Print Tool IT Image Tool AT Audio Tool X Accelerated Menu Item no relevant me
360. ll No 68 Clicking SELECT on the home folder and choosing Hide Subfolders from the Folder View results in the display shown in Figure 2 8 Compare that display with the one shown in Figure 2 7 FM Folder View hightide egret root Oa 5 7 home ILLE home selected Figure 2 8 Example of Hiding Subfolders Choosing Show Subfolders from the Folder View View menu produces the display shown in Figure 2 9 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll FM Folder View hightide egret Seafood FreshwaterFish New Folder OceanFish Figure 2 9 Example of Showing Subfolders With the fish folder selected choosing Begin Tree Here from the View menu changes the display as shown in Figure 2 10 FM Folder View hightide egret root home Fish ILLE Fish selected Figure 2 10 Example of Changing the Beginning Point of a Folder View File Manager 69 lll No Choosing Add Tree s Parent from the Folder View adds one folder farther up the path and its subfolders as shown in Figure 2 11 FM Folder View hightide egret root home Seafood FreshwaterFish New Folder OceanFish ILLE L home selected Figure 2 11 Example of Adding a Parent Folder Path Pane The path pane shows your current location in your file system Parts of the Path and Folder View The path displayed in the File Manager window shows only the folders for the directory and subdirectories t
361. ls 81 Transferring Files From Your System to Another 85 Printing Files 2t1 et etdeterd piopertereew eth ein eadedes 86 Finding Files and Folders cc eev eri aedenediaae enn ees 87 Using the Go To Text Field and Menu 87 Using Pattern Matching to Find Files 88 Pattern Matching in the Go To Text Field 88 Pattern Matching in the File Pane 2s lt s2sseec45e4 ss 89 Using the Find Pop up Window 000s eee eee 89 Finding Files With the Find Window 90 Using the Wastebasket 6 244 n n nn theres ieee eee eee 91 Creating a New Wastebasket 2 66 0 eee cece ees 93 DMG PUGS cn citer een che een E aE EEE EEE hea basen te 94 Creating a LINK escenes riana ee EAEE E EEEREN 94 Removing a Link assansnnnnnnnr errre 95 File and Folder Information n hs daeesca cb eiies 96 Changing Properties and Permissions 98 Customizing Your File Manager 0 0000s eee 98 General Detquts so inccut esed eo oats anan d enne i 100 New Folder Defaults cs acm wwe vette dae nane 101 Current Folder Settings ii devaeerean cen eee neeene eee 108 Contents vii viii Go To Menu Defaults 0 0 cee eee ee ee eee 109 Custom Commands n sasse esseere errre 110 Advanced Seuines use taupe a i eee Pee es 112 Customizing Your File Manager Colors 115 Using Floppy and CD Medidi t5scc
362. ltaneously pressing the SELECT mouse button and the Shift key on the keyboard A tool program or window that provides the user with particular capabilities such as sending electronic mail printing files or interacting with the operating system American Standard Code for Information Interchange A standard data transmission code used to achieve compatibility between data devices ASCII text is plain text that contains no formatting information such as font style size etc 559 Background Base window TH TableMaker NeuFile aa Basic pointer Border box Bounding box Buffer Button Button menu 560 An underlying area on which objects such as controls and windows are displayed The primary window for an application An arrow pointing northwest that shows the mouse position on the Workspace The outline of a window or icon that is displayed while you move windows and icons by dragging A rectangle displayed on the screen to define a region for selection An area of memory used for the temporary storage of data as it is being transferred from one location to another A one choice element of a control area or a menu Buttons are used to execute commands command button display pop up windows window button and display menus menu button A menu that is displayed when the pointer is on a menu button and you press the MENU mouse button Solaris U
363. ltiple Calendars and the Browse Menu 3 Select Add Name to add the name If you enter an invalid host name or an invalid user name while attempting to browse you see an Unable to access Calendar error message Solaris User s Guide September 1995 nN lll Note To improve system and network performance Calendar Manager does not confirm that the user name is valid or that you have browse permission for that calendar when you enter the user name in the scrolling list Calendar Manager does this checking when you select the calendar in the Multiple Calendars scrolling list or when you choose the calendar from the Browse menu 4 Click Apply Deleting Removing a Calendar from Multiple Calendars and the Browse Menu To delete a calendar from your Multiple Calendars scrolling list and from your Browse menu follow these steps 1 Choose Setup Menu from the Browse Menu pulldown or Setup Menu from the Multiple Calendars window 2 Select each calendar that you want to delete in the Browse Menu Items scrolling list 3 Choose Remove from the Setup menu to delete all the selected names in the scrolling list Note You cannot delete your calendar name or initial calendar view 4 Click Apply Selecting a Week to Browse When you display the Multiple Calendars window the week shown in the Multi Browser calendar display is determined as follows If the current view is the Day view or Month v
364. m user domain or user name domain b The owner of the calendar must remember to click SELECT on the Apply button on the Access List and Permissions Properties window Check the user ID and group ID on both your workstation and the remote workstation The user ID and group ID must be the same in both locations 3 Determine your user ID and group ID on each workstation as follows a Look for your password entry in the file etc passwd If you have an entry in this file the user ID is the third field the number between the second and third colons The group ID is the fourth field the number between the third and fourth colons For example if the entry for user Egret in the etc passwd file is egret X4y8r2Bg 3286 10 amp West home egret bin csh the user ID for user Egret is 3286 and the group ID is 10 The values of the user ID and group ID should be between 0 and 32767 Solaris Troubleshooting 527 528 b If you are using the NIS system and you do not have an entry in the file etc passwd and the last line of etc passwd starts with a check for an entry in the NIS passwd entries To determine your NIS user entry type ypmatch username passwd in a Command Tool or Shell Tool For example to find the NIS password entry for user Egret type ypmatch egret passwd If the system responds with a user entry the user ID is the third field and the group ID is the fourth field Adding a Second Calendar on your W
365. mail mary lock Alternatively you can find the lock file in the File Manager and drag it to the Wastebasket to delete it Mail Tool In Box Location The default location for the Mail Tool In Box is var mail username If the environment variable SMAIL exists Mail Tool uses its value as the In Box location Recovering Messages Being Composed If you are in the middle of composing a mail message when your Mail Tool application or your window system crashes you can recover a copy of the message from the file dead letter in your home directory minus the last 80 edits that is the application keeps track of the number of edits and files saves every 80 edits So the most edits lost would be the last 80 Your message is also saved in the file dead letter whenever you click SELECT on the Clear button in the Compose window or choose Clear message from the Compose window s Deliver menu See the man page for mail for information about dead letter and the save variable Solaris Troubleshooting 535 536 Save Changes Runs Out of Disk Space If you try to save changes by selecting Save Changes or Done from the File menu or by switching mail folders and Mail Tool warns that it has run out of disk space you must remove messages from the current mail file to make it small enough to save You can remove messages by deleting or moving them Removing larger messages helps the most You can find the largest messages by choosing Siz
366. marked Search Library For Type any text up to 1024 characters including spaces and punctuation Edit the search phrase as you would in any text window 2 To start the search press Return at the end of the search phrase Or you can click SELECT on the Start Search button Solaris User s Guide September 1995 i Black indicates most relevan document or topic When the search is complete relevant topics are listed in the Documents Found pane The topics are coded with squares starting with black most relevant to white least relevant with shades of gray in between Figure 19 13 shows the result of a search Each item points to a location in the Library where a document that matches your request was found AnswerBook Navigator Modify Library New Bookmark a Search Library For elvis Start Search Search Settings Documents Found 5 3 The ping Command 4dministering TCP IP grep asa Filter User s Guide Determining If a Machine Is Alive on the Network Using ping O Displaying Routing Table Status Administering TCP O The Name to ddress Mapping Libraries Network O 9 1 The ping Command Administering Security Figure 19 13 Documents Found in a Search To see a topic found in the search 3 Double click SELECT on an item in the Documents Found pane That page is then displayed in the Viewer Scroll the list in the Documents Found pane of the Navigator to see more items in the li
367. mation on loading a file refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment or Drag and drop a file onto the Snapshot drop target If the image file is compressed Snapshot automatically uncompresses it for you Solaris User s Guide September 1995 14 Saving a Snapshot Printing a Snapshot Use one of these methods to save a snapshot Click SELECT on Save You see the Save window and the Save window shows the default file named snapshot rs For complete information on saving a file refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment You can override the defaults by starting Snapshot in a Command Tool or Shell Tool and using command line options described in the snapshot manual page or Drag and drop a snapshot into a File Manager folder and assign it a meaningful name If the drag and drop target in the Snapshot window is filled with gray a snapshot ready to be dragged The snapshot is saved in the File Manager as a file called raster For both methods snapshots are always saved as raster files It is a good idea to use rs or some other common suffix for raster file names to make it easier to remember the file type and to manage them as a group Note If you save your snapshot from Snapshot your image is saved in raster format in black and white or color format depending how you ran Snapshot If you save your snapshot in Image Tool you can use any of the si
368. mber 1995 nN lll Week View To print the Week view for the current week choose Week from the Print menu Appointments for the week are printed in the format shown in Figure 5 35 Note that all the information about an appointment is printed not just the first line Wet view byCdendar iim ger Figure 5 35 Printed Week View You can also print a weekly list of Appointments or To Do items See Printing Appointment and To Do Lists on page 272 for more information Calendar Manager 269 lll nN Month View To print the Month view for the current month choose Month from the Print menu Appointments for the month are printed in the format shown in Figure 5 36 February 1993 IANS 10 77 am Month riea by Cdendar Mm ger Figure 5 36 Printed Month View You can also print a monthly list of Appointments or To Do items See Printing Appointment and To Do Lists on page 272 for more information Year View To print the currently displayed year choose Year from the Print menu 270 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 5 You can print a standard view of the year shown in Figure 5 37 or a schedule view of the year Yr view Alt as shown in Figure 5 38 These figures were printed using a height and width of 2 5 inches on the Print Properties window arjddms masim s Figure 5 38 Printed Schedule Year View Calendar Manager 271 Printing Appointment and To D
369. mentation in the Navigator and Viewer 500 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 i The AnswerBook Navigator acts as a kind of remote control for the Viewer Using the controls in the Navigator you locate the information you want and display it in the Viewer The Navigator provides three ways of finding on line information In Contents mode you can select an AnswerBook and then browse through it opening and closing books chapters and sections as needed In Search mode you can enter a search phrase describing what you re looking for and the Navigator displays a list of documents found ranked by relevance e In Bookmarks mode you can go directly to pages where you previously created electronic bookmarks and edit them AnswerBook Navigator Modify Library New Bookmark The three Navigator modes e Contents Location e Search ab Library Bookmarks Click SELECT on a mode to change the functioning of the window Contents of Library Solaris User AnswerBook Figure 19 2 AnswerBook Navigator in Contents Mode Using the AnswerBook Software 501 19 To open a selected document or double click SELECT on its bold title To see the contents of the Library Shows location in the Library Shows contents and lets you browse 502 Use the AnswerBook Navigator window to Search for topics of interest Modify your Library by adding or removing an available AnswerBook
370. menu Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Ss lll The AccessX Main Window After you type accessx amp this window appears Ae accessx Status Help Turn AccessX on off t _ Enable AccessX Get a beep 1 Sound tone when features turned on or off For pressing 2 keys at once Ignore accidental Turn on Features ZL II keystrokes a StickeyKeys Z ToggleKeys 7 SlowKeys Beep when Num Lock Caps Prevent unwanted keystroke Lock and so on are down repetition MouseKeys 4 RepeatKeys lt BounceKeys For users who bounce For using the keypad as 5 on keys a mouse Off after time out min gt gt Automatic shutoff an Settings Minden eee Figure B 1 The AccessX Main Window Displaying the Status of Buttons and Keys From the Status menu you can display two windows that show the status of mouse buttons and certain keys The StickyKey status window indicates if a key such as Control or Shift is pressed the MouseKeys status window does the same for mouse buttons To open the Status menu either use the MENU mouse button or press the F10 key and the letter s Use the arrow keys to move through the menu Access for Users With Disabilities 547 Edl accessx Status StickeyKeys MouseKeys Exit ssX when features turned on or off
371. menu The default mode is Basic mode which uses the standard keys on the Calculator window The other three modes have extra buttons that appear in a pop up window For information on these modes see Financial Functions on page 306 Logical Functions on page 313 and Scientific Functions on page 314 Calculator 0 00e 0 DEG SCI BASIC _ Mode _ Logical Scientific Figure 8 5 Mode Pop up Menu Calculator 299 lll Co Figure 8 6 The Mode Menu The current major mode is displayed on the mode line underneath and slightly to the left of the number display In Figure 8 5 BASIC is listed as the current mode Number Manipulation Functions The Calculator has 12 number manipulation functions as shown in Figure 8 7 Figure 8 7 Number Manipulation Functions 300 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Co lll Int returns the integer portion of the currently displayed value Frac returns the fractional portion of the currently displayed value Abs returns the absolute value of the currently displayed value changes the arithmetic sign of the currently displayed value or of an exponent being entered with the Exp key 1 x returns the value of 1 divided by the currently displayed value x2 returns the square of the currently displayed value calculates the percentage of the currently displayed value specified by the next value entered For example to find 75 of 40 enter 40
372. ming calculations 304 scientific keys 104x 315 Cos 315 ex 315 Hyp 315 Inv 315 Ln 315 Log 315 Rand 315 Sin 315 Tan 315 Trig 314 x 315 y x 315 specifying precedence 304 troubleshooting 524 user defined functions 304 Calendar 220 Calendar Manager introduction 42 Alarm options 235 Appointment Editor 229 Alarm controls 232 appointments scrolling list 231 Appt ToDo setting 231 Date field 230 My Eyes Only 231 Repeat controls 232 Start field 230 What field 231 appointments appointment list 228 appointment template 272 deleting 236 editing 237 finding 239 scheduling 229 scheduling appointments for multiple calendars 248 250 base window elements 233 browse access list adding calendars 263 changing 264 deleting calendars 264 Browse menu 254 adding a calendar 245 deleting a calendar 247 browsing remote calendars 242 254 current day 221 date formats 266 day boundaries 260 drag and drop 240 272 Icons 220 icons 220 Multi Browser Goto button 243 Mail button 243 multi calendar display 243 Schedule button 243 Index scheduling appointments 248 scrolling browse list 243 selecting a week to browse 247 navigation controls 223 permissions 262 printer settings 264 properties 257 Access List and Permissions properties 261 Category menu 258 Date Format properties 266 day boundaries 260 Default View 261 Display Settings properties 259 E
373. mo g Edit v MyFiles The Go To Menu displays the last folders visited Display 10 Folders Figure 2 44 The Go To Menu Defaults Use Pathname and the Add Item button to add another pathname to the default Go To menu This can be in addition to your home directory pathname If you add a pathname without a label then the entire pathname is displayed in the Go To menu Use Menu Label to create a new name for the specified pathname You can add it to the Go To Menu Items scrolling list This is useful if the pathname specified is long File Manager 109 110 e Use the Edit button to cut copy paste an item before after on top or on bottom of another item delete an item in the Go To Menu Items default scrolling list e Use Display Folders to indicate how many of the last folders visited should display by default in the Go To menu Custom Commands The Custom Commands window allows you to create and store commonly used operating system commands Once you have added the commands to the menu you can use them at any time by choosing them from the Custom Commands submenu from the File menu Creating Custom Commands Choose Custom Commands category from the Properties menu as shown in Figure 2 45 You use this window to add often used UNIX commands to your Custom Commands menu You can even create a command that lets you specify different options every time the command is chosen Note
374. mouse button In a moment the application you chose appears on the Workspace At some point you may want to customize the order and entries on your programs menu For information on how to do this refer to Chapter 17 Customizing the Solaris Environment Pinning a Menu You can use the pushpin in the upper left corner of the menu to pin the Workspace menu to the Workspace and keep it there indefinitely Note that these instructions apply to any menu or window with a pushpin Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 13 14 Figure 1 14 shows the Workspace menu pinned to the Workspace Pushpin g Workspace pinning the menu Utilities gt Properties Workstation Info Help Exit Figure 1 14 Menu Pinned to the Workspace To pin the menu press MENU to display the Workspace menu and keep the button pressed down as you drag the pointer over the pushpin The pushpin moves into the hole and the menu stays up Choosing from a Pinned Menu To choose an item from a pinned menu you position the pointer on the item and click SELECT Dismissing a Pinned Menu To unpin a menu just click SELECT on the pushpin again Using Window Menus Windows can have three kinds of menus Examples of each of the following menu types are shown in Figure 1 15 The Window menu that you access from an abbreviated menu button in the window header or from the window border A button menu that you access from a m
375. n Figure 15 14 flip the selected region from left to right or top to bottom If no region is selected the entire image on the canvas is flipped The right two buttons shown in Figure 15 14 rotate the region or the image 90 degrees in the direction of the arrow Filing Options 432 You use the File menu to load save and print icons Loading and Saving a File For information on loading and saving files refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment Saving a New Icon If you have drawn a new icon image you can save it to a new file as follows 1 Choose File gt Save As You see the Save As window 2 Save the file For complete information on saving a file refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment Solaris User s Guide September 1995 iF Saving a Modified Icon If you have modified an existing icon image you can save it to a new file which preserves the original image or save it to the same file For complete information on saving files refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment The formats available for saving an icon are the following If your icon is in color it will be saved as a color X pixmap image This type of icon might be used for some XView applications e If your icon is black and white you can use the Save menu to choose among saving the icon as a regular Xview icon as an X bitmap or as a Monochrome X
376. n Figure 4 34 choose Message Window from the Category menu at the top of the Properties popup window S Mail Tool Properties Category E Message Window Display 0 Lines of Text Print Script p s message id status received return path X lines content type content length Header Field Figure 4 34 Message Window Properties The Display field determines the number of Lines of Text displayed in each View Message or Compose window text pane After you make a change and click SELECT on the Apply button you will need to quit the Mail Tool and start it again for this change to take effect Multimedia Mail Tool 199 200 The Print Script field determines the script used to print your messages via the Print item on the File menu or the header pane pop up menu The default print script is Ip s The Hide scrolling list determines which headers are not displayed when you view your messages with abbreviated headers You can add any header to this list by typing the header in the Header Field text field and clicking SELECT on the Add button Use the Add menu to place the header either before or after the currently selected header Use the Delete button to delete the currently selected header and use the Change button to change the currently selected header to the text typed in the Header Field text field Some of the headers that you might commonly want to hide are displayed in the s
377. n hee we 523 Binder Troubleshooting ccs ok a eecer eur ne dad eenn name 523 Calculator Troubleshooting 024 36 a ceec we eetew ies 524 Calendar Manager Troubleshooting 524 Clock Troubleshooting dists3i4s0ccisoteauevineeceews 530 Drag and Drop Troubleshooting 530 File Manager Troubleshooting 050005 531 Image Tool Troubleshooting 00e eee eee 533 Mail Tool Troubleshooting 00sec ee eee 533 Title of Book Month 1992 Print Tool TrovbleshoGting i ssesketeeevs vel eawawaaes 536 SnapShot Troubleshooting 4 lt ses vivre eidatnwnd awn 536 Tape Tool Troubleshooting 0c eee eee 537 OpenWindows Troubleshooting ciaies dices ce cbs 539 COL PUES oro re 5b eetehe debe Sh ene be ches eRN MEE ees 539 Blank SCreen crer cece dees Piedad he ee ew eed eee eee ews 540 SPARC Jumbled Text Characters 0000c000ees 540 Problems With SaniltGs0 i44 0284 ece deeds weave age es 540 Window Damage tccoi ns cb teweguiekee eee rrr 541 Window Frozen when Opening an Application 541 Window Does Not Accept Input 005 541 Workspace Properties Troubleshooting 542 B Access for Users With Disabilities 0005 545 Starting ACCESS Kiss ht BURR E a E e He SERRE A a 546 AccessX Windows 4554 viel ie eee hee cane ehevine eee eres 546 The AccessX Main Window s2 2 c eve eive ed eevee ee eur
378. n image Image Tool 404 S Sample Time Performance Meter 329 Save Changes 151 Save Changes Mail Tool 182 Save operation keyboard equivalent 11 Save Workspace utility 497 saving Audio Tool files 347 363 Image Tool files 395 keyboard equivalent for 11 Mail Tool changes 182 text file 135 SCI scientific display notation Calculator 298 scientific functions 314 screen blank 540 how to lock 497 how to unlock 498 scrollbar and pointer movement 483 elements of 18 modifying location 489 Scrolling submenu Command Tool 278 searching in the Navigator 509 SELECT xxxi Select All File Manager files 64 Select Line at Number Text Editor 128 Index SELECT mouse button 8 selecting message header 150 Sending Messages 183 settings for AccessX 549 Shared Entries Binder 444 Shell Tool 280 base window 280 Disable Page Mode 282 Enable Page Mode 282 icon 280 stop sign pointer 282 term pane menu 282 Shift Lines Text Editor 134 shift right 314 Show To recipient Mail Tool 196 Show All Subfolders File Manager 67 Show Attachment List 203 Show Attachment List Mail Tool 203 Show Caret at Top Text Editor 128 Show collisions Performance Meter 326 Show context Performance Meter 326 Show cpu Performance Meter 325 Show disk Performance Meter 326 Show errors Performance Meter 326 Show Errs Tape Tool 387 Show interrupts Performance Meter 326 Show load Performance Met
379. n pixels does the mouse move before acceleration begins Multi Click Interval specifies the time in tenths of a second that differentiates a double click from two single clicks Mouse Button Order changes the order of the mouse button functions Pointer Jumping defines a specific way in which the pointer can move in relation to scrolling a window or a pop up menu Multi Click Interval Use the Multi click Interval setting to specify how many tenths of a second can elapse between successive clicks on a mouse button before the first click is ignored This affects how quickly you must double click the SELECT button for instance when you want to open an application window from an icon To set the multi click interval drag the slider with the pointer After you make your changes in the mouse settings window click SELECT on the Apply button to store the new settings Depending upon your system configuration changes to the Scrollbar Pointer Jumping and Pop up Pointer Jumping options do not take place in existing application windows but in those that you open from the Workspace menu after the change was applied The Multi Click Interval option takes effect immediately in all applications Mouse Button Order The default positions of the buttons on both the two and three button mouse are labeled from left to right Often left handed user prefers to reconfigure the buttons so they are more suited for left handed use Figure 17 7
380. n re nne 353 Base WiNGOW i cssecasssuriisope bei kenn EEEE TEEDE es 353 Audio Tool Icon senueusenaaan nuaa 354 Display Canvas 42 ceria rene be rarer ian E E eis cone E E 354 Cursor and Pointer Location jiu uass do ees Sees EwE se iss 354 Drag and Drop latgetsi iscieie aso seer eeeeeabeses 355 Level Meters scis aeeen nebad bats saset eevee CS EEE 355 Status Information 94 255 oe ebes eee e reese ee eare eee eee 355 Rev Reverse Button vio ee erence ceweeeePeeewe ee ees 356 Play Button 2 ccinteeee eee ee pnrt tantis eveteavagenny 356 Fwd Fast Forward Button 0 000005 357 Rec Record Stop Button s2 2 26 La ki ecedeetetcs 357 Pile Menu lt 5 lt 449 609 ter e8Se eek ead a eee cee ees 358 NOW chcut et babe Sede AA te er eee 358 OPelivctevertibentt eter Sieur n nEn es el MEUN elon 361 DAVE cc badass Was ae eee eee Geek 363 SAVE Sunao wawsga dewe reer wat eee dad eae eee ot 364 INCHING 24 nnceue sees eeeeen Coed cae ERRARE RAEE 366 xviii Title of Book Month 1992 ICAL anci cat e eRe ee hee eR Me REL e ces a eues 367 UNO sccxcee entered una a dae ead 367 RENO 549440 ett ee isa ener eh baer a aa eens 368 CU pegero e e shee net eesnr ee bee eee eer eeeues 3 368 COPY siicccriteentdideutspoess ecto eeu EEEE 368 Pasten aa panao e deter peed essed ene e eee sees 368 Delete ee ee ee ee 368 DROPCUIES spy cc Rebate ee tenee en eee pre Ree eee 369 Edit Pop Up Mente sesirik ics enevenawen neers eenee eee 371
381. n the Find button Click SELECT on the Find button again to find and select the next occurrence of the text string To replace the current selection with a text string type the text in the Replace field and click SELECT on the Replace button You can use the Replace button together with the Find button to find a string and then replace it with another or separately to replace highlighted text You can replace a string with nothing by leaving the Replace text field blank If you want to find a text string that contains tabs or carriage returns select the text containing tabs or carriage returns in the text pane before you display the Text Find and Replace window You cannot type carriage returns or tabs directly in the Find or Replace text fields The buttons at the bottom of the Find and Replace window combine the find and replace operations allowing you to quickly do any of these combinations Use the Find then Replace button to find the text string in the Find text field and then immediately replace it with the text string in the Replace text field e Use the Replace then Find button to replace the currently selected text with the text string in the Replace text field and then immediately find the next occurrence of the Find text string e Use the Replace All button to replace all occurrences of the Find text string with the Replace text string Text Editor 131 132 You can specify whether you want the find and replace ope
382. n the object being dragged the location can be an icon a drag and drop target the window of an application the workspace background or a text pane In many cases you do not need to worry about whether you need to move an object or copy it Whenever you use drag and drop to move an object the DeskSet applications attempt to do the right thing based on the operation For example if you move a file from the File Manager into the Wastebasket it is actually moved to the Wastebasket That is the file is removed from the original location On the other hand if you move a file from the File Manager onto the Print Tool the file is only copied The original file remains in its original location If it is not obvious whether an object should be moved or copied it is moved unless the Control key is held down while the drag is initiated The following paragraphs list some typical drag and drop operations between the DeskSet applications See the chapter for each application for more information about how the application supports drag and drop operations File Manager glyphs can be dropped onto the following DeskSet applications Mail Tool Wastebasket Print Tool Tape Tool Text Editor Icon Editor if it is an icon file Snapshot if it is a raster or GIF file Audio Tool if it is an audio file Mail messages from the Mail Tool Header window can be dropped onto the following DeskSet applications Text Editor Print Tool File Man
383. nd from the View menu The Find pop up window is displayed as shown in Figure 4 17 gv Mail Tool Find Messages From 4 To Ce To Cc Subject Find Forward Find Backward Select all Clear Figure 4 17 Find Pop up Window You can search for messages based on the mail header s From field To field Cc field or Subject field or by any combination of these fields The Search text fields are case insensitive and match partial words and phrases You do not need to type a complete sender name and you can use keywords to match subjects For example typing the name robles in the From text field will find messages sent by robles oak as well as manual robles Multimedia Mail Tool 171 172 To search for messages by sender type the sender name in the From text field Clicking SELECT on the Find Forward button selects the next message header with the sender name you specify Clicking SELECT on the Find Backward button selects the previous message header Clicking SELECT on the Select All button selects all message headers with the sender name A message is displayed in the footer of the Find Messages window telling you how many messages are selected If you want to find mail sent to a person or alias either directly or by Cc list type the name in the To Cc field If you only want to find mail sent directly to a person or alias but not carbon copied type the name in the To field If you only want to find ma
384. nd Metoo is Not Checked If the allnet option is checked and the metoo option is not checked and you do a Reply to All your address is not included in any form in the To or Cc fields of your reply For example suppose you receive a message with this header From salmon sea Fri Aug 23 10 36 21 1991 To yourname machine yourname host tuna ocean The To field of your reply would look like this To tuna ocean salmon sea Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll When Neither Allnet Nor Metoo is Checked When neither the allnet nor the metoo options are checked your email address is only included in the To and Cc fields of a Reply to All in the form yourname host For example suppose you receive a message with this header From salmon sea Fri Aug 23 10 36 21 1991 To yourname machine yourname host tuna ocean The To field of your reply would look like this To yourname host tuna ocean salmon sea When Use Network Aware Mail File Locking is Checked Mail Tool tries to prevent two different instances of Mail Tool from opening the same mail file at the same time By default a technique that successfully detects this access when both Mail Tools and the file are all on the same machine As an option you can use a network aware locking protocol that uses ToolTalk to coordinate the Mail Tools This ensures consistency if running MailTool from more than one machine or if mail files are accessed over the netw
385. nd Tool and in the View and Compose windows of the Mail Tool To open the Text Editor window choose Workspace gt Programs gt Text Editor The Text Editor icon shows you as much as it can of the beginning of the file name When the file has been edited and you have not saved the changes the file name is preceded by a right angle bracket gt When there is no file or when you have created a new file but have not saved it the icon displays the words NO FILE Figure 3 1 shows an example of three Text Editor icons The one on the left contains a file named example The one in the middle contains a file named example that has been edited but not saved The one on the right contains either no file at all or a file that has never been saved Figure 3 1 Text Editor Icons 125 3 Text Editor Base Window 126 Control Area Text Pane The Text Editor base window shown in Figure 3 2 has a control area and a text pane that you use to compose and edit your text message The header of the Text Editor window displays the name of the file you are editing or the word NONE when you have not assigned a name to the file and shows you the directory where the file is located When you have made editing changes the word edited is displayed in parentheses following the file name Use the text pane to compose and edit your text To begin click SELECT in the text pane and begin typing For information on adding modifying or deleti
386. ndar Manager Icon Calendar Manager 273 9 Accessing Your Calendar from a Shell Tool or Command Tool There are three Calendar Manager programs that you can run from a Shell Tool or Command Tool in order to view insert or delete appointments This may be useful for example if you are logging into your machine from a remote destination and are therefore unable to run the Calendar Manager window based application These programs are called cm_lookup cm_insert and cm_delete Use cm_lookup to display your appointments for the current day You can use command line options to specify the calendar that you want to see a different date or an alternate view such as week or month See the cm_lookup man page for more information Use cm_delete to delete your appointments You are shown a list of your appointments for the current day and you are prompted for the number of the appointments that you want to delete You can also use command line options to specify the calendar date and view See the man page for cm_delete for more information Use cm_insert to add new appointments to your calendar You can use command line arguments to specify the calendar date start and end times and a description of the new appointment See the man page for cm_insert for more information 274 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Command Tool Shell Tool and Console Window 6 This chapter provides information about the Command Tool
387. ne folder at a time To drag and drop a folder onto the workspace follow these steps 1 Click SELECT on a folder to select it 2 Press SELECT and drag the folder onto the workspace background 3 Release SELECT The window is opened and the contents displayed as shown in the example in Figure 2 19 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll File Manager hightide v File Man File 7 View v Edit v GoTo v a hightide egret Fish IELE Contains 8 items O cod Feb 17 14 06 31 C DeskSetDefaults Feb 17 14 06 2230 D Eel Feb 17 14 06 0 D itflip rs Feb 17 14 06 28192 O salmon Feb 17 14 06 31 Seafood Feb 17 14 08 512 O swordfish Feb 17 14 06 0 O Tuna Feb 17 14 06 0 Figure 2 19 Folder Opened into a new File Manager Window 4 Close folder to an icon on the WorkSpace Dragging and Dropping Between Tools You can use drag and drop in the following ways between tools Dragging and Dropping a File onto another Application You can drag and drop a file onto another application outside of File Manager regardless of whether the application is displayed as an icon or as an open window If you drop a file with an inappropriate format onto a window or icon the move or copy is not performed When you drop a file onto the drag and drop target or icon of an application the file is loaded into the application Follow these steps to load a file into another application
388. ng text see the section Working with Text in Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment To copy and move text use the Cut Copy Paste functions from the Edit menu or from the keyboard Note Solaris supports SPARC x86 and PowerPC based machines Command functions and their corresponding keyboard equivalents may differ on each machine For a full table of these equivalents see Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment Text Editor NONE dir hightide egret O Figure 3 2 Text Editor Base Window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Qo lll Text Editor Menus The control area of the Text Editor has File View Edit and Find buttons These menu buttons are included as menu items in the Text pane pop up menu Text Pane Pop Up Menu File Menu You display the Text Pane pop up menu by moving the pointer anywhere onto the Text pane and pressing MENU The Text Pane pop up menu is also provided in the text editing panes of the Console Command Tool and Mail Tool applications The commands for each of the items in Text Pane pop up menu operate in the same way as the controls in the Text Editor window described in the following sections An additional item on the Text Pane pop up menu called Extras is also described later in this chapter The File menu contains items that you can use to open save save as include and empty the document for your text files For com
389. ng Document The following procedure saves a file under a name 1 Choose Save As from the File menu Depending on the application you are working in you see a Save As window similar to the one in Figure 1 31 Choose the folder location for saving the document The name of the folder must be displayed under Current Folder To display the folder you can Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 35 3 Select the name of the folder from the scrolling list Click SELECT on the name of the folder or double click on the name of the folder If it is not displayed double click on Go up one folder You may need to repeat this a few times or a Type the name of the folder in the Go To text field or click SELECT on the Go To button and press Return b Select the folder from the Go To menu press MENU on Go To then choose the desired folder from the menu 4 Type a new name for the document in the text field and SELECT Save As When the scrolling list shows the contents of the folder type a document name and click SELECT on Save Note When you rename a document without making changes to it you will have two versions of the document one with the old name and one with the new name If you work with a file on a daily basis note the name of the one you are working with so as not to overwrite the wrong one when you save your work Introduction to the DeskSet Applications 36 DeskSet is the collection o
390. ng an image refer to Opening Image Files and Documents on page 391 Select a portion of the image to be saved For information on using the selector tool to select a portion of the image refer to Selecting An Area to Be Saved on page 402 Select File gt Save Selection As Saving a selection is the same as using Save as Refer to Save As on page 397 for complete information 398 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 is Save Page As Image Printing Images You may want to save a single page from a multiple page document To do this you need to 1 Open the multiple page document Refer to Opening Image Files and Documents on page 391 for complete information Save Page as Image is only used for multiple page documents 2 Navigate to the page to be saved For information on selecting a page refer to Viewing Multiple Page Documents on page 406 3 Select File gt Save Page As Image Saving a single page of a multiple page document is exactly like any other type of save Refer to Save As on page 397 for complete information You can print your image without verifying the print settings or you can check or change settings before printing Previewing images before printing them saves paper and trips to the printer Especially if you have scaled an image to a larger size Printing with Current Settings Select File gt Print One from the current file menu Image Tool uses
391. ng of the selection or file before playing starts Once selected this button changes from Play to Stop so to stop playing click SELECT on the Stop button If Auto Play on Selection in Audio Tool Properties options is set on playing starts automatically whenever you make a selection Solaris User s Guide September 1995 LS Fwd Fast Forward Button This button controls the forward movement of the play position pointer Click SELECT on the Fwd button to move the play position pointer forward If there is no selection in the canvas clicking SELECT on the Fwd button causes the pointer to jump forward segment by segment until it reaches the end of the file If there is a selection the pointer s movement is constrained to the selection Hold down SELECT on the Fwd button to play the selection at an accelerated speed until you release SELECT or until the play position pointer reaches the end of the selection Rec Record Stop Button This button controls the starting and stopping of recording Click SELECT on the Rec button to start recording at the current play position pointer location Recorded audio data is inserted into the sound file at the play position pointer The existing data is moved forward in the file it is not overwritten However if a sound segment is selected when record is activated the selected segment is cut from the audio file and placed on the clipboard Once selected this button change
392. ng to a remotely mounted temp file system 370 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Hi Edit Pop Up Menu In addition there are two buttons at the bottom of the Properties window Apply and Reset Use these buttons as follows Click SELECT on Apply to apply all changes made in the Properties window e Click SELECT on Reset to restore all parameters to their original value as set by the last Apply operation A pop up menu with commonly used audio editing commands is available when you click MENU in the display canvas Figure 11 20 Note that many of these choices also appear in the Edit menu under Clear and Delete Audio Tool maintalk au i Cursor 0 02 5 pinter 0 05 3 Delete Unselected Delete All Silence Delete Silent Ends Select All TO e Voice Format Length 0 08 5 0 01 9 1 Figure 11 20 Edit Pop Up Menu Reset Pointer Clear This command clears the current selection and places the pointer at the beginning of the file This command removes the current sound data from the display canvas Delete Unselected This command deletes everything in the display canvas that is not selected Audio Tool 371 11 Delete All Silence This command deletes all silent segments which are indicated by horizontal lines Delete Silent Ends Select All Volume Menu Play 372 This command deletes only the silent segments at the beginning and end of the file
393. notifier and remove the word Vacation from the header choose Stop from the Vacation submenu Multimedia Mail Tool 169 4 Deleting Messages Undeleting Messages 170 It is a good idea to periodically delete obsolete messages from your In Box To delete one or more mail messages select the message headers that you want to delete then choose Delete from the Edit menu The selected mail messages are deleted from the display and the status message in the footer updates to reflect the current state of your In Box as shown in the example in Figure 4 16 Mail Tool var mail egret File v view v Edit v Compose v Mail File Done Next Delete Reply Move 7 Copy 7 Load v thief cici 0 18 506 Your Move patten newbirth 46 1282 Project Status bgahl scuba H 32 1110 Inbox status ayers outhouse 17 532 SunU Training Registratio ayers outhouse J 17 511 vi command summary mariac celtic 90 2531 Project Schedule hamilton artemis 22 611 meeting reminder abelson sharonolds 32 1232 Your position paper aquablu cowman 21 647 Summer Collaboration 11 items 1 new 2 deleted F Figure 4 16 Status Message after Deleting Two Mail Messages Delete is also the default value of the third custom button It is also available from the header pane pop up menu described in the section Pop up Menus on page 154 As long as you do not incorporate changes to Mail Tool by switching
394. nt jobs Printing Files mimeo Feb 22 19 49 mimeo 8 10 Feb 22 19 50 E mimeo 9 Feb 22 19 50 g mimeo 10 9 Feb 22 19 50 mimeo 11 Feb 22 19 50 Once print job s have been selected this button is enabled and selected jobs are cancelled Figure 10 2 Print Tool Window There are two ways to print files By typing the filename in the Print Tool window By dragging and dropping With both methods status messages are displayed in the footer of the Print Tool window The following sequence of messages is typical each time you start a print job or change printers Print Tool 333 10 1 Printing lt filename gt This flashes for a short time before displaying 2 no entries You see no entries once all the job s have been completed If the properties have been set the Print Tool window flashes and beeps when all printing jobs have been completed If you want to print a file with a format other than the default you need to supply an alternative print method Refer to Changing the Print Method in the Print Tool on page 339 for information on these procedures Typing the Filename in the Print Window To print by typing the file name in the PrintTool window 1 Type the file s full path name in the Filename text field If the file is in your home directory just type the filename Otherwise start the path name from your home directory and include each subdirectory in the path to the file in
395. nt to the next outer pair of specified delimiters Solaris User s Guide September 1995 3 To surround the selected text with the selected delimiters click SELECT on the Insert Pair button To delete a matched pair of delimiters from the selected text click SELECT on the Remove Pair button Replace Field The Text Editor pane recognizes any text between the characters gt and lt as a text field You can search forward through the text from the insert point to find and select each field using the Replace gt field lt item of the Find menu The Replace gt field lt submenu provides three options Expand Next and Previous When the caret in the Text Editor pane is between field delimiters choose Expand to search in both directions and select the entire field and its delimiters Use Next to search forward from the insert point and select the next field Use Previous to search backward from the insert point and select the previous field Extras Menu There is an additional item on the Text Pane pop up menu called Extras that is not a button in the Control area as File View Edit and Find are This menu contains some useful filters to format the selected text You can customize the Extras menu and define your own set of filters available from the Extras menu See Customizing Your Text Editor on page 143 for information about how to define your own set of filters This section describes the default
396. ntained in your in box Loading a Message from the Mail Files Directory If the message you want to view is in the default Folder directory 1 Press MENU on the abbreviated menu button to the left of the Mail File text field A menu pops up listing the messages in the Folder directory 2 Drag the pointer to the message you want to load highlight it and release MENU 3 Choose Load All messages saved to that file appear in the Mail Tool base window as separate messages just as they did when first received in the In Box Loading a Message from Another Directory To load a message saved to another directory 1 In the Mail Tool base window type the path to the message file in the text field Use the same path that you used to store it initially 2 Choose Load All messages saved to that file name appear in the Mail Tool base window as separate messages just as they did when first received in the In Box Multimedia Mail Tool 191 Alternatively you can drag a file of saved mail from File Manager and drop it onto the Mail Tool base window The message or messages in that file will appear in the base window just as they did when you first received them This method is especially helpful if you have forgotten the path to the file Loading the In Box To reload your In Box messages In the Header window choose Load In Box from the File menu All of the message headers in the In Box are again displayed in the Mail Tool H
397. ntments for several users at one time Send mail to other users notifying them of new appointments Print high quality calendar output for reference 219 lll nN To open Calendar Manager choose Workspace gt Programs gt Calendar Manager Calendar Manager opens to icon form Calendar Manager Icons Icons Calendar Manager provides different ways to view your calendar You can view your schedule a day week month or year at a time You can also view a daily weekly monthly or yearly list of appointments or To Do items This section describes all the ways you can view the calendar When Calendar Manager is displayed as an icon it shows the current date as shown in Figure 5 1 Figure 5 1 Calendar Manager Icon Calendar Manager Base Window Views by Day Week Month and Year 220 To view the full calendar double click SELECT on the calendar icon Calendar Manager opens up into a full sized window containing the current month Figure 5 2 shows the Calendar Manager window Note that one appointment is displayed for each line and the text for the appointments is clipped to fit the size of the date box Solaris User s Guide September 1995 nN lll Calendar Manager egret river January 1993 4 7 10 00a14 f 1 00p Engi 10 00a Prod 12 00p Mari 11 13 14 15 10 00a 1 1 F 1 00p Liz s 10 00a Prod S 00p Mar 3 00p Mar 1 00p writ 18 19 20 21 22 10 00 1 1 10 00a Staff 1 00p
398. ntries that you normally cannot modify These entries can be duplicated into your private database and then modified Refer to Updating and Viewing System and Network Binder Entries on page 444 for more information Binder 443 444 Use the items on the View menu to determine the Binder entries displayed in the base window scrolling list as follows Choose All Entries to display a merged list of all the private system and network entries If you copy a system or network entry to your private user database only your private version of the entry is displayed in the merged list Choose Shared Entries to display all the system and network entries Choose Personal Entries to display only your private user entries Updating and Viewing System and Network Binder Entries If you want to modify your system bindings you must become root and start Binder by typing binder system ina Shell Tool or Command Tool In order to modify the network bindings you need to have root access on your OpenWindows server workstation and you need to start Binder by typing binder network in a Shell Tool or Command Tool If you cannot start the Binder as root you probably need to restart OpenWindows with the noauth option To do this exit the window system and type openwin noauth at the console The entries on the View menu have a different meaning if you are running the Binder with the command line options listed previously If you
399. nu item btn relevant item is a button no accelerator Meta use the Meta key lt gt or Ctrl Alt on your keyboard Accel Keys to press in this order to invoke the accelerator Table 17 1 Keyboard Equivalent Menu Items Accel FM CM MT TE SS IE B PT IT AT Copy Meta c X X X X X Cut Meta x X X X X X Find Meta f X X X X B Z New Meta n X X x Open Meta o X X X X btn X X X 476 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 17 Table 17 1 Keyboard Equivalent Menu Items Continued Accel FM CM MT TE SS IE B PT IT AT Paste Meta v X X X 2 x Print Meta p X X X X X xX z Props Meta i X X X x Xx x x Redo Shift Meta p z xX 2 g x Save Meta s X X btn X btn X X Sel All Meta a z z Undo Meta u X 7 X x x Typeface Meta t 2 2 z 2 2 p Normal Shift Meta n Z E P 7 Bold Shift Meta b E a z s Italic Shift Meta i z z z z Other Keyboard Options Other keyboard options you can control are e Key Click sounds a click with each depression of a key Key Repeat means when a key is depressed and held the key will type multiple characters until released With this setting turned on a single character is typed when it is off multiple c
400. nually If you are unsure contact your system administrator 3 To start OpenWindows manually after you login type openwin and press Return Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 3 Logging Out When you are done working on the system you will need to log out If you are sharing a system this allows other people to log in to your computer under their own accounts To log out 1 You must exit OpenWindows to log out Press the MENU button and select Exit A Notice appears asking you to confirm that you want to exit from OpenWindows 2 SELECT Exit Normally when you exit OpenWindows the system automatically logs you out However if it does not go to Step 3 3 Type exit or logout and press Return The login prompt appears as shown in the example in Figure 1 4 Now another user can log in under their own account and use the system genius johndoe genius login Figure 1 4 Type Exit to Log Out Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Overview of the OpenWindows Environment When you start the Solaris software you see the Workspace background on your screen as well as the DeskTop Intro described later in this chapter The Workspace is the display area for objects such as windows icons and menus Figure 1 5 shows a portion of the Workspace with several open application windows Notice that the windows can overlap each other Mail
401. o Lists In addition to printing the schedule for a day week month or year you can print any Appointment or To Do list To print an Appointment list or To Do list follow these steps 1 Select the day that you want to print a list for or a day in the week month or year that you want to print a list for 2 Choose the list that you want to print from any of the Print submenus Using Calendar Manager with Mail Tool 272 You can enter appointments into Calendar Manager from Mail Tool by dragging and dropping a Calendar Manager appointment attachment if it is included in the attachment area of the mail message You can create a mail message with the appropriate format by using the Mail pop up window in Multiple Calendars Or create a Calendar Manager appointment that can be attached in the attachment area of a mail message by Selecting Attach gt Appt from the Compose window in Mail Tool Sending Appointment Mail from Calendar Manager The easiest way to generate a message about an appointment is to use the Mail feature of Multiple Calendars This will automatically generate a compose window with an appointment icon attached See Sending Mail about Appointments from Multiple Calendars on page 252 for information about this feature Creating an Appointment Message from Mail Tool Mail Tool provides a template that you can use to create mail messages in the format that Calendar Manager can accept See Template Prope
402. o Read File To Read fstab group hosts printcap usr2 brenda dosed Figure 12 4 Selected Files to Read group licenses and passwd Delete Selected from the Read Functions pop up menu removes these files from the list Choose Select All and then Delete Selected from the pop up menu to delete all the files from the list To restore an accidentally deleted file add it back to the list by typing the file name in the File To Read text field then press the Return key or click SELECT on the File To Read button These functions prepare the scrolling list for an operation from the Read menu described in the next section Solaris User s Guide September 1995 12 Reading Files from a Tape AN The Read menu available from the Read button at the top of the Tape Tool base window has three options to read files from the tape or archive files to the directory specified in the Tape Tool window Caution When you read files that have a path name in front of them an absolute path name as shown in the Tape Contents list that path name is always used as the destination If the files are not preceded by a file name the directory you specify in the Destination text field is used as the destination Read Selected When you have listed the contents of a tape and selected all or some of the files choosing Selected from the Read menu copies the specified files to the destination directory shown in t
403. o locate the line number where the selected text begins The line number is displayed in a Notice When there is no current selection in the Text Editor window the Notice displays an error message instead of a line number Show Caret at Top Use the Show Caret at Top item of the View menu to scroll the document so the line currently containing the caret is the third line from the top of the text pane Change Line Wrap The Change Line Wrap submenu provides three choices for line wrapping word character and clip lines The text shown in Figure 3 4 is wrapped at a character so words are broken at the end of lines Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Select Line at Number amp z Bout a dream I had last night Yo what Line Number Hpreface this with a reminder that Show Caret at Top strange I mean don t get wei Change Line wra wrap at word i Wrap at Word 4 to work Based on my wrinkles and a tay this was about 10 y E the usual exit and e wed through the electri c fence gates i b had just recently moy ed Everyone wa declared that she had done some figuring and this was her 32nd office since bei ng at the company ears or so into Wrap at Character Not all of us were still here Henry had just opened his o wn phone repair business called Dead Ringers and John was considering retirement from the computer business to organi ze 9 of his friends his brother wife and seven kids into Figure 3 4 Lines W
404. o the next application Shift Alt n Moves focus to the previous application Shift Alt m Displays Workspace menu Local Navigation Commands Table 17 5 Commands that Manipulate Base Windows or Pop Up Windows Sequence Action Alt m Displays window menu Alt F5 Moves window to back Alt F6 Enables you to move window with arrow keys Alt F7 Enables you to resize window with arrow keys Alt F8 Refreshes window Customizing the Solaris Environment 479 ae 1 Table 17 6 Commands that Manipulate Base Windows Only Sequence Action Alt F2 Opens the icon at the pointer location or closes the window at the pointer location Alt F3 Resizes window to full size or reduces it to default size Alt F9 Quits application Table 17 7 Commands that Manipulate Pop Up Window Menus Sequence Action Alt F2 Dismisses or cancels pop up menu Alt F10 Indicates owner of pop up menu Mouse You may want to change the way your mouse behaves within the Workspace g Workspace Properties Category amp Mouse Mouse Acceleration Sao None High Mouse Threshold pixels 1 50 Multi Click Interval seconds 0 1 1 0 Mouse Button Order MENU ADJUST SELECT Pointer Jumping W Scrollbars W Pop up Windows Figure 17 6 Mouse Properties 480 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 17 You can change the following settings from the Mouse Properties Mouse Acceleration is the speed at which the mouse moves Mouse Threshold defines how far measured i
405. o the program in the Default Editor text field as shown in Figure 2 45 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll Update File System You can set the number of seconds that File Manager checks to see if any items were added or deleted Follow Symbolic Links If Symbolic Lines is set to No the default you see filenames just as you typed them For example in the Go To field If Symbolic Links is set to Yes you see links made across file systems Open File Manager Window Automatically opens the CD window of the CD that has been inserted Use Generic Icons When you insert a Floppy or CD it can take some time for the icons to display If it is not important to you what the icons look like and or if you want the them to display quickly you can set Yes and a generic representation of the icon is displayed and is much quicker time Customizing Your File Manager Colors There are two ways to change the File Manager color scheme as follows To change the colors in the tree and file panes use the fg and bg command line flags to specify different colors for your foreground characters and background For example if you want the tree and file panes to have blue characters on a gray background try starting File Manager in a Command Tool or Shell Tool by typing the following filemgr fg 0 0 255 bg 127 127 127 amp Each trio of numbers represents red green and blue intensities from 0 to 255 Alternat
406. o use from the Font menu Solaris User s Guide September 1995 i Fe 3 Choose the text weight style and size from the relevant menus The items on the Weight Style and Size menus depend on the font that you have chosen For example some fonts may have many available choices for size while others only have one default choice Type the text you want in the Text field When you have typed the text in the text field insert it in the icon by moving the pointer onto the desired spot on the canvas and pressing SELECT A rectangle is displayed that shows you the size of the text to be inserted as shown in the example in Figure 15 6 You can move the rectangle anywhere within the canvas to position it as long as you continue to press SELECT Icon Editor cat icon Edited File 7 view 7 Edit 7 A Icon Editor Text Oo j Text cat IN O fee a BS i Font lucida Weight medium E Style regular E Size default 64 X 64 2 undos 0 redos available Figure 15 6 Adding Text to Your Icon Icon Editor 425 19 6 Drag the pointer to position the rectangle and when it is positioned correctly release SELECT The text is added to the canvas as shown in the example in Figure 15 7 E Icon Editor File 7 View v Edit v Properties 7 g Baar O fa A EE Le FJ 4 2 G4 oo oe
407. oblems There are two basic symptoms of remote Calendar Manager access problems You try to browse a remote calendar where you think you have Browse access and all you can see are appointment times You try to insert delete or change an appointment on a remote calendar where you think you have access and Calendar Manager gives you an Access Denied error message in the footer of the Appointment Editor There are three things you can check to try to fix these access problems Solaris User s Guide September 1995 A 1 If you are using the NIS or DNS system which uses the concept of mail domains make sure you are trying to browse a calendar in your domain or that you have specified the domain in your browse list For example if you are trying to browse the calendar of user Rob in your domain you can simply specify Rob host If you are in a domain called Eng and Rob is in a domain called Corp you need to specify rob host Corp in your browse list 2 Make sure that the owner of the remote calendar has really given you Browse Insert and or Delete access In order for the access to occur make sure both of these conditions are met a Names in the access list must take the form user host or just user Note that if the name in the access list is just user access is given to anyone on your network with that user name If you are using the NIS or DNS system make sure your name in the access list is not listed in the for
408. ocation just move the pointer onto an icon press SELECT and drag the outline of the icon to a new location When you release the mouse button the icon appears in the new place Figure 1 26 shows an icon and the outline that appears as it is moved Icon border moves with the pointer Figure 1 26 Moving an Icon to a New Location When you first start an application and then close it to an icon the icon appears in a default location You can change the default locations by selecting Save WorkSpace from Utilities or with the Workspace Properties window Chapter 17 Customizing the Solaris Environment describes the Properties window Resizing Windows The corners of windows are the handles you use for resizing To resize a window 1 Position the pointer on one of the window corners The pointer turns into a tiny bull s eye This means that the pointer is in the correct location for resizing 2 Press SELECT and drag the pointer to the desired size An outline shows the size of the window 3 Release SELECT Figure 1 27 shows the pointer positioned on a window s handle for resizing Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll fac cmdtool bin csh Window border stretches as the pointer is moved wae Resize corner a changes appearance during window resizing Figure 1 27 Stretching a Window by its Resize Corner Closing and Quitting Windows Each window has a Close option in
409. of sound is pasted into the new location as shown in Figure 11 8 Audio Tool audio test Modified Pointer 0 03 2 L pe 00 MOU Play Fwd Length 0 07 9 Figure 11 8 Pasting the Sound Portion Back Into a File Undoing an Edit You can undo the last edit you made by choosing Edit gt Undo Audio Tool 349 11 Tips for Editing Audio Files e In the display canvas the granularity of selections is based on pixel width play 8 y P which depends on the length of the file that is loaded You can stretch Audio Tool s base window to see more detail when you are selecting segments You may find it useful to use multiple Audio Tools For example you can edit a small region of a large file by selecting a segment that is somewhat larger than the region and copying the segment to another Audio Tool display canvas Then you can easily edit the segment in the other Audio Tool by stretching the tool to provide better pixel resolution When you re finished editing you can copy the edited region back into the original Audio Tool You can also use multiple Audio Tools to assemble an audio track from multiple sources Sending a Voice Mail Message 350 You can create an audio file from Mail Tool by selecting Attach gt Voice in the Mail Tool Compose window The audio file you create is automatically bound to Audio Tool and to an audio file glyph The glyph is automatically
410. ogin prompt and press Return The user name tells the system who you are Your user name should have been defined during installation For more information refer to the installation manual for your specific platform The Solaris operating environment recognizes the difference between uppercase and lowercase letters so make sure you type the user name using the correct case The login prompt usually consists of your machine name assigned as the Hostname during the installation followed by the word login as shown in the example in Figure 1 1 genius login johndoe Figure 1 1 The login prompt Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll 2 Type your password at the Password prompt and press Return You do not see the characters on the screen as you type your password as shown in the example in Figure 1 2 genius login johndoe Password Figure 1 2 The Password Prompt If you mistype the user name or password and have already pressed Return the system asks you to start over with your user name See the example in Figure 1 3 genius login johndoe Password Login incorrect login Figure 1 3 Log in again with your user name After you type your password OpenWindows launches automatically if a full installation was performed Note If OpenWindows does not launch automatically for example you may have OpenWindows configured differently you can start OpenWindows ma
411. oice mail 350 Silence detection 370 Silence threshold 370 sound segments 356 status information 355 stop Play button 356 stop Rec button 357 Temp file directory 370 Auto play on load Audio Tool 370 Auto play on selection Audio Tool 370 Auto Adjust button Audio Control 375 automatic shut off for AccessX 548 Automatically Display Headers 196 B Background Color Binder 450 background color Binder 450 Backspace Calculator 302 base window 31 Audio Tool 343 353 Binder 442 Calculator 296 Clock 286 Command Tool 276 features 17 File Manager 58 Icon Editor 421 Performance Meter 324 Print Tool 332 Shell Tool 280 Snapshot 414 Tape Tool 378 Text Editor 126 Bcc Mail Tool 158 Beep setting Calendar Manager 232 235 beep when modifier key is pressed AccessX 552 beeping on locked keys 554 Begin Tree Here File Manager 67 Binder 441 All Entries 444 background color 450 base window 442 Index bindings 441 changing 462 creating 458 deleting 462 Color Chooser 464 database 443 entries network 444 private 443 system 444 Entry Types 443 icon 442 Icon field 448 image file 448 image mask 448 Local Entries 444 Mask File 448 open application 450 Pattern 453 print method 450 properties 446 File Type properties 451 Icon properties 447 Save button 442 Shared Entries 444 tag mask 456 tag offset 456 tag type 456 tag value 456
412. ointer in the Help Viewer window and press MENU The Viewer Menu appears 2 Move the pointer to the pushpin and pin up the Viewer menu if you want to keep the menu up for repeated use When you release the mouse button the menu remains 3 Click SELECT on a menu item to page down page up redisplay refresh the window or go back to your last location Alternatively if you have not pinned the menu just choose a menu item using the MENU mouse button Note As with any DeskSet application or pinned menu you can move the Viewer menu by positioning the pointer on the menu outline pressing SELECT and dragging the pointer to a new location Using the Handbook Hypertext Links The help handbooks can be used in a non linear fashion When you see an outlined reference to more information you can double click SELECT on that portion of the text to go to the referenced location The black outlines indicate hypertext links From the main table of contents for the handbooks you can access a handbook quickly by double clicking SELECT on the handbook s title Within a given handbook you can double click SELECT on one of the links within that book to go to that topic Figure 1 46 shows the hypertext links in the table of contents for the Calendar Manager help handbook Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 53 54 Help Viewer menu button iyperte links to topics within the handbook are outlined Hypertext icon re
413. ol 357 G Goto text field 88 Gradients Calculator 314 Grid Display Icon Editor 435 group change file properties File Manager 98 H handicapped users avoiding unintentional input 556 557 controlling key repeat behavior 555 getting a beep for locked keys 554 ignoring inadvertant key presses 556 557 pressing two keys at once 551 using keys to mimic the mouse 552 handicapped users see also AccessX 545 handicapped users interface for 545 Header menu button Mail Tool 158 help closing Help Viewer 55 handbooks 45 keyboard equivalent for 11 magnify 45 paging through handbook 51 using hypertext in handbooks 53 Help button Image Tool 409 Hidden Files File Manager 105 Index Hide Snapshot During Capture 415 Hide Subfolders File Manager 67 Hide Mail Tool 156 200 History Command Tool 277 SHOME variable 205 208 Host Name Tape Tool 387 hot spot 21 Hyp Calculator key 315 hyperbolic cosine function Calculator 315 hyperbolic function flag Calculator 315 hyperbolic sine function Calculator 315 hyperbolic tangent 315 hypertext links 508 I icon introduction 6 default location 488 application 59 Binder 442 Calculator 296 Calendar Manager 220 Clock 285 Command Tool 276 data file 59 File Manager 58 folder 59 Icon Editor 421 Mail Tool 44 Mail Tool Compose window 157 Mail Tool Header window 148 moving 28 Navigator 504 Performance Meter 32
414. ol area ta SampleTool File v View v Edit v Properties D 562 A system buffer that provides the means for keeping track of data that is cut or copied The Paste key is used to insert information from the clipboard into a pane See also Buffer 1 The central timing device in a computer 2 A DeskSet application which can be opened from the Workspace Programs submenu used to show local or international time An index of colors implemented by an application When the application is opened its color map is loaded into the hardware and for each color used an index number tells the hardware what color to display A button that is used to execute application commands see Button A window tool that provides a shell environment within a window that scrolls both forward and backward with use of a scrollbar See Shell Tool A pop up window that is used to execute application commands or set parameters A status message in the footer of a window The controlling terminal of a computer system that displays system messages An unbordered region of a window where controls such as buttons settings and text fields are displayed Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Controls Current item Courier Cut Default DeskSet Dimmed controls Directory Double click Drag Objects in a control area a pane or on a menu that are used to perform an action Controls include buttons i
415. ols Figure 18 4 shows the Window Controls utility Sj Programs gt Utilities Workspace Refresh Reset Input Function Keys Window Controls Properties Help Open Close Desktop Intro p Save Workspace Full Restore Size Lock Screen Back Console Quit Exit Figure 18 4 Window Controls Submenu Since Window Controls is a submenu To make use of this utility it is usually best pinning the workspace Utilities 495 18 496 Using Window Controls The items in the Window Controls submenu correspond to items in the base Window menu that you pull down from the header of an application window Any choice you make in the Window Controls submenu such as Quit affects the currently selected window or windows The following examples illustrate the use of window controls on a group of selected windows or icons To select multiple windows either click SELECT on one window and ADJUST on additional windows or icons or position the pointer on the workspace near the applications you want to group press SELECT and drag the pointer diagonally across the workspace to create a rectangle around the series of windows Any windows or icons completely inside the rectangle formed by the dragging motion are included in the group Opening a Group of Applications from Icons To open a number of applications at once select the group of icons using one of the methods describe
416. olume This slider controls the recording volume gain You can also type in a volume level 0 100 Balance If your computer has stereo capability you can use the Balance slider to adjust the balance The slider has a detent at the 50 50 balance point Typically you ll only want to change the record balance if your audio inputs are not at the same level Before adjusting the record balance make sure that the play balance is calibrated for your output configuration You can do this by using the Audio Tool Save As window to convert a monaural file to stereo and then adjusting the play balance until the left and right speakers produce the same output level 374 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 i Once the play balance is calibrated you can record a segment of audio data and play it back to determine if the record balance is correct Note On systems that support the monitor function the record balance may not affect the monitor output To determine the actual effect of record balance changes you must record and play back a sample of stereo audio Monitor Volume This slider controls the volume of the audio input signal that is channeled through the output port You can also type in a monitor volume level 0 100 This is useful when an audio source such as a CD player or tape deck is connected to the selected input jack By adjusting the monitor volume the audio input is heard without having to record any d
417. ome jayna protocol Local Host Figure 12 5 Files to be Copied to Tape 6 Click SELECT on the Write button in the Tape Tool window The file listing is cleared from the window pane when the copy is complete Because the files are copied the original data remain on your system If you are archiving the files to free up disk space you then need to delete the files from your system Before removing the files refer to Checking the Tape Contents on page 383 Checking the Tape Contents Before deleting the backup files from your system make certain that the copy occurred At any time you can list the files on a tape as follows 1 Insert the tape into the tape drive 2 Click SELECT on the List button in the Tape Tool base window In a few moments the contents of the tape are listed in the Tape Contents window pane Messages in the footer tell you how many files have been found Tape Tool 383 12 Retrieving Reading Files from a Tape The following three sections describe three methods of retrieving reading files from a tape The method you choose depends upon whether you want to retrieve a small portion of the files a large portion or all of the files from the tape Retrieving a Portion of the Files from a Tape To retrieve a particular portion of the archived files from a tape cartridge providing they were initially archived with the SunOS tar command or through Tape Tool follow these steps 1
418. ompose v Mail File Done Next Delete Reply v Move v amp _ it_printpreviw rs thief cici Thu Feb 18 10 18 506 cod patten newbirth Thu Feb 18 10 46 1282 Folder DesksetDefaults bgah scuba Thu Feb 18 10 32 1110 Testapps Eel ayers outhouse Thu Feb 18 10 17 532 dead letter ayers outhouse Thu Feb 18 10 17 511 mariac celtic Thu Feb 18 11 90 2531 dead letter 1 NoName hamilton artemis Thu Feb 18 11 22 611 dead letter 2 Salmon abelson sharonolds Thu Feb 18 11 32 1232 i aquablu cowman Thu Feb 18 13 21 64 salt undoirs Seafood mariac celtic Wed Feb 24 15 32 418 2437 filename Swordfish flip_icons rs Tuna it_print_window jmage rs cc FlounderMail 1 2 3 4 5 8 9 10 mailfile Figure 4 27 Mail File Menu Showing Mail Files and Subdirectories of Mail Files As you access a mail file it is added to the Move Copy and Load menus of the Header window Each of these three menus contains an identical list of recently accessed mail files The first item on each menu is the entry in the Mail File text field If no entry is in the text field the first item is called Entry and is dimmed Figure 4 28 shows a Copy menu after several mail files have been accessed and when there is an entry in the Mail File text field itv Mail File status reports status reports finance deskset mail tool ow docs todo 10 45121 requeste Figure 4 28 Copy Menu with the
419. on or from on to off Chosen options have a thickened border on monochrome monitors Figure 2 41 shows an example of a list display when all of the options are chosen f amp File Manager hightide egret File v View v Edit v GoTo v rs hightide egret IELI Contains 27 items 875 Mbytes at Jan 19 17 30 egret 1 D ab_library an 19 17 30 110 egret staff 1 fwe r r C cetables Dec 20 15 43 512 egret staff 2 drwxr xr x B scshre an 11 14 32 1392 egret other 1 rw rw r d Nov 24 11 24 1589 sebring staff 1 rwxrwxrwx a desksetdefaults an 20 11 18 2230 egret staff 1 rwxrwxrwx C fm an 20 17 16 512 egret staff 9 drwxr xr x O history an 20 11 01 146 egret staff 1 rw r r 0 login Oct 23 16 04 1656 egret other 1 rw r r D mailre an 20 11 23 1606 egret staff 1 rwer r C mailtool init Nov 13 10 24 132 egret staff 1 rw r r S openwin init Nov 13 10 24 1006 egret staff 1 rwxr xr x e openwin initBAk Oct 26 15 50 1057 egret staff 10 rwxr xr x LD openwin menu programs Oct 21 11 28 881 egret staff L rwer r Figure 2 41 File Pane with all of the List Options Set View Contents As View Contents as lets you determine the type of files that you want to display a preview of when the Display Mode is Content Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll View By Content When your
420. on created in Step 1 If you want to specify a color mask for the icon type the path and file name of the icon mask in the Mask File text field An icon mask defines the area of the icon to be colored when the icon is displayed in the File Manager or other DeskSet applications See the section Mask File on page 448 for more information If you don t specify an icon mask file the entire icon image will be colored with the background color Binder 459 16 460 6 Specify the foreground and background colors for the icon by typing RGB red green blue values in the text fields or by using the Color Chooser The foreground color is the color the icon is drawn with when it is displayed by the File Manager or other DeskSet applications See the section Foregr Foreground Color on page 449 for more information The background color is the color the icon is filled with when it is displayed by the File Manager or other DeskSet applications If you have specified an icon mask file the background color is only filled in the mask area See the section Backgr Background Color on page 450 for more information You use the Color Chooser to specify colors by clicking SELECT on the Foreground Color or Background Color menu buttons located to the right of the Foregr and Backer text fields See Using the Color Chooser Palette with Binder on page 464 for information about using the Color Chooser If desired ty
421. on might be used for some XView applications If your icon is black and white it can be saved as a regular Xview icon as an X bitmap or as a Monochrome X pixmap image Save the icon as an Xview icon if you want to display your icon in the File Manager by binding Icon Editor 437 19 438 Icon Size it to an application or data file using the Binder See Chapter 16 Binder for more information Save the icon as an X bitmap if you want to include it in a C program A monochrome X pixmap image might be used for some XView applications The Size item provides five standard icon image sizes 16 by 16 pixels typical cursor size 32 by 32 pixels the required size for File Manager data file icons 48 by 48 pixels 64 by 64 pixels typical application icon size 128 by 128 pixels If you change the size of the canvas when an icon file is loaded the file is read from the upper left corner Larger images are cropped to fit the existing size of the canvas In the example shown in Figure 15 17 the canvas with the cat icon file has been resized to 32 by 32 XView format pixels Solaris User s Guide September 1995 15 amp Icon Editor cat icon Edited File 7 View 7 Edit 7 Properties 7 Black White oes i O abe P e gt 32 X 32 4 undos 0 redos available Figure 15 17 Changing the Size of an Existing Icon
422. on the directory that contains the audio file you want to hear 3 Click SELECT on the name of the audio file 4 Click SELECT on the Open button The audio file appears in Audio Tool s base window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 11 5 Press MENU on the Volume button and choose Play The Audio Control Play window appears Figure 11 3 Audio Control Play Headphone Line Out Record Play Volume 66 Balance Left j Right I Figure 11 3 Audio Control Play Window Note Depending on the audio capabilities of your computer you may or may not see all of the choices shown in the figure e g if your computer does not support stereo the balance slider is not displayed 6 Click SELECT on the Play button in Audio Tool s base window 7 To adjust the volume press SELECT on the Play Volume slider in the Audio Control Play window and move the slider left to lower the volume or right to raise the volume Note that you can choose just a small segment of the sound file to be played To do this click SELECT on the location in the recording where you want to start and click ADJUST at the end of the segment that you want to hear Recording Sound To record an audio file do the following 1 If you re recording from a microphone place the microphone near the sound source 2 Press MENU on the Volume button and choose Record The Audio Control Record w
423. on the minus sign button at the bottom of the expanded window This section describes the fields in the expanded Icon Properties window Icon and Binder Entry Name The Icon field shows the current icon and Binder database entry name Use the text field to modify the entry name and use the following fields to modify the appearance of the icon Double click SELECT on the temporary unique name to the right of the icon to modify the icon Image File The Image File text field displays the path of the 32 by 32 pixel XView format icon that is bound to the current Binder entry The icon is displayed in the base window scrolling list and the Icon field This is the same icon displayed by the File Manager Mail Tool and other applications in the DeskSet environment Mask File The Mask File text field displays the path of an icon color mask A color mask defines the region of the icon to which the background color is applied You can think of this as a stencil cut out overlaid on top of your icon before the background color is applied to the icon If no icon mask file is specified the entire icon is colored with the background color 448 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 1lb The icon mask does not have to be a 32 by 32 XView format pixel icon If it is larger only the first 32 by 32 XView format pixels in the top left corner of the icon are used For example Figure 16 6 shows the icon and the icon mask for the printtool prog Binder
424. on within a Magnify Help window or choosing Help from the Workspace menu fails and the following error message is displayed on the console XView error NULL pointer passed to xv_set helpopen Viewer could not display document handbooks Magnify Help When you begin using the Solaris software you will find that you can choose from a variety of windows and menus When you need information on a particular window menu or object Magnify Help enables you to get information quickly Follow these steps to get on line help about a window or menu item 1 Move the pointer to the item such as a menu that you want to know about 2 Press the Help key on the keyboard This is the F1 key on some systems A help window pops up with information about that item Figure 1 38 shows a Magnify Help window Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 45 46 olwm Help Window Border This is the header footer or side of a window that contains an application program The border thickens when the window is selected To select a window point to the border and click SELECT Figure 1 38 Magnify Help Window More Help Most items on the Workspace have associated help handbooks When an associated handbook exists a button labeled More appears at the bottom of the Magnify Help window To see more help on that topic click SELECT on the More button Figure 1 39 shows a help window with a More button Month v
425. one page or pane of text at a time just as the UNIX more command does The pointer changes to a stop sign when the window fills up as shown in Figure 6 6 shelltool bin csh total 1194 drwxrwxrws 2 winsor 512 Feb 11 15 19 Binder drwxrwxrwx 2 winsor 2566 Feb 11 15 18 Calendar drwxrwxrwx 2 winsor 15368 Feb 20 11 46 Deskset drwxrwxrwx 3 winsor 512 Jan 29 09 47 Examples drwxrwxrwx 2 winsor 6656 Feb 11 15 17 Filemgr drwxrwxrwx 2 winsor 1024 Feb 11 15 16 Gettingstarted drwxrwxrws 2 winsor 512 Feb 6 49 54 Installation drwxrwxrwx 2 winsor 3584 Feb 11 15 18 Mailtool drwxrwxrwx 2 winsor Feb 11 15 18 Printtool Figure 6 6 Shell Tool Stop Sign Pointer Instead of displaying continuing text in the window the display stops so that you can look at it as long as you like The Enable Page Mode item on the Term Pane pop up menu changes to Continue when there is more information that you can display When you want to see the next pane press any key or choose Continue from the Term Pane menu When there is no more data to display the first item of the Term Pane menu changes to Disable Page Mode which switches the display out of page mode Use the Copy item to copy highlighted text from the Shell Tool window to the clipboard When there is text on the clipboard you can use the Paste item to insert the contents of the clipboard at the insert point The Enable Scrolling item on the Term Pane menu can be used to turn th
426. ons will occur Clicking SELECT while the cursor is in the canvas moves the pointer to the hairline cursor location Drag and Drop Target Level Meter The drag and drop target is where you can drop sound data into or drag sound data out of Audio Tool For example you can drag and drop sound data to and from the File Manager Sound data dropped on the drag and drop target replaces any data in the display canvas Press SELECT on the drag and drop target and drag out of the target to copy the current audio file to another application When sound data is dropped directly into the display canvas the data is inserted at the play position pointer location If data is selected highlighted in the display canvas the insertion occurs at that specific location replacing the selected data The level meter which looks like an LED indicator is active during play and record On color monitors the indicators are green and red During recording there should generally be 5 to 7 green LEDs displayed If the red LEDs are lit all of the time the recording level is too high Status Information The lower left corner of the Audio Tool window is the status message display area If any status information or error messages occur while using Audio Tool the information is displayed here For example the current audio format is displayed there Audio Tool 355 11 356 The lower right corner of the Audio Tool window displays the length of a rec
427. oo san ieee wie ere re ee Penk Se eueees 462 Using the Color Chooser Palette with Binder 464 17 Customizing the Solaris Environment 465 Viewing Information About Your Workstation 465 Your Workstation Information 00005 466 Networking Information vsiaceae ste sssr rsrsrsr 467 System Memory Information 0 005 467 Solaris Information 2 24 65 iw ss ep oe Feb eee e ceeded 468 Using the Workspace Properties Window 468 Change Bats scienne buyers eo ee eddie due euae ee 470 Workspace Properties Window Buttons 470 Contents xxiii Setting COlOtS srete so pee bee eh OL etwe besa E 471 Customizing POMS ie 90ers 164 eee eR CEN EEE enna mu 474 Choosing a Font Scale ccciwiiiniknh ia taededestetitns 474 Specifying the Font Style av caiwsett ha bee now k ews 474 Listing the Available Fonts 2 35105 200seeeuw ude daccea 475 Previewing Selected Font Settings 475 Keyboard Menu Equivalents 6 6 ceeev ee eee cee 475 Other Keyboard Options 0 64ssdeedewnweeinaees 477 Modified Use of the Keyboard and Mouse 477 Keyboard Accelerators 4 bs esexeteteeniuenin ceases 477 Erase Functions erted tagean t ia even eeeeey ey yew 478 Move Caret Functions sssusa asasaran rrenuar 478 Keyboard Mouse Equivalents 0005 479 Mouse seeren raana a EEEN E EEA NETE 480 Mult
428. ool Compose Window Any time you choose an item from the Compose menu except for Vacation a Compose Message window is opened The Compose Message window is simply referred to as the Compose window in the rest of this document A Compose window operates independently from the Mail Tool Header window You can close an opened Compose window to an icon for later use or keep a Compose window open while the primary Mail Tool Header window is closed to an icon The Compose window icon shows an unsealed envelope a sheet of paper and a label indicating the recipient of the message if the recipient has been specified Figure 4 6 shows these views of the Compose icon Figure 4 6 Compose Window Icon before and after specifying a recipient You can open as many Compose windows as you like at one time while replying to or composing several messages concurrently The Compose window is shown in Figure 4 7 Multimedia Mail Tool 157 158 Mail Tool Compose Message Include 7 Deliver 7 Header 7 Clear Attach v To Subject Ce ELE Attachments 0 Figure 4 7 Compose Message Window The Compose window has its own set of controls that you use to create and send mail messages The Include menu button provides choices to include selected messages as part of the message you are composing It also provides you with a set of templates for creating different types of messages See Templ
429. op files to be printed onto the drop target of the Print Tool window and onto the Print Tool icon Print Tool Window You can perform the following operations from the Print Tool window as shown in Figure 10 2 Print files using the Filename text field and the Print button Print files by dragging and dropping files from other applications Specify the number of copies to print Specify a header page Choose which of the available printers to use Use the Information button to view information about each printer if set up by system administrator Specify an executable print command or print script for use with the file to be printed Display print queue status Stop printing job s in this print queue Change printer property information such as including a header page notification of job completion overriding a default print method 332 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 10 Pathname to file for printing Scrolling list of Print Tool shi ais Drag and Drop Target Filename tmp guideEAAaQ00Eg SELECT this to start printing after typing Header Y Menamg SELECT this to bring up Properties window banders free SELECT this to find out available printers Displays status of print jobs in the queue SELECT Status to information about a selected printer This is only available if info was entered during the installation Size K Time view updated status of selected pri
430. operties window and confirm that you have the correct options set You should check the Tape Tool Properties window each time you write files to a tape since the settings are not saved if you quit Tape Tool and start it up again 2 Check the tape to be sure that it is not write protected 3 Insert a blank tape into your tape drive Alternatively you can use a tape containing data that are no longer needed Caution Any data on the tape will be overwritten by the new data 4 Click SELECT on the files or directories in a File Manager file pane that you want to copy onto tape Use ADJUST to select additional files or directories 5 Drag and drop the files onto the Tape Tool drag and drop target and release Press SELECT and use the pointer to move the file or directory icon across the Workspace to the Tape Tool target Alternatively you can type the name of a directory or of an individual file in the File To Write text field and then press the Return key or click SELECT on the File To Write button The files or directories you have chosen are listed in the Tape Tool window pane as shown in the example in Figure 12 5 When you see the directory in the scroll box select it 382 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 12 Tapetool List Read v Write Props File To Write Destination home iayna OD fhome jayna archive information D fhome jayna news C home jayna projects OD h
431. or complete information on opening a file refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment Saving the Existing File You can now edit the existing file and either save your changes in that file or save it as a new file To modify the file see the section Editing Files on page 136 To save the changes to the existing file do the following Choose File gt Save from the Text Editor control area The file is automatically saved Because UNIX does not allow two documents with the same name in one directory when you make a copy of a document in the same directory the original file is automatically saved to a backup file and renamed with a Text Editor 135 lll Qo suffix For instance a file named messages would automatically be renamed messages The next save overwrites the existing backup file rather than creating a second backup Figure 3 9 shows the two files displayed as icons in File Manager stored text stored text Figure 3 9 Edited File and Backup File with a Suffix Note If you do not want to retain the original delete the file with the suffix by pressing SELECT on the icon in File Manager and dragging it to the Wastebasket Saving the Modified File as a New File Editing Files 136 To keep the original file intact and create a new file with the modifications do the following 1 Choose File gt Save As You see the Text Save As window 2 Name and
432. or information on how to drag and drop see Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment Image Tool 409 13 Image Tool Controls and Menus 410 File Menu The Image Tool control area has three menu buttons File View and Edit and a Help button The Help button opens the On Line Help Handbook for Image Tool The File View and Edit menus are described in the following sections The File menu contains items for opening saving and printing images Image Tool conforms to standard file choosing methods All items on the File menu except Save and Print One display pinnable pop up windows The choices you can make depend on the type of file you are working with multiple page or single page images The functions of each item are Open displays a window from which you choose the file for the image you want to open Open As displays a window from which you choose the file and file format for the image you want to open Save displays a window from which you can save the currently displayed image to a file Save As displays a window from which you choose the type format folder and name of a file for saving the currently displayed image Use this option when you want to convert an image to a different file format and file type Save Selection As saves the selected area to a new image file This option is active when an area of the View window has been selected with the Selector tool from the palette Sav
433. or key 310 Q Quit Calculator key 302 quitting Help Viewer 56 Navigator 504 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Viewer 504 window 29 R Radians Calculator 314 Rand Calculator key 315 random number calculator function 315 Rate Calculator key 310 Rcl Calculator key 303 Read Entire List Tape Tool 381 Read Entire Tape Tape Tool 382 read files from tape 381 read files Tape Tool 378 Read Selected Tape Tool 381 Read settings Tape Tool 388 reading email 167 Rec record stop button Audio Tool 357 Recall Calculator 303 Record window Audio Control 373 recording sound with Audio Tool 345 Redo operation keyboard equivalent 11 Refresh utility 491 Region Icon Editor 426 Register Exchange Calculator 303 registers Calculator memory 303 release mouse button definition 9 remainder 301 remapping keyboards 478 Remote Copy pop up window 85 Remote Copy File Manager 63 Remove 134 Remove Brackets Text Editor 134 removing links 95 renaming files File Manager 78 repeat appointments 234 Repeat field Calendar Manager 232 repeating operations keyboard equivalent 11 RepeatKeys 555 rate of repeating 555 setting initial delay 555 Replace text Text Editor 133 Reply Mail Tool 153 Reply To header Mail Tool 204 resizing windows manually 28 Retrieve Every Mail Tool 196 Return Receipt To header Mail Tool 204 Rev reverse button Audio Tool 356 Root 66 rotating a
434. orded file e g Length 0 08 5 Whenever a sound segment is selected in the display canvas brackets appear indicating the length of the selection e g Length 0 08 5 0 00 9 These brackets also appear when recording is initiated and display the length of the newly recorded data which is updated periodically Rev Reverse Button Play Button This button controls the backward movement of the play position pointer Click SELECT on the Rev button to move the play position pointer backward If there is no selection in the canvas clicking SELECT on the Rev button causes the pointer to jump backward segment by segment until it reaches the beginning of the file A segment is the start of a sound box in the display canvas If there is a selection the pointer s movement is constrained to the selection Hold down SELECT on the Rev button to play the selection in reverse at an accelerated speed until you release SELECT or until the play position pointer reaches the beginning of the selection This button controls the playing of an audio file If you ve selected part of an audio file only that part of the file is played Otherwise the entire file is played Click SELECT on the Play button to start playing from the current play position pointer location to the end of the selection or file If the play position pointer is at the end of a selection or file clicking SELECT on the Play button moves the pointer to the beginni
435. ork Mail Tool can only change this option when first opening a mail file If you change this option when a mail file is open you are given three choices You can save the current mail file and reopen it making the new locking technique take effect immediately e You can continue editing the current mail file The new locking technique will take effect the next time you open a mail file e You can abort the apply and return to editing the property sheet Multimedia Mail Tool 217 lll HS 218 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Calendar Manager 5 Calendar Manager is an appointment and resource scheduling tool Calendar Manager can help you schedule and keep track of your daily appointments Upon request Calendar Manager can send you reminders in advance of your appointments Your system must be set with the accurate date and time for you to receive these advance notices when you need them Additionally you must keep Calendar Manager running on your system open or in icon form for this message system to work properly With Calendar Manager you can Display appointments and To Do items for a day week month or year at a glance Schedule a single or repeating event Provide reminders of events Access browse and edit the calendar appointments of other users who have given you permission to do so Browse calendars of many users at one time in order to find meeting times available to everyone Schedule appoi
436. orkstation If you d like to add a second calendar on your workstation you need to create a dummy user for that calendar For example you might want to add a second calendar for appointments for your entire work group To create the dummy user and new calendar use the following steps These steps assume a basic understanding of UNIX system administration so you may need to get some assistance This assumes you are root 1 Add a dummy entry in the etc passwd file of the workstation where you want to create the second calendar You need to specify a name a dummy user ID and so forth 2 Bring down the cm and rpc cmsd processes 3 Log in as the new dummy user and start a new Calendar Manager 4 Edit the access list and permissions for your group 5 Add the calendar name to the browse list 6 Log out and log back in with your own login You can now browse the new calendar Sharing Calendars Across Workstations If you move around from workstation to workstation and you want to always be able to access your real Calendar you need to have Calendar Manager running on each workstation Use the following steps to set up access to your calendar from multiple workstations Solaris User s Guide September 1995 A 1 On your primary workstation give full access list permissions to your calendars at the remote workstations For example suppose user Egret has his real calendar on the workstation named work and also
437. ou can add new mail attachments to a message using drag and drop as described in the previous section or the Add Attachment pop up window Note Keep in mind that when you add attachments to a mail message it is easy to construct very large messages without realizing it To add a new mail attachment using the Add Attachment popup window follow these steps 1 Choose Add from the File menu at the top of the Attachments pane The Add Attachment popup window is displayed 2 Select the directory name of the file to be attached Alternatively you can type the path in the Go To text field 3 Click SELECT on the Add button as shown in Figure 4 21 oH Mail Tool Add Attachment Type in the path to the folder and press Return Current Folder fhightide egret Fish Select a file and click Add T co up one folder Deo salmon O SwordFish O Tuna LLEI Hidden Files Figure 4 21 Adding an Attachment with the Add Attachment Popup Window 178 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll The file is added to the mail message attachment pane as shown in Figure 4 22 Mail Tool Compose Message To mariac celtic Subject Requested file Ce Attached is the file you requested a Attachments 1 attachment 2230 bytes E DeskSetDefaults A Added 1 attachments for a total of 3k bytes Figure 4 22 Attachment Added to a Mail Message Attachmen
438. ou return the Viewer to the last successive As you can see the contents of sample file now contains the output from page you viewed the date command See Chapter 3 Working with Files and Directoried for information on the more command Sometimes you may want to redirect the output of one command as input to another command A set of commands strung together in this fashion is called a pipeline The symbol for this type of redirection is a vertical bar called a pipe For example instead of saving the output of a command to a file you may want to direct it as input to the command for printing 1p by using the pipe symbol To send the output from the date command directly to the printer you would enter the following date lp This would print the results of the date command See Requests to the Default Printer in Chapter 8 Using Printers for information on using the 1p command to print files The command redirection examples shown here are quite simple but when you learn more advanced commands you will find that there are many uses for piping and redirection Figure 19 4 AnswerBook Viewer Functions Using the AnswerBook Software 503 Closing or Quitting the AnswerBook Navigator and Viewer You can close the Navigator and Viewer windows separately The closed Navigator and Viewer windows are represented by the icons in Figure 19 5 Navigator Viewer Figure 1
439. ou to perform basic OpenWindows tasks such as Displaying and choosing from the Workspace menu Moving an application icon Opening and closing an application icon Pinning and unpinning a pinnable window Displaying and choosing from an application s File menu Choosing exclusive or non exclusive choice items on a properties window Selecting items in a scrolling list Using scrollbars Selecting multiple objects Xxix If you are not familiar with these operations read Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment for information on how to use the mouse icons windows and menus The on line tutorial Introducing Your Desktop also provides information about these OpenWindows elements Note that context sensitive help is available for each application Position the pointer over the item you want help with and press the Help or F1 key depending upon your keyboard A pop up window is displayed giving detailed information Note Solaris supports SPARC x86 and PowerPC machines whose keyboards differ Consequently some keyboard equivalents of commands found in OpenWindows menus differ according to keyboard For most keyboard equivalents Solaris supports a Meta key combination that can be used on both platforms See Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment for a list of command functions and their various keyboard equivalents How this Guide is Organized This guide is divided into
440. our changes CM EEE Calendars 3 _ Can add another To A A Oe appointment by E Subject Meetin Ce selecting Attach then Appt Cc Attached is date and time of the review meeting E a Attachments 1 attachment 131 bytes Appointment Added 1 attachments for a total of 1k bytes 5 Calendars Displayed Figure 5 22 Multiple Calendars Compose Message Window Calendar Manager 253 z Browsing a Single Remote Calendar 254 Once a calendar has been added to the Browse menu you can display and or edit the appointments for that user depending on the access permissions that user has given you by choosing the calendar from the Browse menu If Calendar Manager cannot find the user name or access the appointments for that user the error message Unable to access user machine is displayed in the footer of the Calendar Manager window The appropriate user and machine names are displayed in the error message If Calendar Manager can access the user s appointments they are displayed in the window and the name of the user is shown in the header If you do not have browse access for that user you cannot see or edit their appointments but you can see blocks of scheduled time as shown in Figure 5 23 f amp Calendar Manager bud cad Week Starting Mon February 8 1993 Mon 8 Tue 9 Wed 10
441. ow To update the file that is being edited follow the previous steps to modify the file then choose File gt Save from Audio Tool s base window Because you can see an audio file graphically you can determine which portions are sound and which are silence This feature allows you to edit audio files such as voice messages For instance you might want to edit out long pauses silence between sentences or phrases To modify the sound file you edit the audio file as you would edit a text file in Text Editor using cut copy and paste commands from the Edit menu To cut a portion of sound from one location and paste it in another do the following 1 Click SELECT at the beginning of the sound portion you want to cut 2 Click ADJUST at the end of the portion you want to cut Or instead of steps 1 and 2 position the hairline cursor at the beginning of the sound portion hold down the SELECT mouse button and drag the pointer to the end of the portion That portion is highlighted as shown in Figure 11 7 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 11 Audio Tool audio test p 00 gt gt 0 Rev Play Fwd Rec MOU Length 0 07 9 0 01 gt p Figure 11 7 Selecting a Portion to Cut 3 Choose Edit gt Cut That portion is removed to the clipboard 4 Click SELECT on the destination point for the portion of sound you cut 5 Choose Edit gt Paste The cut portion
442. ow To see the Mail Filing Properties shown in Figure 4 38 choose Mail Filing from the Category menu at the top of the Properties popup window gy Mail Tool Properties Category Mail Filing Mail File Directory 4 jungle brenda maildir Display Up To 10 4 Files in Menus Move Copy Load Menus ly Permanent File Figure 4 38 Mail Filing Properties Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll Mail File Directory Use the Mail File Directory text field to specify the directory where mail files are stored when you move or copy messages from your In Box to mail files For example you might want to name the directory mail maildir or mail_files Unless a full path name is specified the directory is considered a subdirectory of your home directory If the directory name you specify does not exist a Notice is displayed asking if you want to create the directory when you click SELECT on the Apply button See Organizing Your Mail Messages on page 183 for more information about using the Mail File directory Mail File Move Copy and Load Menus The Move Copy and Load menus on the Mail Tool Header window display up to 10 of the most recently accessed mail files You can change the maximum number of files on the menus with the Display Up To setting of the Mail Filing Properties category Click SELECT on Apply after changing the setting When you start up a new Mail Tool application the Move
443. ow as shown in Figure 2 48 You can begin using the information on your disk The disk is unformatted Refer to Reformatting a Floppy Disk on page 119 for information on formatting a disk The disk is formatted and may contain data If the data is in Macintosh format or unknown to this system you may see the a popup as shown in Figure 2 53 116 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll Checking for a Floppy Disk 1 Insert your floppy disk into the disk drive on or attached to your computer 2 Select Check For Floppy from the File Menu If you inserted a formatted labeled disk you can move on to Viewing a File from the Contents of a Floppy Disk or CD on page 117 Note You do not have to check for CDs Viewing a File from the Contents of a Floppy Disk or CD Once the File Manager window is displayed you can view the contents of your floppy disk or CD File Manager floppy Fish es T Fish ILLE 1 Contains 0 items Eject Disk 1 Mbytes 100 available Figure 2 48 The File Manager Floppy Disk Window File Manager 117 lll No 7 File Manager cdrom unnamed_cdrom unnamed_cdrom amp Contains 4 items Eject Disk 16 Mbytes 17 available a e e 2 f bin cdm cdmanager Openwindows Figure 2 49 The File Manger CD Window 1 If necessary scroll through the contents of floppy disk or CD until you find the file you want to view 2 Selec
444. own print method and override the default method Apply Save as Default aves the selections made as the new defaults Figure 10 6 The Print Tool Properties Window The following properties can be set from the Print Tool Properties window Use the Header Page setting to indicate whether or not your jobs should print with a header or banner page The Header Page setting on the Print Tool window overrides the setting made here You can turn the header page on or off for an individual job from the Print Tool window without going back and forth to the Print Tool Properties window A check in the checkbox box indicates that the default is to print a header page with each job Use the Notify when ALL jobs done setting to beep and or flash you when all of the print jobs you sent to the queue have printed Use the Override Default Print Method to use your own print method next time you start Print Tool For more information on using your own print method refer to Changing the Print Method in the Print Tool on page 339 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 10 Changing the Print Method in the Print Tool Note Depending upon your installation certain printer filter programs should have been installed for the printers you use by the system administrator If no print filters are installed your print job will not be printed Check with your system administrator for the filter programs installed for your printer or for
445. owse list and the Browse menu pulldown which allows quick access to a calendar For more information refer to Multiple Calendars Base Window on page 242 Print Menu The print menu allows you to print the currently selected view as well as Day Week Month Year views and corresponding Appointment and To Do lists Navigation Controls Figure 5 3 The Calendar Navigation Controls The right side of the control area has three buttons for changing to past present or future views Prev displays the previous day week month or year Today displays a view that contains the current date Next displays tomorrow or the upcoming week month or year Resizing Your Calendar For all views and lists the Calendar Manager window has resize corners that you can use to change its size to see greater detail For information on resizing see Resizing Windows on page 28 To display more information on each line use one of the resize corners to stretch the window horizontally To increase the number of lines for appointments use one of the resize corners to stretch the window vertically Calendar Manager 223 z Calendar Views 224 Day View The following sections describe the views you can choose from the View menu Day Week Month and Year The day at a glance view is useful when you have many appointments scheduled for a single day To change the view in the Calendar Manager window so that it disp
446. ox for the Clock Face style The stop watch also works in analog style but it does not display the time in numerical form so is less suited to use as a stopwatch Click SELECT on the Stopwatch reset box as shown in Figure 7 12 The clock face changes to a timer with 00 hours 00 minutes and 00 seconds Stopwatch none start stop Figure 7 12 Resetting the Stopwatch 5 Click SELECT on the Stopwatch start box when you want to begin timing The Clock begins clocking seconds as shown in Figure 7 13 Figure 7 13 Stopwatch in the Digital Display 6 Click SELECT on the Stopwatch stop box when the timing period is over 7 Click SELECT on the start box again if you want to resume timing Solaris User s Guide September 1995 i 8 Click SELECT on the reset box if you want the next timing session to begin with zero time 9 Click SELECT on none to return to the regular Clock Alarm Settings To set the alarm choose Properties gt Clock menu Use the Alarm Hr and Min settings to specify the time for an alarm Use the Alarm command text field to type in the command that you d like to take place at the alarm time If you don t specify a command the Clock application will beep For example if your workstation has audio capabilities you can set the Clock to create a cuckoo sound with the following Alarm command sh c cat usr demo SOUND sounds cuckoo au gt dev audio Use the Repeat
447. page 229 for more information e Calendars and Insert access tells you what permissions you have for the selected calendar See Customizing Your Calendar Manager on page 257 A setting called Privacy Setting which lets you create a private appointment If you select the options Show Time Only or Show Time and Text only the time of the appointment and what fields are displayed or Show Nothing nothing from the appointment is displayed If you select Show Nothing the appointment including the appointment time is completely hidden from everyone else You can change the default in the Properties menu Refer to Customizing Your Calendar Manager on page 257 Caution If you create a Show Nothing appointment by using the Privacy setting nobody else will be aware that you have an appointment scheduled in that time slot when they browse your calendar There is a possibility that someone else will schedule another appointment for you in that time slot because they cannot see that time slot filled when using Multiple Calendars See Multiple Calendars Base Window on page 242 for information Calendar Manager 231 e Alarm controls determine how you are reminded of an appointment You can use as many of the alarm controls as you like for each appointment Each alarm setting allows you set an advance alarm in intervals of minutes hours or days by using the abbreviated menu buttons and typing a number in the text fiel
448. page 89 for more information Use Information to find out information about your file See File and Folder Information on page 96 for more information e Use Remote Copy to open a pop up window for remote transfers See Transferring Files From Your System to Another on page 85 for more information Use Custom Commands to run your own customized commands or to pop up a UNIX shell that you use like any other Shell Tool See Customizing Your File Manager on page 98 for information e Use Check for Floppy to bring up window if floppy has been inserted Use Quit File Manager to quit the File Manager This does preserve the way you had your icons set up in the window Note The following two items are only visible if you are using a floppy disk Use Format Floppy to format a floppy in your disk drive For more information see Using Floppy and CD Media on page 116 Use Rename Floppy to rename the floppy inserted into your disk drive For more information see Renaming a Floppy Disk on page 123 From the Base Window the View button has a menu with choices for different ways to view the file system These are Open Folder View Large Icon View Small Icon View Icon By Name Icon By Type List by Name List by Type List by Size List by Date and Cleanup Selection Refer to Folder View on page 65 for information on the Folder View Otherwise use these display options to choose how
449. pane e Onto the Text Editor icon text pane or drop target e Onto the icon or drop target of Print Tool Tape Tool Icon Editor Snapshot Audio Tool or any other application supporting the drag and drop File Manager 79 80 Moving or Copying Files and Folders Using Drag and Drop To move or copy a file or folder into another folder within File Manager when both the source and destination icons are visible follow these steps 1 Select the file or folders that you want to move or copy 2 To move press SELECT on a selected file and drag the pointer onto the destination folder To copy press the Control key together with SELECT on a selected file and drag the pointer onto the destination folder The tip of the arrow defines the destination of the move operation 3 Release SELECT The file or folder is moved or copied to the new folder Dragging and Dropping a Document Icon onto the Workspace You can drag and drop data file icons from File Manager onto the Workspace When you drop the icon onto the workspace it starts the appropriate application and opens the file Dragging and Dropping a Folder onto the Workspace You can drag and drop individual folders from File Manager onto the Workspace When you drop the folder onto the workspace it is opened and the contents of the folder are displayed in a new window If you switch frequently between directories you can use this feature to display the contents of more than o
450. pe Tool 379 Destination Machine 86 Destination Path 86 Device field Tape Tool 387 Disable Page Mode 282 disabled users interface for 545 disabled users see alsohandicapped users and AccessX 545 disk traffic 326 Display Characters Mail Tool 196 Display Headers Mail Tool 196 Display Lines of Text Mail Tool 199 Display Settings Calendar Manager properties 259 displaying property window keyboard equivalent 11 displaying files File Manager 65 108 Done Mail Tool 151 182 Dot files File Manager 105 double click definition 8 drag and drop 20 Audio Tool 355 Calendar Manager 272 File Manager 79 94 File Manager to Mail Tool 176 File Manager to Print Tool 86 File Manager to Tape Tool 378 from Audio Tool to Mail Tool 351 from File Manager to Print Tool icon 334 from File Manager to Tape Tool 382 from Text Editor 136 mail attachments 176 178 180 194 mail onto File Manager 82 mail to Calendar Manager 240 mail to Print Tool 163 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Mail Tool 192 272 Print Tool 331 problems 532 Tape Tool 378 target 20 Text Editor 140 142 Text Editor to Mail Tool 177 Text Editor to Print Tool 139 drag area on scrollbar 18 drag definition 9 dragging and dropping Image Tool 409 drag right distance 484 E e x Calculator key 315 Edit 367 Edit menu Audio Tool 367 Binder 443 File Manager 64 Icon Editor 436 Mail Tool 152 Text Editor 130 edit menu
451. pe a new name for the disk You type over the existing disk name and it disappears when you have finished typing 5 SELECT the Rename Disk button The disk is now ready to be used or ejected Dragging and Dropping Files from Floppy Disk or CD to File Manager 1 Open the floppy disk or CD into a window 2 Select the file or folder icon and drag it from one window to the other For information on dragging and dropping refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment The file is now copied to File Manager File Manager 123 124 Copying Files from Floppy Disk or CD to Floppy Disk You can copy files from a floppy disk or CD to another floppy disk 1 2 3 Insert the floppy or CD that contains the files to be copied Select all files to be copied Copy the selected files to a folder in a File Manager window Remove that floppy Insert a new floppy Copy the folder to the newly inserted floppy Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Text Editor Icon Text Editor 3 The Text Editor is an interactive ASCII text editor It allows you to create new files and modify existing files This chapter describes how to use the Text Editor You do not need to know any special editing commands because the editing commands are available from the base window The editing functions provided in this DeskSet application are also available in the text editing panes of the Console and the Comma
452. pe an Application or Print Method or both in the text fields of the expanded Properties window If your Properties window is not expanded click SELECT on the plus sign button at the bottom right corner of the Properties window to display the Application and Print Method text fields The Application defines the application that is invoked whenever any file bound to this set of properties is opened in File Manager Mail Tool or other applications in the DeskSet environment The default application is textedit The Print Method defines how a file bound to this set of properties is printed in the DeskSet environment If you do not specify a Print Method the print method of the application the file is being printed from is used Choose File Types on the Properties window Category choice item to display the File Type properties The File Type properties determine the set of files that are bound to the Icon properties that you just specified Solaris User s Guide September 1995 1lb 9 10 11 12 13 Type the new File Type entry name in the Pattern text field and press Return In this example type cat in the Pattern text field If you are going to recognize files by Pattern the Pattern text field must contain the pattern to be matched such as cat in this example If you are going to recognize files by Content the Pattern text field can be anything that distinguishes this type of file Move the pointe
453. pecified in the AUDIOPATH environment variable Audio Tool 361 11 Path Scrolling List The scrolling list displays the names of directories and files Double click SELECT on the first item in the scrolling list to move to the parent directory Double click SELECT on any of the directories in the scrolling list indicated by folder icons to change the current directory All Files Button and Audio Files Button If you click SELECT on the All Files button the path scrolling list displays the names of all directories and files However non audio files are dimmed and cannot be loaded If you click SELECT on the Audio Files button the scrolling list displays the names of audio files only other file types are omitted from the display Open Button Click SELECT on this button to open the specified audio file and load it into Audio Tool s display canvas If the selected item is a directory click SELECT to open the directory You can also open a sound file by following these steps 1 Scroll to the directory that contains the specific file 2 Double click SELECT on the directory 3 Double click SELECT on the audio file icon glyph The specified file is loaded into the display canvas Note If the audio hardware of your computer does not support the audio format of a file that you re trying to open Audio Tool displays the conversion pop up shown in Figure 11 16 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 11 S
454. pending on whether you have a folder or file selected all or some of the following options are available from this menu Select All Cut Copy Link Paste Delete Print One Print Cleanup Selection For information on Cut Copy Paste and Delete refer to File Menu on page 62 For information on Link refer to Linking Files on page 94 For information on Cleanup Selection refer to View Menu on page 63 Alternative Display Options 74 You can change the way icons are displayed in the file pane by choosing options from the View menu and you can change the default displays from the Properties window See Current Folder Settings on page 108 or New Folder Defaults on page 101 for more information Large Icon View Choosing Large Icon View from the View menu displays a list of standard size icons with the name of the icon centered below it as shown in Figure 2 14 When application images are specified by the Binder those images are displayed You can move these icons around Note Sorting large icons looses all position information for the large icon view Small Icon View Choosing Small Icon View from the View menu displays a list of small sized icons with a name centered below it The small icon show you whether each file is a folder data file or an executable program file The small icons are shown in Figure 2 15 O Fish O rasterfile rs my_printscript Figure 2 15 File Manager List Display Small
455. pening upon your keyboard A visual indication that an object is in a special state In monochrome implementations the visual indication is reverse video white type on black In color implementations highlighting color is a slightly darker shade of the window color The name given to the ability to programmatically link two separate text nodes locations When positioned at a hypertext node you can go to the other node by clicking the SELECT mouse button A small pictorial representation of a base window Displaying objects as icons conserves screen real estate while keeping the window available for easy access The place on the screen that accepts keyboard input In click to type mode click SELECT to set the insert point in the input area In Move Pointer mode move the pointer into pane the area is then ready for input The specific location in the input area where keyboard input is entered When the user sets the insert point an active caret is displayed A key or sequence of keys on the keyboard that quickly perform specific menu or application functions without using a menu A set of conventions that are unique to a geographical area and or language Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Localization man page Menu Menu button Menu Button y Menu item Menu Item b Menu mark v b MENU mouse button 000 O Message The process of establishing information within a computer system that is
456. permission The tilde indicates the top level of your home directory To save a mail message in a location under your home directory follow the instructions in the section Saving Mail to the New Default Location on page 210 but use the form in one of the examples below to type the path on the Mail File text field username Subdirectory filename HOME username Subdirectory filename When you choose Move or Copy the chosen mail file in your mailbox is stored in a file named filename in a subdirectory named Subdirectory under your home directory Saving to an Absolute Path Relative to the Root Directory To save a mail message to an absolute location starting from the top level directory in your file system you use a slash to indicate the root directory and follow that with an absolute path To save a mail message in a location under your root directory follow the instructions in the section Creating a New Mail File on page 186 but use the following form on the Mail File text field Subdirectory filename where is the root directory and Subdirectory is an existing directory under root For example you could type tmp myfile The tmp directory is a directory that contains some system files Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll Caution You should only use the tmp directory for temporary file storage When you reboot your system these files will be purge
457. playing seconds for the clock may have a negative effect on system performance If your Workspace color is black your clock is invisible when it is an icon on the Workspace See the man page for clock to learn how to have the clock icon painted with the Window Background color instead of the Workspace color Drag and Drop Troubleshooting The section describes some of the error messages you may get while attempting a drag and drop from on deskset application to another Drag and Drop Timed Out This can occur if the server is unable to connect with the receiving application within a certain time The default timeout value for an XView application is three seconds You can change this value by adding a line to your Xdefaults file If you wanted to change this to five seconds add the line Selection Timeout 5 to Xdefaults file and then type xrdb Xdefaults from a command line to setup the server with the new timeout value Drag and Drop Illegal Target The receiving application does not support drag and drop operations This message may also appear if the receiving application s drag and drop targets are not responding to the sender If this is the case restarting the receiving application may clear up the problem Drag and Drop Root Window The dragged object was dropped onto the root window Normally this is considered an error by the sending application though File Manager assumes in this case that the item is to
458. ple if you want to snap a pop up menu you need to set the timer in order to have time to display the menu or submenu 4 Click SELECT on the Snap button The Snap button displays the standard busy pattern and a message is displayed in the footer You may not be able to see the entire message The message informs you to use SELECT to position the rectangle ADJUST to snap the image and MENU to cancel the snapshot 5 Move the pointer to one corner of the region and click SELECT to define that corner Move the pointer and click SELECT again on the opposite corner to define a rectangular region Alternatively you can press SELECT to define the first corner drag the pointer to the second corner then release SELECT to define region A bounding box is displayed You can adjust the size of the bounding box by moving the pointer and clicking SELECT at a different place 6 When the region is defined click ADJUST to take the snapshot or start the timer If you are using the Snap Delay timer to take a snapshot of a pop up menu move the pointer into the defined region and press MENU to display the pop up menu while the timer is beeping Leave the menu up until the snapshot is complete When the timer beeper stops and the message is displayed the snapshot is complete For information on saving your snapshot refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment For information on viewing your image with Image Tool refer to
459. ple Calendars with Five Calendars Displayed Solaris User s Guide September 1995 5 One hour in the Multiple Calendars display has a double border On color workstations the inside border is the color of your Windows as determined by the Workspace Properties Color category This indicates the selected time Every user who has an appointment scheduled during the selected time has a clock symbol to the left of their name in the scrolling list You can use these clock symbols to see who is busy during a desired time slot For example if you have to schedule a meeting and there is no time that everyone is available you can use the check mark display to find out who is scheduled during a time slot for which only one person is busy The selected time in Figure 5 18 is Tuesday at 11 00 You can see by the check marks in the scrolling list that users hamilton artemis and patten phosphor both have appointments scheduled on Tuesday at 11 00 a m Adding a Calendar to Multiple Calendars and the Browse Menu The scrolling list of the Multiple Calendars displays all the calendars that are available to be browsed The Browse menu from the Browse button of the Calendar Manager control panel is also made up of this same list of calendars In order to browse a calendar you must first add it to the Multiple Calendars scrolling list New calendars are displayed on the Browse menu in the order you enter them in the Multiple Calendars scrolling lis
460. plete information on opening and saving files refer to Opening Saving Including and Attaching Files in Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment Include File Use the include file to include an existing file into a new text file 1 Use the Include File item of the File menu to display the Text Include window 2 Locate and include your file Include your file in the same manner you would open or save a file For detailed information on choosing a file to open or save refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment Empty Document Use the Empty Document item of the File menu to clear the contents of the text pane If you have made editing changes and have not saved them a Notice is displayed asking you to confirm or cancel the operation Text Editor 127 128 View Menu Use the View menu item to control the position of the cursor and the way the line wrap is used Select Line at Number Use the Select Line at Number item to display the Text Line Number window shown in Figure 3 3 Type the number of the line that you want selected and click SELECT on the Select Line at Number button The text on the specified line is selected and the insert point is moved to the end of the selected text gy Text Line Number Line Number Select Line at Number Figure 3 3 Text Line Number Pop up Window What Line Number Use the What Line Number item of the View menu t
461. pplication you are working in you see a Save window similar to the one in Figure 1 31 Text Save Type in the path to the folder and press Return Current Folder hightide egret Fish Seafood Select a file or folder and click Open Folder E c0 up one folder J New Folder BS saime Save Myfile Hidden Files Figure 1 31 An example of the Save Window 2 Choose the folder location for saving the document The name of the folder must be displayed under Current Folder 34 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll Select the name of the folder from the scrolling list Click SELECT on the name of the folder and click Open or double click on the name of the folder If it is not displayed double click on Go up one folder You may need to repeat this a few times or a Type the name of the folder in the Go To text field or click SELECT on the Go To button and press Return b Select the folder from the Go To menu press MENU on Go To then choose the desired folder from the menu Type a name for the document in the text field and SELECT Save When the scrolling list shows the contents of the folder type a document name and click SELECT on Save Saving an Existing Document To save changes to the contents of an existing file Choose Save from the File menu The document is saved with the same name and in the same folder Saving and Renaming an Existi
462. pt input When you choose a repeating appointment the For text field and abbreviated menu button are active and the units are displayed in the text field You use the For menu and text field to choose the time frame you want the appointment to repeat For example you may know that a weekly meeting will be scheduled for the next ten weeks The default number in the For text field usually sets the appointment to repeat for a year For example the default number is 365 when the repeat interval is Daily or 52 when the repeat interval is Weekly The default number for the Solaris User s Guide September 1995 5 Yearly setting is two years If you want the appointment to repeat indefinitely you can choose forever from the For menu or type the word forever in the text field 6 Choose a Privacy setting if applicable If this is a private appointment that you do not want anyone to view you can use the abbreviated menu button from the Privacy field to select Show Time Only or Show Nothing about the appointment For complete information refer to Appointment Editor Options on page 230 7 Choose the way you want to be reminded of this appointment You can set none some or all of the Alarm options Beep and Flash cause the Calendar Manager icon to beep and flash if it is closed The Calendar Manager window itself will beep and flash if it is open If you choose PopUp at the time specified for PopUp the appointment Reminder w
463. r picture elements whose number corresponds to the resolution of the monitor To modify the drag right distance follow these steps 1 In the Workspace Properties window press MENU on the Category menu button and choose Menus Figure 17 9 shows the Menus category defaults Q Workspace Properties Category Menus Reset To Standard Drag Right Distance pixels 0 150 Left Mouse Press Displays Menu Selects Default Item Figure 17 9 Menus Category 2 Move the slider to the desired distance The distance from the left of the slider is the actual drag right distance that will take effect on your screen 3 Click SELECT on Apply to make the change take effect 484 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 i Customizing Menu Operation Programs Menu Use the Menus category of the Workspace Properties window to change how you operate menus It determines whether the default menu item is chosen automatically when you click SELECT on a menu button or the menu is presented for you to make a choice In previous versions of the Deskset the default behavior was equivalent to the Selects Default Item setting This meant that the default menu item is automatically chosen when you click SELECT on the menu The alternate choice Displays Menu sets the SELECT button just to display the menu You then need to click the SELECT button again to choose a menu item You can add items to your Programs menu remove items
464. r hightide egret Fish Modified After mm dd yy Modified Before mm dd yy Search Files Containing String Figure 2 25 Find Window File Manager 89 90 Finding Files With the Find Window To find a specific file or group of files you can fill in some or all of the text fields according to the type of search you want to perform e Use the File Type setting to specify whether you want to search only folders only files only applications only executable files or a combination The mini icons displayed in the File Type choice item are the same as the mini icons used in the List by displays as shown in Figure 2 15 Use the Find files in and below folders text field to specify where in your file system you want to start the search The search begins in the folder you specify in this text field and includes all subfolders in that path Use the Name text field to specify the file name or pattern you want to match Use Included or Excluded to either include or exclude the pattern from the search Use the Owner text field when you want to search for files by owner or exclude a particular owner from the search e Use the Modified After or Modified Before text field or both to specify a time frame for the search You must specify as a minimum the month and day for each of these text fields Use the Search Files Containing String field when you want to find files with specific conten
465. r Icons You can change the default location where icons appear in the Workspace when they are closed from windows The OpenWindows default location for icons is on the bottom edge of the Workspace Solaris User s Guide September 1995 i To change the default locations of icons 1 In the Workspace Properties window press MENU on the Category menu button and choose Miscellaneous 2 Click Select on the appropriate button You can specify any of the four edges of the Workspace as the default location for icons 3 Click SELECT on Apply Changes to the Icons setting take effect immediately That is icons for applications that are on the Workspace or are subsequently opened are located in the newly specified location Icons for applications started from the command line with an explicit icon location appear in the specified location Changing Scrollbar Placement Locale Use the Scrollbar Placement setting to specify whether scrollbars are displayed at the right or the left side of the pane This setting applies to all scrollable application windows on the Workspace In Figure 17 10 on page 487 the default option Right is selected To set the location of the scrollbars on the left side click SELECT on the Left button Note Scrollbar changes do not affect applications that are already on the Workspace After you make your choices for system beep input area and scrollbar placement click SELECT on Apply to s
466. r more information about Vacation options The default item of the Compose menu is New When you choose New a new Compose window is opened Custom Mail Tool Buttons The first four buttons on the second row of the control area are custom Mail Tool buttons You can change these buttons to be any of the items on the File View Edit or Compose menus The default items of the custom buttons are Done from the File menu Next from the View menu Delete from the Edit menu and Reply from the Compose menu See Header Window Properties on page 195 for information about how to change the items on these custom buttons Mail File Text Field and Menus You use the Mail File text field and abbreviated menu button to create and view mail files and to store messages into mail files You use the abbreviated menu button to choose from all your available mail files See Mail File Menus on page 185 for information on creating and viewing mail files Use the last three buttons on the second row of the control area to move or copy selected messages into a mail file or to view load a different mail file Each of these buttons displays a menu of the most recently used mail files You can customize this menu to always include particular mail files See Mail File Menus on page 185 for information on creating and viewing mail files See Mail Filing Properties on page 206 for information about customizing your mail file menus M
467. r on the screen For a description of how to navigate with For most of your work you ll use the left mouse button called the SELECT button Use the mouse to turn this page the Help Viewer and Magnify Help Double Move the pointer over the button above and Click SELECT here click press and release the SELECT button once lt l Table of Contents Ext AboutHelp L Desktop Introduction at 100 Figure 1 42 First Page of the Desktop Intro Handbook Help on Help You can view a description of how to navigate in the help system Double click SELECT on the About Help icon shown in Figure 1 42 Alternatively you can click SELECT once on the icon and then click SELECT on the View menu button This option is available from any help handbook Note also that there is Magnify Help described in Magnify Help on page 45 for each element on the Help Viewer Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 49 lll bd Other Handbooks You can access help handbooks that describe the DeskSet applications and the OpenWindows Workspace by following the steps below Note however that if you are currently displaying the first page of any handbook you can bypass these steps by double clicking SELECT on the More Handbooks icon at the bottom of the Help Viewer To access the help handbooks at any time 1 Move the pointer onto the Workspace and press MENU The Workspace menu appears 2 Drag the pointer to choose H
468. r read in a duplicate of that File Type entry before it read the Binder entry in question When there are 523 524 duplicate File Type entries the Binder only uses the first one it reads The first File Type entry that the Binder reads does not necessarily correspond to the first Binder entry in the base window scrolling list Therefore you should use caution when using the Copy button to copy a File Type entry If a File Type entry does not show up for a particular Binder entry try to find and delete the duplicate File Type entry Calculator Troubleshooting If the Calculator detects an error such as division by zero the word Error is displayed The Calculator must then be cleared with the Clr key before any further calculations can take place Calendar Manager Troubleshooting This section describes basic Calendar Manager troubleshooting RPC Problems and Calendar Manager Installation The Calendar Manager consists of two parts e A database manager called rpc cmsd Calendar Manager service that maintains the information for the Calendar Manager The Calendar Manager application itself called cm The Calendar Manager application cannot function without the Calendar Manager service If your Calendar Manager does not display appointments or if you get RPC timeout messages in the console window rpc cmsd may not be running To check your configuration use these steps 1 Open a Command Tool or Shell Tool See
469. r to the Identify choice item on the expanded properties window and click SELECT on by Name or by Content to specify how you want to recognize files In this example click SELECT on by Name to match the file named cat If you select by Content the last four Type Information fields become active You then need to specify the Tag Offset Tag Type and Tag Value to be used to recognize files by content You can also specify a Tag Mask if desired See the section Identify by Content on page 456 for more information about the Content fields If you want to specify more files to be bound to the Icon properties repeat steps 9 and 10 Click SELECT on the Apply button to apply the Icon and File Type properties to your new Binder entry Click SELECT on the Save button at the top of the Binder base window to save the new Binder entry in your personal database If you are running the Binder as root with the special options to update the system or network entries the new entry is added to the appropriate database See the section Binder Databases on page 443 for information about the three different Binder databases Note The DeskSet applications will not recognize the new binding until you have saved it by clicking SELECT on the Save button You must also restart the application Figure 16 14 shows the new bound image after quitting File Manager and starting it again Binder 461 16 File
470. r with Mail Tool on page 272 for more information See Mail Tool Compose Window on page 157 in Chapter 4 Multimedia Mail Tool for information about creating and sending mail If you have calendars selected in the Multiple Calendars scrolling list the Mail Tool Compose window displayed by the Mail button is automatically addressed to those users The subject field is Meeting The Calendar Manager appointment icon in the Compose window attachments area is automatically filled out with the appropriate date and time as follows Solaris User s Guide September 1995 5 If the Appointment Editor window is or has been displayed the Date Start End and What fields are included with the appointment attachment with the corresponding fields from the most recent session of the Appointment Editor For complete information on using the Appointment Editor refer to Appointment Editor Options on page 230 If the Mail Tool Compose window is displayed before the Appointment Editor window is displayed the Date Start and End fields are included in the appointment attachment with the date and time of the currently selected time in the Multiple Calendars display You can change any of the information that is automatically filled out and add more information Figure 5 22 shows the Mail Tool Compose window displayed when the Mail button is selected from the Multiple Calendars window Attaching the appointment saves y
471. racters and retype that portion of the command Figure 6 3 shows the insert point cmdtool bin csh example cd home jayna Projects Docs ELIEN Insert point Figure 6 3 Insert Point in a Command Line Command Tool Shell Tool and Console Window 279 280 Shell Tool Editing Text with Command Tool Command Tool can be used as a Text Editor window at any time The advantage to this is that you do not need to know a command line editor such as vi To enable the Command Tool text editing window move the pointer onto the window pane press the MENU button drag the pointer down to highlight File Editor and then to the right to highlight Enable The Command Tool pane splits in two the top pane remains as Command Tool while the bottom pane becomes a Text Editor See the Text Editor section for an introduction to the commands in the Command Tool File Editor To return to the basic Command Tool position the pointer in the top pane and choose File Editor gt Disable Like Command Tool Shell Tool is a window that you use to communicate with the operating system or to move around in your file system and compose and edit files by command line You can use Shell Tool for shells or other programs that employ a standard teletype TTY interface The basic differences between Command Tool and Shell Tool are Command Tool is a scrolling window by default Shell Tool cannot be converted into a File E
472. rapped at a Character The most commonly used wrapping method is to wrap at the end of words The text shown in Figure 3 5 is wrapped at the end of words lz Text Editor story dir home jungle brenda Select Line at Number amp s a Bout a dream I had last night You what Line Number feface this with a reminder that Show Caret at Top strange I mean don t get 4 to work Based on my wrinkles years or ended up electric d recently 3 ng and Mary declared that she had done some figuring and this was her 32nd office since being at the company Not all of us were still here Henry had just opened his own phone repair business called Dead Ringers and John was considering retirement from the computer business to organize 9 of his friends his brother wife and seven kids Figure 3 5 Lines Wrapped at a Word Text Editor 129 130 Edit Menu Find Menu If you choose Clip Lines the beginning of each line that ends with a Return is displayed In Figure 3 6 each line represents a paragraph because there are no carriage returns embedded in the lines Only carriage returns are at the end of each paragraph That is v Text Editor story dir home jungle brenda 7 B Select Line at Number what Line Number Show Caret at Top me driving to work Based on m Wrap at Word just opened his Aout a dream I had last night I unpacked and headed Wrap at Character ting We had lot Next Alison told u
473. rations the corresponding button is dimmed when no plug is inserted into a jack Play Volume This slider controls the audio output volume You can also type in a volume level 0 100 Balance If your computer has stereo capability use the Balance slider to adjust the balance The slider has a detent at the 50 50 balance point Record This button displays the Audio Control Record window which is described in Record on page 373 Mute This button mutes the audio output to the selected devices The audio file or selected audio segment continues to play Click SELECT on the button to turn off muting so that you can hear the audio Audio Tool turns muting off when you adjust the play volume Record controls the adjustment of volume gain during recording Click SELECT on Record to display the Audio Control Record window shown in Figure 11 22 Audio Tool 373 j Note If recording difficulty is experienced with a commercial microphone use an external pre amp to boost the recording gain level Audio Control Record Press the Auto Adjust button to set the record volume Record Volume 50 _ Balance Left Right Monitor Volume 0 O Figure 11 22 Audio Control Record Window Microphone and Line In Buttons Click SELECT on one of these buttons to select an audio input device if they are supported by your hardware configuration Record V
474. rations to apply to all of the text or to restrict the operation to the text between the insert point and the end of the document Use the abbreviated menu button at the lower right corner of the window to select either All Text or To End The current setting is listed to the right of the abbreviated menu button as shown in Figure 3 7 Find Selection Use Find Selection on the Find menu to search the file for another occurrence of the text string that is highlighted as the current selection You can search forward or backward from the insert point by choosing Forward or Backward from the Find Selection submenu Find Marked Text Use Find Marked Text on the Find menu to highlight text between a matched set of delimiters provided as options in the Text Find Marked Text window shown in Figure 3 8 oH Text Find Marked Text CHEF Fanara ecra pana Insert Pair Remove Pair Figure 3 8 Text Find Marked Text Pop up Window You can search and highlight text for any of the matched delimiters provided as choices in the Text Find Marked Text pop up window Click SELECT on one of the sets of delimiters and then click SELECT on the Find Pair button Use the Backward or Forward choice to direct the search either backward or forward from the current insertion point If you have nested delimiters such as matched parentheses in a program s code you can use the Expand choice to select text outward from the current insertion poi
475. rea shown in Figure 4 3 has three groups of controls Mail Tool var mail bren ont Figure 4 3 Mail Tool Control Area Solaris User s Guide September 1995 File Menu View Menu The first four buttons in the top row are the standard Mail Tool menu buttons The first four buttons in the bottom row are user defined accelerator buttons which you can customize to represent any of the items available from the standard menus The items at the right side of the control area are the Mail File controls These include the Mail File abbreviated menu button and text field and the Mail File Move Copy and Load menu buttons The following sections provide a brief description of each of these controls The File menu has choices that you use to organize mail messages print them or commit changes such as deleting and sequentially renumbering messages Use Load In Box to load and view messages from your In Box This is how you return to the default mail view after you are done viewing a different mail file It is also how you can get your new mail in between mail delivery intervals See Organizing Your Mail Messages on page 183 for more information about mail files Use Print to print the selected messages See Printing Messages on page 162 for more information about printing Use Save Changes to incorporate changes See Saving Changes for Mail Tool on page 182 for more information s
476. rget is the small shaded box in the upper right corner of the Text Editor or the upper left corner of the Print Tool You can also print Text Editor files the same way you print any file with the File Manager Save your Text Editor file using one of the methods described in the section File Menu on page 127 Then select the file in the File Manager and drag and drop it onto the Print Tool or choose Print File from the File Manager s File menu See Printing Files on page 86 for more information about printing files from the File Manager The Text Editor pane can be split into two or more panes so that you can view and edit different parts of the document at the same time The document itself is not split so any editing changes you make in one view are reflected in other views as well To split the Text Editor pane 1 Move the pointer to the top cable anchor of the vertical scrollbar and press SELECT 2 Drag the pointer downward into the pane A horizontal line is displayed from the left edge of the pane to the center of the cable anchor to show where the split will occur 3 Release SELECT The pane is now split into two panes as shown in Figure 3 11 Text Editor 139 Drag and Drop Feature 140 Text Editor story dir home jungle brenda I have to tell you guys about a dream I had last night Move pointer here were all there Let me preface this with a reminder that sometimes dreams are very strange gate
477. ries of equal payments earning a periodic interest rate over the number of payment periods in a term The memory registers need to contain the following numbers Register 0 Amount of each payment Register 1 Interest rate Register 2 Number of payments Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Co lll Fo Example You plan to deposit 4 000 each year for the next 20 years into a bank account The account is paying 8 interest compounded annually Interest is paid on the last day of each year You want to compute the value of your account in 20 years You make each year s contribution on the last day of the year Memory register usage Register 0 4000 periodic payment Register 1 0 08 periodic interest rate is 8 Register 2 20 number of periods Clicking SELECT on Fv returns 183047 86 the value of your account in dollars at the end of 20 years Pmt Periodic Payment Use Pmt to compute the amount of the periodic payment of a loan Most installment loans are computed like ordinary annuities in that payments are made at the end of each payment period Store the following information in the memory registers Register 0 Principal or amount of the loan Register 1 Periodic interest rate of the loan Register 2 Term or number of payments Pmt Example You are considering taking out a 120 000 mortgage for 30 years at an annual interest rate of 11 0 You want to determine your monthly repayment
478. ript specified in the Message Window Properties sheet See Message Window Properties on page 199 If a message has attachments the attachments are not printed A message is printed that tells you how many attachments the message has To print an attachment open the attachment and print it using the attachment s application or drag the attachment to the Print Tool Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll Printing Mail Messages Using Print Tool You can use Print Tool to print your mail messages using these steps 1 With both Mail Tool and Print Tool running select the headers for the messages you want to print 2 Press SELECT and drag the headers until the hot spot of the pointer is on the Print Tool drag and drop target The drag and drop target is the box in the upper left corner of the Print Tool window The pointer changes to a document glyph if you are dragging one mail header to indicate that what is being dragged is document The pointer changes to three document glyphs if you are dragging several mail headers In the example shown in Figure 4 11 two files have been selected for printing v Mail Tool var mail egret Done Cert z Print Tool 1 thief cici Filename tmp guideEAAa000EQ 2 patten newbirth U 3 bgahl scuba Copies 1 ea Print U 4 ayers outhouse E 1 em 5 ayers outhouse Header 7 mariac celtic 9 abelson sharonolg 10 aquablu cowman
479. ris Troubleshooting 531 Deleting Floppy and CD Windows If you delete a window for a floppy disk or CD you can bring it back by selecting them from the Go To menu button They are always displayed within the application specific section of the Go To menu For information on using the Go To menu refer to Chapter 2 File Manager Drag and Drop Problems If you use File Manager to drag and drop a file to another application but you get the error message drag and drop illegal target in the File Manager footer the file was dropped in a place that does not recognize the file type or that does not support drop operations File Manager Does Not Display Some or All of Your Files If files you expect to see in the file pane are not being displayed make sure you have not specified a view filter pattern from the File Manager Properties window which can suppress the display of those files When a filter is specified it is always displayed in the header of the File Manager window To clear this up try selecting View gt Icon by Name Remote File Copy Problems If you have trouble transferring files between remote systems you may not have the correct permissions to access the file directory or system or the remote system may not be accessible through the network Contact the person who owns the files or the person who asked you to transfer the files to change permissions so the transfer will work To find out if the remote system is a
480. roduction 5 base 31 buttons 19 click SELECT before typing click to type mode 488 closing and quitting 29 fixing display 541 menu 14 move pointer to type 488 moving front or back 26 pane 14 prompt 18 repositioning 25 resizing manually 28 snapshots 415 window controls 17 Window Controls utility 495 windows Xxx closing to icons keyboard equivalent 11 opening icons keyboard equivalent 11 Workspace definition 5 how to save setup 497 menu how to display 12 Properties 468 icon locations 488 menu drag distance 484 Workspace menu 37 world change file permissions File Manager 98 world Calendar Manager permissions 262 wrap change line wrap 128 character 129 clip lines 130 word 129 Write settings Tape Tool 387 Index writing files to tape 378 382 X X bitmap 433 437 x Calculator key 315 x 2 Calculator key 301 x86 based machines OpenWindows keyboard equivalents accelerators 10 to 11 Xdefaults file 143 316 Xnor Calculator key 314 XNOR logical 314 Xor Calculator key 314 XOR logical 314 Xview icon 433 437 Y y x Calculator key 315 year view printing 270 year view Calendar Manager 227 Z zooming an image Image Tool 405 599 600 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Copyright 1995 Sun Microsystems Inc 2550 Garcia Avenue Mountain View Californie 94043 1100 USA Tous droits r serv s Ce produit ou document est prot g par un copyright
481. rst Last Page First _ printer Print to a printer or create a PostScript file Choose a printer Start printing Figure 19 22 Print Window 522 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Solaris Troubleshooting A This appendix provides help with some of the problems you may experience when using Solaris It is recommended that you read this entire appendix for information on these problems The troubleshooting sections in this appendix are listed by DeskSet OpenWindows and Workspace Properties categories and are in alphabetical order within each category for ease of reference Some of the information in this troubleshooting section requires a basic understanding of the UNIX operating system If you do not understand how to diagnose or correct problems related to the UNIX operating system see your system administrator or someone who is familiar with UNIX for assistance DeskSet Troubleshooting This section provides information about tools in the DeskSet Binder Troubleshooting You can only run one Binder at a time because your user database locks while the Binder is running If you cannot start up the Binder and you receive a message in your console telling you that you do not have permission to write to your user database it s probably because you have another Binder currently running If a File Type entry that you think is associated with a Binder entry is not showing up it s probably because the Binde
482. rties on page 210 in Chapter 4 Multimedia Mail Tool for more information about Mail Tool template The section Mail Tool Template for Calendar Manager Messages on page 273 shows the Appointment window If all the information you need has not automatically been filled in add it at this time This works just like the appointment editor For information on the appointment editor see Appointment Editor Options on page 230 You can however drag and Solaris User s Guide September 1995 nN lll drop from the appointment panel using the drag and drop target to a Calendar Manager canvas You can drop another appointment icon onto the drop target of the appointment panel and the fields are automatically filled in RESET returns you to the last appointment attached 1 Compose Message Appointment Date 12 19 92 Month Day Year Start 9 00 Stop 10 00 __ What Repeat one Time Fer Figure 5 39 Mail Tool Template for Calendar Manager Messages Displaying the Calendar Manager Monthly Icon If you want your Calendar Manager icon to display the entire current month with the current date highlighted as shown in Figure 5 40 you can start Calendar Manager from a Command Tool or Shell Tool by typing cm i 2 amp August 1991 5S M W 4 5 6 7 18 19 20 21 2 T 4 8 11 12 13 14 15 2 25 26 27 28 29 1 2 3 Figure 5 40 Alternate Cale
483. s it was obvious that we had just recently moved Everyone was unpacking and Mary declared that she had done some figuring and this was her 32nd office since being at the company Not all of us were still here Henry had just opened his own phone repair business called Dead Ringers and John was considering retirement from the computer business to organize 3 of his friends his brother wife and seven kids into a Figure 3 11 A Split Text Editor Pane Alternatively you can move the pointer into the scrollbar at the place you want to split the views press MENU to display the scrollbar menu and choose Split View One way to remove a split pane is to move the pointer to the top cable anchor in the pane you want to remove and press SELECT Then drag the pointer down until the top and bottom cable anchors overlap and release SELECT Another method is to move the pointer to the place in the scrollbar where the views are split press MENU to display the Scrollbar menu and choose Join Views Drag and drop is a method of moving files or selected text into and out of the Text Editor using only your mouse Refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment for an overview of the drag and drop feature To load a file overwriting any existing text you can drag and drop a text file onto the Text Editor drag and drop target or icon To insert text within a Text Editor file you can drag and drop a file or selected text
484. s a Clip Lines urse she was busy Figure 3 6 Clipped Lines The Edit menu provides standard editing functions as follows Again repeats the last editing action Undo undoes the last editing action or all editing actions depending on which item you choose from the Undo submenu e Copy stores a copy of the selected text on the clipboard Only one selection at a time can be stored on the clipboard If something is already on the clipboard and you do a Copy or Cut the contents of the clipboard are overwritten with the new information e Paste inserts the contents of the clipboard at the insertion point Cut removes the selected text and stores it on the clipboard Only one selection can be stored on the clipboard at a time The Find menu items help you to search for specific text strings special characters and delimiters to find a text string and replace it with another Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Qo lll Text Find and Replace Use Find and Replace to find specific text and replace it through the Text Find and Replace window If you have a current selection it is automatically displayed in the Find text field as shown in the example in Figure 3 7 ow Text Find and Replace dam Find then Replace Replace then Find Replace All All Text Figure 3 7 Text Find and Replace Pop up Window To find a text string and select it type the text in the Find field and click SELECT o
485. s and PUShPINS ecrcincny ede yeer ede VEN Eee ee ew Wee 12 Using the Workspace Menu s0cscsesk veeeundewenaaws 12 Using SubM NUS sscretitanrep ela pisdi e 13 Pinning a Men 128 tdi et ha ahehs entener onune 13 Using Window Menus 222295 4 500 0 5auweusedacena 14 Using Window Menus 20i 3590 s bieeen eye eee cates 15 Choosing Menu Defaults 2 40 60 ia iiiewer en eee eens 16 Changing the Menu Default 005 16 Window Controls j c5y 54 42602 cirmaniikiaines ee ee eee 17 Dra and Drop eee siak kk oe e eae anaana aa ARAA AARRE E 20 Positioning Windows and Pinned Menus 25 Moving Multiple Windows 0 00sec ee eee 26 Moving a Window Front or Back 00005 26 Movie ICONS 3x 220eeh eh eee trett ee a 6 oe Teei 28 Resizing WindOWss waa vss itere ree cucens oheew ee re ears 28 Closing and Quitting Windows 5000 29 Starting an Application n s naass eiwe ree ndan naw nie 30 Elements of an Application s Base Window 31 Opening Saving Including and Attaching Files 31 Opening a Document nici i095ssh0seis eens betetwnies 33 Saving a Document 222205 Ce ees se npeeee hed pea Rees 33 Introduction to the DeskSet Applications 36 Starting DeskSet Applications vv vids ciscdevawstenadt 37 Working with TOXE cnc ce nee npanek eerie rnnr 39 Title of Book Month 1992 Managing Your Files cect ee eaeedera de ueienans ewe 40 Managing
486. s check boxes where you can check off an item when you have completed it To check off a To Do item click SELECT on the check box of the completed list item To erase a check mark click SELECT on the check box containing the check mark An appointment such as a meeting typically has a time associated with it but it doesn t have to A To Do item such as Create status report typically does not have a time associated with it but you can give it a time if you want to It s Solaris User s Guide September 1995 5 Edit Menu entirely up to you which items on your calendar are Appointments and which are To Do items See Edit Menu on page 229 for information about creating and changing calendar items Displaying an Appointment or To Do List To display an Appointment List or To Do list follow these steps 1 Select or view the day week month or year that you want to display a list for 2 Choose Appt List or To Do List from any of the View submenus A pop up window with the selected list appears next to the Calendar Manager base window You schedule Appointments and To Do items from the Appointment Editor pop up window You can display the Appointment Editor window by selecting a day and choosing Appointment from the Edit menu Alternatively you can double click SELECT on an hour for Day view or a day for Week or Month view to display the Appointment Editor The Appointment Editor window automatically
487. s from Record to Stop so to stop recording click SELECT on the Stop button You can click SELECT on New from the File menu to delete the current sound and record from scratch Note Clicking SELECT on the Play button during a recording session causes the recording to stop and the segment that was just recorded to be automatically selected and played back Audio Tool 357 File Menu 358 New Items on the File menu handle opening including and saving files Click MENU on the File button to display the File menu Whenever a command cannot be performed the corresponding menu item is dimmed For example Save is dimmed when there is no new data to be saved Use the New menu to clear the current audio file or select a new audio data format Press MENU on New and drag to the right to display a pop up menu with format choices If you click SELECT on New the display canvas is cleared and retains the current format The selected audio format stays in effect until the next New operation or other operation that loads a new audio file such as Open When recording a new file you have the option of saving in the current format or in a new format If there is an unsaved sound file in the display canvas a confirmation message appears saying that the file is modified and asking if you want to discard the edited data Click SELECT on the Continue button to clear the display canvas and begin recording The confirmation mess
488. s in Memory Registers 1 and 2 and store the sum in Register 5 type R1 R2 S5 R1 means R etrieve register 1 R2 means R etrieve register 2 and S5 means S tore into register 5 See Table 8 1 at the end of this chapter for the keyboard equivalents such as R and S that you can use when creating your functions When you create your own functions if you want to use a function from one of the function windows that is the Financial Logical or Scientific windows make sure to include a command to change modes For example if you want to retrieve the contents of memory register 3 and get the factorial value of it R3 will not work because you need to change to Scientific mode before retrieving the factorial Instead use R3Ms Mb This function translates correctly to Retrieve the contents of memory register 3 change mode to Scientific mode get the factorial value and change mode back to Basic mode 5 Click SELECT on the Enter Function button to store the new function in your calctoolrc file and add it to the Functions menu To use the new function choose it from the Functions menu When creating functions remember that calculations are performed from left to right with no arithmetic precedence For example the calculation 2 3 4 as performed by the DeskSet Calculator gives a result of 20 The same equation performed with canonical arithmetic precedence would give a result of 14 This can be achieved wit
489. s monitors the number of errors per second on receiving packets If the Performance Meter is displaying just one graph or dial when you choose an option from the pop up menu that graph is replaced with the new selection If the Performance Meter is displaying more than one graph or dial the new one is added to the display Customizing Performance Meters 326 You can customize many aspects of the Performance Meter from the Properties window shown in Figure 9 6 Choose Properties from the Performance Meter pop up menu to display the Properties window or move the pointer anywhere into the Performance Meter window and press the Props key on your keyboard Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Ne lll Events to monitor Direction added meters are displayed Meter style Frequency of display update Monitoring frequency of dial s hour hand Monitoring frequency of dial s minute hand Perf meter Properties swap disk errors Direction Display dial araph Graph type Maching manic Sample time 2 seconds Hour hand 20 __ ajy seconds Log Samples fHenarmes Minute hand 2 ajr seconds Figure 9 6 The Performance Meter Properties Window Performance Meter Monitors Selecting one or more of the Monitor settings and clicking SELECT on the Apply button changes the display to show performance of the selected item or items If more than one Monitor setting is selected the Performance Me
490. s not have to be the actual UNIX command You may want the command to be something more descriptive In this example type String Search 3 Add the item File Manager iy 112 4 To prompt for command options that is if you are using SARG in the UNIX command choose Yes on the Prompt Window setting then type the prompt label into the first line of the Prompt text field If you use a prompt window when the custom command is chosen from the Custom Commands menu a window is displayed with the prompt label You use this pop up window to type the command options In this example choose Yes on the Prompt Window setting and type Search For inthe Prompt text field When your custom command is chosen from the Custom Commands window a window is displayed in which you can specify the text that you want to search for 5 If your custom command will create any output choose Yes on the Output Window setting This causes an output window to be displayed when the custom command is chosen where you can see the result of your command In this example you want to choose Yes on the Output Window Then when you choose the new custom command from the Custom Commands menu a window will be displayed that lists the places the text string is found 6 Click SELECT on Apply to add the new command to the Custom Commands scrolling list To use the item select the folders and files where you want to search for text choose the String Sear
491. s su 0u dete tote toes seater eGuseaes 411 Edit WWiCNis acs Eos eeeeeie ad Nae cos o4 Ce eee AEDT 412 Some Standard Operations i erteeeeer gee eek Ceres 412 14 SHapshOtscicdicadecies ses ehd inerse o EEEE aaa 413 Snapshot Icon and Base Window 6 00 cee eee 414 Snapshot Controls sso ccxeene ee ada en eee ned enone namns 414 Snap Types cnrewesiacccek ce eea a Le E dade eee 414 Snap Delay aici ca ctw th habe hehs theese caakeerwies 415 Hiding the Snapshot Window During Capture 415 Creating a Snapshot n nb voeeed wire hhh ete eade dwn 415 Snapping a Window wie eevee eeed eee knees 415 Snapping a REPO c cncr unary breti tedd esati eree es 416 Snapping the Sereen aia ctaeneeeeeden rine eeeanny 417 Contents XXI MIEWING a SNSPShOl ccneeceeeey hey eee ede VE bene tiga wy 418 Loading a Snapshot ance oe ananass ENE een mewn 418 Saving a Snapshot wie Giietp iis aecede debe ees 419 Printing a Snapshot ceresti ensce kiii erieree yy yeus 419 15 Icon BUNGE 5 c1c eae seer ene mearan OE Eaa aE 421 Icon Editor Icon and Base Window 00 050008 421 Icon Editor Drawing Controls 00 ee eee 422 Adding Text to the Canvas n c sscacsucnevvawers 424 Editing Images reee ia anaana e a AEA RERE 427 Filing QPHONS sd seepe kk k e E E AREER Or REER 432 Loading and Saving a File cssinss ca nunnana 432 Saving a New CONi ennea e ee iae E e ae Sees 432 Saving a Modified Cte ciel aavaves oo pe
492. s the input area The default mode is Click SELECT See the section Setting the Active Window on page 488 for information on how to use the Workspace Properties window to change to Move Pointer mode The insert point in a text window changes in appearance depending upon whether that window is active or inactive If the insert point is active it looks like a triangle If it is inactive it looks like a dimmed diamond and you must move the pointer into the window and if in Click SELECT mode click SELECT in that window s work area to activate the insert point When you begin typing the text appears at the insert point Figure 1 11 shows an insert point that is active and one that is inactive Active W W Inactive Figure 1 11 Active and Inactive Insert Points Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 9 lll bd Pointer Jumping Keyboard Equivalents 10 In most cases you move the pointer by moving the mouse However in some cases the pointer moves for you and jumps directly to a specific place on the screen This is called pointer jumping For example if you apply a change to the Workspace Properties window a pop up window appears with a warning that this will change a file that you may have manually customized The pop up window asks if you want to make these changes and the pointer jumps to the Yes button You must click SELECT on one of the choices in the pop up window before you c
493. sage To include a message from the Compose window 1 Compose your message 2 In the Header window click SELECT on the header of the message s you want to include 3 In the Compose window choose Bracketed or Indented as you prefer from the Include menu Your choice determines the formatting of the original message e Bracketed labels the beginning and end of the message e Indented indents each line of the message and marks each line with a greater than sign gt 4 To send the message click SELECT on Deliver A template is a file you can include in a mail message that contains text you frequently use when composing messages Mail Tool allows you to create your own template files You might for example want to create a standard table format for status report information or a standard signature and closing message See Template Properties on page 210 for information about how to create and store templates When you have created a template file and added it to Mail Tool it is displayed as an item on the Templates submenu The menu in the left margin shows a Templates submenu with three templates The default Templates submenu contains only the Calendar template The Calendar template creates messages in a form that Calendar Manager interprets when the message header is dragged and dropped onto the Calendar Manager See the chapter Calendar Manager on page 219 for more information Any template available from the
494. se file s by opening the target folder and selecting Paste Figure 2 29 Instruction Message after a Link is Initiated Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll 3 Open the folder you want to link the file to 4 Choose Paste from the Edit menu or the File Pane pop up menu or press the Paste key on the keyboard The file icon is displayed in the file pane and a message confirming the link is displayed in the File Manager footer Link information is displayed as part of the properties of the file as shown in the example in Figure 2 30 See File and Folder Information on page 96 for more information about file properties FM Information Name Tun D Size 0 bytes Type 4 ide egret root home Fish Tuna Figure 2 30 Links Displayed as Part of the File Type Properties Removing a Link You can remove a link by selecting the file and choosing Delete from the Edit menu or the File Pane menu Removing a link does not remove the original file If you remove the original file without also deleting the link the icon for the link changes to display a broken chain In the example shown in Figure 2 31 the original file named aliases has been deleted but the linked file remains ro Ges CD Edits 3 hightide egret root hor UCL Contains 2 items Salmon Swordfish Figure 2 31 A Broken Link File Manager 95 2 File and Folder Information 96
495. se the Mail Alarm CM Properties egret river Category Editor Defaults Alarm Mail Mail To egret river Privacy Show Time and Text Figure 5 27 Editor Defaults Properties Solaris User s Guide September 1995 nN lll To change the defaults 1 Click SELECT on the settings you want to change 2 Click SELECT in the text field and type a new number Use the abbreviated menu buttons to indicate minutes hours or days Figure 5 27 shows an example of the Alarms with Beep Flash and PopUp set You can change the default Privacy setting to Show Time Only or Show Nothing When you click SELECT on the Apply button the new defaults become effective immediately Changing the Alarm settings does not affect any appointments that have already been scheduled using the old default choices Display Settings Properties The Display Settings controls shown in Figure 5 28 specify the location of the default user calendar the boundary times for the day 12 or 24 hour time display the default calendar view and the initial calendar to be viewed in the Calendar Manager window To display this set of controls choose Display Settings from the Category menu gy CM Properties egret river Category Display Settings User Calendar Location river Day Boundaries Begin 7 00 a m End 7 00 p m tour Display Default View Vear week Day Initial Calendar View egret river
496. selected text is piped through the filter assigned to that key The output is then piped back into the text at the caret replacing the text that was selected If you want to specify your own set of bindings of filter keys to function keys you must copy the file usr lib textswrc toa file called textswrc in your home directory The Text Editor reads the file textswrc from your home directory if the file exists Format of the text swrc File List the sample file usr lib textswrc to see an example of filters used with a right handed keyboard You can copy this file into your home directory then modify it by adding filter bindings to unused function keys Here is the basic format of each textswrc file entry key name FILTER command line A function is assigned to one of the function keys by including a statement like the following in your textswrc file Note that insert_brackets does NOT work g double quotes are needed x KEY_TOP 10 FILTER insert_brackets x This example shows how to include C language comment markers around a piece of text You could enter this example into your textswrc file and save the file Then to use this added function start up a new Text Editor application Changes to your textswrc file are only effective when you Text Editor 145 lll Qo bring up a new Text Editor Then select the text and press the key The text will be replaced with a copy of itself
497. selection or dismiss the menu by clicking SELECT elsewhere e You can press and hold MENU in the Workspace to display the Workspace menu and then slide the pointer onto an item With this method the Workspace menu is dismissed when you release the mouse button 12 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll Using Submenus When you display the Workspace menu the first two items Programs and Utilities each have a hollow triangle next to them pointing to the right This means that there is a submenu of additional choices To display a submenu keep pressing MENU as you drag the pointer to the right at one of the arrows Figure 1 13 shows the Programs submenu workspac Q Programs Programs File Manager Utilities Text Editor Properties Mail Tool workstation Info Calendar Manager Help Command Tool Shell Tool Exit Clock Calculator Performance Meter Print Tool Audio Tool Tape Tool Image Tool Snapshot Icon Editor Binder Answer Book Demos Figure 1 13 Programs Submenu If you continue to press MENU and drag to the right at Programs the Programs submenus is displayed containing a list of default applications called DeskSet available for the OpenWindows environment To choose an item from the Programs submenu press MENU and drag the pointer over to your choice When the choice is highlighted release the
498. ser s Guide September 1995 Cable Cable anchor Ji Calendar Manager Caret Change bars Parity Odd Even None Check boxes A L Click Click to Type A cable on the scrollbar that represents the total size of the data you can view in the pane The elevator moves up and down the cable to show the position of the view into the data The button at each end of the scrollbar cable A DeskSet application supplied with the OpenWindows software package The Calendar Manager enables you to schedule appointments and reminders for any future date and time A marker that indicates the insert point in windows that accept keyboard input An active caret ready for text input is a solid triangle that may blink An inactive caret is a dimmed diamond Vertical lines on the left side of property window panes that show that a setting has been modified but not applied A nonexclusive setting that shows a check mark in a square box when the setting is chosen To press a mouse button once and release it without moving the pointer Another term for the Click SELECT Input Area property see Workspace Properties window that requires you to click the SELECT mouse button in a window pane to activate that window s input area Contrast with Move Pointer definition 2 Glossary 561 Clipboard Clock Color map Command button Command Tool Command window oH Browse Completion message Console Contr
499. several major components Introduction to OpenWindows DeskSet Workspace and on line help concepts e Descriptions of the DeskSet applications Each tool in the DeskSet has a separate chapter with descriptions of the tool s windows icon s controls and special features and step by step instructions for accomplishing various tasks Each chapter concludes with a description of that tool s properties that allow you to customize special features to your own preference The more experienced you become the more likely it is that you will want to customize features Description of the Workspace properties and how to use them e A Troubleshooting section on the Solaris environment OpenWindows DeskSet and the WorkSpace Properties The AnswerBook appendix provides information on using AnswerBook The Glossary entries define concepts that you may need to know as you become familiar with the Solaris user environment Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Conventions The following conventions are used in this guide Terms introduced for the first time variables and book titles are in italic type Names of buttons menu items and settings have initial capitals for example Choose Print from the File menu Text that you type is in Courier font Text that appears on the screen such as a file name is in Courier font Names of keys on the keyboard have initial capitals for example Press the Shift key
500. shows the default functions of the buttons for both mice Customizing the Solaris Environment 481 17 SELECT SELECT ADJUST ADJUST Shift SELECT MENU MENU Figure 17 7 Default Functions of the Mouse Buttons for Right hand Use Figure 17 8 shows the functions of the mouse buttons after changing the order for left handed use Now when the right mouse button is pressed SELECT is activated and when the left button is pressed MENU is activated MENU MENU ADJUST ADJUST Shift SELECT SELECT SELECT Figure 17 8 Functions of the Mouse Buttons for Left hand Use After you have made these changes in the mouse settings window click SELECT on the Apply button to store the new settings Mouse Pointer Jumping The Mouse Property contains Pointer Jumping controls for scrollbars and pop up windows Each of these defines a specific way in which the pointer can move in relation to scrolling in a window or a pop up menu 482 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 i Customizing Scrollbar Pointer Jumping Use the Pointer Jumping Scrollbar check box to specify whether or not you want the pointer to move along with the scrollbar elevator during scrolling actions When the box is checked as in Figure 17 6 on page 480 pointer jumping is enabled When the box is not checked pointer jumping is disabled and the pointer remains in a fixed position as the scrollbar elevator moves Note that if you position the pointer above or below the
501. sk rs shightide egret TestApps 493ScreenShots fmrenamedisk rs hightide egret Testapps 493ScreenShots fcopenwindow rs hightide egret Test pps 493ScreenShots fesavewindow rs p fhightide egret Test4pps 493ScreenShots ws3windows rs 37 file s found Figure 2 26 Example of a Find You can select and open one file at a time from the Find window scrolling list To select a file move the pointer onto the line and click SELECT The line is highlighted and the Open button is activated To open the highlighted file click SELECT on the Open button The Wastebasket is a temporary storage area for files that you want to discard and that you probably will delete from your file system When you start File Manager the Wastebasket is automatically created and displayed as an icon You can move the Wastebasket anywhere you want on the workspace When the Wastebasket is empty the icon shows an empty wastebasket After you have put a file in the Wastebasket the Wastebasket icon s appearance is changed to remind you that at least one file is there Figure 2 27 shows the Wastebasket icon when empty and when there are one or more files in it File Manager 91 92 Waste Waste Figure 2 27 The Wastebasket Icon Empty and with One or More Files You can move folders and files to the Wastebasket by selecting them and dragging and dropping them onto the Wastebasket icon or window or by choosing Delete from the Edit menu Files
502. specific to the operation of particular native languages local customs and character sets Another word for a reference manual page an on line resource for information about tools programs commands and applications A rectangle containing a group of controls Menus are displayed in two ways from a menu button with choices appropriate to the menu button label button menu and from any place on the screen that is not a control pop up menu The pop up menu displays choices appropriate to the pointer location A multiple choice control A menu button always has a menu mark and is used to display a menu An item on a menu with a menu mark pointing to the right that is used to display a submenu A hollow triangle in the border of a button or following a menu item that has a submenu attached to it The triangle points to where the menu or submenu is displayed The right mouse button that is used to display menus Unless you have switched the order of the buttons with xmodmap in which case MENU and SELECT are swapped Information generated by an application that informs you about the status of a process Glossary 567 Network Nonexclusive setting rota atic Notice i Application AVS Numeric field OPEN LOOK Palette 568 An electronic or mechanical device that is used to select and manipulate information on a computer screen To remove selected text or graphics from
503. splays the storage requirements of the file when Audio Tool writes it to disk and the amount of free disk space that you have available in the file system that contains the selected folder Open Folder Click SELECT on the Open Folder button to open a folder that you have selected in the file scrolling list Cancel Button Click SELECT on the Cancel button to close the Save As window If you save a compressed audio file the conversion can take a long time The Cancel button remains active and can be used to cancel the in progress save conversion Save Button Click SELECT on this button to save the specified audio file If the file selection is not made this button is dimmed Include enables you to insert audio data from another file into the current file Click SELECT on the Include menu item to display the Audio Tool Include window This window is similar to the Open window shown in Figure 11 15 on page 361 with the Include button replacing the Open button and the addition of the Open Folder button Choose the file you want to include then click SELECT on the Include button to insert the selected file into the display canvas at the play position pointer Note that if the file selection is not made the Include button is dimmed Solaris User s Guide September 1995 i Edit Menu Clear Undo Note You can include only files whose formats match the current audio format All other files are dimmed if Al
504. ssing SELECT to define one corner of a rectangle surrounding the group of files dragging the pointer to the opposite corner and releasing SELECT You can select an additional group of icons using the same method with the ADJUST mouse button Double Click Accelerators You can double click SELECT on any individual icon to open it Double clicking SELECT on any folder in the path pane or the file pane opens it and displays its contents in the file pane Double clicking SELECT on a data file starts the application for that data file and usually displays its data Double clicking SELECT on an application icon starts the application Panning Through the Tree and File Panes A feature provided by File Manager is the ability to pan through file panes This lets you scroll through the panes without using the scrollbars Panning is like gluing the contents of a pane to the current pointer so that when you move the pointer the entire contents of the pane moves with it Note On x86 and PowerPC machines Meta is Ctrl Alt You initiate panning by following these steps 1 Move the pointer to the place where you want to start panning 2 Press the Meta key on the keyboard and then press SELECT When the pointer changes to the panning pointer a curved arrow pointing down release the Meta key File Manager 61 Control Area Menus 62 File Menu 3 Drag the pointer to a new location within the pane and release SELECT The
505. st Using the AnswerBook Software 511 19 Reusing and Changing Search Phrases Your search phrases dating from the last time you started the Navigator are saved so you can reuse them You can reuse a search phrase as is or you can edit it before starting a new search Click SELECT on the Previous Searches button The Previous Searches window is displayed AnswerBook Navigator Previous Searches Figure 19 14 Previous Searches Window Your search phrases are listed with the most recent at bottom You can copy and paste a phrase from the Previous Searches window into the Search For pane Press Return or click SELECT on the Start Search button Customizing Searches To change search settings click SELECT on the Search Settings button In the Search Settings window you can specify various options to control the results of your searches Q AnswerBook Navigator Search Settings Search Library by Text and Titles Titles Only Sort findings by Relevance Only Relevance and Book Limit findings to 30 4 Figure 19 15 Search Settings Window 512 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 v Search Library by Text and Titles searches all text included in your Library while Titles Only searches only book and chapter titles and section and subsection headings Sort Findings by Relevance Only simply lists all documents found in order of relevance regardless of the books they appear in Relevance and Book me
506. surrounded with and Note the C like syntax of comments in the textswrc file When defining a filter in the textswrc file remember that the filter must appear in a directory accessible by your search path If the command is not found or if there is some other failure in the invocation of the filter no change occurs in the document 146 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Multimedia Mail Tool 4 Multimedia Mail Tool lets you communicate with other people on the network You can write send and receive electronic mail When you receive an electronic mail email message you can act upon it in various ways Save the message as a file anywhere in your file system Delete the message Reply to the sender Forward the message to another recipient along with your own message Print the message You can send and receive attachments audio files image files document files executable files or any other files Using drag and drop Multimedia Mail Tool works in combination with File Manager Text Editor AudioTool Calendar Manager and other applications to provide an integrated workspace environment For brevity Multimedia Mail Tool is referred to simply as Mail Tool throughout the rest of this document To open Mail Tool choose Workspace gt Programs gt Mail Tool 147 4 How Mail Tool Is Organized Header Window Icons No mail icon No new mail icon Mail Tool has three key windo
507. t This list can be sorted alphabetically after adding the name to the list To add calendars to the browse list and menu follow these steps 1 If the Multiple Calendars window is not currently displayed choose Browse gt Setup Menu If the Multiple Calendars window is displayed click SELECT on the Setup Menu button You see the Setup Menu window Calendar Manager 245 246 2 In the User Name text field type the calendar address of the user whose calendar you want to add The calendar address is the user s login name followed by followed by the user s host machine name For example the calendar address mariac celtic is in the Calendar field of Figure 5 19 If you are using the NIS or DNS system which uses the concept of domains make sure you are either browsing a calendar in your domain or that you specify the remote domain For example if you are trying to browse the calendar for user egret in your own domain the correct calendar address is egret host However if egret is in another domain the calendar address needs to be in the format egret host domain gy CM Setup Menu User Name mariac celtig Adds user calendar if name is typed Browse Menu Itens Changes the selected egret river user calendar hamilton artemis patten phosphor Removes the selected sebring curry name from browse list Sort List Sorts list of calendars alphabetically Figure 5 19 Adding a Calendar to Mu
508. t Pane Renaming Mail Attachments Follow these steps to rename a mail attachment in the View Message or Compose window Attachments pane 1 Select the attachment that you want to rename You can only rename one attachment at a time 2 Choose Rename from the Edit menu at the top of the Attachments pane The Rename Attachment popup window is displayed 3 In the Rename Attachment popup window type the new attachment name in the Name text field and click select on the Rename button as shown in Figure 4 23 The attachment in the Attachments pane is renamed Multimedia Mail Tool 179 180 Mail Tool Rename Attachment Rename Selected attachment to Name new attachment CER Figure 4 23 Renaming an Attachment in the Rename Attachment Popup Window Note The name of an attachment should never contain the slash character This can cause confusion between file and directory names Moving Mail Attachments You can drag and drop attachments to the File Manager or any other application that accepts files of the attachment s file type See Using Drag and Drop with Mail Tool on page 192 for more information Alternatively you can use the Attachment pane s controls to copy an attachment to a directory 1 In the Attachments pane click SELECT on the attachment to be copied The file is highlighted 2 In the control area of the Attachments pane choose Save As from the File menu You see the
509. t applications See File server and Window server Controls for choosing predetermined values see Exclusive setting and Nonexclusive setting Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Shell Tool Shrink Slider Magnify Help EJ Application Help Pushpin Status message Submenu Text duplicate pointer Yones Text field File Name Doct Text move pointer The gt Text region A window tool that provides a shell environment within a forward scrolling window only See Command Tool To resize a window so that its area is reduced A control used to set a value and give a visual indication of the setting A brief message pertaining to the object under the pointer when the user presses the Help key Information generated by an application that informs you about the progress of a process A menu that displays additional choices under a menu item on a menu The pointer that is displayed when you duplicate text directly by dragging An area in a window into which you type text from the keyboard The pointer that is displayed when you move text directly by dragging A multi line area in a window into which you type text from the keyboard Glossary 57a Tool Undo Wastebasket Window Window border Window button Window manager Window menu Window Full Size Properties Back Refresh Quit 574 An application or utility program
510. t calendar is Calendar Manager 251 252 automatically selected If any of the selected calendars has an appointment at the selected time that appointment is added to the Appointments scrolling list If you change the time or selected calendars in the Multiple Calendars window that information is automatically updated in the CM Appointment Editor window Sending Mail about Appointments from Multiple Calendars You can use the Multiple Calendars Mail facility to send mail about an appointment to other users The mail is sent with an appointment icon that for easy scheduling can be dragged and dropped on the Calendar Manager main window See Using Calendar Manager with Mail Tool on page 272 for information about using drag and drop with Mail Tool to schedule Calendar Manager appointments This feature is particularly useful when you have used the Multiple Calendars to schedule a new appointment After scheduling the appointment you may want to send mail about the appointment to all the participants In addition there may be users who have not given you Insert access to their calendar in which case you can send them mail and let them schedule the appointment themselves To use the Multiple Calendars mail feature Click SELECT on the Mail button at the top of the Multiple Calendars window This displays a Mail Tool Compose window that contains an appointment icon in the attachment area Refer to Using Calendar Manage
511. t format The buttons in the window work the same as the buttons in the Audio Tool New Format window described on page 359 ow Audio Tool Save Format Encoding 16 bit linear Sample Rate 7 8kHz Channels z mono Save Format Reset C Figure 11 18 Audio Tool Save Format Window Compress Click MENU on the Compress button to display a list of compression techniques The choices are None no compression This choice provides the best audio quality loads and saves files the fastest but consumes the most disk space e 4 bit G 721 ADPCM 2 1 compression This is a good choice for voice files and adequate for music It uses 50 less disk space than no compression e 3 bit G 723 ADPCM 8 3 compression This is an adequate choice for voice files but may be unacceptable for some music It uses 62 5 less space than no compression If the size of a file is a concern choose compression If loading time is a concern choose no compression A compressed file uses less disk space but requires additional loading time because it must be decompressed before it is used Also if you choose to compress a file the audio encoding specified by Audio Tool 365 11 366 Include New Format is ignored When you load a compressed file the format may change from its previous choice e g if you compress an A law file and reload the file format changes to u law File Size The File Size field di
512. t icon is an image of a camera as shown in Figure 14 1 Figure 14 1 Snapshot Icon The Snapshot base window shown in Figure 14 2 contains all the controls you need to take snapshots Snapshot load Save Print 7 7 go PEP Snap Type target Snap Delay o 2 4 s is seconds TEEN A works when Snap Delay CO Beep During Countdown is set O Hide Window During Capture Displays the snap by starting Image Tool Figure 14 2 Snapshot Base Window Snapshot provides you with three options for creating snapshots e Use the Snap Type Window setting to snap an entire window e Use the Snap Type Region setting to snap a region you define e Use the Snap Type Screen setting to snap the entire screen Solaris User s Guide September 1995 14 Snap Delay Note Snapshot does not capture the screen pointer Snapshot has a timer that you can use to set the number of seconds between the time you initiate the snapshot and the time it is taken This delay setting is especially useful if you are taking snapshots of a menu that you must display after you start taking a snap Once a number of seconds is selected the Beep During Countdown option becomes available Selecting this option turns on a beep countdown timer that sounds until the snap is taken Hiding the Snapshot Window During Capture Sometimes you may want to take a snapshot of a large portion of the screen or of the entire workspace without show
513. t specifies the format for the time and date e Numeric Format defines the numeric format or placement of the comma or decimal point Note For systems that allow locale specifications changes apply when you start a new application The changes do not affect applications already running 490 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Refresh Utilities 18 In addition to the applications under Programs the Workspace menu has several important utilities This chapter discusses each of the utilities in the order they appear in the menu To use a utility choose Workspace gt Utilities and select a submenu Note Solaris supports both SPARC and x86 or PowerPC based machines whose keyboards differ Consequently some keyboard equivalents of commands found in OpenWindows menus differ according to keyboard For most keyboard equivalents Solaris supports a Meta key combination that can be used on both platforms See Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment for a list of command functions and their various keyboard equivalents Sometimes an application prints characters outside of a particular window or leaves artifacts lines or other remnants from the window when it is cleared from the Workspace This is sometimes called window damage To clear these artifacts you refresh the Workspace This causes the entire screen and all your applications and icons to be repainted To refr
514. t the file or folder to be viewed 3 Choose File gt Open You can now use File Manager windows and menus If you close the window to an icon you see the following for floppy or CD as in Figure 2 50 unnamed_cdrom Figure 2 50 The Floppy Disk and CD icons 118 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll Removing a Floppy Disk or CD from the Disk Drive 1 From the floppy or CD window Select the Eject Disk Button 2 Remove the disk or CD from the drive when it is ejected The drive is now free Note On x86 or PowerPC machines you must physically remove floppies by hand After selecting the Eject Disk button you will see a pop up window telling you that you may manually eject the floppy Do not remove the floppy without selecting Eject Disk first If you do the system will display a pop up window telling you to reinsert the floppy Reinsert it select Eject Disk and remove the floppy Ejecting Unrecognized Data Format CDs To eject a CD that has an unrecognized data format such as audio files 1 Open a Command Tool or Shell Tool 2 At the prompt type eject cdrom Your disk should now be ejected from the drive Reformatting a Floppy Disk If you are using a diskette for the first time or if you want to format your diskette perform the following steps 1 Insert the floppy disk 2 Select Check For Floppy from the File Menu Note If you inserted a correctly formatted disk you see the win
515. t to be representative For example software version numbers are not shown in window headers e Open Windows menu commands carried out using keyboard equivalents also called keyboard accelerators are represented in this manual with the following convention a dash indicates that you press two keys at the same time For example Ctrl Alt means that you press and hold both the Control and Alt keys at the same time Ctrl Alt c means that you press and hold Control and Alt at the same time and simultaneously type c Keyboard equivalents are obtained by pressing the Meta key and one or more additional keys on the keyboard On SPARC keyboards the Meta key is the lt gt key on x86 and PowerPC keyboards the Meta key is obtained by pressing the Ctrl and Alt keys simultaneously Ctrl Alt For more information on keyboard equivalents see Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment and Chapter 17 Customizing the Solaris Environment This guide uses the following notation to describe choosing a menu option For example choose Workspace gt Programs xxxii Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Platform Specific Conventions The following symbols preceding a section or procedure title indicate that the section or procedure pertains only to the particular platform SPARC Denotes a SPARC platform specific section or procedure x86 Denotes an x86 platform specific section or procedure PowerPC Denotes a
516. tally or vertically Use Edit Menu item to change the Delete option default on the Edit menu Delete means delete to Waste window where files can be recovered if necessary Destroy means files cannot be recovered Whatever you set for delete or destroy is reflected in the Edit menu The Delete Destroy setting allows you to choose whether File Manager deletes files by moving them to the Wastebasket or destroys them See Using the Wastebasket on page 91 for more information If you choose Destroy files are not moved to the wastebasket and are not recoverable once you delete them On the other hand you never need to empty the wastebasket if you choose the Destroy option 100 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll Note If you choose the Destroy option and selected Save as Defaults this state is saved when you quit File Manager Therefore the next time you start up the File Manager application the Wastebasket will not be created because Destroy is on e Use Default Document Name to change the default name of a new document This is the name you see when you create a new document New Folder Defaults You can change the default for the way new files or folders are displayed in the file pane using the New Folder Defaults shown in Figure 2 35 To display this window choose New Folder Defaults from the Properties Category Choose Properties gt New Folder Defaults from Category The New Folder Defaults
517. te each line e In the To and Cc text fields separate multiple email addresses with a comma a space or both For example here machine there elsewhere outside somewhere a Type the topic in the Subject text field and press Return b If desired type email addresses of carbon copy recipients in the Cc text field Separate the addresses with a comma a space or both 3 Move to the Text pane either by pressing Return or clicking SELECT in the Text pane The dimmed insert point darkens to indicate it is active Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Addressee Message subject Carbon copy line 4 Type your message The Compose window Text pane uses standard text editing functions Figure 4 12 shows a sample message I 7 Mail Tool Compose Message ve To user machinename Subject Title of the mail message et user machinename This is where you type the text of the mail message You can add an attachment or two if you like Make sure you at least fill out the sender information in the To field Text pane Attachments pane Attachments Figure 4 12 Addressing a Message To include an attachment see Sending Mail Attachments on page 176 5 To send the message click SELECT on Deliver The message is delivered and the Compose window closes Multimedia Mail Tool 165 166 Replying to a Message Replying to a message is similar to composing a message 1 2 In
518. te the text string and click SELECT to position the caret there 5 Press MENU to display the window pane s pop up menu drag the pointer down to highlight Edit and to the right to highlight Paste The text string appears in the new location Alternatively you can use the Paste button on the keyboard if there is one or Meta v Copying and Moving Text To copy a section of text you highlight the line of text using SELECT and ADJUST as follows 1 Click SELECT to the left of the first character in the string that you would like to copy 2 Click ADJUST to the right of the last character in the string The text string is highlighted Text Editor 137 138 3 Press MENU to display the window pane s pop up menu drag the pointer down to highlight Edit and to the right to highlight Copy The text string is placed in the system clipboard Figure 3 10 shows the Edit menu Alternatively you can use the Copy button on the keyboard if there is one or Meta c Figure 3 10 Edit Menu 4 Move the pointer to the place where you want to insert the text and click SELECT to set the insert point 5 Choose Paste from the Edit menu or press the Paste key on the keyboard To move text the steps are similar except that you choose Cut instead of Copy and the selected text is removed from its original location Paste the text in a new location by clicking SELECT once on the destination point and then choosing Paste from the
519. tely Depending on the hardware capabilities of your display the Workspace Properties window categories may have different choices available to you When you open the Workspace Properties window color appears as the first property you can customize Figure 17 3 shows the Color category in the Workspace Properties window Workspace Properties E d Category Color Reset To Standard WINDOWS Foreground ON Background Q DATA AREAS Foreground Om Background em WORKSPACE Foreground Om Pattern Background O X E Window Title x Control Area Re Data Area A ___________________________y Customizing the Solaris Environment 471 To modify colors 1 Click SELECT on the button for the item you want to change Each button Windows Foreground Windows Background Data Areas Foreground and so on has a corresponding pop up window that displays a color palette for that item Figure 17 3 shows a color palette Note that for the purpose of this document the color choices have been replaced with patterns 2 Point to a new color on the palette and click SELECT The preview area at the bottom of the Workspace Properties window as shown in Figure 17 4 shows a sample of your color choices Ss WindowTitle Control Area Data Area E Figure 17 4 Color Preview Area 3 If you are not satisfied with
520. tember 1995 v Combining Advanced Search Techniques You can combine any or all of the above search techniques to further refine your search For example chang mail tool finds documents containing literal phrases such as change mailtool change mail tool change mail tool change mail tool changing mailtool changing mail tool changing mail tool and so on display button viewer searches for display button and viewer in proximity to each other Using Bookmarks Mode Placing bookmarks helps you relocate pages of interest quickly You can also use bookmarks to annotate a page with your comments Note that bookmarks do not appear on the marked pages When you put the Navigator in Bookmarks mode you ll see a list of all the bookmarks you ve created to date You can create a bookmark in any Navigator mode but you must change the Navigator to Bookmarks mode if you want to read edit or delete bookmarks or print or display bookmarked pages See Viewing and Editing Your Bookmarks on page 516 Creating a New Bookmark To create a new bookmark for the page currently displayed in the Viewer click SELECT on the New Bookmark button at the top of the Navigator no AnswerBook Navigator New Bookmark Bookmark for Rebooting your system Comment a Figure 19 16 New Bookmark Window Using the AnswerBook Software 515 19 In the New Bookmark
521. tems on menus exclusive and nonexclusive settings sliders gauges text fields and check boxes See also Dimmed controls An active item in a scrolling list To remove a selected object or objects from a window and store it on the clipboard 1 The specified choice in a menu that is activated if the user clicks SELECT on the menu instead of choosing an item with the MENU mouse button 2 A choice or set of choices in a program provided automatically if no other choices are specified by the user A default set of productivity applications supplied with the OpenWindows software package File Manager Calendar Manager and Mail Tool are examples of DeskSet applications A control that is inactive Its representation on a control area or menu is dimmed to show that it cannot accept input from the mouse or the keyboard A division or level in a hierarchical file storage system that contains files and optionally other directories Pressing a mouse button twice rapidly as an accelerator that performs a specific function without using a menu To press and hold down any mouse button while moving the pointer and the object under the pointer on the screen Glossary 563 Drag and drop Drag area Eo Dragging modifiers Electronic mail Elevator End boxes Exclusive setting File File Manager 564 An operation with the mouse and pointer used to select data within one application and copy or move it to
522. ter displays all of the selected dials or graphs at the same time Figure 9 7 shows three aspects of system performance being monitored at the same time P cpu 164 oad 4 Le isofintr 266 iJ Figure 9 7 Performance Monitor with Three Horizontal Displays The Direction setting determines whether multiple monitors are displayed side by side horizontally or stacked on top of each other vertically In Figure 9 7 the Direction setting is horizontal In Figure 9 8 the Direction setting is vertical Performance Meter 327 328 Figure 9 8 Performance Monitor with Vertical Displays Note that the performance meter does not try to fit multiple graphs in the window based on the shape of the window It always uses the Direction setting to determine if the graphs are displayed horizontally or stacked vertically For example if you have a vertical display like the one in Figure 9 8 resizing the window to be short and wide as in Figure 9 7 does not change the Direction display to be horizontal Performance Meter Display Options As discussed earlier you can monitor system performance with either dial or graph displays Use the Display setting of the Performance Meter Properties window to choose Dial or Graph displays Remember to click SELECT on Apply to change the display in this session only or click SELECT on Set Default to make the selected display your default every time you start the Performance Meter If you choose Gr
523. text sensitive help for the object at the pointer location Loads a new file Opens a file for example if you ve highlighted a file icon in File Manager Opens an icon or closes a window to an icon Copies the clipboard selection to the insertion point Sends the file to the printer for example if you ve highlighted a file icon in File Manager Displays the property window for th application at the pointer location Undoes an Undo Save the current file Stops the current operation Undoes the previous operation Note For instructions on remapping a SPARC or x86 keyboard see the Solaris Advanced User s Guide Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 11 lll Menus and Pushpins A menu lists the choices you can make from the Workspace or window For instance to start an application you move the pointer to any location on the Workspace background and press the MENU button This displays the Workspace menu which includes Programs Utilities Properties Workstation Info Help and the option to Exit the OpenWindows environment Figure 1 12 shows the Workspace menu Pushpin g Workspace Utilities o Properties Workstation Info Help Exit Figure 1 12 Workspace Menu Using the Workspace Menu There are two ways to display the Workspace menu You can click the MENU mouse button quickly in the Workspace The Workspace menu will pop up and stay up until you make a
524. that you put in the Wastebasket are stored ina wastebasket folder in your home directory You can view the contents of the Wastebasket by opening the Wastebasket icon A window is displayed with a scrolling pane that shows you the files you have moved to the Wastebasket Figure 2 28 shows an example of the Wastebasket window FM Waste hightide egret waste bas ket z IELE Contains 0 items 873 Mbytes 98 ava Figure 2 28 Wastebasket Window The Wastebasket window has View Edit and Empty Waste functions available To access the Wastebasket pop up menu move the pointer anywhere in the Wastebasket window and press MENU You can use the Wastebasket pop up menu to do the following Solaris User s Guide September 1995 2 e Use Empty Wastebasket to delete all the files in the Wastebasket This option is inactive if the Wastebasket is already empty Waste or Empty Wastebasket on the File pane menu Caution You cannot recover any files that you delete destroy with Empty Use Select All to select and highlight all the files in the Wastebasket This option is inactive if the Wastebasket is empty Use Destroy to delete all the selected files in the Wastebasket This option is inactive if no files in the Wastebasket are selected Use Undelete to restore the selected files in the Wastebasket The files are automatically moved back to their original locations This option is inactive if the Wastebas
525. the sign The result 13 in this example is displayed in the numeric display area Alternatively you can use the keyboard to enter numbers and simple functions You can also use the Copy key to store the numeric display to the clipboard and the Paste key to retrieve the contents of the clipboard If you want to copy just a portion of the numeric display use the SELECT and ADJUST mouse buttons to define the portion of the numeric display to copy If an operation needing more than one input is partially complete the pending operation is displayed on the line beneath the current number as a reminder Creating and Saving a Function Note that when you enter a value for a new function you must type the keyboard equivalents in the Value field To display the keyboard equivalents for each Calculator key click SELECT on the Keys button The following example describes how to create and save a function that adds together two numbers taken from memory registers and stores the result in another memory register 1 Choose Enter Function from the Fun key menu The Enter Function pop up window is displayed 2 Type in the number of the function you wish to add or replace in the Function No field The function number must be in the range 0 through 9 3 Type a function name in the Description field for example addition Calculator 305 lll Co Financial Functions 306 4 Type a function into the Value field To add the number
526. the icon the File Manager and other DeskSet applications If no value is given for this field the background color is white If you want to pick a new background color click SELECT on the button to the right of the Backgr Color text field to invoke the Color Chooser See the section Using the Color Chooser Palette with Binder on page 464 for more information Alternatively you can type three numbers in the Backgr Color text field to indicate the amount of red green and blue respectively of the background color Color saturation values range from 0 through 255 For example 0 255 0 represents a bright solid green color Application The Application text field defines the application that is invoked whenever any file defined by the current binding is opened in File Manager or other applications in the DeskSet environment This text field is on the expanded portion of the Icon Properties window Note If there is a ToolTalk method available applications do not use this field Refer to the Desktop Integration Guide Print Method The Print Method defines how a file is printed in the DeskSet environment If no Print Method is specified the default print method of the application the file is being printed from is used This field is on the expanded portion of the Icon Properties window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 i Note DeskSet applications such as File Manager and Print Tool expect print m
527. the Compose window is checked by default Viewing the File of Logged Messages To view the messages you have logged do the following 1 In the Mail Tool base window type the name of the file in which you have logged your messages in the text field Using the example above for instance you would type record Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll 2 Click SELECT on the Load button The messages you have logged will appear in your Mail Tool Base window in place of the current mail messages and each has the message header Request Confirmations If the Request Confirmations setting is checked a Notice is displayed in the following cases When you have text or attachments in the Compose window and you select Clear on the Compose window control panel a message is displayed asking if you really want to clear the Compose window When you have text or attachments in the Compose window and you quit the Compose window a confirmation message is displayed asking if you really want to quit When you have made changes to a message in the View window and you then display a new message unpin the View window or receive new incoming mail a message is displayed asking if you want to save the changes Caution If the Request Confirmations setting is not checked any editing changes in the View window are automatically incorporated without notification If you remove or change the From header of a message
528. the Header window control area press MENU on Reply Choose the appropriate item for your recipient s The Compose Message window is displayed Note the following e The To and Subject text fields are filled out e A copy of the original message is included only if you chose Reply To Sender Include or Reply To All Include Type or edit your message and its header and send the message Refer to the section Composing Messages on page 164 Forwarding Messages to Third Parties You can forward a message to another person in two ways depending on where you start from Forwarding a message from the Header window Including a message from the Compose Message window Forwarding a Message To forward a message from the Header window 1 Select the message s you want to forward e Click SELECT on the first message header e Click ADJUST on additional message headers Choose Forward from the Compose menu The Compose Message window is displayed Note the following e The Subject text field is filled in You need to fill in the other To text field and if desired the Cc text field e The Text pane displays the original message e The Attachments pane includes any attachments to the original message Type your message and send the entire new message Refer to the section Composing Messages on page 164 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll Using Templates Including a Mes
529. the contents of the file pane are displayed and sorted Use Large Icon View for viewing icons at regular size You can move these icons around in the file pane Use Small Icon View for viewing icons at reduced size You can move these icons around in the file pane Use Icon by Name to sort the large icons alphabetically by name Use Icon by Type to sort the icons in alphabetical groups by file type with folders first followed by files then by applications File Manager 63 64 Edit Menu As a listing to show you more information about each individual file e Use List by Name to sort the files alphabetically e Use List by Type to sort the files in alphabetical groups by file type with folders first followed by files then by applications e Use List by Size to sort the files by size largest to smallest e Use List by Date to sort the files from newest to oldest Use Cleanup Icons for putting all icon s in order to the nearest grid point If icon s are selected use Cleanup Selection for putting selections in order to nearest grid point Each grid point is determined by the width of the largest name Edit has a menu with options for editing Use Select All to select all the files in the file pane Use Cut to remove selected icons from a folder and place them on the clipboard Cut is inactive unless you have made a selection in the File pane Use Copy to put a copy of selected icons on the clipboard Cop
530. the current date as shown in Figure 5 5 The chart in the lower left corner of the window shows you the blocks of time allocated for appointments during the week The darkly shaded area indicates overlapping appointments You can also display a weekly list of Appointments or To Do items See the section Appointment List and To Do List Views on page 228 You can also display to the Day View by selecting the date header in the Week View Calendar Manager 225 226 Month View Calendar Manager egret river Week Starting Mon January 4 1993 Mon4 Wed 6 Thu 10 00am 11 00 10 00am 11 00 1 00pm 2 00p 10 00am 11 00 11 w Steve Staff Meeting Engineering All Product Meeting 1 0 30am 11 30 1 00pm 2 00p 10 30am 1 00p Tech Talk On Line Help Ov Design Review B 12 00pm 1 00 Maria s Lunch 7 8 9 10 11 12 1 2 3 4 5 6 Figure 5 5 Week View To change the View in the Calendar Manager window so that is displays appointments for a month choose View gt Month Alternatively from the Month view place the pointer over the number for an individual day and click SELECT to change the view to the week containing that day Make sure to click SELECT directly on the number of the day within Month view Clicking SELECT anywhere else on the day just selects that day When you click SELECT directly on the number of a day the entire week containing that day is highlight
531. the form directory1 directory2 filename 2 Click SELECT on the Print button Dragging and Dropping the File When you drag a file from another application you can drop it onto either the Print Tool icon or the drop target of the Print Tool window To print a file by dragging and dropping 1 Display the item you want to print For example A file in the File Manager window A mail message in Mail Tool e An attachment in a Mail Tool message Drag the icon or message header to either the Print Tool icon or the drop target in the Print Tool window To drag more than one file click ADJUST on additional files Solaris User s Guide September 1995 10 3 Release the mouse button to drop the file Printing should begin Print Tool Drag and drop icon is grayed once file Copies 1 ae is dropped onto it Header Wf Filename Printer l Information mimeo Size k Time I ELA no entries Figure 10 3 Dropping a File on the Print Tool Drop Target Choosing Another Printer When the Print Tool window is open the list of available printers is shown in the scrolling list for Printer The list is alphabetical with the default printer highlighted and located at the top of the list if it exists If a default printer does not exist the first printer in the list is highlighted To choose another printer follow these steps 1 Scroll down the list until the printer you want to use is
532. the name of a File Type entry type a new name in the Pattern text field and press Return If you want to identify a set of files by a pattern you must type the actual pattern in the Pattern text field If you want to identify a set of files by content the name of the File Type entry can be anything Cut removes the currently selected File Type entry from the current Binder entry the entry selected in the base window scrolling list and to move it to the clipboard If the current Binder entry is a read only entry the Cut button is inactive Copy copies the currently selected File Type entry to the clipboard e Paste adds the File Type entry that is on the clipboard to the current Binder entry The Paste button is inactive if there is nothing on the clipboard Delete removes the File Type entry from the current Binder entry The Delete button is inactive if the current Binder entry is a read only entry Note that deleting a Binder entry does not delete its File Type entry Binder 453 16 454 Binder Binder Entries You use the Apply and Reset buttons at the bottom of the File Type Properties window to apply your File Type and Icon Properties changes to the current Binder entry or to reset all the changes you ve made since the last Apply Identify Choice Item Theldentify choice item determines how the current class of files the selected File Type entry is recognized by DeskSet applications such as the File Man
533. the name of the folder then click Open Or double click on the name of the folder If it is not displayed double click on Go up one folder You may need to repeat this a few times 3 Choose the folder that contains the document you want to open The name of the folder must be displayed under Current Folder To display the folder you can a Select the folder from the Go To menu by pressing MENU on Go To then choosing the desired folder from the menu or b Type the path name of the folder in the Go To text field and press Return or click SELECT on the Go To button 4 When the scrolling list shows the contents of the folder select the desired document and click SELECT on Open You can also double click on the name of the document Note You can use the same steps as opening a document for including a file from Text Editor or Attaching a file from Mail Tool The result will be an included or attached file or document Saving a Document You may need to save or rename a document in one of three stages Saving a new and untitled document Saving an existing document Saving and renaming an existing document Save as Introduction to the Solaris User Environment 33 lll Saving a New and Untitled Document The first time you work with a document or file you have to give it a name and save it to a particular location in your file system 1 Choose Save from the File menu Depending on the a
534. the new color select another color from the palette or create a custom color To create a custom color a Click SELECT on Custom on the palette The palette is replaced with sliders for Hue Saturation and Brightness as shown in Figure 17 5 Note that for the purpose of this document the color choices have been replaced with patterns 472 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 17 x workspace Properties Category Color Reset To Standard Window Foreground Color Hue D WINDOWS Foreground Saturation Q ____ o SSN Background ae DATA AREAS Brightness ____ Foreground Palette Background WORKSPACE Foreground Om Pattern amp Background Control Area Data Area Figure 17 5 Using the Custom Color Palette b Move the sliders as you watch the preview area The sliders let you control three characteristics e Hue is a color from a range of colors red orange yellow green blue indigo violet and magenta e Saturation is the deepness or richness of a color e Brightness is the amount of light that is filtered into a color 4 To change additional foreground or background colors repeat the previous three steps A palette for each foreground and background color is pinned to the Workspace 5 When the colors suit you click SELECT on Apply The changes occur immediately on the
535. then choose Empty from the Edit menu Mail Tool will give you a notice asking you to confirm that you really want to empty the mail file To rename a mail file select the mail file in the Mail Files scrolling list type the new name in the Name field and then choose Rename from the Edit menu Sorting the Contents of a Mail File 190 You can sort items in your In Box or the currently viewed mail file by choosing an item from the Sort By submenu of the Header window View menu Sort by time and date of receipt placing the most recently received messages at the bottom Sort alphabetically by name of sender This is useful for grouping together all the messages from a particular person Sort alphabetically by subject of mail to group together all the messages about a particular subject Sort by the size of mail messages from smallest to largest Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Sort by the read status of the mail This puts the messages you have read first the unread messages next and the new messages last This is useful to group together all your unread mail after you have read your messages in a non sequential order Sort by the message numbers Loading Saved Messages Back into Mail Tool You can load saved messages back into the Mail Tool base window and view them as you would new mail messages When you load previously saved messages they temporarily replace the current messages co
536. thers as well as allowing other users to browse your appointments See Multiple Calendars Base Window on page 242 for more information about browsing TheAccess List and Permissions properties let you specify who may browse insert delete or change your appointments The default access list shown in Figure 5 29 gives all users permission to browse your calendar To display the Access List controls choose the Access List and Permissions item from the Category menu Calendar Manager 261 262 Q CM Properties egret river Category Access List and Permissions User Name salmon sea Add Name User Name Permissions Remove world B Sort List Permissions Browse Insert Delete Figure 5 29 Access List and Permissions Properties The scrolling list displays everyone who has access to your calendar The entry world means everyone who is using the DeskSet environment The default is that the world has Browse access permissions If you delete the world entry only the users you specifically add will be able to access your appointments To the right of each name in the scrolling list are letters indicating the permissions that user has The available permissions are B for Browse meaning the user can read your appointments e T for Insert meaning the user can add new appointments in your calendar e D for Delete meaning the user can delete existing appointments from your calendar
537. these steps 1 Click SELECT on the attachment to be copied Click ADJUST on any additional attachments that you want to drag at the same time 2 Press SELECT on one of the highlighted attachments drag the pointer to the destination and release SELECT Dropping Files onto the Mail Tool The Mail Tool Compose and View windows accept dropped files from the File Manager and Text Editor in the text panes The Compose and View windows accept dropped files of any type in the Attachments pane See the section Sending Mail Attachments on page 176 for more information The Header window pane accepts dropped mail files When you drop a mail file onto the Header pane it is loaded into the Mail Tool and becomes the current mail file You can customize the properties of Mail Tool from the Mail Tool Properties window Display this window by choosing Properties from the Edit menu The Properties window has seven categories Header Window Message Window Compose Window Mail Filing Template Alias and Expert properties Solaris User s Guide September 1995 To display a particular category of properties choose the category from the Category menu located at the top of the Properties window When you release MENU the contents of the Properties window shows the properties you can set for that category The new properties take effect immediately in most cases In a few cases such as number of Headers to display in the Header Windo
538. ting has been postponed a Attachments 1 attachment 14 bytes 1 weekly status Figure 4 4 View Message Window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 The number of the displayed message is always shown in the header of the View Message window Message 2 in Figure 4 4 Once you have displayed a message in a View Message window any New or Unread flags on the message header are cleared whether or not you have actually read the message The View Message window uses the standard text editing pane and pop up menu You can edit the text in the View Message pane If you have made editing changes to the message a Notice asking if you want to save the changes is displayed when you change messages or dismiss the window The View Message window can be split into two or more panes to view and edit different parts of the mail message at the same time See Chapter 3 Text Editor for more information If the message you are viewing contains attachments a separate attachment area is displayed at the bottom of the View Message window See Mail Tool Attachments on page 173 for information about mail attachments Using the Pushpin in the View Message Window The View Message window has a pushpin that you can use to pin the window to the workspace if you want to keep a message or several messages visible If you do not pin the View Message window it is reused for subsequent mail messages that you
539. tion Keyboard Equivalent Description yx y Current entry raised to power of next entry x Factorial of current entry Cos Control c Cosine of current entry Sin Control s Sine of current entry Tan Control t Tangent of current entry Ln N Natural logarithm of current entry Log G Base 10 logarithm of current entry Rand Random number from 0 0 through 1 0 Customizing Your Calculator Use the Calculator Properties window to customize the look and layout of your Calculator To display the Properties window place the pointer anywhere in the Calculator application Press MENU Choose Properties from the Calculator pop up menu and release MENU The Properties window is shown in Figure 8 14 320 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Co lll gy Calculator properties Appearance 2D look 3D look Style left handed right handed Figure 8 14 Calculator Properties Window e Use the Appearance setting to determine if your Calculator is displayed with two or three dimensional buttons The default is two dimensional for performance reasons e Use the Display setting to determine if your Calculator is shown in black and white or color Color is applicable only on machines that support it e Use the Style setting to determine the layout of the Calculator The default layout is with the number keys on the left If you choose the right handed Style setting and click SELECT on Apply or Save as Defaults the
540. tions or to the specifications of the indent pro file if you have one Insert Brackets You can use the Insert Brackets item to quickly insert any of the following type of brackets around the selected text depending on which item you choose from the Insert Brackets submenu J or Remove Brackets Choose the Remove Brackets item to remove any of the following types of brackets around the selected text depending on what item you choose from the Remove Brackets submenu or Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Qo lll Creating a New File To create a new file with Text Editor 1 Choose Workspace gt Programs gt Text Editor and type a line in the Text Editor window field such as This is a test file 2 Press MENU on the File menu button and select Save You see the Text Save window 3 Save the file For complete information on saving a file refer to Chapter 1 Introduction to the Solaris User Environment Working with an Existing File You can open load any standard ASCII text file into the Text Editor and then modify the current file or change the name of the file to create a new file which leaves the original file intact To load a file from your file system into Text Editor 1 Choose File gt Open from the Text Editor control area You see the Text Open window 2 Select and open the file The file you have specified is displayed in the Text Editor window F
541. to another Mail File or by choosing either Save Changes or Done from the File menu your deleted messages remain available and you can Undelete them When there are no deleted messages available the Undelete item on the File menu is inactive To undelete the message most recently deleted choose Undelete from the Edit menu To undelete a different message or to undelete more than one message at a time choose From List on the Undelete submenu to display the Undelete window The Undelete window contains a scrolling list of messages that you Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Finding Messages have deleted since you last incorporated changes in Mail Tool Select the headers of the messages that you want to undelete then click SELECT on the Undelete button To save your undeleted messages in your Inbox click SELECT on Done in the Mail Tool Message window control area or choose Save Changes on the File menu To find messages you can search your In Box or mail files for messages with a particular subject messages that have been sent to or from a specific person or both You can use this feature to find one particular message or to find a group of messages For example if you come back from vacation and find a lot of mail messages about a topic you are not interested in you can find all the messages about that subject and quickly delete them To find a message first display the Find pop up window by choosing Fi
542. to dos4 875 185 kbytes 99 ar Advanced Options Figure 2 32 Example of a File Properties Window To display the Information window select a file or a group of files and choose Information from the File menu If the Information window is already showing when you select a new file the File Properties information is updated to reflect the properties of the new file If you select more than one file the Information window shows those properties that the selected files can share The document names and specific document information are not displayed You can change the permissions for the group of selected files to be the same by clicking SELECT on the Permissions check boxes and then clicking SELECT on the Apply button File Manager 97 Changing Properties and Permissions Every file and directory has a security system organized around permissions Permissions determine which users can read a file write to or change it or execute it applications are executed You must own the file to change its permissions Users are categorized as owner group and world e Owner designates the owner of the file Group designates the name of a specified group that can access the file World allows access to anyone on your network You can change file properties for any file you own as long as you have permission to make modifications in the folder containing the file If you do not own the file the write permissions determine whether
543. to the spot in the text pane where you want the text inserted Solaris User s Guide September 1995 3 You can drag and drop either selected text or the entire Text Editor file to any location in the DeskSet environment that accepts ASCII text The following sections describe two different ways to drag and drop from the Text Editor application Dragging Selected Text from the Text Editor To drag a copy of selected text from the Text Editor 1 Select the text to be copied If you want to copy the entire file quadruple click SELECT or drag from the drag and drop target as described in the next section 2 Press the Control key on the keyboard and click SELECT Once you have clicked SELECT you can release the Control key Pressing the Control key assures that the text is copied instead of moved If you don t press the Control key first the text being dragged will be cut from the original text 3 Drag the pointer a short distance A text duplicate pointer is displayed as shown in Figure 3 12 with the first few characters of the selected text displayed inside the rectangle Text Editor V3 3 NONE edited dir home bsilva 801 66 File View Edit Find a slow lazy fox woke up with a start What was that he looking over his left shoulder down the trail leading away from his lai Yones Figure 3 12 Dragging a Copy of Text Editor Text 4 Drag the pointer to the destination or the text and release SELECT Text Ed
544. to toggle the Direction setting If multiple monitors are displayed vertically they will be changed to a horizontal display and vice versa Type g to toggle the Display setting between the Dial and Graph display Type q to quit the Performance Meter application Type s to toggle a graph display style between Line and Solid graphs e Type S to toggle the Save Samples setting Type t to toggle the Machine setting between Local and Remote Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Print Tool Icons Print Tool 0 The Print Tool DeskSet application provides an easy way to print files Print Tool provides a graphical user interface to the UNIX printing functions This chapter describes the functions of the Print Tool For information about UNIX printing functions see System Administration Guide Volume II or the Solaris Advanced User s Guide To start Print Tool choose Workspace gt Programs gt Print Tool You can print files by dragging and dropping files from the File Manager or a header attachment from the Mail Tool onto the Print Tool icon which is shown in Figure 10 1 Figure 10 1 Print Tool Icon Before and During Printing 10 The name of the current printer is displayed at the bottom of the Print Tool icon When a file is dragged and dropped onto the Print Tool the footer of the open Print Tool window displays the name of the file being printed and may also display error messages You can drag and dr
545. ton N press mouse button Figure B 5 Mouse Button Equivalents for a Numeric Keypad Access for Users With Disabilities 553 ToggleKeys MouseKeys Settings Changing the Maximum Speed of the Pointer If you have trouble moving the pointer with the accuracy you want you can slow it down To change how fast the pointer moves check the box marked Max pointer speed pix sec See Figure B 4 Adjust its slider bar to the speed that you want The speed is in pixels per second and can range from 10 up to 1000 Setting the Ramp Up Speed for the Pointer You can set how fast the pointer reaches its maximum speed when MouseKeys is set To do this adjust the slider marked Time to max speed see Figure B 4 This way you can be more deliberate in moving the pointer You can set the mouse to take up to four seconds to reach full speed Many keyboards have indicator lights LEDs that light up when certain keys are active An example of this is the Caps Lock key When Caps Lock is pressed its indicator light goes on For people with no or little eyesight these indicator lights are of limited use The ToggleKeys feature serves as the aural equivalent of such a light When you make Num Lock Caps Lock or Scroll Lock active the computer beeps once When you deactivate the key the computer beeps twice Turning ToggleKeys On and Off Check the ToggleKeys check box in the AccessX main window to turn this fea
546. ton Note that you can change this default arrangement Chapter 17 Customizing the Solaris Environment describes how to swap SELECT and MENU for left handed use SELECT SELECT ADJUST ADJUST Shift SELECT MENU MENU Figure 1 10 Functions of the Mouse Buttons e You click a mouse button by pressing and releasing it quickly e You double click a mouse button by clicking twice quickly within approximately half a second or less without moving the pointer Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll e You click SELECT to choose an item e You click ADJUST to make a secondary choice or modify what you have chosen with SELECT e You press MENU and hold to make a choice from a menu Throughout this text press means to press and hold You release the mouse button to initiate the action e You move the pointer by sliding the mouse with no buttons pressed e You drag the pointer by pressing a mouse button while sliding the mouse Pointer and Input Area Because you can have several windows open on the Workspace at once the OpenWindows environment must track which window is currently active You can choose between two methods of notifying the window system of the currently active window or input area Move Pointer and Click SELECT In Move Pointer mode the window is activated when you move the pointer onto the window pane In Click SELECT mode you must also click SELECT in the window to designate that window a
547. tore the changes Changes made to the Miscellaneous category take place immediately after you apply them The Locale category of the Workspace Properties window provides users with a mechanism for specifying an input language and display language as well as time date and numeric formats for a specific locale Figure 17 11 shows the Locale category in the Workspace Properties window Customizing the Solaris Environment 489 Sz Workspace Properties Category amp Locale Basic Locale Display Locale English Input Locale English Time Format 12 31 89 21 30 30 Numeric Format 10 000 0 Figure 17 11 Locale Category in the Workspace Properties Window If your system has a Solaris localization installed such as Japanese Solaris German Solaris or French Solaris you have access to locales in addition to the basic U S A locale If you do not have a Solaris localization installed U S A English is the only available locale The following is a description of each of the choices in the Properties window Basic Locale is the name of the country or native language of the user interface Specific setting choices vary depending on the basic locale setting The following settings help define characteristics of a particular locale or cultural area e Display Locale specifies the language in which messages menu labels button labels help files and so forth are displayed e Input Locale specifies the language to be input e Time Forma
548. ts For example to find all files in which the DeskSet product is specifically named you would type DeskSet in the text field If you click SELECT to turn on the Ignore Case setting all files with the word DeskSet will be listed in the scrolling list regardless of how the word is capitalized When you have filled in the text fields click SELECT on the Find button to start the search Once you start a search the Stop button is activated You can stop the search at any time by clicking SELECT on the Stop button When the search is completed all files that match the pattern are displayed in the scrolling list at the bottom of the Find window If you have more than one field filled out on the Find window a file must match the information in all of these fields for it be listed Figure 2 26 shows an example of a file content pattern matching search File Manager found 37 files containing the specified string Seven of the files found are shown in the figure the rest are scrolled out of view Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Using the Wastebasket FM Find File Type Io Find in and below folder hightide egret TestApps 493ScreenShots Name Owner Modified After 01 15 93 mm dd yy Modified Before mm dd yy Search Files Cantalning String cy hightide egret Testapps 493Screenshots D shightide egret TestApps 493Screenshots fmfloppywindow rs shightide egret TestApps 493ScreenShots fmformatdi
549. tton Audio Tool 356 stop Rec button Audio Tool 357 Stop operation keyboard equivalent 11 stop sign pointer Shell Tool 282 stopping the vacation notifier 169 stopwatch 292 Store log as new file 277 Store log Command Tool 277 Store Calculator 303 straight line depreciation 311 Strip Path Tape Tool 379 388 subfolders File Manager 70 Subject field of mail header 159 submenu 13 sum of the years digits depreciation 312 Suppress Tape Tool 388 Syd Calculator key 312 Sym Links Tape Tool 387 symbolic links Tape Tool 387 T Tag Mask 456 Tag Offset 456 Tag Type 456 Tag Value 456 Tan Calculator key 315 TAN tangent function Calculator 315 Tape Tool introduction 377 adding a file to write 379 base window 378 copying files onto tape 382 destination 379 drag and drop 378 drag and drop from File Manager 382 extracting files from tape 384 File to Write button 379 Host Name 387 icon 377 list files 378 editing 379 properties 379 386 read files 378 381 Read menu 381 reading files from tape 381 Strip Path option 379 tape device 387 troubleshooting 537 Write settings 387 writing files to tape 378 382 tar command 377 teletype tty interface 280 Temp file directory Audio Tool 370 templates 167 Calendar template 272 creating 167 210 properties 210 using 167 210 Templates submenu Mail Tool 167 10x Calculator key 315 Term Calculator key 313 terminal em
550. ture on and off 1 Limits on pointer speed apply only when MouseKeys is turned on Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Ss lll RepeatKeys Some users with limited motor abilities have a hard time taking their finger or mouth stick off keys quickly As a result for example they sometimes type kkkkkkkkk when they mean to type k With RepeatKeys on a key must be held down for a certain length of time before it starts to repeat Turning RepeatKeys On and Off There are two ways to turn RepeatKeys on and off Check the RepeatKeys check box in the AccessX main window Hold down the Shift key either one for eight seconds The computer beeps at four seconds to let you know that you re turning this feature on or off Valid only if you ve started OpenWindows with the accessx option Note Holding down the Shift key for eight seconds also turns on SlowKeys RepeatKeys Settings Delaying the Onset of Repetition You can set the amount of time you want a key to be pressed before it begins repeating This interval can be anywhere from a tenth of a second up to ten seconds To set this parameter move the Delay until repeat slider see Figure B 4 to the number of seconds you want keys to wait before repeating Setting the Rate of Repeating You can also set the repeat rate The repeat rate represents how many times a pressed key will repeat per second The rate ranges from 0 1 that is ten secon
551. turns you to main table of contents j Help Viewer About Calendar Manager Double dick SELECT on any of the choices below What Calendar Manager Offers Calendar Manager Views Scheduling and Editing Appointments Customizing Calendar Manager Printing a Calendar View Browsing Calendars Mailing a Calendar Reminder Opening a Mail Message fae f More Handbooks About Help h About Calendar Manager at 100 Figure 1 46 Table of Contents with Hypertext Links Returning to a Handbook s Table of Contents When you have chosen a handbook and selected a topic within that handbook you can return to that handbook s table of contents by double clicking SELECT on the Table of Contents icon see Figure 1 47 at the bottom of the handbook Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll Table of Contents Figure 1 47 The Table of Contents Icon in a Handbook Returning to the Main Table of Contents To return to the main table of contents for all the help handbooks navigate to the first page of the current handbook and double click SELECT on the More Handbooks icon at the bottom of a page shown in Figure 1 46 Closing the Help Viewer You can close the Help Viewer to an icon until you need it next To close Help Viewer click SELECT on the abbreviated menu button in the upper left corner of any handbook Figure 1 48 shows the Viewer icon
552. uare at the left of the palette 2 Click SELECT on the Apply button to record the color change 3 Move the pointer back to the Icon Editor to draw your icon with the chosen color The color of the pointer changes to the selected color you are drawing with 440 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Binder 16 The Binder application allows you to bind icons colors applications open methods and print methods to files A binding is a connection between file types and elements such as applications to be started when a file is opened print scripts or icons that the File Manager Print Tool Mail Tool and other DeskSet applications use to display and operate on files Audio Tool sound files are also bound Because the DeskSet applications come with a default set of bindings most DeskSet users will not need to use the Binder application You may want to use the Binder however to customize your DeskSet applications For example you use the Binder if you want to change the way particular files are displayed in the File Manager or other DeskSet applications or if you want to change the application used to open or print a file Programmers who want to integrate applications into the DeskSet should see the Desktop Integration Guide for programmer information about the Binder database If you are not a programmer working on the integration of applications into the DeskSet this chapter provides all the information you need to know abo
553. uivalent 11 Local Entries Binder 444 localization 489 Lock Screen utility 497 locking keys AccessX 551 Log Calculator key 315 Log Samples Performance Meter 330 Log Mail Tool 159 logarithm base 10 315 natural 315 logical functions 306 313 logical mode 313 logical shift left 314 Longest File Name File Manager 102 M Magnify button 521 Magnify help 45 Mail File Directory 207 Mail File menu 185 Mail File text field 153 Mail Files menu item 151 Mail setting Calendar Manager 232 235 Mail Tool 147 introduction 44 attachments 149 173 adding 178 attachments pane 159 deleting 182 drag and drop 194 589 moving 180 opening 174 printing 162 renaming 179 sending 176 Show Attachment List 203 commiting changes 182 composing messages 164 165 custom buttons 151 153 197 custom header fields 204 customizing 194 drag and drop 163 176 180 192 194 272 headers Reply To header 204 Return Receipt To 204 icons 148 157 In Box location 535 loading In Box 192 lock file 535 Mail File menu 153 mail files 183 adding messages to 188 creating 186 deleting 190 emptying 190 Mail File directory 207 Mail File menu 185 Mail File text field 153 Mail Files menu item 151 Mail Files window 183 renaming 190 sorting 190 viewing 189 menus Compose menu 152 Copy menu 185 207 Edit menu 152 File menu 151 Load menu 185 207 Messages menu 154 Move menu
554. ulator pane 281 Text Find and Replace 131 text adding and deleting 137 copying 137 cutting and pasting 138 text editing panes 154 Text Editor 125 introduction 39 base window 126 Change Line Wrap 128 Clip Lines 130 control area 126 creating a text file 135 customizing 143 drag and drop 139 140 editing a text file 136 Index emptying document 127 File menu 127 Find and Replace window 131 Find Marked Text 132 Find Selection 132 icon 125 Include File menu item 127 loading a text file 135 menus Edit menu 130 Extras menu 133 Find menu 130 View menu 128 printing files 139 Select Line at Number 128 shifting lines 134 Show Caret at Top 128 splitting panes 139 text capitalizing 134 creating 127 finding 132 format 133 inserting brackets 134 removing brackets 134 replacing 133 text pane 126 What Line Number 128 text pane 126 Text creating in Icon Editor 424 text terminal emulator pane 276 text_extras_menu file 143 144 textswre file 145 time zone Calendar Manager 256 timezone on clock display 290 To field in mail header 159 ToDo list Calendar Manager 228 ToggleKeys 554 transfer files File Manager 86 transferring files File Manager 57 tree File Manager 70 Trig Calculator key 314 597 598 trigonometric base 314 trigonometric functions 314 troubleshooting Calculator 524 Clock 530 Command Tool 283 File Manager 531 Mail Tool 533 Print Tool
555. ult value is your local host name e Write sets none some or all of the options listed here No SCCS excludes all SCCS directories No SCCS excludes all SCCS directories files with a suffix o and files named errs core and a out Block I O specifies a blocking factor for better throughput When you click SELECT on this setting a text field is displayed in which you can type the blocking factor you want Tape Tool to use Sym Links follows symbolic links as if they were normal files Show Errs displays error messages if all links to archived files cannot be resolved Tape Tool 387 12 388 e Suppress suppresses information showing owner and file modes Strip Path settings determine whether selected files are stripped completely of their path names use complete path names or use a specific path name When you click SELECT on Pattern a text field is displayed in which you can type the name of a path to use for all the files Read sets none some or all of the options listed here e No Check ignores directory checksum errors e Mod Time prevents Tape Tool from resetting the modification time of files that it reads from the tape e Orig Mode restores the named files to their original mode ignoring the default umask setting of 2 Other sets none one or both of the following options for both read and write operations Err Exit exits the operation as soon as an error is encountered e Exclude to specifi
556. ultimedia Mail Tool 153 Pop up Menus A pop up menu in the Header pane called Messages contains a subset of controls from the File View Edit and Compose menus Display this menu by moving the pointer anywhere in the Header window pane and pressing the MENU button Each item on the Messages pop up menu works the same way as it does when you choose the same item from a menu button The text editing panes in the View Message and Compose windows contain a pop up menu with the standard editing commands from the Text Editor For a description of the text editing commands see the chapter Text Editor on page 125 Mail Tool View Message Window 154 To view a message double click SELECT on the header for the message that you want to display Alternatively you can SELECT the message header and then choose Messages from the View menu A View Message pop up window is displayed showing the text of the selected message with an abbreviated message header as shown in Figure 4 4 Mail Tool View Message 2 From patten newbirth Thu Feb 18 10 49 PST 1993 ate Thu 18 Feb 93 10 49 35 PST From patten newbirth Robert Patten To egret river Subject Project Status Cc otter dodona Content Type X sun attachment Content Length 710 Enclosed is a summary of our current status against the milestones we established in our last weekly meeting Please make this information available to your staff 4s a reminder our next mee
557. uring a Mail Tool or window system crash Running Multiple Versions of Mail If you run multiple versions of Mail Tool at the same time or the Mail Tool application and the Mail program you may receive notices from your Mail Tool application advising you to Save Changes or Quit one of the Mail Tool applications This is because both versions try to modify your In Box Follow the instructions of the notices to avoid creating confusion about the state of your In Box If you did not choose Done or Save Changes in the Mail Tool application before running another Mail Tool application or the Mail program a notice instructs you to quit your Mail Tool application If you did save your changes you will be given a choice to either quit the Mail Tool application or Save Changes to keep it in its original state Solaris Troubleshooting 533 You can avoid having to quit your Mail Tool application by getting into the habit of choosing Done from the File menu at the end of each day or when it is likely that you will be logging into your machine and reading mail from a remote location If you forget to choose Done and you remotely log into your machine to read mail you can tell Mail Tool to choose Done by following these steps 1 From a Shell Tool prompt type ps e grep mailtool and press Return The listing should look like the one shown in Figure A 2 ps e grep mailtool 1431 co IW 0 04 home owv3 bin mailtool 1438 p1 S 0
558. us category from the Workspace Properties menu Figure 17 10 shows the Miscellaneous category Solaris User s Guide September 1995 17 workspace Properties Category Miscellaneous Reset To Standard Screen Saver Off 1G Beep Notices Only Never Beep Duration nn j Hr Milliseconds 0 1000 Set Active Window Click Mouse Icon Location Top Right Scrollbar Placement Left Right Figure 17 10 Miscellaneous Category of Workspace Properties Setting the Screensaver Feature The screensaver feature makes the screen go blank after a period of no use This option is turned off by default but you can enable it To turn on the screensaver 1 Press SELECT on Auto 2 Type the number of minutes before it is enabled The default is five minutes 3 Press SELECT on Apply Your changes now apply Returning to the Desktop If you have set the screensaver option and your screen turns blank you can restore your desktop by moving the mouse in any direction Although input from any keyboard key or mouse button will restore your screen it is advised Customizing the Solaris Environment 487 that you move the mouse instead This is because pressing a key creates system input This means as an example that if the pointer is positioned in a text file you may insert a character in the text Setting the System Beep Use the Beep setting to specify whether your system beeps for all application g
559. used to enhance productivity on the Sun Workstation To return an object to its state before you performed the last operation The number of levels of undo are determined by the application A DeskSet tool that is bound to the File Manager application and is used as a temporary repository for deleted files A rectangle containing application elements See also Base window and Pop up window The part of the window including the header footer and sides of the window that you can use to select a window set the input area move by dragging and display the window menu A button that is used to display a window containing additional controls The window manager is a special program that handles the arrangement of windows on the screen It allows you to open close move and resize windows It also provides facilities such as the Workspace menu for starting and stopping application programs The menu that is accessed from the background of a window Pop up windows have a window menu with slightly different choices than those of the base Window menu Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Window menu button The abbreviated menu button that is always displayed at the left of the header hed in each base window and can be used to execute the default setting on the window menu by clicking the SELECT mouse button and to display the window menu by pressing the MENU mouse button Window server The program that coordinates output
560. ustomizing Calculator 320 Clock 286 clock time zone 290 default menu item 16 File Manager 98 font scale 474 fonts 474 interval between mouse clicks 481 Mail Tool 194 mouse click time out 481 press whether menu selection is automatic 485 Performance Meter 326 pointer jumping 483 scrollbars 489 Text Editor 143 type styles 474 Index Viewer 520 Workspace 468 customizing your Text Editor 143 Cut operation keyboard equivalent 11 Cut Edit menu 130 Cut File Manager 64 cutting and pasting text 138 D data file 59 Date field in Calendar Manager 230 Date Format properties 266 day boundaries 259 day view 224 printing 267 day view Calendar Manager 224 Ddb Calculator key 308 dead letter file 535 debounce time 557 default how to change on a menu 16 locations of icons 488 menu choice 16 how to change 16 default ring on menus xxxii default view of Calendar Manager 261 default app Binder entry 455 default dir Binder entry 455 default doc Binder entry 455 Degrees 314 delete data from sound file 349 drag and drop method 24 file in Text Editor 136 text in Text Editor 136 Delete method File Manager 100 deleting appointments 236 binding 462 files 64 91 mail messages 152 messages 170 583 Deliver Mail Tool 158 depreciation allowance 308 DeskSet applications introduction 36 starting 37 desksetdefaults file 316 Destination field Ta
561. ut the Binder and the underlying Binder database To open the Binder application choose Workspace gt Programs gt Binder 441 16 Binder Icon and Window 442 The Binder icon and base window are shown in Figure 16 1 L Binder Binder Entries GUIDE file IslandDraw document IslandDraw prog e IslandPaint Tiff document gt s IslandPaint prog o Read Only Entry i Figure 16 1 Binder Icon and Base Window Binder Control Area Use the buttons in the Binder control area as follows e Save saves your changes to the Binder database Save replaces the standard File menu button because it is the only file operation used by the Binder e View determines which Binder entries you want to display See the following section Binder Databases on page 443 for more information Solaris User s Guide September 1995 1lb Binder Databases Undo undoes the last operation The operations that are undoable are the buttons at the bottom of the base window New Duplicate and Delete If no editing operations have been made since the Binder was started or since the last Save the Undo button is dimmed and unavailable Undo replaces the standard Edit menu button because it is the only Edit function used by the Binder Props displays the properties of a Binder entry There are two components for each Binder entry the Icon properties that determine how a file is displayed and operated on by t
562. utton Figure 15 9 shows how the area to be cut is surrounded by a rectangular region Icon Editor 427 19 Outlined region Figure 15 9 Selecting a Portion of an Icon Image to Cut 3 Choose Edit gt Cut This cuts the outlined portion of the image and places it in a system clipboard You can then paste it elsewhere if needed Figure 15 10 shows the icon image with the portion cut away 428 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 15 Figure 15 10 Icon Image with a Portion Cut Away Erase The small rectangular object next to the abc button on the Icon Editor control area is an eraser The icon for the eraser is shown in Figure 15 11 Eraser Figure 15 11 Icon for the Eraser To erase a portion of an image 1 Click SELECT on the eraser icon 2 Move the pointer to the area in the canvas window that you want to erase Icon Editor 429 19 430 3 Press SELECT and drag the pointer over the area you want to erase If you lift your finger from the mouse button frequently to end the current input segment you can undo the last segment at any time without losing all of the changes you ve made You can undo the last input erase you made at any time by choosing Undo from the Edit menu or from the pop up menu in the Icon Editor window pane canvas Fill Choices The Fill choices shown in Figure 15 12 allow you to choose an outline or one of 10 fill patterns for drawing squares circles or ell
563. vage value of the asset Register 2 Useful life of the asset Register 3 Period for which depreciation is computed Syd Example You have just purchased an office machine for 8 000 The useful life of this machine is six years and the salvage value after eight years will be 900 You want to compute the depreciation expense for the fourth year using the sum of the years digits method Memory register usage Register 0 8000 cost of the asset Register 1 900 salvage value of the asset Register 2 6 useful life of the asset Register 3 4 period for which depreciation is computed Clicking SELECT on Syd returns 1014 29 the dollar depreciation allowance for the fourth year Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Co lll Term Payment Period Logical Functions Use Term to compute the number of payment periods in the term of an ordinary annuity necessary to accumulate a future value earning a specified periodic interest rate Store the following information in the memory registers Register 0 Amount of each periodic payment Register 1 Future value Register 2 Periodic interest rate Term Example You deposit 1 800 at the end of each year into a bank account Your account earns 11 a year compounded annually You want to determine how long it will take to accumulate 120 000 Memory register usage Register 0 1800 periodic payment Register 1 120000 future value Register 2 0
564. vailable on your network contact your system administrator View By Content Takes Too Much Time When the File Manager is viewing files by content it needs to read and compress the first screen of files so they can be displayed For Sun icons X Bitmap and X Pixmap files this should work fairly quickly However compressing large Sun raster images can take some time Therefore if you only Solaris User s Guide September 1995 A need to look at icon files be sure to only have Monochrome Icons and Color Icons set on the Properties Current Folder or New Folder window for the Files to View setting Image Tool Troubleshooting If you try to run Image Tool and you receive the following message Id so 1 imagetool can t find file libxil so 1 Killed You need to have the XIL packages installed Contact your system administrator for assistance Mail Tool Troubleshooting If you run multiple versions of mail programs Mail Tool may become confused about the state of your In Box If Mail Tool takes a long time to open the In Box it s possible that a Mail Tool lock file needs to be removed If there is not enough disk space for the Save Changes operation you will need to remove messages from the current mail file This section describes how to recognize and correct these problems In addition it describes where you can find your Mail Tool In Box and where you can find mail messages you were composing that were cleared or lost d
565. ve the pointer onto the header of the window you wish to move in back 2 Press MENU drag the pointer to highlight Back Figure 1 25 shows the Back button highlighted on a Window menu Solaris User s Guide September 1995 lll Choose Back from the Window menu Mail Tool var mail egret z mail Fie E co 1 egret Tue Sep 29 11 29 25 560 Look 2 Mailer Daemon Fri Oct 9 11 06 35 872 Returned mail u 3 mariac celtic Thu Jan 7 16 52 18 496 NeoL_4 egret Sat Jan 9 23 42 21 534 File Manager hightide egret Fish File v View 7 Edit v GoTo v hightide egret Fish ILLI il Contains 4 items 881 Mbytes 99 available O cod O salmon O swordfish O Tuna A Figure 1 25 Moving a Window in Back of Another Window 3 Release MENU That window moves to the rear SPARC Alternatively you can use the Front key on your keyboard which toggles back front depending on the location of the window If the window is in back and you position the pointer in that window and press the Front key that window moves to the front But if it is already in front it moves in back Introduction to the Solaris User Environment eri Moving Icons You position icons in much the same way as you do windows and pinned menus To move an icon to a new l
566. ving mail messages to the new default that you have specified is just like saving mail to the Folders directory To save mail do the following 1 Type the file name or a subdirectory name and then the file name on the text field in the Mail Tool base window Note that if you have changed the default location to your home directory there is no need to type a tilde to specify your home directory as the destination 2 Click SELECT on the message you want to save 3 Choose Move or Copy The chosen mail message is saved to the directory name of your choice under your home directory e g the directory name you substituted for Folders the top level of your home directory or a specified subdirectory Template Properties Mail Tool allows you to create your own template files containing text that you frequently use for composing messages Each template is an individual file that you create outside of Mail Tool using any editor such as Text Editor or vi You can add a created template to Mail Tool using the Template Properties category shown in Figure 4 39 Display the Template properties by choosing Template from the Category menu at the top of the Properties popup window Solaris User s Guide September 1995 HS lll gv Mail Tool Properties Category 7 Template Templates Calendar Figure 4 39 Template Properties To add a template to the Include Templates submenu of the Compose window follow th
567. visible Print Tool 335 10 2 Select the printer name The printer must be available For information on adding a printer refer to System Administration Guide Volume II The printer you chose is selected as shown in the example in Figure 10 3 Checking the Print Queue Status To check the status of your print jobs click SELECT on the Status button near the bottom of the Print Tool window The scrolling status window lists by job size in KB and time all of your files or jobs for the selected printer in the print queue as shown in Figure 10 4 Print Tool Filename Copies Header Printer Job Size K Tine mimeo Feb 22 19 49 mimeo 8 Feb 22 19 50 mimeo 9 Feb 22 19 50 mimeo 10 Feb 22 19 50 mimeo 11 Feb 22 19 50 Status Stop Printing Figure 10 4 Example of Entries in the Print Queue 336 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 10 Each entry in the print queue is identified by Job Size in KB and Time The Job category shows a unique job number for each file in the queue It is also helpful to know the size of a print job Time shows the time the job was submitted Figure 10 4 shows that the job ranked first will take longer to print than the following job because it is larger in size Stopping a Print Job You can stop one or more of your jobs in the queue To stop your job s in the queue do the following 1 Click SELECT on the Status button to display the jobs in the
568. w Properties you must quit and restart Mail Tool before the changes take effect You must apply changed properties for each category by clicking SELECT on the Apply button Header Window Properties The Header Window properties are shown in Figure 4 31 and described in the following sections After you change any of the Header Window properties click SELECT on the Apply button to apply them to the Mail Tool application gy Mail Tool Properties Category E Header Window Signal With ajy Beep s aje Flash es Display 20 ajv Headers Retrieve Every 300 Seconds 1 o 80 ajy Characters wide Delivery W Automatically display headers O Show To recipient when mail is from me Custom Buttons Next Delete Reply Command E Done Label Done Figure 4 31 Header Window Properties Multimedia Mail Tool 195 196 Mail Arrival Properties Use the Retrieve Every field to determine how often new mail is retrieved The default value is 300 seconds or 5 minutes You can retrieve mail at any time between this interval by choosing Load In Box or Save Changes from the File Menu Use the Signal With fields to determine how Mail Tool signals new incoming mail The Beep setting causes Mail Tool to beep the specified number of times The Flash setting causes the icon to flash or the Header window to flash depending on whether the Mail Tool is closed to an icon or open Mai
569. window the text at the top specifies the current page You can edit the text in the Bookmark for field which is used in the Existing Bookmarks list when the Navigator is in Bookmarks mode You can also type an annotation in the Comment pane Click SELECT on the Create button to create the new bookmark Or if you decide not to create a bookmark dismiss the New Bookmark window Viewing and Editing Your Bookmarks Bookmarks AnswerBook titles Current bookmark Comment for current bookmark 516 To see your list of bookmarks click SELECT on Bookmarks H AnswerBook Navigator Modify Library New Bookmark Bookmarks in Library co Solaris User s AnswerBook e Cover in User s Guide E lv System Software AnswerBook Can t Remember Password Subsection in User s Guide Network Access Your NIS Password Subsection in User s cl Delete Bookmark Comment for 4 User s Guide Basic Troubleshooting don t use these characters el d Lb Figure 19 17 AnswerBook Navigator in Bookmarks Mode Solaris User s Guide September 1995 v The Bookmarks list shows the Bookmark titles listed under the associated AnswerBook To see the comment for a particular bookmark select highlight it in the Bookmarks list Editing a Bookmark You can edit a bookmark directly in the Bookmarks list When you re done save the bookmark changes Deleting a Bookmark To delete a bookmark se
570. ws The Header window is a base window that lists mail messages that you have received The View Message window is a pop up window where you read your messages The Compose window is a base window for responding to messages or writing new messages Each of these windows is described in detail later in this chapter The primary Mail Tool icon for the Header window that shows you incoming mail messages looks like a standard office In Box When you don t have any mail the In Box on the icon is empty When you have mail that has all been read the In Box contains a neatly stacked set of envelopes When new mail arrives envelopes are placed in the In Box with the stamped and addressed side showing Figure 4 1 shows these views of the mailbox icon New mail icon mailtool mailtool mailtool Figure 4 1 Mail Tool Header Window Icons The Mail Tool Compose window can also be closed to an icon See Mail Tool Compose Window on page 157 for a description and picture of the Compose window icons Mail Tool Header Window 148 The window shown in Figure 4 2 provides a set of controls with which you access other parts of the Mail Tool application display a list of your electronic mail messages and see the status of your mail messages Solaris User s Guide September 1995 By default this window shows you a scrolling list of the mail messages in your In Box Each line in the scrolling list of the win
571. x formats available For complete information on Image Tool refer to Chapter 13 Image Tool To print a snapshot Choose Print Snap from the Print menu You see the printing status message displayed in the lower left corner of the window Once the snapshot has printed you see Print Complete Note You can also use Image Tool to print your snapshot For complete information on Image Tool refer to Chapter 13 Image Tool Snapshot 419 14 420 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Icon Editor 15 The Icon Editor allows you to create your own black and white or color icon images You can display your icon images in the File Manager by binding them to applications and data files using the Binder Programmers can use the Icon Editor to create application cursors glyphs and icons and save them in a format for inclusion into a C program To open Icon Editor choose Workspace gt Programs gt Icon Editor Icon Editor Icon and Base Window The Icon Editor icon is shown in Figure 15 1 Figure 15 1 The Icon Editor Icon When you start the Icon Editor the base window is displayed as shown in Figure 15 2 421 19 c IA amp Icon Editor ontrol Area SS MM File v View v Edit 7 Properties 7 Palette Drawing controls Preview area oles Cees NIOj aj SB e gt t 2 ta 0 a Displays image in icon size Arrows for moving image on canvas
572. y is inactive unless you have made a selection in the File pane Use Link to link files together See Linking Files on page 94 Use Paste to paste the contents of the clipboard at the next available grid point in File Manager Paste is inactive unless something is on the clipboard se Delete Destroy to remove selected file names from a folder and place them in the Wastebasket or really delete them depending on the File Manager Properties setting See Using the Wastebasket on page 91 for information about the Wastebasket Use Properties to customize your File Manager See Customizing Your File Manager on page 98 for information Go To Menu and Text Field The Go To menu has choices that can be set by you in properties that allow you to quickly go back to your home directory or to other directories that you have recently accessed You can also type the path name of a folder you want to go to in the Go To text field See Using the Go To Text Field and Menu on page 87 for more information Solaris User s Guide September 1995 No lll Folder View Use Folder View to look at your folder hierarchy The Folder View opens a separate window that displays only folders and shows how folders are stored in the hierarchy You can open each of your folders into a separate window by selecting the folder and Selecting View gt Open Folder View Figure 2 6 shows a Folder View FM Folder View Z
573. y you want to change from the Category menu 2 To view the Category menu position the pointer on the Category menu button and press MENU Figure 17 2 shows the Category menu Customizing the Solaris Environment 469 17 g Workspace Properties Category WINDOWS DATA AREAS Background B E WORKSPACE Foreground Om Pattern a Background Q Figure 17 2 Category Menu Change Bars As you change settings a vertical change bar is displayed to the left of the setting you have altered since the last time changes were implemented This visual cue helps you track your changes Workspace Properties Window Buttons The Workspace Properties window has three buttons Reset to Standard displays but does not implement the system default settings that is the settings determined by your system administrator Change bars mark your previously applied nonstandard settings Reset ignores any changes and immediately reverts to previously applied settings 470 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 v Setting Colors e Apply implements changes Most changes take place immediately while others do not take place until you open a new application or restart the OpenWindows software Note To change settings in more than one category be sure to select Apply before continuing to the next category Unlike previous versions this version of OpenWindows software treats changes to each category separa
574. you can add the following to your login file setenv LANG en_US Solaris Troubleshooting 543 lll aN 544 Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Access for Users With Disabilities Many users with disabilities have trouble using the standard keyboard and mouse on computers They may find it difficult or impossible to hold down two keys at once to type capital letters or control characters or to use a mouse or type accurately AccessX is an extension to OpenWindows that makes it easier for people with disabilities to use a keyboard and to move a pointer around their screen With AccessX running you can Keep the Control Shift Alt and Meta keys pressed and active while you press another key enabling you to type capital letters Control C Alt M and so forth See StickyKeys on page 551 Note Not all keyboards have all these keys On some keyboards for example the Meta key is replaced by Control Alt e Use the numeric keypad to emulate the mouse You can move a pointer around the screen and perform mouse button actions for instance double clicking all from the keyboard See MouseKeys on page 552 Make the computer beep when certain keys are activated or deactivated people with limited vision can then tell whether for example the Caps Lock key is on See ToggleKeys on page 554 Prevent a key from repeating if you have trouble releasing it quickly See Repeat
575. your keyboard or any button on your mouse Type your password and press Return to display the workspace The Console is the small window that normally appears in the upper left corner of the workspace when you start up the OpenWindows software Its primary use is to display messages from your system and server You can only have one Console running and you should keep it open at all times for important messages Figure 18 5 shows the Console window cmdtool CONSOLE bin csh example Figure 18 5 Console Window If you do not have a Console you can open one by choosing Workspace gt Utilities gt Console When the Console appears resize it so that it is just large enough to print about four or five message lines and move it to one corner of your screen You can scroll up and down through the messages that appear in your Console by placing the pointer on one of the scrollbar arrows up or down and clicking SELECT Solaris User s Guide September 1995 Using the AnswerBook Software D The AnswerBook Navigator and Viewer are a pair of windows for browsing searching bookmarking and printing on line document collections also known as an AnswerBook To start the AnswerBook Navigator to see AnswerBook products that may be available to you Choose Workspace gt Programs gt AnswerBook Note AnswerBooks are available to you if your system or site administrator has installed them and configur
576. your own functions through the Con and Fun keys shown in Figure 8 10 Figure 8 10 User defined Function Keys Each of these keys has a menu associated with it which you display by pressing MENU on the key Choosing the first item from the menu displays a window that lets you enter the value of a constant or a function and associate a name with that value The numbers you enter are stored ina calctoolrc file in your home directory Once you have entered the new value the new value and its name are displayed in the pop up menu associated with that Calculator key To use the constant or function value choose the desired item from the pop up menu Performing Simple Calculations 304 Calculations are performed from left to right with no arithmetic precedence For example 2 3 4 20 You need parentheses available on the Calculator base window to establish correct arithmetic precedence For example 2 3 4 14 To perform a numerical operation such as adding two numbers together 1 Click SELECT on the first digit for example 7 The number is entered in the display at the upper right corner of the Calculator In Figure 8 1 the number 0 00 is displayed Solaris User s Guide September 1995 8 2 Click SELECT on the operation you want to perform for example 3 Click SELECT on the number you want to add to the first number for example 6 The number is displayed in the numeric display area 4 Click SELECT on
577. your system You can change back to your native time zone by selecting Time Zone from the View menu Brazil ce Japan CET Libya CST6CDT MST Canada e MST7MDT Chile Mexico Cuba Mideast EET NZ EST PRC PSTPDT Egypt Poland Factory ROC GB Eire ROK GMT 1 Singapore 14 1 GMT 10 Turkey GMT 11 us GMT 12 w SU GMT 13 WET 2 4 GMT 2 africa GMT 3 asia GMT 4 australasiz Figure 5 25 A portion of the Time Zone Menu Solaris User s Guide September 1995 nN lll Customizing Your Calendar Manager You can customize the following parts of Calendar Manager from the Properties window Editor Defaults for the Appointment Editor pop up window Display Settings to specify default display options Access List and Permissions to specify security access defaults Printer Settings to specify default print options Date Formats to specify the format for the date on the Appointment Editor The Properties window has five separate displays selected from the category field that you use to modify the five different sets of properties To display the Properties window Choose Edit Properties or move the pointer into the control area or pane of the Calendar Manager window and press the Properties key L3 on the keyboard to display the Properties w
578. zed by DeskSet applications You can think of each entry in the File Type scrolling list as a class of files which may consist of one file or many files Each class of files in this scrolling list each File Type entry is bound to the Icon properties of the current Binder entry Solaris User s Guide September 1995 i Note If you have two identical File Type entries in your Binder database only the first one that the Binder reads is used The first Binder entry to use the File Type entry is not necessarily the first Binder entry in the Binder base window scrolling list Pattern Text Field Use the Pattern text field beneath the scrolling list to modify the name of a File Type entry If the files are to be identified by a pattern this pattern must be the name of the Binding entry If the currently selected File Type is identified by Content the Pattern text field is dimmed and unavailable When there are no items selected on the scrolling list you can type a pattern into the Pattern text field and press Return to create a new File Type entry File Type Properties Window Buttons You SELECT the buttons to the right of the File Type scrolling list to create and delete File Type entries and to move them to and from a clipboard as follows e New creates a new File Type entry The name of the first new entry is unnamed_1 If you create another new entry without renaming the first it is called unnamed_2 etc To change

4 - Oracle Documentation

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents